ANSIfication

FossilOrigin-Name: 1be88f1039a57d37b1f4567340d02ca39ddb3575

25 files changed, 6165 insertions, 5659 deletions

diff --git a/win/tkWin32Dll.c b/win/tkWin32Dll.c
index ed869fc..3978f1c 100644
--- a/win/tkWin32Dll.c
+++ b/win/tkWin32Dll.c
@@ -1,20 +1,21 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWin32Dll.c --
  *
  *	This file contains a stub dll entry point.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWin32Dll.c,v 1.11 2005/08/23 18:31:11 mdejong Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWin32Dll.c,v 1.12 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 #ifndef STATIC_BUILD
 
 #ifdef HAVE_NO_SEH
+
 /*
  * Unlike Borland and Microsoft, we don't register exception handlers by
  * pushing registration records onto the runtime stack. Instead, we register
@@ -30,23 +31,23 @@ typedef struct EXCEPTION_REGISTRATION {
     int status;
 } EXCEPTION_REGISTRATION;
 
-/* Need to add noinline flag to DllMain declaration so that gcc -O3
- * does not inline asm code into DllEntryPoint and cause a
- * compile time error because of redefined local labels.
+/*
+ * Need to add noinline flag to DllMain declaration so that gcc -O3 does not
+ * inline asm code into DllEntryPoint and cause a compile time error because
+ * of redefined local labels.
  */
 
-BOOL APIENTRY		DllMain(HINSTANCE hInst, DWORD reason, 
-				LPVOID reserved)
-                        __attribute__ ((noinline));
+BOOL APIENTRY		DllMain(HINSTANCE hInst, DWORD reason,
+			    LPVOID reserved) __attribute__ ((noinline));
 
-#else
+#else /* !HAVE_NO_SEH */
 
 /*
  * The following declaration is for the VC++ DLL entry point.
  */
 
-BOOL APIENTRY		DllMain _ANSI_ARGS_((HINSTANCE hInst,
-			    DWORD reason, LPVOID reserved));
+BOOL APIENTRY		DllMain(HINSTANCE hInst, DWORD reason,
+			    LPVOID reserved);
 #endif /* HAVE_NO_SEH */
 
 /*
@@ -54,9 +55,8 @@ BOOL APIENTRY		DllMain _ANSI_ARGS_((HINSTANCE hInst,
  *
  * DllEntryPoint --
  *
- *	This wrapper function is used by Borland to invoke the
- *	initialization code for Tk.  It simply calls the DllMain
- *	routine.
+ *	This wrapper function is used by Borland to invoke the initialization
+ *	code for Tk. It simply calls the DllMain routine.
  *
  * Results:
  *	See DllMain.
@@ -68,10 +68,10 @@ BOOL APIENTRY		DllMain _ANSI_ARGS_((HINSTANCE hInst,
  */
 
 BOOL APIENTRY
-DllEntryPoint(hInst, reason, reserved)
-    HINSTANCE hInst;		/* Library instance handle. */
-    DWORD reason;		/* Reason this function is being called. */
-    LPVOID reserved;		/* Not used. */
+DllEntryPoint(
+    HINSTANCE hInst,		/* Library instance handle. */
+    DWORD reason,		/* Reason this function is being called. */
+    LPVOID reserved)		/* Not used. */
 {
     return DllMain(hInst, reason, reserved);
 }
@@ -81,35 +81,35 @@ DllEntryPoint(hInst, reason, reserved)
  *
  * DllMain --
  *
- *	DLL entry point.  It is only necessary to specify our dll here so
- *	that resources are found correctly.  Otherwise Tk will initialize
- *	and clean up after itself through other methods, in order to be
- *	consistent whether the build is static or dynamic.
+ *	DLL entry point. It is only necessary to specify our dll here so that
+ *	resources are found correctly. Otherwise Tk will initialize and clean
+ *	up after itself through other methods, in order to be consistent
+ *	whether the build is static or dynamic.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Always TRUE.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	This might call some sycronization functions, but MSDN
- *	documentation states: "Waiting on synchronization objects in
- *	DllMain can cause a deadlock."
+ *	This might call some sycronization functions, but MSDN documentation
+ *	states: "Waiting on synchronization objects in DllMain can cause a
+ *	deadlock."
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 BOOL APIENTRY
-DllMain(hInstance, reason, reserved)
-    HINSTANCE hInstance;
-    DWORD reason;
-    LPVOID reserved;
+DllMain(
+    HINSTANCE hInstance,
+    DWORD reason,
+    LPVOID reserved)
 {
 #ifdef HAVE_NO_SEH
     EXCEPTION_REGISTRATION registration;
 #endif
 
     /*
-     * If we are attaching to the DLL from a new process, tell Tk about
-     * the hInstance to use.
+     * If we are attaching to the DLL from a new process, tell Tk about the
+     * hInstance to use.
      */
 
     switch (reason) {
@@ -120,9 +120,8 @@ DllMain(hInstance, reason, reserved)
 
     case DLL_PROCESS_DETACH:
 	/*
-	 * Protect the call to TkFinalize in an SEH block.  We can't
-	 * be guarenteed Tk is always being unloaded from a stable
-	 * condition.
+	 * Protect the call to TkFinalize in an SEH block. We can't be
+	 * guarenteed Tk is always being unloaded from a stable condition.
 	 */
 
 #ifdef HAVE_NO_SEH
@@ -175,7 +174,7 @@ DllMain(hInstance, reason, reserved)
 	    "movl	0x8(%%edx),	%%edx"		"\n"
 
 
-	    /* 
+	    /*
 	     * Come here however we exited. Restore context from the
 	     * EXCEPTION_REGISTRATION in case the stack is unbalanced.
 	     */
@@ -199,10 +198,10 @@ DllMain(hInstance, reason, reserved)
 #else /* HAVE_NO_SEH */
 	__try {
 	    /*
-	     * Run and remove our exit handlers, if they haven't already
-	     * been run.  Just in case we are being unloaded prior to
-	     * Tcl (it can happen), we won't leave any dangling pointers
-	     * hanging around for when Tcl gets unloaded later.
+	     * Run and remove our exit handlers, if they haven't already been
+	     * run. Just in case we are being unloaded prior to Tcl (it can
+	     * happen), we won't leave any dangling pointers hanging around
+	     * for when Tcl gets unloaded later.
 	     */
 
 	    TkFinalize(NULL);
@@ -217,4 +216,11 @@ DllMain(hInstance, reason, reserved)
 }
 
 #endif /* !STATIC_BUILD */
-
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWin3d.c b/win/tkWin3d.c
index 3c97560..8d1002b 100644
--- a/win/tkWin3d.c
+++ b/win/tkWin3d.c
@@ -1,31 +1,30 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWin3d.c --
  *
- *	This file contains the platform specific routines for
- *	drawing 3d borders in the Windows 95 style.
+ *	This file contains the platform specific routines for drawing 3D
+ *	borders in the Windows 95 style.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWin3d.c,v 1.7 2004/01/13 02:06:01 davygrvy Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWin3d.c,v 1.8 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 #include "tk3d.h"
 
 /*
- * This structure is used to keep track of the extra colors used by
- * Windows 3d borders.
+ * This structure is used to keep track of the extra colors used by Windows 3D
+ * borders.
  */
 
 typedef struct {
     TkBorder info;
-    XColor *light2ColorPtr; /* System3dLight */
-    XColor *dark2ColorPtr;  /* System3dDarkShadow */
+    XColor *light2ColorPtr;	/* System3dLight */
+    XColor *dark2ColorPtr;	/* System3dDarkShadow */
 } WinBorder;
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -44,9 +43,10 @@ typedef struct {
  */
 
 TkBorder *
-TkpGetBorder()
+TkpGetBorder(void)
 {
     WinBorder *borderPtr = (WinBorder *) ckalloc(sizeof(WinBorder));
+
     borderPtr->light2ColorPtr = NULL;
     borderPtr->dark2ColorPtr = NULL;
     return (TkBorder *) borderPtr;
@@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ TkpGetBorder()
  *
  * TkpFreeBorder --
  *
- *	This function frees any colors allocated by the platform
- *	specific part of this module.
+ *	This function frees any colors allocated by the platform specific part
+ *	of this module.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -70,8 +70,8 @@ TkpGetBorder()
  */
 
 void
-TkpFreeBorder(borderPtr)
-    TkBorder *borderPtr;
+TkpFreeBorder(
+    TkBorder *borderPtr)
 {
     WinBorder *winBorderPtr = (WinBorder *) borderPtr;
     if (winBorderPtr->light2ColorPtr) {
@@ -87,18 +87,17 @@ TkpFreeBorder(borderPtr)
  *
  * Tk_3DVerticalBevel --
  *
- *	This procedure draws a vertical bevel along one side of
- *	an object.  The bevel is always rectangular in shape:
+ *	This procedure draws a vertical bevel along one side of an object. The
+ *	bevel is always rectangular in shape:
  *			|||
  *			|||
  *			|||
  *			|||
  *			|||
  *			|||
- *	An appropriate shadow color is chosen for the bevel based
- *	on the leftBevel and relief arguments.  Normally this
- *	procedure is called first, then Tk_3DHorizontalBevel is
- *	called next to draw neat corners.
+ *	An appropriate shadow color is chosen for the bevel based on the
+ *	leftBevel and relief arguments. Normally this procedure is called
+ *	first, then Tk_3DHorizontalBevel is called next to draw neat corners.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -110,19 +109,18 @@ TkpFreeBorder(borderPtr)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_3DVerticalBevel(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
-	leftBevel, relief)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
-    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Token for border to draw. */
-    int x, y, width, height;	/* Area of vertical bevel. */
-    int leftBevel;		/* Non-zero means this bevel forms the
-				 * left side of the object;  0 means it
-				 * forms the right side. */
-    int relief;			/* Kind of bevel to draw.  For example,
-				 * TK_RELIEF_RAISED means interior of
-				 * object should appear higher than
-				 * exterior. */
+Tk_3DVerticalBevel(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    Tk_3DBorder border,		/* Token for border to draw. */
+    int x, int y, int width, int height,
+				/* Area of vertical bevel. */
+    int leftBevel,		/* Non-zero means this bevel forms the left
+				 * side of the object; 0 means it forms the
+				 * right side. */
+    int relief)			/* Kind of bevel to draw. For example,
+				 * TK_RELIEF_RAISED means interior of object
+				 * should appear higher than exterior. */
 {
     TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) border;
     int left, right;
@@ -136,36 +134,36 @@ Tk_3DVerticalBevel(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
     }
 
     switch (relief) {
-	case TK_RELIEF_RAISED:
-	    left = (leftBevel)
+    case TK_RELIEF_RAISED:
+	left = (leftBevel)
 		? borderPtr->lightGC->foreground
 		: borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
-	    right = (leftBevel)
+	right = (leftBevel)
 		? ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->light2ColorPtr->pixel
 		: ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->dark2ColorPtr->pixel;
-	    break;
-	case TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN:
-	    left = (leftBevel)
+	break;
+    case TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN:
+	left = (leftBevel)
 		? borderPtr->darkGC->foreground
 		: ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->light2ColorPtr->pixel;
-	    right = (leftBevel)
+	right = (leftBevel)
 		? ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->dark2ColorPtr->pixel
 		: borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
-	    break;
-	case TK_RELIEF_RIDGE:
-	    left = borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
-	    right = borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
-	    break;
-	case TK_RELIEF_GROOVE:
-	    left = borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
-	    right = borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
-	    break;
-	case TK_RELIEF_FLAT:
-	    left = right = borderPtr->bgGC->foreground;
-	    break;
-	case TK_RELIEF_SOLID:
-	    left = right = RGB(0,0,0);
-	    break;
+	break;
+    case TK_RELIEF_RIDGE:
+	left = borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
+	right = borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
+	break;
+    case TK_RELIEF_GROOVE:
+	left = borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
+	right = borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
+	break;
+    case TK_RELIEF_FLAT:
+	left = right = borderPtr->bgGC->foreground;
+	break;
+    case TK_RELIEF_SOLID:
+	left = right = RGB(0,0,0);
+	break;
     }
     half = width/2;
     if (leftBevel && (width & 1)) {
@@ -181,9 +179,9 @@ Tk_3DVerticalBevel(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
  *
  * Tk_3DHorizontalBevel --
  *
- *	This procedure draws a horizontal bevel along one side of
- *	an object.  The bevel has mitered corners (depending on
- *	leftIn and rightIn arguments).
+ *	This procedure draws a horizontal bevel along one side of an object.
+ *	The bevel has mitered corners (depending on leftIn and rightIn
+ *	arguments).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -195,30 +193,28 @@ Tk_3DVerticalBevel(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
  */
 
 void
-Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
-	leftIn, rightIn, topBevel, relief)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
-    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Token for border to draw. */
-    int x, y, width, height;	/* Bounding box of area of bevel.  Height
-				 * gives width of border. */
-    int leftIn, rightIn;	/* Describes whether the left and right
-				 * edges of the bevel angle in or out as
-				 * they go down.  For example, if "leftIn"
-				 * is true, the left side of the bevel
-				 * looks like this:
+Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
+    Drawable drawable,		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    Tk_3DBorder border,		/* Token for border to draw. */
+    int x, int y, int width, int height,
+				/* Bounding box of area of bevel. Height gives
+				 * width of border. */
+    int leftIn, int rightIn,	/* Describes whether the left and right edges
+				 * of the bevel angle in or out as they go
+				 * down. For example, if "leftIn" is true, the
+				 * left side of the bevel looks like this:
 				 *	___________
 				 *	 __________
 				 *	  _________
 				 *	   ________
 				 */
-    int topBevel;		/* Non-zero means this bevel forms the
-				 * top side of the object;  0 means it
-				 * forms the bottom side. */
-    int relief;			/* Kind of bevel to draw.  For example,
-				 * TK_RELIEF_RAISED means interior of
-				 * object should appear higher than
-				 * exterior. */
+    int topBevel,		/* Non-zero means this bevel forms the top
+				 * side of the object; 0 means it forms the
+				 * bottom side. */
+    int relief)			/* Kind of bevel to draw. For example,
+				 * TK_RELIEF_RAISED means interior of object
+				 * should appear higher than exterior. */
 {
     TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) border;
     Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
@@ -232,40 +228,40 @@ Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
     }
 
     /*
-     * Compute a GC for the top half of the bevel and a GC for the
-     * bottom half (they're the same in many cases).
+     * Compute a GC for the top half of the bevel and a GC for the bottom half
+     * (they're the same in many cases).
      */
 
     switch (relief) {
-	case TK_RELIEF_RAISED:
-	    topColor = (topBevel)
+    case TK_RELIEF_RAISED:
+	topColor = (topBevel)
 		? borderPtr->lightGC->foreground
 		: borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
-	    bottomColor = (topBevel)
+	bottomColor = (topBevel)
 		? ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->light2ColorPtr->pixel
 		: ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->dark2ColorPtr->pixel;
-	    break;
-	case TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN:
-	    topColor = (topBevel)
+	break;
+    case TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN:
+	topColor = (topBevel)
 		? borderPtr->darkGC->foreground
 		: ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->light2ColorPtr->pixel;
-	    bottomColor = (topBevel)
+	bottomColor = (topBevel)
 		? ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->dark2ColorPtr->pixel
 		: borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
-	    break;
-	case TK_RELIEF_RIDGE:
-	    topColor = borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
-	    bottomColor = borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
-	    break;
-	case TK_RELIEF_GROOVE:
-	    topColor = borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
-	    bottomColor = borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
-	    break;
-	case TK_RELIEF_FLAT:
-	    topColor = bottomColor = borderPtr->bgGC->foreground;
-	    break;
-	case TK_RELIEF_SOLID:
-	    topColor = bottomColor = RGB(0,0,0);
+	break;
+    case TK_RELIEF_RIDGE:
+	topColor = borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
+	bottomColor = borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
+	break;
+    case TK_RELIEF_GROOVE:
+	topColor = borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
+	bottomColor = borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
+	break;
+    case TK_RELIEF_FLAT:
+	topColor = bottomColor = borderPtr->bgGC->foreground;
+	break;
+    case TK_RELIEF_SOLID:
+	topColor = bottomColor = RGB(0,0,0);
     }
 
     /*
@@ -298,8 +294,7 @@ Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
     for ( ; y < bottom; y++) {
 	/*
 	 * In some weird cases (such as large border widths for skinny
-	 * rectangles) x1 can be >= x2.  Don't draw the lines
-	 * in these cases.
+	 * rectangles) x1 can be >= x2. Don't draw the lines in these cases.
 	 */
 
 	if (x1 < x2) {
@@ -317,27 +312,26 @@ Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
  *
  * TkpGetShadows --
  *
- *	This procedure computes the shadow colors for a 3-D border
- *	and fills in the corresponding fields of the Border structure.
- *	It's called lazily, so that the colors aren't allocated until
- *	something is actually drawn with them.  That way, if a border
- *	is only used for flat backgrounds the shadow colors will
- *	never be allocated.
+ *	This procedure computes the shadow colors for a 3-D border and fills
+ *	in the corresponding fields of the Border structure. It's called
+ *	lazily, so that the colors aren't allocated until something is
+ *	actually drawn with them. That way, if a border is only used for flat
+ *	backgrounds the shadow colors will never be allocated.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The lightGC and darkGC fields in borderPtr get filled in,
- *	if they weren't already.
+ *	The lightGC and darkGC fields in borderPtr get filled in, if they
+ *	weren't already.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin)
-    TkBorder *borderPtr;	/* Information about border. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window where border will be used for
+TkpGetShadows(
+    TkBorder *borderPtr,	/* Information about border. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window where border will be used for
 				 * drawing. */
 {
     XColor lightColor, darkColor;
@@ -354,13 +348,13 @@ TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin)
      */
 
     if ((TkWinIndexOfColor(borderPtr->bgColorPtr) == COLOR_3DFACE)
-	|| (TkWinIndexOfColor(borderPtr->bgColorPtr) == COLOR_WINDOW)) {
+	    || (TkWinIndexOfColor(borderPtr->bgColorPtr) == COLOR_WINDOW)) {
 	borderPtr->darkColorPtr = Tk_GetColor(NULL, tkwin,
-	    Tk_GetUid("SystemButtonShadow"));
+		Tk_GetUid("SystemButtonShadow"));
 	gcValues.foreground = borderPtr->darkColorPtr->pixel;
 	borderPtr->darkGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
 	borderPtr->lightColorPtr = Tk_GetColor(NULL, tkwin,
-	    Tk_GetUid("SystemButtonHighlight"));
+		Tk_GetUid("SystemButtonHighlight"));
 	gcValues.foreground = borderPtr->lightColorPtr->pixel;
 	borderPtr->lightGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
 	((WinBorder*)borderPtr)->dark2ColorPtr = Tk_GetColor(NULL, tkwin,
@@ -368,45 +362,42 @@ TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin)
 	((WinBorder*)borderPtr)->light2ColorPtr = Tk_GetColor(NULL, tkwin,
 		Tk_GetUid("System3dLight"));
 	return;
-    } else {
-	darkColor.red = 0;
-	darkColor.green = 0;
-	darkColor.blue = 0;
-	((WinBorder*)borderPtr)->dark2ColorPtr = Tk_GetColorByValue(tkwin,
+    }
+    darkColor.red = 0;
+    darkColor.green = 0;
+    darkColor.blue = 0;
+    ((WinBorder*)borderPtr)->dark2ColorPtr = Tk_GetColorByValue(tkwin,
 	    &darkColor);
-	lightColor = *(borderPtr->bgColorPtr);
-	((WinBorder*)borderPtr)->light2ColorPtr = Tk_GetColorByValue(tkwin, 
+    lightColor = *(borderPtr->bgColorPtr);
+    ((WinBorder*)borderPtr)->light2ColorPtr = Tk_GetColorByValue(tkwin,
 	    &lightColor);
-    }
-    
+
     /*
-     * First, handle the case of a color display with lots of colors.
-     * The shadow colors get computed using whichever formula results
-     * in the greatest change in color:
-     * 1. Lighter shadow is half-way to white, darker shadow is half
-     *    way to dark.
-     * 2. Lighter shadow is 40% brighter than background, darker shadow
-     *    is 40% darker than background.
+     * First, handle the case of a color display with lots of colors. The
+     * shadow colors get computed using whichever formula results in the
+     * greatest change in color:
+     * 1. Lighter shadow is half-way to white, darker shadow is half way to
+     *    dark.
+     * 2. Lighter shadow is 40% brighter than background, darker shadow is 40%
+     *    darker than background.
      */
 
     if (Tk_Depth(tkwin) >= 6) {
 	/*
-	 * This is a color display with lots of colors.  For the dark
-	 * shadow, cut 40% from each of the background color components.
-	 * But if the background is already very dark, make the
-	 * dark color a little lighter than the background by increasing
-	 * each color component 1/4th of the way to MAX_INTENSITY.
+	 * This is a color display with lots of colors. For the dark shadow,
+	 * cut 40% from each of the background color components. But if the
+	 * background is already very dark, make the dark color a little
+	 * lighter than the background by increasing each color component
+	 * 1/4th of the way to MAX_INTENSITY.
 	 *
-	 * For the light shadow, boost each component by 40% or half-way
-	 * to white, whichever is greater (the first approach works
-	 * better for unsaturated colors, the second for saturated ones).
-	 * But if the background is already very bright, instead choose a
-	 * slightly darker color for the light shadow by reducing each
-	 * color component by 10%.
+	 * For the light shadow, boost each component by 40% or half-way to
+	 * white, whichever is greater (the first approach works better for
+	 * unsaturated colors, the second for saturated ones). But if the
+	 * background is already very bright, instead choose a slightly darker
+	 * color for the light shadow by reducing each color component by 10%.
 	 *
-	 * Compute the colors using integers, not using lightColor.red
-	 * etc.: these are shorts and may have problems with integer
-	 * overflow.
+	 * Compute the colors using integers, not using lightColor.red etc.:
+	 * these are shorts and may have problems with integer overflow.
 	 */
 
 	/*
@@ -463,7 +454,7 @@ TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin)
 	    tmp2 = (MAX_INTENSITY + b)/2;
 	    lightColor.blue = (tmp1 > tmp2) ? tmp1 : tmp2;
 	}
-	
+
        /*
         * Allocate the light shadow color and its GC
         */
@@ -483,10 +474,10 @@ TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin)
     }
     if (borderPtr->visual->map_entries > 2) {
 	/*
-	 * This isn't a monochrome display, but the colormap either
-	 * ran out of entries or didn't have very many to begin with.
-	 * Generate the light shadows with a white stipple and the
-	 * dark shadows with a black stipple.
+	 * This isn't a monochrome display, but the colormap either ran out of
+	 * entries or didn't have very many to begin with. Generate the light
+	 * shadows with a white stipple and the dark shadows with a black
+	 * stipple.
 	 */
 
 	gcValues.foreground = borderPtr->bgColorPtr->pixel;
@@ -504,8 +495,8 @@ TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin)
 
     /*
      * This is just a measly monochrome display, hardly even worth its
-     * existence on this earth.  Make one shadow a 50% stipple and the
-     * other the opposite of the background.
+     * existence on this earth. Make one shadow a 50% stipple and the other
+     * the opposite of the background.
      */
 
     gcValues.foreground = WhitePixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
@@ -529,8 +520,7 @@ TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin)
  *
  * TkWinGetBorderPixels --
  *
- *	This routine returns the 5 COLORREFs used to draw a given
- *	3d border.  
+ *	This routine returns the 5 COLORREFs used to draw a given 3d border.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the colors in the specified array.
@@ -542,34 +532,42 @@ TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin)
  */
 
 COLORREF
-TkWinGetBorderPixels(tkwin, border, which)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    Tk_3DBorder border;
-    int which;			/* One of TK_3D_FLAT_GC, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC,
+TkWinGetBorderPixels(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tk_3DBorder border,
+    int which)			/* One of TK_3D_FLAT_GC, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC,
 				 * TK_3D_DARK_GC, TK_3D_LIGHT2, TK_3D_DARK2 */
 {
     WinBorder *borderPtr = (WinBorder *) border;
-    
+
     if (borderPtr->info.lightGC == None) {
 	TkpGetShadows(&borderPtr->info, tkwin);
     }
     switch (which) {
-	case TK_3D_FLAT_GC:
-	    return borderPtr->info.bgColorPtr->pixel;
-	case TK_3D_LIGHT_GC:
-	    if (borderPtr->info.lightColorPtr == NULL) {
-		return WhitePixelOfScreen(borderPtr->info.screen);
-	    }
-	    return borderPtr->info.lightColorPtr->pixel;
-	case TK_3D_DARK_GC:
-	    if (borderPtr->info.darkColorPtr == NULL) {
-		return BlackPixelOfScreen(borderPtr->info.screen);
-	    }
-	    return borderPtr->info.darkColorPtr->pixel;
-	case TK_3D_LIGHT2:
-	    return borderPtr->light2ColorPtr->pixel;
-	case TK_3D_DARK2:
-	    return borderPtr->dark2ColorPtr->pixel;
+    case TK_3D_FLAT_GC:
+	return borderPtr->info.bgColorPtr->pixel;
+    case TK_3D_LIGHT_GC:
+	if (borderPtr->info.lightColorPtr == NULL) {
+	    return WhitePixelOfScreen(borderPtr->info.screen);
+	}
+	return borderPtr->info.lightColorPtr->pixel;
+    case TK_3D_DARK_GC:
+	if (borderPtr->info.darkColorPtr == NULL) {
+	    return BlackPixelOfScreen(borderPtr->info.screen);
+	}
+	return borderPtr->info.darkColorPtr->pixel;
+    case TK_3D_LIGHT2:
+	return borderPtr->light2ColorPtr->pixel;
+    case TK_3D_DARK2:
+	return borderPtr->dark2ColorPtr->pixel;
     }
     return 0;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinButton.c b/win/tkWinButton.c
index d9b10b5..bd9768c 100644
--- a/win/tkWinButton.c
+++ b/win/tkWinButton.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinButton.c --
  *
  *	This file implements the Windows specific portion of the button
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
  * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
  * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinButton.c,v 1.26 2004/06/16 19:53:40 a_kovalenko Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinButton.c,v 1.27 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #define OEMRESOURCE
@@ -21,9 +21,9 @@
  */
 
 #define LABEL_STYLE (BS_OWNERDRAW | WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS)
-#define PUSH_STYLE (BS_OWNERDRAW | BS_PUSHBUTTON | WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS)
-#define CHECK_STYLE (BS_OWNERDRAW | BS_CHECKBOX | WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS)
-#define RADIO_STYLE (BS_OWNERDRAW | BS_RADIOBUTTON | WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS)
+#define PUSH_STYLE  (LABEL_STYLE | BS_PUSHBUTTON)
+#define CHECK_STYLE (LABEL_STYLE | BS_CHECKBOX)
+#define RADIO_STYLE (LABEL_STYLE | BS_RADIOBUTTON)
 
 /*
  * Declaration of Windows specific button structure.
@@ -37,17 +37,16 @@ typedef struct WinButton {
     DWORD style;		/* Window style flags. */
 } WinButton;
 
-
 /*
- * The following macro reverses the order of RGB bytes to convert
- * between RGBQUAD and COLORREF values.
+ * The following macro reverses the order of RGB bytes to convert between
+ * RGBQUAD and COLORREF values.
  */
 
 #define FlipColor(rgb) (RGB(GetBValue(rgb),GetGValue(rgb),GetRValue(rgb)))
 
 /*
- * The following enumeration defines the meaning of the palette entries
- * in the "buttons" image used to draw checkbox and radiobutton indicators.
+ * The following enumeration defines the meaning of the palette entries in the
+ * "buttons" image used to draw checkbox and radiobutton indicators.
  */
 
 enum {
@@ -61,17 +60,17 @@ enum {
 };
 
 /*
- * Cached information about the boxes bitmap, and the default border 
- * width for a button in string form for use in Tk_OptionSpec for 
- * the various button widget classes.
+ * Cached information about the boxes bitmap, and the default border width for
+ * a button in string form for use in Tk_OptionSpec for the various button
+ * widget classes.
  */
 
-typedef struct ThreadSpecificData { 
-    BITMAPINFOHEADER *boxesPtr;   /* Information about the bitmap. */
-    DWORD *boxesPalette;	  /* Pointer to color palette. */
-    LPSTR boxesBits;		  /* Pointer to bitmap data. */
-    DWORD boxHeight;              /* Height of each sub-image. */
-    DWORD boxWidth ;              /* Width of each sub-image. */
+typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
+    BITMAPINFOHEADER *boxesPtr;	/* Information about the bitmap. */
+    DWORD *boxesPalette;	/* Pointer to color palette. */
+    LPSTR boxesBits;		/* Pointer to bitmap data. */
+    DWORD boxHeight;		/* Height of each sub-image. */
+    DWORD boxWidth;		/* Width of each sub-image. */
     char defWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
@@ -79,17 +78,18 @@ static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 /*
  * Declarations for functions defined in this file.
  */
-static LRESULT CALLBACK	ButtonProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message,
-			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
-static Window		CreateProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    Window parent, ClientData instanceData));
-static void		InitBoxes _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+
+static LRESULT CALLBACK	ButtonProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
+static Window		CreateProc(Tk_Window tkwin, Window parent,
+			    ClientData instanceData);
+static void		InitBoxes(void);
 
 /*
  * The class procedure table for the button widgets.
  */
 
-Tk_ClassProcs tkpButtonProcs = { 
+Tk_ClassProcs tkpButtonProcs = {
     sizeof(Tk_ClassProcs),	/* size */
     TkButtonWorldChanged,	/* worldChangedProc */
     CreateProc,			/* createProc */
@@ -101,13 +101,13 @@ Tk_ClassProcs tkpButtonProcs = {
  *
  * InitBoxes --
  *
- *	This function load the Tk 3d button bitmap.  "buttons" is a 16 
- *	color bitmap that is laid out such that the top row contains 
- *	the 4 checkbox images, and the bottom row contains the radio 
- *	button images. Note that the bitmap is stored in bottom-up 
- *	format.  Also, the first seven palette entries are used to 
- *	identify the different parts of the bitmaps so we can do the 
- *	appropriate color mappings based on the current button colors.
+ *	This function load the Tk 3d button bitmap. "buttons" is a 16 color
+ *	bitmap that is laid out such that the top row contains the 4 checkbox
+ *	images, and the bottom row contains the radio button images. Note that
+ *	the bitmap is stored in bottom-up format. Also, the first seven
+ *	palette entries are used to identify the different parts of the
+ *	bitmaps so we can do the appropriate color mappings based on the
+ *	current button colors.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Tk_ClassProcs tkpButtonProcs = {
  */
 
 static void
-InitBoxes()
+InitBoxes(void)
 {
     /*
      * For DLLs like Tk, the HINSTANCE is the same as the HMODULE.
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ InitBoxes()
     HGLOBAL hblk;
     LPBITMAPINFOHEADER newBitmap;
     DWORD size;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     hrsrc = FindResource(module, "buttons", RT_BITMAP);
@@ -145,14 +145,14 @@ InitBoxes()
 
     if (tsdPtr->boxesPtr != NULL && !(tsdPtr->boxesPtr->biWidth % 4)
 	    && !(tsdPtr->boxesPtr->biHeight % 2)) {
-	size = tsdPtr->boxesPtr->biSize + (1 << tsdPtr->boxesPtr->biBitCount) 
+	size = tsdPtr->boxesPtr->biSize + (1 << tsdPtr->boxesPtr->biBitCount)
                 * sizeof(RGBQUAD) + tsdPtr->boxesPtr->biSizeImage;
 	newBitmap = (LPBITMAPINFOHEADER) ckalloc(size);
 	memcpy(newBitmap, tsdPtr->boxesPtr, size);
 	tsdPtr->boxesPtr = newBitmap;
 	tsdPtr->boxWidth = tsdPtr->boxesPtr->biWidth / 4;
 	tsdPtr->boxHeight = tsdPtr->boxesPtr->biHeight / 2;
-	tsdPtr->boxesPalette = (DWORD*) (((LPSTR) tsdPtr->boxesPtr) 
+	tsdPtr->boxesPalette = (DWORD*) (((LPSTR) tsdPtr->boxesPtr)
                 + tsdPtr->boxesPtr->biSize);
 	tsdPtr->boxesBits = ((LPSTR) tsdPtr->boxesPalette)
 	    + ((1 << tsdPtr->boxesPtr->biBitCount) * sizeof(RGBQUAD));
@@ -167,8 +167,8 @@ InitBoxes()
  * TkpButtonSetDefaults --
  *
  *	This procedure is invoked before option tables are created for
- *	buttons.  It modifies some of the default values to match the
- *	current values defined for this platform.
+ *	buttons. It modifies some of the default values to match the current
+ *	values defined for this platform.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Some of the default values in *specPtr are modified.
@@ -180,13 +180,13 @@ InitBoxes()
  */
 
 void
-TkpButtonSetDefaults(specPtr)
-    Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;	/* Points to an array of option specs,
+TkpButtonSetDefaults(
+    Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr)	/* Points to an array of option specs,
 				 * terminated by one with type
 				 * TK_OPTION_END. */
 {
     int width;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (tsdPtr->defWidth[0] == 0) {
@@ -220,8 +220,8 @@ TkpButtonSetDefaults(specPtr)
  */
 
 TkButton *
-TkpCreateButton(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
+TkpCreateButton(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)
 {
     WinButton *butPtr;
 
@@ -235,8 +235,8 @@ TkpCreateButton(tkwin)
  *
  * CreateProc --
  *
- *	This function creates a new Button control, subclasses
- *	the instance, and generates a new Window object.
+ *	This function creates a new Button control, subclasses the instance,
+ *	and generates a new Window object.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the newly allocated Window object, or None on failure.
@@ -248,10 +248,10 @@ TkpCreateButton(tkwin)
  */
 
 static Window
-CreateProc(tkwin, parentWin, instanceData)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window. */
-    Window parentWin;		/* Parent of new window. */
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Button instance data. */
+CreateProc(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window. */
+    Window parentWin,		/* Parent of new window. */
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Button instance data. */
 {
     Window window;
     HWND parent;
@@ -300,11 +300,12 @@ CreateProc(tkwin, parentWin, instanceData)
  */
 
 void
-TkpDestroyButton(butPtr)
-    TkButton *butPtr;
+TkpDestroyButton(
+    TkButton *butPtr)
 {
     WinButton *winButPtr = (WinButton *)butPtr;
     HWND hwnd = winButPtr->hwnd;
+
     if (hwnd) {
 #ifdef _WIN64
 	SetWindowLongPtr(hwnd, GWLP_WNDPROC, (LONG_PTR) winButPtr->oldProc);
@@ -319,22 +320,21 @@ TkpDestroyButton(butPtr)
  *
  * TkpDisplayButton --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to display a button widget.  It is
- *	normally invoked as an idle handler.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to display a button widget. It is normally
+ *	invoked as an idle handler.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Information appears on the screen.  The REDRAW_PENDING flag
- *	is cleared.
+ *	Information appears on the screen. The REDRAW_PENDING flag is cleared.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about widget. */
+TkpDisplayButton(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about widget. */
 {
     TkWinDCState state;
     HDC dc;
@@ -342,26 +342,27 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
     GC gc;
     Tk_3DBorder border;
     Pixmap pixmap;
-    int x = 0;			/* Initialization only needed to stop
-				 * compiler warning. */
+    int x = 0;			/* Initialization only needed to stop compiler
+				 * warning. */
     int y, relief;
     register Tk_Window tkwin = butPtr->tkwin;
     int width, height, haveImage = 0, haveText = 0, drawRing = 0;
     RECT rect;
     int defaultWidth;		/* Width of default ring. */
-    int offset;			/* 0 means this is a label widget.  1 means
-				 * it is a flavor of button, so we offset
-				 * the text to make the button appear to
-				 * move up and down as the relief changes. */
-    int textXOffset = 0, textYOffset = 0; /* text offsets for use with
-					   * compound buttons and focus ring */
+    int offset;			/* 0 means this is a label widget. 1 means it
+				 * is a flavor of button, so we offset the
+				 * text to make the button appear to move up
+				 * and down as the relief changes. */
+    int textXOffset = 0, textYOffset = 0;
+				/* Text offsets for use with compound buttons
+				 * and focus ring. */
     int imageWidth, imageHeight;
-    int imageXOffset = 0, imageYOffset = 0; /* image information that will
-					     * be used to restrict disabled
-					     * pixmap as well */
+    int imageXOffset = 0, imageYOffset = 0;
+				/* Image information that will be used to
+				 * restrict disabled pixmap as well. */
     DWORD *boxesPalette;
 
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     boxesPalette= tsdPtr->boxesPalette;
@@ -386,9 +387,8 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Override the relief specified for the button if this is a
-     * checkbutton or radiobutton and there's no indicator.  The new
-     * relief is as follows:
+     * Override the relief specified for the button if this is a checkbutton
+     * or radiobutton and there's no indicator. The new relief is as follows:
      *      If the button is select  --> "sunken"
      *      If relief==overrelief    --> relief
      *      Otherwise                --> overrelief
@@ -402,15 +402,15 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
      *       on         no               sunken
      *       on         yes              sunken
      *
-     * This is accomplished by configuring the checkbutton or radiobutton
-     * like this:
+     * This is accomplished by configuring the checkbutton or radiobutton like
+     * this:
      *
      *     -indicatoron 0 -overrelief raised -offrelief flat
      *
      * Bindings (see library/button.tcl) will copy the -overrelief into
-     * -relief on mouseover.  Hence, we can tell if we are in mouse-over by
-     * comparing relief against overRelief.  This is an aweful kludge, but
-     * it gives use the desired behavior while keeping the code backwards
+     * -relief on mouseover. Hence, we can tell if we are in mouse-over by
+     * comparing relief against overRelief. This is an aweful kludge, but it
+     * gives use the desired behavior while keeping the code backwards
      * compatible.
      */
 
@@ -441,10 +441,10 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * In order to avoid screen flashes, this procedure redraws
-     * the button in a pixmap, then copies the pixmap to the
-     * screen in a single operation.  This means that there's no
-     * point in time where the on-sreen image has been cleared.
+     * In order to avoid screen flashes, this procedure redraws the button in
+     * a pixmap, then copies the pixmap to the screen in a single operation.
+     * This means that there's no point in time where the on-sreen image has
+     * been cleared.
      */
 
     pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(butPtr->display, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
@@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
 	Tk_SizeOfBitmap(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, &width, &height);
 	haveImage = 1;
     }
-    imageWidth  = width;
+    imageWidth = width;
     imageHeight = height;
 
     haveText = (butPtr->textWidth != 0 && butPtr->textHeight != 0);
@@ -472,49 +472,58 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
 	int fullWidth = 0, fullHeight = 0;
 
 	switch ((enum compound) butPtr->compound) {
-	    case COMPOUND_TOP: 
-	    case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: {
-		/* Image is above or below text */
-		if (butPtr->compound == COMPOUND_TOP) {
-		    textYOffset = height + butPtr->padY;
-		} else {
-		    imageYOffset = butPtr->textHeight + butPtr->padY;
-		}
-		fullHeight = height + butPtr->textHeight + butPtr->padY;
-		fullWidth = (width > butPtr->textWidth ? width :
-			butPtr->textWidth);
-		textXOffset = (fullWidth - butPtr->textWidth)/2;
-		imageXOffset = (fullWidth - width)/2;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case COMPOUND_LEFT:
-	    case COMPOUND_RIGHT: {
-		/* Image is left or right of text */
-		if (butPtr->compound == COMPOUND_LEFT) {
-		    textXOffset = width + butPtr->padX;
-		} else {
-		    imageXOffset = butPtr->textWidth + butPtr->padX;
-		}
-		fullWidth = butPtr->textWidth + butPtr->padX + width;
-		fullHeight = (height > butPtr->textHeight ? height :
-			butPtr->textHeight);
-		textYOffset = (fullHeight - butPtr->textHeight)/2;
-		imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2;
-		break;
+	case COMPOUND_TOP:
+	case COMPOUND_BOTTOM:
+	    /*
+	     * Image is above or below text.
+	     */
+
+	    if (butPtr->compound == COMPOUND_TOP) {
+		textYOffset = height + butPtr->padY;
+	    } else {
+		imageYOffset = butPtr->textHeight + butPtr->padY;
 	    }
-	    case COMPOUND_CENTER: {
-		/* Image and text are superimposed */
-		fullWidth = (width > butPtr->textWidth ? width :
-			butPtr->textWidth);
-		fullHeight = (height > butPtr->textHeight ? height :
-			butPtr->textHeight);
-		textXOffset = (fullWidth - butPtr->textWidth)/2;
-		imageXOffset = (fullWidth - width)/2;
-		textYOffset = (fullHeight - butPtr->textHeight)/2;
-		imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2;
-		break;
+	    fullHeight = height + butPtr->textHeight + butPtr->padY;
+	    fullWidth = (width > butPtr->textWidth ? width :
+		    butPtr->textWidth);
+	    textXOffset = (fullWidth - butPtr->textWidth)/2;
+	    imageXOffset = (fullWidth - width)/2;
+	    break;
+
+	case COMPOUND_LEFT:
+	case COMPOUND_RIGHT:
+	    /*
+	     * Image is left or right of text.
+	     */
+
+	    if (butPtr->compound == COMPOUND_LEFT) {
+		textXOffset = width + butPtr->padX;
+	    } else {
+		imageXOffset = butPtr->textWidth + butPtr->padX;
 	    }
-	    case COMPOUND_NONE: {break;}
+	    fullWidth = butPtr->textWidth + butPtr->padX + width;
+	    fullHeight = (height > butPtr->textHeight ? height :
+		    butPtr->textHeight);
+	    textYOffset = (fullHeight - butPtr->textHeight)/2;
+	    imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2;
+	    break;
+
+	case COMPOUND_CENTER:
+	    /*
+	     * Image and text are superimposed.
+	     */
+
+	    fullWidth = (width > butPtr->textWidth ? width :
+		    butPtr->textWidth);
+	    fullHeight = (height > butPtr->textHeight ? height :
+		    butPtr->textHeight);
+	    textXOffset = (fullWidth - butPtr->textWidth)/2;
+	    imageXOffset = (fullWidth - width)/2;
+	    textYOffset = (fullHeight - butPtr->textHeight)/2;
+	    imageYOffset = (fullHeight - height)/2;
+	    break;
+	case COMPOUND_NONE:
+	    break;
 	}
 	TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, butPtr->padX, butPtr->padY,
 		butPtr->indicatorSpace + fullWidth, fullHeight, &x, &y);
@@ -530,12 +539,13 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
 	    if ((butPtr->selectImage != NULL) && (butPtr->flags & SELECTED)) {
 		Tk_RedrawImage(butPtr->selectImage, 0, 0,
 			width, height, pixmap, imageXOffset, imageYOffset);
-	    } else if ((butPtr->tristateImage != NULL) && (butPtr->flags & TRISTATED)) {
+	    } else if ((butPtr->tristateImage != NULL)
+		    && (butPtr->flags & TRISTATED)) {
 		Tk_RedrawImage(butPtr->tristateImage, 0, 0,
 			width, height, pixmap, imageXOffset, imageYOffset);
 	    } else {
-		Tk_RedrawImage(butPtr->image, 0, 0,
-			width, height, pixmap, imageXOffset, imageYOffset);
+		Tk_RedrawImage(butPtr->image, 0, 0, width, height, pixmap,
+			imageXOffset, imageYOffset);
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, gc, imageXOffset, imageYOffset);
@@ -547,6 +557,7 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
 	if ((butPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED) &&
 	       	(butPtr->disabledFg != NULL)) {
 	    COLORREF oldFgColor = gc->foreground;
+
 	    gc->foreground = GetSysColor(COLOR_3DHILIGHT);
 	    Tk_DrawTextLayout(butPtr->display, pixmap, gc,
 		    butPtr->textLayout, x + textXOffset + 1,
@@ -570,7 +581,7 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
 	    TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, 0, 0,
 		    butPtr->indicatorSpace + width, height, &x, &y);
 	    x += butPtr->indicatorSpace;
-	    
+
 	    if (relief == TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN) {
 		x += offset;
 		y += offset;
@@ -602,7 +613,7 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
 		    butPtr->textHeight,	&x, &y);
 
 	    x += butPtr->indicatorSpace;
-	    
+
 	    if (relief == TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN) {
 		x += offset;
 		y += offset;
@@ -629,12 +640,12 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Draw the focus ring.  If this is a push button then we need to
-     * put it around the inner edge of the border, otherwise we put it
-     * around the text.  The text offsets are only non-zero when this
-     * is a compound button.
+     * Draw the focus ring. If this is a push button then we need to put it
+     * around the inner edge of the border, otherwise we put it around the
+     * text. The text offsets are only non-zero when this is a compound
+     * button.
      */
-    
+
     if (drawRing && butPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS && butPtr->type != TYPE_LABEL) {
 	dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(butPtr->display, pixmap, &state);
 	if (butPtr->type == TYPE_BUTTON || !butPtr->indicatorOn) {
@@ -655,11 +666,10 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
     }
 
     y += height/2;
-    
+
     /*
-     * Draw the indicator for check buttons and radio buttons.  At this
-     * point x and y refer to the top-left corner of the text or image
-     * or bitmap.
+     * Draw the indicator for check buttons and radio buttons. At this point x
+     * and y refer to the top-left corner of the text or image or bitmap.
      */
 
     if ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && butPtr->indicatorOn
@@ -677,11 +687,11 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
 
 	/*
 	 * Update the palette in the boxes bitmap to reflect the current
-	 * button colors.  Note that this code relies on the layout of the
-	 * bitmap's palette.  Also, all of the colors used to draw the
-	 * bitmap must be in the palette that is selected into the DC of
-	 * the offscreen pixmap.  This requires that the static colors
-	 * be placed into the palette.
+	 * button colors. Note that this code relies on the layout of the
+	 * bitmap's palette. Also, all of the colors used to draw the bitmap
+	 * must be in the palette that is selected into the DC of the
+	 * offscreen pixmap. This requires that the static colors be placed
+	 * into the palette.
 	 */
 
 	if ((butPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED)
@@ -712,18 +722,18 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
 		border, TK_3D_FLAT_GC));
 
 	dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(butPtr->display, pixmap, &state);
-	StretchDIBits(dc, x, y, tsdPtr->boxWidth, tsdPtr->boxHeight, 
-                xSrc, ySrc, tsdPtr->boxWidth, tsdPtr->boxHeight, 
-                tsdPtr->boxesBits, (LPBITMAPINFO) tsdPtr->boxesPtr, 
+	StretchDIBits(dc, x, y, tsdPtr->boxWidth, tsdPtr->boxHeight,
+                xSrc, ySrc, tsdPtr->boxWidth, tsdPtr->boxHeight,
+                tsdPtr->boxesBits, (LPBITMAPINFO) tsdPtr->boxesPtr,
                 DIB_RGB_COLORS, SRCCOPY);
 	TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(pixmap, dc, &state);
     }
 
     /*
      * If the button is disabled with a stipple rather than a special
-     * foreground color, generate the stippled effect.  If the widget
-     * is selected and we use a different background color when selected,
-     * must temporarily modify the GC so the stippling is the right color.
+     * foreground color, generate the stippled effect. If the widget is
+     * selected and we use a different background color when selected, must
+     * temporarily modify the GC so the stippling is the right color.
      */
 
     if ((butPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED)
@@ -733,10 +743,12 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
 	    XSetForeground(butPtr->display, butPtr->stippleGC,
 		    Tk_3DBorderColor(butPtr->selectBorder)->pixel);
 	}
+
 	/*
-	 * Stipple the whole button if no disabledFg was specified,
-	 * otherwise restrict stippling only to displayed image
+	 * Stipple the whole button if no disabledFg was specified, otherwise
+	 * restrict stippling only to displayed image
 	 */
+
 	if (butPtr->disabledFg == NULL) {
 	    XFillRectangle(butPtr->display, pixmap, butPtr->stippleGC, 0, 0,
 		    (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin));
@@ -753,8 +765,8 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Draw the border and traversal highlight last.  This way, if the
-     * button's contents overflow they'll be covered up by the border.
+     * Draw the border and traversal highlight last. This way, if the button's
+     * contents overflow they'll be covered up by the border.
      */
 
     if (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
@@ -784,8 +796,8 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen,
-     * then delete the pixmap.
+     * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen, then
+     * delete the pixmap.
      */
 
     XCopyArea(butPtr->display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
@@ -799,9 +811,9 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
  *
  * TkpComputeButtonGeometry --
  *
- *	After changes in a button's text or bitmap, this procedure
- *	recomputes the button's geometry and passes this information
- *	along to the geometry manager for the window.
+ *	After changes in a button's text or bitmap, this procedure recomputes
+ *	the button's geometry and passes this information along to the
+ *	geometry manager for the window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -813,21 +825,21 @@ TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
  */
 
 void
-TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr)
-    register TkButton *butPtr;	/* Button whose geometry may have changed. */
+TkpComputeButtonGeometry(
+    register TkButton *butPtr)	/* Button whose geometry may have changed. */
 {
-    int txtWidth, txtHeight;		/* Width and height of text */
-    int imgWidth, imgHeight;		/* Width and height of image */
-    int width = 0, height = 0;		/* Width and height of button */
+    int txtWidth, txtHeight;	/* Width and height of text */
+    int imgWidth, imgHeight;	/* Width and height of image */
+    int width = 0, height = 0;	/* Width and height of button */
     int haveImage, haveText;
     int avgWidth;
     int minWidth;
     /* Vertical and horizontal dialog units size in pixels. */
     double vDLU, hDLU;
     Tk_FontMetrics fm;
-    
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-	Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (butPtr->highlightWidth < 0) {
 	butPtr->highlightWidth = 0;
@@ -839,13 +851,16 @@ TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr)
 	InitBoxes();
     }
 
-    /* Figure out image metrics */
+    /*
+     * Figure out image metrics.
+     */
+
     if (butPtr->image != NULL) {
 	Tk_SizeOfImage(butPtr->image, &imgWidth, &imgHeight);
 	haveImage = 1;
     } else if (butPtr->bitmap != None) {
 	Tk_SizeOfBitmap(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap,
-			&imgWidth, &imgHeight);
+		&imgWidth, &imgHeight);
 	haveImage = 1;
     } else {
 	imgWidth = 0;
@@ -853,10 +868,11 @@ TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr)
 	haveImage = 0;
     }
 
-    /* 
+    /*
      * Figure out font metrics (even if we don't have text because we need
      * DLUs (based on font, not text) for some spacing calculations below).
      */
+
     Tk_FreeTextLayout(butPtr->textLayout);
     butPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(butPtr->tkfont,
 	    Tcl_GetString(butPtr->textPtr), -1, butPtr->wrapLength,
@@ -870,7 +886,10 @@ TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr)
 	    52) + 26) / 52;
     Tk_GetFontMetrics(butPtr->tkfont, &fm);
 
-    /* Compute dialog units for layout calculations. */
+    /*
+     * Compute dialog units for layout calculations.
+     */
+
     hDLU = avgWidth / 4.0;
     vDLU = fm.linespace / 8.0;
 
@@ -887,179 +906,197 @@ TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr)
 
     /*
      * Set width and height by button type; See User Experience table, p449.
-     * These are text-based measurements, even if the text is "".
-     * If there is an image, height will get set again later.
+     * These are text-based measurements, even if the text is "". If there is
+     * an image, height will get set again later.
      */
+
     switch (butPtr->type) {
-        case TYPE_BUTTON: {
-	    /*
-	     * First compute the minimum width of the button in 
-	     * characters.	MWUE says that the button should be
-	     * 50 DLUs.  We allow 6 DLUs padding left and right.
-	     * (There is no rule but this is consistent with the
-	     * fact that button text is 8 DLUs high and buttons
-	     * are 14 DLUs high.)
-	     * 
-	     * The width is specified in characters.  A character
-	     * is, by definition, 4 DLUs wide.  11 char * 4 DLU
-	     * is 44 DLU + 6 DLU padding = 50 DLU.	Therefore,
-	     * width = -11 -> MWUE compliant buttons.
-	     */
-	    if (butPtr->width < 0) {
-		/* Min width in characters */
-		minWidth = -(butPtr->width);
-		/* Allow for characters */
-		width = avgWidth * minWidth;
-		/* Add for padding */
-		width += (int)(0.5 + (6 * hDLU));
-	    } 
+    case TYPE_BUTTON:
+	/*
+	 * First compute the minimum width of the button in characters. MWUE
+	 * says that the button should be 50 DLUs. We allow 6 DLUs padding
+	 * left and right. (There is no rule but this is consistent with the
+	 * fact that button text is 8 DLUs high and buttons are 14 DLUs high.)
+	 *
+	 * The width is specified in characters. A character is, by
+	 * definition, 4 DLUs wide. 11 char * 4 DLU is 44 DLU + 6 DLU padding
+	 * = 50 DLU. Therefore, width = -11 -> MWUE compliant buttons.
+	 */
 
-	    /*
-	     * If shrink-wrapping was requested (width = 0) or
-	     * if the text is wider than the default button width,
-	     * adjust the button width up to suit.	
-	     */
-	    if (butPtr->width == 0 
-		    || (txtWidth + (int)(0.5 + (6 * hDLU)) > width)) {
-		width = txtWidth + (int)(0.5 + (6 * hDLU));
-	    }
+	if (butPtr->width < 0) {
+	    minWidth = -(butPtr->width);	    /* Min width in chars */
+	    width = avgWidth * minWidth;	    /* Allow for characters */
+	    width += (int)(0.5 + (6 * hDLU));	    /* Add for padding */
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * If shrink-wrapping was requested (width = 0) or if the text is
+	 * wider than the default button width, adjust the button width up to
+	 * suit.
+	 */
+
+	if (butPtr->width == 0
+		|| (txtWidth + (int)(0.5 + (6 * hDLU)) > width)) {
+	    width = txtWidth + (int)(0.5 + (6 * hDLU));
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * The User Experience says 14 DLUs. Since text is, by definition, 8
+	 * DLU/line, this allows for multi-line text while working perfectly
+	 * for single-line text.
+	 */
+
+	height = txtHeight + (int)(0.5 + (6 * vDLU));
+
+	/*
+	 * The above includes 6 DLUs of padding which should include defaults
+	 * of 1 pixel of highlightwidth, 2 pixels of borderwidth, 1 pixel of
+	 * padding and 1 pixel of extra inset on each side. Those will be
+	 * added later so reduce width and height now to compensate.
+	 */
+
+	width -= 10;
+	height -= 10;
 
+	if (!haveImage) {
 	    /*
-	     * The User Experience says 14 DLUs.  Since text is, by
-	     * definition, 8 DLU/line, this allows for multi-line text
-	     * while working perfectly for single-line text.
+	     * Extra inset for the focus ring.
 	     */
-	    height = txtHeight + (int)(0.5 + (6 * vDLU));
 
+	    butPtr->inset += 1;
+	}
+	break;
+
+    case TYPE_LABEL:
+	/*
+	 * The User Experience says, "as wide as needed".
+	 */
+
+	width = txtWidth;
+
+	/*
+	 * The User Experience says, "8 (DLUs) per line of text". Since text
+	 * is, by definition, 8 DLU/line, this allows for multi-line text
+	 * while working perfectly for single-line text.
+	 */
+
+	if (txtHeight) {
+	    height = txtHeight;
+	} else {
 	    /*
-	     * The above includes 6 DLUs of padding which should include
-	     * defaults of 1 pixel of highlightwidth, 2 pixels of 
-	     * borderwidth, 1 pixel of padding and 1 pixel of extra inset 
-	     * on each side.  Those will be added later so reduce width 
-	     * and height now to compensate.
+	     * If there's no text, we want the height to be one linespace.
 	     */
-	    width  -= 10;
-	    height -= 10;
-
-	    if (!haveImage) {
-		/*
-		 * Extra inset for the focus ring.
-		 */
-		butPtr->inset += 1;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	    height = fm.linespace;
 	}
+	break;
 
-        case TYPE_LABEL: {
-            /*
-             * The User Experience says, "as wide as needed".
-             */
-            width = txtWidth;
+    case TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON:
+    case TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON: {
+	/*
+	 * See note for TYPE_LABEL.
+	 */
 
-            /*
-             * The User Experience says, "8 (DLUs) per line of text."
-             * Since text is, by definition, 8 DLU/line, this allows
-             * for multi-line text while working perfectly for single-line
-             * text.
-             */
-            if (txtHeight) {
-                height = txtHeight;
-            } else {
-		/*
-		 * If there's no text, we want the height to be one linespace.
-		 */
-                height = fm.linespace;
-            }
-            break;
-        }
+	width = txtWidth;
 
-        case TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON:
-        case TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON: {
-            /* See note for TYPE_LABEL */
-            width = txtWidth;
-            /*
-             * The User Experience says 10 DLUs.  (Is that one DLU above
-             * and below for the focus ring?)	 See note above about
-             * multi-line text and 8 DLU/line.
-             */
-            height = txtHeight + (int)(0.5 + (2.0 * vDLU));
-            
-            /*
-             * The above includes 2 DLUs of padding which should include
-             * defaults of 1 pixel of highlightwidth, 0 pixels of 
-             * borderwidth, and 1 pixel of padding on each side.  Those
-             * will be added later so reduce height now to compensate.
-             */
-            height -= 4;
-            
-            /*
-             * Extra inset for the focus ring.
-             */
-            butPtr->inset += 1;
-            break;
-        }
+	/*
+	 * The User Experience says 10 DLUs. (Is that one DLU above and below
+	 * for the focus ring?) See note above about multi-line text and 8
+	 * DLU/line.
+	 */
+
+	height = txtHeight + (int)(0.5 + (2.0 * vDLU));
+
+	/*
+	 * The above includes 2 DLUs of padding which should include defaults
+	 * of 1 pixel of highlightwidth, 0 pixels of borderwidth, and 1 pixel
+	 * of padding on each side. Those will be added later so reduce height
+	 * now to compensate.
+	 */
+
+	height -= 4;
+
+	/*
+	 * Extra inset for the focus ring.
+	 */
+	butPtr->inset += 1;
+	break;
+    }
     }/* switch */
 
     /*
-     * At this point, the width and height are correct for a Tk text
-     * button, excluding padding and inset, but we have to allow for
-     * compound buttons.  The image may be above, below, left, or right
-     * of the text.
+     * At this point, the width and height are correct for a Tk text button,
+     * excluding padding and inset, but we have to allow for compound buttons.
+     * The image may be above, below, left, or right of the text.
      */
 
     /*
-     * If the button is compound (i.e., it shows both an image and text),
-     * the new geometry is a combination of the image and text geometry.
-     * We only honor the compound bit if the button has both text and an
-     * image, because otherwise it is not really a compound button.
+     * If the button is compound (i.e., it shows both an image and text), the
+     * new geometry is a combination of the image and text geometry. We only
+     * honor the compound bit if the button has both text and an image,
+     * because otherwise it is not really a compound button.
      */
+
     if (butPtr->compound != COMPOUND_NONE && haveImage && haveText) {
 	switch ((enum compound) butPtr->compound) {
-	    case COMPOUND_TOP:
-	    case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: {
-		/* Image is above or below text */
-		if (imgWidth > width) {
-		    width = imgWidth;
-		}
-		height += imgHeight + butPtr->padY;
-		break;
+	case COMPOUND_TOP:
+	case COMPOUND_BOTTOM:
+	    /*
+	     * Image is above or below text.
+	     */
+
+	    if (imgWidth > width) {
+		width = imgWidth;
 	    }
-	    case COMPOUND_LEFT:
-	    case COMPOUND_RIGHT: {
-		/* Image is left or right of text */
-		/*
-		 * Only increase width of button if image doesn't fit in
-		 * slack space of default button width
-		 */
-		if ((imgWidth + txtWidth + butPtr->padX) > width) {
-		    width = imgWidth + txtWidth + butPtr->padX;
-		}
+	    height += imgHeight + butPtr->padY;
+	    break;
 
-		if (imgHeight > height) {
-		    height = imgHeight;
-		}
-		break;
+	case COMPOUND_LEFT:
+	case COMPOUND_RIGHT:
+
+	    /*
+	     * Image is left or right of text.
+	     *
+	     * Only increase width of button if image doesn't fit in slack
+	     * space of default button width
+	     */
+
+	    if ((imgWidth + txtWidth + butPtr->padX) > width) {
+		width = imgWidth + txtWidth + butPtr->padX;
 	    }
-	    case COMPOUND_CENTER: {
-		/* Image and text are superimposed */
-		if (imgWidth > width) {
-		    width = imgWidth;
-		}
-		if (imgHeight > height) {
-		    height = imgHeight;
-		}
-		break;
+
+	    if (imgHeight > height) {
+		height = imgHeight;
+	    }
+	    break;
+
+	case COMPOUND_CENTER:
+	    /*
+	     * Image and text are superimposed.
+	     */
+
+	    if (imgWidth > width) {
+		width = imgWidth;
+	    }
+	    if (imgHeight > height) {
+		height = imgHeight;
 	    }
+	    break;
 	} /* switch */
 
-        /* Fix up for minimum width */
-        if (butPtr->width < 0) {
-            /* minWidth in pixels (because there's an image */
-            minWidth = -(butPtr->width);
-            if (width < minWidth) {
-                width =  minWidth;
-            }
-        } else if (butPtr->width > 0) {
+	/*
+	 * Fix up for minimum width.
+	 */
+
+	if (butPtr->width < 0) {
+	    /*
+	     * minWidth in pixels (because there's an image.
+	     */
+
+	    minWidth = -(butPtr->width);
+	    if (width < minWidth) {
+		width = minWidth;
+	    }
+	} else if (butPtr->width > 0) {
 	    width = butPtr->width;
 	}
 
@@ -1081,68 +1118,76 @@ TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr)
 	    height = imgHeight;
 	}
     } else {
-        /* No image.  May or may not be text.  May or may not be compound. */
+        /*
+	 * No image. May or may not be text. May or may not be compound.
+	 */
 
         /*
-	 * butPtr->width is in characters.  We need to allow for that
-	 * many characters on the face, not in the over-all button width
+	 * butPtr->width is in characters. We need to allow for that many
+	 * characters on the face, not in the over-all button width
 	 */
+
         if (butPtr->width > 0) {
 	    width = butPtr->width * avgWidth;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * butPtr->height is in lines of text. We need to allow for
-	 * that many lines on the face, not in the over-all button
-	 * height.
+	 * butPtr->height is in lines of text. We need to allow for that many
+	 * lines on the face, not in the over-all button height.
 	 */
+
 	if (butPtr->height > 0) {
 	    height = butPtr->height * fm.linespace;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Make the same adjustments as above to get same height for
-	     * e.g. a one line text with -height 0 or 1.  [Bug #565485]
+	     * Make the same adjustments as above to get same height for e.g.
+	     * a one line text with -height 0 or 1. [Bug #565485]
 	     */
 
 	    switch (butPtr->type) {
-		case TYPE_BUTTON: {
-		    height += (int)(0.5 + (6 * vDLU)) - 10;
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON:
-		case TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON: {
-		    height += (int)(0.5 + (2.0 * vDLU)) - 4;
-		    break;
-		}
+	    case TYPE_BUTTON: {
+		height += (int)(0.5 + (6 * vDLU)) - 10;
+		break;
+	    }
+	    case TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON:
+	    case TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON: {
+		height += (int)(0.5 + (2.0 * vDLU)) - 4;
+		break;
+	    }
 	    }
 	}
-	    
-	width  += 2 * butPtr->padX;
+
+	width += 2 * butPtr->padX;
 	height += 2 * butPtr->padY;
     }
 
-    /* Fix up width and height for indicator sizing and spacing */
+    /*
+     * Fix up width and height for indicator sizing and spacing.
+     */
+
     if (butPtr->type == TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON
 	    || butPtr->type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) {
 	if (butPtr->indicatorOn) {
 	    butPtr->indicatorDiameter = tsdPtr->boxHeight;
 
-            /* 
-             * Make sure we can see the whole indicator, even if the text
-             * or image is very small.
+            /*
+             * Make sure we can see the whole indicator, even if the text or
+             * image is very small.
              */
+
             if (height < butPtr->indicatorDiameter) {
                 height = butPtr->indicatorDiameter;
             }
 
 	    /*
-	     * There is no rule for space between the indicator and
-	     * the text (the two are atomic on 'Windows) but the User
-	     * Experience page 451 says leave 3 hDLUs between "text
-	     * labels and their associated controls".
+	     * There is no rule for space between the indicator and the text
+	     * (the two are atomic on 'Windows) but the User Experience page
+	     * 451 says leave 3 hDLUs between "text labels and their
+	     * associated controls".
 	     */
+
 	    butPtr->indicatorSpace = butPtr->indicatorDiameter +
-		(int)(0.5 + (3.0 * hDLU));
+		    (int)(0.5 + (3.0 * hDLU));
 	    width += butPtr->indicatorSpace;
 	}
     }
@@ -1150,7 +1195,8 @@ TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr)
     /*
      * Inset is always added to the size.
      */
-    width  += 2 * butPtr->inset;
+
+    width += 2 * butPtr->inset;
     height += 2 * butPtr->inset;
 
     Tk_GeometryRequest(butPtr->tkwin, width, height);
@@ -1162,8 +1208,8 @@ TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr)
  *
  * ButtonProc --
  *
- *	This function is call by Windows whenever an event occurs on
- *	a button control created by Tk.
+ *	This function is call by Windows whenever an event occurs on a button
+ *	control created by Tk.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Windows return value.
@@ -1175,11 +1221,11 @@ TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr)
  */
 
 static LRESULT CALLBACK
-ButtonProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
-    HWND hwnd;
-    UINT message;
-    WPARAM wParam;
-    LPARAM lParam;
+ButtonProc(
+    HWND hwnd,
+    UINT message,
+    WPARAM wParam,
+    LPARAM lParam)
 {
     LRESULT result;
     WinButton *butPtr;
@@ -1191,70 +1237,80 @@ ButtonProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
     butPtr = (WinButton *)((TkWindow*)tkwin)->instanceData;
 
     switch(message) {
-	case WM_ERASEBKGND:
-	    return 0;
-
-	case BM_GETCHECK:
-	    if (((butPtr->info.type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON)
-		    || (butPtr->info.type == TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON))
-		    && butPtr->info.indicatorOn) {
-		return (butPtr->info.flags & SELECTED)
-		    ? BST_CHECKED : BST_UNCHECKED;
-	    }
-	    return 0;
-
-	case BM_GETSTATE: {
-	    DWORD state = 0;
-	    if (((butPtr->info.type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON)
-		    || (butPtr->info.type == TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON))
-		    && butPtr->info.indicatorOn) {
-		state = (butPtr->info.flags & SELECTED)
+    case WM_ERASEBKGND:
+	return 0;
+
+    case BM_GETCHECK:
+	if (((butPtr->info.type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON)
+		|| (butPtr->info.type == TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON))
+		&& butPtr->info.indicatorOn) {
+	    return (butPtr->info.flags & SELECTED)
 		    ? BST_CHECKED : BST_UNCHECKED;
-	    }
-	    if (butPtr->info.flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
-		state |= BST_FOCUS;
-	    }
-	    return state;
 	}
-	case WM_ENABLE:
-	    break;
+	return 0;
 
-	case WM_PAINT: {
-	    PAINTSTRUCT ps;
-	    BeginPaint(hwnd, &ps);
-	    EndPaint(hwnd, &ps);
-	    TkpDisplayButton((ClientData)butPtr);
+    case BM_GETSTATE: {
+	DWORD state = 0;
 
-	    /*
-	     * Special note: must cancel any existing idle handler
-	     * for TkpDisplayButton;  it's no longer needed, and
-	     * TkpDisplayButton cleared the REDRAW_PENDING flag.
-	     */
-           
-	    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(TkpDisplayButton, (ClientData)butPtr);
-	    return 0;
+	if (((butPtr->info.type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON)
+		|| (butPtr->info.type == TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON))
+		&& butPtr->info.indicatorOn) {
+	    state = (butPtr->info.flags & SELECTED)
+		    ? BST_CHECKED : BST_UNCHECKED;
 	}
-	case BN_CLICKED: {
-	    int code;
-	    Tcl_Interp *interp = butPtr->info.interp;
-	    if (butPtr->info.state != STATE_DISABLED) {
-		Tcl_Preserve((ClientData)interp);
-		code = TkInvokeButton((TkButton*)butPtr);
-		if (code != TCL_OK && code != TCL_CONTINUE
-			&& code != TCL_BREAK) {
-		    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (button invoke)");
-		    Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
-		}
-		Tcl_Release((ClientData)interp);
-	    }
-	    Tcl_ServiceAll();
-	    return 0;
+	if (butPtr->info.flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
+	    state |= BST_FOCUS;
 	}
+	return state;
+    }
+    case WM_ENABLE:
+	break;
+
+    case WM_PAINT: {
+	PAINTSTRUCT ps;
+	BeginPaint(hwnd, &ps);
+	EndPaint(hwnd, &ps);
+	TkpDisplayButton((ClientData)butPtr);
 
-	default:
-	    if (Tk_TranslateWinEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam, &result)) {
-		return result;
+	/*
+	 * Special note: must cancel any existing idle handler for
+	 * TkpDisplayButton; it's no longer needed, and TkpDisplayButton
+	 * cleared the REDRAW_PENDING flag.
+	 */
+
+	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(TkpDisplayButton, (ClientData)butPtr);
+	return 0;
+    }
+    case BN_CLICKED: {
+	int code;
+	Tcl_Interp *interp = butPtr->info.interp;
+
+	if (butPtr->info.state != STATE_DISABLED) {
+	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData)interp);
+	    code = TkInvokeButton((TkButton*)butPtr);
+	    if (code != TCL_OK && code != TCL_CONTINUE
+		    && code != TCL_BREAK) {
+		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (button invoke)");
+		Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
 	    }
+	    Tcl_Release((ClientData)interp);
+	}
+	Tcl_ServiceAll();
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    default:
+	if (Tk_TranslateWinEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam, &result)) {
+	    return result;
+	}
     }
     return DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinClipboard.c b/win/tkWinClipboard.c
index b08147a..bb91f4d 100644
--- a/win/tkWinClipboard.c
+++ b/win/tkWinClipboard.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinClipboard.c --
  *
  *	This file contains functions for managing the clipboard.
@@ -6,30 +6,30 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinClipboard.c,v 1.7 2000/04/12 18:51:11 hobbs Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinClipboard.c,v 1.8 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 #include "tkSelect.h"
 
-static void	UpdateClipboard _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd));
+static void		UpdateClipboard(HWND hwnd);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkSelGetSelection --
  *
- *	Retrieve the specified selection from another process.  For
- *	now, only fetching XA_STRING from CLIPBOARD is supported.
- *	Eventually other types should be allowed.
- * 
+ *	Retrieve the specified selection from another process. For now, only
+ *	fetching XA_STRING from CLIPBOARD is supported. Eventually other types
+ *	should be allowed.
+ *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return value.
- *	If an error occurs (such as no selection exists)
- *	then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs
+ *	(such as no selection exists) then an error message is left in the
+ *	interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -38,18 +38,17 @@ static void	UpdateClipboard _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd));
  */
 
 int
-TkSelGetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting
-				 * errors. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window on whose behalf to retrieve
-				 * the selection (determines display
-				 * from which to retrieve). */
-    Atom selection;		/* Selection to retrieve. */
-    Atom target;		/* Desired form in which selection
-				 * is to be returned. */
-    Tk_GetSelProc *proc;	/* Procedure to call to process the
-				 * selection, once it has been retrieved. */
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
+TkSelGetSelection(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window on whose behalf to retrieve the
+				 * selection (determines display from which to
+				 * retrieve). */
+    Atom selection,		/* Selection to retrieve. */
+    Atom target,		/* Desired form in which selection is to be
+				 * returned. */
+    Tk_GetSelProc *proc,	/* Procedure to call to process the selection,
+				 * once it has been retrieved. */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
 {
     char *data, *destPtr;
     Tcl_DString ds;
@@ -64,8 +63,8 @@ TkSelGetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Attempt to get the data in Unicode form if available as this is
-     * less work that CF_TEXT.
+     * Attempt to get the data in Unicode form if available as this is less
+     * work that CF_TEXT.
      */
 
     result = TCL_ERROR;
@@ -93,19 +92,17 @@ TkSelGetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Get the locale identifier, determine the proper code page
-	     * to use, and find the corresponding encoding.
+	     * Get the locale identifier, determine the proper code page to
+	     * use, and find the corresponding encoding.
 	     */
 
 	    Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, "cp######", -1);
 	    data = GlobalLock(handle);
-	    
 
 	    /*
-	     * Even though the documentation claims that GetLocaleInfo 
-	     * expects an LCID, on Windows 9x it really seems to expect
-	     * a LanguageID.
+	     * Even though the documentation claims that GetLocaleInfo expects
+	     * an LCID, on Windows 9x it really seems to expect a LanguageID.
 	     */
 
 	    locale = LANGIDFROMLCID(*((int*)data));
@@ -146,7 +143,7 @@ TkSelGetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
     /*
      * Translate CR/LF to LF.
      */
-	
+
     data = destPtr = Tcl_DStringValue(&ds);
     while (*data) {
 	if (data[0] == '\r' && data[1] == '\n') {
@@ -165,12 +162,11 @@ TkSelGetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
     Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
     CloseClipboard();
     return result;
-     
-error:
+
+  error:
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, selection),
 	    " selection doesn't exist or form \"",
-	    Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, target),
-	    "\" not defined", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, target), "\" not defined", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -179,9 +175,8 @@ error:
  *
  * TkSetSelectionOwner --
  *
- *	This function claims ownership of the specified selection.
- *	If the selection is CLIPBOARD, then we empty the system
- *	clipboard.
+ *	This function claims ownership of the specified selection. If the
+ *	selection is CLIPBOARD, then we empty the system clipboard.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -193,27 +188,26 @@ error:
  */
 
 void
-XSetSelectionOwner(display, selection, owner, time)
-    Display* display;
-    Atom selection;
-    Window owner;
-    Time time;
+XSetSelectionOwner(
+    Display *display,
+    Atom selection,
+    Window owner,
+    Time time)
 {
     HWND hwnd = owner ? TkWinGetHWND(owner) : NULL;
     Tk_Window tkwin;
 
     /*
-     * This is a gross hack because the Tk_InternAtom interface is broken.
-     * It expects a Tk_Window, even though it only needs a Tk_Display.
+     * This is a gross hack because the Tk_InternAtom interface is broken. It
+     * expects a Tk_Window, even though it only needs a Tk_Display.
      */
 
     tkwin = (Tk_Window) TkGetMainInfoList()->winPtr;
 
     if (selection == Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, "CLIPBOARD")) {
-
 	/*
-	 * Only claim and empty the clipboard if we aren't already the
-	 * owner of the clipboard.
+	 * Only claim and empty the clipboard if we aren't already the owner
+	 * of the clipboard.
 	 */
 
 	if (GetClipboardOwner() != hwnd) {
@@ -227,8 +221,8 @@ XSetSelectionOwner(display, selection, owner, time)
  *
  * TkWinClipboardRender --
  *
- *	This function supplies the contents of the clipboard in
- *	response to a WM_RENDERFORMAT message.
+ *	This function supplies the contents of the clipboard in response to a
+ *	WM_RENDERFORMAT message.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -240,9 +234,9 @@ XSetSelectionOwner(display, selection, owner, time)
  */
 
 void
-TkWinClipboardRender(dispPtr, format)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
-    UINT format;
+TkWinClipboardRender(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr,
+    UINT format)
 {
     TkClipboardTarget *targetPtr;
     TkClipboardBuffer *cbPtr;
@@ -253,13 +247,14 @@ TkWinClipboardRender(dispPtr, format)
 
     for (targetPtr = dispPtr->clipTargetPtr; targetPtr != NULL;
 	    targetPtr = targetPtr->nextPtr) {
-	if (targetPtr->type == XA_STRING)
+	if (targetPtr->type == XA_STRING) {
 	    break;
+	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Count the number of newlines so we can add space for them in
-     * the resulting string.
+     * Count the number of newlines so we can add space for them in the
+     * resulting string.
      */
 
     length = 0;
@@ -296,8 +291,8 @@ TkWinClipboardRender(dispPtr, format)
     *buffer = '\0';
 
     /*
-     * Depending on the platform, turn the data into Unicode or the
-     * system encoding before placing it on the clipboard.
+     * Depending on the platform, turn the data into Unicode or the system
+     * encoding before placing it on the clipboard.
      */
 
     if (TkWinGetPlatformId() == VER_PLATFORM_WIN32_NT) {
@@ -330,8 +325,6 @@ TkWinClipboardRender(dispPtr, format)
 	Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
 	SetClipboardData(CF_TEXT, handle);
     }
-
-    return;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -339,8 +332,8 @@ TkWinClipboardRender(dispPtr, format)
  *
  * TkSelUpdateClipboard --
  *
- *	This function is called to force the clipboard to be updated
- *	after new data is added.
+ *	This function is called to force the clipboard to be updated after new
+ *	data is added.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -352,9 +345,9 @@ TkWinClipboardRender(dispPtr, format)
  */
 
 void
-TkSelUpdateClipboard(winPtr, targetPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
-    TkClipboardTarget *targetPtr;
+TkSelUpdateClipboard(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,
+    TkClipboardTarget *targetPtr)
 {
     HWND hwnd = TkWinGetHWND(winPtr->window);
     UpdateClipboard(hwnd);
@@ -365,8 +358,8 @@ TkSelUpdateClipboard(winPtr, targetPtr)
  *
  * UpdateClipboard --
  *
- *	Take ownership of the clipboard, clear it, and indicate to the
- *	system the supported formats.
+ *	Take ownership of the clipboard, clear it, and indicate to the system
+ *	the supported formats.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -378,16 +371,16 @@ TkSelUpdateClipboard(winPtr, targetPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-UpdateClipboard(hwnd)
-    HWND hwnd;
+UpdateClipboard(
+    HWND hwnd)
 {
     TkWinUpdatingClipboard(TRUE);
     OpenClipboard(hwnd);
     EmptyClipboard();
 
     /*
-     * CF_UNICODETEXT is only supported on NT, but it it is prefered
-     * when possible.
+     * CF_UNICODETEXT is only supported on NT, but it it is prefered when
+     * possible.
      */
 
     if (TkWinGetPlatformId() == VER_PLATFORM_WIN32_NT) {
@@ -404,25 +397,22 @@ UpdateClipboard(hwnd)
  *
  * TkSelEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever a selection-related
- *	event occurs. 
+ *	This procedure is invoked whenever a selection-related event occurs.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Lots:  depends on the type of event.
+ *	Lots: depends on the type of event.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkSelEventProc(tkwin, eventPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which event was
-				 * targeted. */
-    register XEvent *eventPtr;	/* X event:  either SelectionClear,
-				 * SelectionRequest, or
-				 * SelectionNotify. */
+TkSelEventProc(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window for which event was targeted. */
+    register XEvent *eventPtr)	/* X event: either SelectionClear,
+				 * SelectionRequest, or SelectionNotify. */
 {
     if (eventPtr->type == SelectionClear) {
 	TkSelClearSelection(tkwin, eventPtr);
@@ -434,9 +424,8 @@ TkSelEventProc(tkwin, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkSelPropProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when property-change events
- *	occur on windows not known to the toolkit.  This is a stub
- *	function under Windows.
+ *	This procedure is invoked when property-change events occur on windows
+ *	not known to the toolkit. This is a stub function under Windows.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -448,7 +437,15 @@ TkSelEventProc(tkwin, eventPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkSelPropProc(eventPtr)
-    register XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X PropertyChange event. */
+TkSelPropProc(
+    register XEvent *eventPtr)	/* X PropertyChange event. */
 {
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinColor.c b/win/tkWinColor.c
index 134176f..ee033f3 100644
--- a/win/tkWinColor.c
+++ b/win/tkWinColor.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinColor.c --
  *
  *	Functions to map color names to system color values.
@@ -6,10 +6,10 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1994 Software Research Associates, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinColor.c,v 1.7 2004/01/13 02:06:01 davygrvy Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinColor.c,v 1.8 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
@@ -22,15 +22,14 @@
 
 typedef struct WinColor {
     TkColor info;		/* Generic color information. */
-    int index;			/* Index for GetSysColor(), -1 if color
-				 * is not a "live" system color. */
+    int index;			/* Index for GetSysColor(), -1 if color is not
+				 * a "live" system color. */
 } WinColor;
 
 /*
- * The sysColors array contains the names and index values for the
- * Windows indirect system color names.  In use, all of the names
- * will have the string "System" prepended, but we omit it in the table
- * to save space.
+ * The sysColors array contains the names and index values for the Windows
+ * indirect system color names. In use, all of the names will have the string
+ * "System" prepended, but we omit it in the table to save space.
  */
 
 typedef struct {
@@ -38,7 +37,6 @@ typedef struct {
     int index;
 } SystemColorEntry;
 
-
 static SystemColorEntry sysColors[] = {
     "3dDarkShadow",		COLOR_3DDKSHADOW,
     "3dLight",			COLOR_3DLIGHT,
@@ -69,7 +67,7 @@ static SystemColorEntry sysColors[] = {
     NULL,			0
 };
 
-typedef struct ThreadSpecificData { 
+typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
     int ncolors;
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
@@ -78,20 +76,20 @@ static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
  * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file.
  */
 
-static int	FindSystemColor _ANSI_ARGS_((const char *name,
-		    XColor *colorPtr, int *indexPtr));
+static int		FindSystemColor(const char *name, XColor *colorPtr,
+			    int *indexPtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * FindSystemColor --
  *
- *	This routine finds the color entry that corresponds to the
- *	specified color.
+ *	This routine finds the color entry that corresponds to the specified
+ *	color.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns non-zero on success.  The RGB values of the XColor
- *	will be initialized to the proper values on success.
+ *	Returns non-zero on success. The RGB values of the XColor will be
+ *	initialized to the proper values on success.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -100,18 +98,18 @@ static int	FindSystemColor _ANSI_ARGS_((const char *name,
  */
 
 static int
-FindSystemColor(name, colorPtr, indexPtr)
-    const char *name;		/* Color name. */
-    XColor *colorPtr;		/* Where to store results. */
-    int *indexPtr;		/* Out parameter to store color index. */
+FindSystemColor(
+    const char *name,		/* Color name. */
+    XColor *colorPtr,		/* Where to store results. */
+    int *indexPtr)		/* Out parameter to store color index. */
 {
     int l, u, r, i;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * Count the number of elements in the color array if we haven't
-     * done so yet.
+     * Count the number of elements in the color array if we haven't done so
+     * yet.
      */
 
     if (tsdPtr->ncolors == 0) {
@@ -154,10 +152,12 @@ FindSystemColor(name, colorPtr, indexPtr)
 
     *indexPtr = sysColors[i].index;
     colorPtr->pixel = GetSysColor(sysColors[i].index);
+
     /*
-     * x257 is (value<<8 + value) to get the properly bit shifted
-     * and padded value.  [Bug: 4919]
+     * x257 is (value<<8 + value) to get the properly bit shifted and padded
+     * value. [Bug: 4919]
      */
+
     colorPtr->red = GetRValue(colorPtr->pixel) * 257;
     colorPtr->green = GetGValue(colorPtr->pixel) * 257;
     colorPtr->blue = GetBValue(colorPtr->pixel) * 257;
@@ -178,27 +178,26 @@ FindSystemColor(name, colorPtr, indexPtr)
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	May invalidate the colormap cache associated with tkwin upon
- *	allocating a new colormap entry.  Allocates a new TkColor
- *	structure.
+ *	allocating a new colormap entry. Allocates a new TkColor structure.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 TkColor *
-TkpGetColor(tkwin, name)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which color will be used. */
-    Tk_Uid name;		/* Name of color to allocated (in form
+TkpGetColor(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which color will be used. */
+    Tk_Uid name)		/* Name of color to allocated (in form
 				 * suitable for passing to XParseColor). */
 {
     WinColor *winColPtr;
     XColor color;
     int index = -1;		/* -1 indicates that this is not an indirect
-				 * sytem color. */
+				 * system color. */
 
     /*
-     * Check to see if it is a system color or an X color string.  If the
-     * color is found, allocate a new WinColor and store the XColor and the
-     * system color index.
+     * Check to see if it is a system color or an X color string. If the color
+     * is found, allocate a new WinColor and store the XColor and the system
+     * color index.
      */
 
     if (((strncasecmp(name, "system", 6) == 0)
@@ -211,7 +210,7 @@ TkpGetColor(tkwin, name)
 
 	XAllocColor(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin),
 		&winColPtr->info.color);
- 	return (TkColor *) winColPtr; 
+ 	return (TkColor *) winColPtr;
     }
     return (TkColor *) NULL;
 }
@@ -221,27 +220,26 @@ TkpGetColor(tkwin, name)
  *
  * TkpGetColorByValue --
  *
- *	Given a desired set of red-green-blue intensities for a color,
- *	locate a pixel value to use to draw that color in a given
- *	window.
+ *	Given a desired set of red-green-blue intensities for a color, locate
+ *	a pixel value to use to draw that color in a given window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to an TkColor structure that
- *	indicates the closest red, blue, and green intensities available
- *	to those specified in colorPtr, and also specifies a pixel
- *	value to use to draw in that color.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to an TkColor structure that indicates
+ *	the closest red, blue, and green intensities available to those
+ *	specified in colorPtr, and also specifies a pixel value to use to draw
+ *	in that color.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	May invalidate the colormap cache for the specified window.
- *	Allocates a new TkColor structure.
+ *	May invalidate the colormap cache for the specified window. Allocates
+ *	a new TkColor structure.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 TkColor *
-TkpGetColorByValue(tkwin, colorPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which color will be used. */
-    XColor *colorPtr;		/* Red, green, and blue fields indicate
+TkpGetColorByValue(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which color will be used. */
+    XColor *colorPtr)		/* Red, green, and blue fields indicate
 				 * desired color. */
 {
     WinColor *tkColPtr = (WinColor *) ckalloc(sizeof(WinColor));
@@ -266,15 +264,15 @@ TkpGetColorByValue(tkwin, colorPtr)
  *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Invalidates the colormap cache for the colormap associated with
- *	the given color.
+ *	Invalidates the colormap cache for the colormap associated with the
+ *	given color.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkpFreeColor(tkColPtr)
-    TkColor *tkColPtr;		/* Color to be released.  Must have been
+TkpFreeColor(
+    TkColor *tkColPtr)		/* Color to be released. Must have been
 				 * allocated by TkpGetColor or
 				 * TkpGetColorByValue. */
 {
@@ -289,13 +287,13 @@ TkpFreeColor(tkColPtr)
  *
  * TkWinIndexOfColor --
  *
- *	Given a color, return the system color index that was used
- *	to create the color.
+ *	Given a color, return the system color index that was used to create
+ *	the color.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the color was allocated using a system indirect color name,
- *	then the corresponding GetSysColor() index is returned.
- *	Otherwise, -1 is returned.
+ *	If the color was allocated using a system indirect color name, then
+ *	the corresponding GetSysColor() index is returned. Otherwise, -1 is
+ *	returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -304,13 +302,13 @@ TkpFreeColor(tkColPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkWinIndexOfColor(colorPtr)
-    XColor *colorPtr;
+TkWinIndexOfColor(
+    XColor *colorPtr)
 {
     register WinColor *winColPtr = (WinColor *) colorPtr;
     if (winColPtr->info.magic == COLOR_MAGIC) {
 	return winColPtr->index;
-    }    
+    }
     return -1;
 }
 
@@ -322,8 +320,8 @@ TkWinIndexOfColor(colorPtr)
  *	Find the closest available color to the specified XColor.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Updates the color argument and returns 1 on success.  Otherwise
- *	returns 0.
+ *	Updates the color argument and returns 1 on success. Otherwise returns
+ *	0.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Allocates a new color in the palette.
@@ -332,10 +330,10 @@ TkWinIndexOfColor(colorPtr)
  */
 
 int
-XAllocColor(display, colormap, color)
-    Display* display;
-    Colormap colormap;
-    XColor* color;
+XAllocColor(
+    Display *display,
+    Colormap colormap,
+    XColor *color)
 {
     TkWinColormap *cmap = (TkWinColormap *) colormap;
     PALETTEENTRY entry, closeEntry;
@@ -356,7 +354,7 @@ XAllocColor(display, colormap, color)
 	/*
 	 * Find the nearest existing palette entry.
 	 */
-	
+
 	newPixel = RGB(entry.peRed, entry.peGreen, entry.peBlue);
 	index = GetNearestPaletteIndex(cmap->palette, newPixel);
 	GetPaletteEntries(cmap->palette, index, 1, &closeEntry);
@@ -364,15 +362,14 @@ XAllocColor(display, colormap, color)
 		closeEntry.peBlue);
 
 	/*
-	 * If this is not a duplicate, allocate a new entry.  Note that
-	 * we may get values for index that are above the current size
-	 * of the palette.  This happens because we don't shrink the size of
-	 * the palette object when we deallocate colors so there may be
-	 * stale values that match in the upper slots.  We should ignore
-	 * those values and just put the new color in as if the colors
-	 * had not matched.
+	 * If this is not a duplicate, allocate a new entry. Note that we may
+	 * get values for index that are above the current size of the
+	 * palette. This happens because we don't shrink the size of the
+	 * palette object when we deallocate colors so there may be stale
+	 * values that match in the upper slots. We should ignore those values
+	 * and just put the new color in as if the colors had not matched.
 	 */
-	
+
 	if ((index >= cmap->size) || (newPixel != closePixel)) {
 	    if (cmap->size == sizePalette) {
 		color->red   = closeEntry.peRed * 257;
@@ -399,11 +396,10 @@ XAllocColor(display, colormap, color)
 	}
 	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, (ClientData)refCount);
     } else {
-	
 	/*
 	 * Determine what color will actually be used on non-colormap systems.
 	 */
-	
+
 	color->pixel = GetNearestColor(dc,
 		RGB(entry.peRed, entry.peGreen, entry.peBlue));
 	color->red    = GetRValue(color->pixel) * 257;
@@ -426,19 +422,19 @@ XAllocColor(display, colormap, color)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Removes entries for the current palette and compacts the
- *	remaining set.
+ *	Removes entries for the current palette and compacts the remaining
+ *	set.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-XFreeColors(display, colormap, pixels, npixels, planes)
-    Display* display;
-    Colormap colormap;
-    unsigned long* pixels;
-    int npixels;
-    unsigned long planes;
+XFreeColors(
+    Display *display,
+    Colormap colormap;,
+    unsigned long *pixels,
+    int npixels,
+    unsigned long planes)
 {
     TkWinColormap *cmap = (TkWinColormap *) colormap;
     COLORREF cref;
@@ -451,16 +447,14 @@ XFreeColors(display, colormap, pixels, npixels, planes)
     /*
      * We don't have to do anything for non-palette devices.
      */
-    
-    if (GetDeviceCaps(dc, RASTERCAPS) & RC_PALETTE) {
 
+    if (GetDeviceCaps(dc, RASTERCAPS) & RC_PALETTE) {
 	/*
 	 * This is really slow for large values of npixels.
 	 */
 
 	for (i = 0; i < npixels; i++) {
-	    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&cmap->refCounts,
-		    (char *) pixels[i]);
+	    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&cmap->refCounts, (char *) pixels[i]);
 	    if (!entryPtr) {
 		Tcl_Panic("Tried to free a color that isn't allocated.");
 	    }
@@ -471,8 +465,8 @@ XFreeColors(display, colormap, pixels, npixels, planes)
 		GetPaletteEntries(cmap->palette, index, 1, &entry);
 		if (cref == RGB(entry.peRed, entry.peGreen, entry.peBlue)) {
 		    count = cmap->size - index;
-		    entries = (PALETTEENTRY *) ckalloc(sizeof(PALETTEENTRY)
-			    * count);
+		    entries = (PALETTEENTRY *)
+			    ckalloc(sizeof(PALETTEENTRY) * count);
 		    GetPaletteEntries(cmap->palette, index+1, count, entries);
 		    SetPaletteEntries(cmap->palette, index, count, entries);
 		    ckfree((char *) entries);
@@ -506,11 +500,11 @@ XFreeColors(display, colormap, pixels, npixels, planes)
  */
 
 Colormap
-XCreateColormap(display, w, visual, alloc)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
-    Visual* visual;
-    int alloc;
+XCreateColormap(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w,
+    Visual *visual,
+    int alloc)
 {
     char logPalBuf[sizeof(LOGPALETTE) + 256 * sizeof(PALETTEENTRY)];
     LOGPALETTE *logPalettePtr;
@@ -544,7 +538,7 @@ XCreateColormap(display, w, visual, alloc)
     for (i = 0; i < logPalettePtr->palNumEntries; i++) {
 	entryPtr = logPalettePtr->palPalEntry + i;
 	hashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&cmap->refCounts, (char*) PALETTERGB(
-	    entryPtr->peRed, entryPtr->peGreen, entryPtr->peBlue), &new);
+		entryPtr->peRed, entryPtr->peGreen, entryPtr->peBlue), &new);
 	Tcl_SetHashValue(hashPtr, (ClientData)1);
     }
 
@@ -562,19 +556,19 @@ XCreateColormap(display, w, visual, alloc)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Deletes the palette associated with the colormap.  Note that
- *	the palette must not be selected into a device context when
- *	this occurs.
+ *	Deletes the palette associated with the colormap. Note that the
+ *	palette must not be selected into a device context when this occurs.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-XFreeColormap(display, colormap)
-    Display* display;
-    Colormap colormap;
+XFreeColormap(
+    Display *display,
+    Colormap colormap)
 {
     TkWinColormap *cmap = (TkWinColormap *) colormap;
+
     if (!DeleteObject(cmap->palette)) {
 	Tcl_Panic("Unable to free colormap, palette is still selected.");
     }
@@ -587,10 +581,9 @@ XFreeColormap(display, colormap)
  *
  * TkWinSelectPalette --
  *
- *	This function sets up the specified device context with a
- *	given palette.  If the palette is stale, it realizes it in
- *	the background unless the palette is the current global
- *	palette.
+ *	This function sets up the specified device context with a given
+ *	palette. If the palette is stale, it realizes it in the background
+ *	unless the palette is the current global palette.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the previous palette selected into the device context.
@@ -602,9 +595,9 @@ XFreeColormap(display, colormap)
  */
 
 HPALETTE
-TkWinSelectPalette(dc, colormap)
-    HDC dc;
-    Colormap colormap;
+TkWinSelectPalette(
+    HDC dc,
+    Colormap colormap)
 {
     TkWinColormap *cmap = (TkWinColormap *) colormap;
     HPALETTE oldPalette;
@@ -614,3 +607,11 @@ TkWinSelectPalette(dc, colormap)
     RealizePalette(dc);
     return oldPalette;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinConfig.c b/win/tkWinConfig.c
index 0e12ba2..967ee86 100644
--- a/win/tkWinConfig.c
+++ b/win/tkWinConfig.c
@@ -1,15 +1,15 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinConfig.c --
  *
- *	This module implements the Windows system defaults for
- *	the configuration package.
+ *	This module implements the Windows system defaults for the
+ *	configuration package.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinConfig.c,v 1.3 2002/08/05 04:30:41 dgp Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinConfig.c,v 1.4 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tk.h"
@@ -22,13 +22,13 @@
  *
  * TkpGetSystemDefault --
  *
- *	Given a dbName and className for a configuration option,
- *	return a string representation of the option.
+ *	Given a dbName and className for a configuration option, return a
+ *	string representation of the option.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a Tk_Uid that is the string identifier that identifies
- *	this option. Returns NULL if there are no system defaults
- *	that match this pair.
+ *	Returns a Tk_Uid that is the string identifier that identifies this
+ *	option. Returns NULL if there are no system defaults that match this
+ *	pair.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None, once the package is initialized.
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Tcl_Obj *
 TkpGetSystemDefault(
     Tk_Window tkwin,		/* A window to use. */
     CONST char *dbName,		/* The option database name. */
-    CONST char *className)		/* The name of the option class. */
+    CONST char *className)	/* The name of the option class. */
 {
     Tcl_Obj *valueObjPtr;
     Tk_Uid classUid;
@@ -58,3 +58,11 @@ TkpGetSystemDefault(
 
     return valueObjPtr;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinCursor.c b/win/tkWinCursor.c
index 73ae25c..653fbbe 100644
--- a/win/tkWinCursor.c
+++ b/win/tkWinCursor.c
@@ -1,21 +1,21 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinCursor.c --
  *
  *	This file contains Win32 specific cursor related routines.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinCursor.c,v 1.12 2003/07/24 02:10:01 patthoyts Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinCursor.c,v 1.13 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 
 /*
- * The following data structure contains the system specific data
- * necessary to control Windows cursors.
+ * The following data structure contains the system specific data necessary to
+ * control Windows cursors.
  */
 
 typedef struct {
@@ -25,16 +25,17 @@ typedef struct {
 } TkWinCursor;
 
 /*
- * The HAND cursor is only present when WINVER >= 0x0500. If this is
- * not available at runtime, it will default to the unix-style cursor.
+ * The HAND cursor is only present when WINVER >= 0x0500. If this is not
+ * available at runtime, it will default to the unix-style cursor.
  */
+
 #ifndef IDC_HAND
 #define IDC_HAND MAKEINTRESOURCE(32649)
 #endif
 
 /*
- * The table below is used to map from the name of a predefined cursor
- * to its resource identifier.
+ * The table below is used to map from the name of a predefined cursor to its
+ * resource identifier.
  */
 
 static struct CursorName {
@@ -76,10 +77,10 @@ static struct CursorName {
  *
  * TkGetCursorByName --
  *
- *	Retrieve a system cursor by name.  
+ *	Retrieve a system cursor by name.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a new cursor, or NULL on errors.  
+ *	Returns a new cursor, or NULL on errors.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Allocates a new cursor.
@@ -88,11 +89,11 @@ static struct CursorName {
  */
 
 TkCursor *
-TkGetCursorByName(interp, tkwin, string)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
-    Tk_Uid string;		/* Description of cursor.  See manual entry
-				 * for details on legal syntax. */
+TkGetCursorByName(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
+    Tk_Uid string)		/* Description of cursor. See manual entry for
+				 * details on legal syntax. */
 {
     struct CursorName *namePtr;
     TkWinCursor *cursorPtr;
@@ -118,8 +119,8 @@ TkGetCursorByName(interp, tkwin, string)
 
     if (argv[0][0] == '@') {
 	/*
-	 * Check for system cursor of type @<filename>, where only
-	 * the name is allowed.  This accepts any of:
+	 * Check for system cursor of type @<filename>, where only the name is
+	 * allowed. This accepts any of:
 	 *	-cursor @/winnt/cursors/globe.ani
 	 *	-cursor @C:/Winnt/cursors/E_arrow.cur
 	 *	-cursor {@C:/Program\ Files/Cursors/bart.ani}
@@ -129,7 +130,7 @@ TkGetCursorByName(interp, tkwin, string)
 
 	if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't get cursor from a file in",
-		    " a safe interpreter", (char *) NULL);
+		    " a safe interpreter", NULL);
 	    ckfree((char *) argv);
 	    ckfree((char *) cursorPtr);
 	    return NULL;
@@ -139,6 +140,7 @@ TkGetCursorByName(interp, tkwin, string)
 	/*
 	 * Check for the cursor in the system cursor set.
 	 */
+
 	for (namePtr = cursorNames; namePtr->name != NULL; namePtr++) {
 	    if (strcmp(namePtr->name, argv[0]) == 0) {
 		cursorPtr->winCursor = LoadCursor(NULL, namePtr->id);
@@ -148,9 +150,10 @@ TkGetCursorByName(interp, tkwin, string)
 
 	if (cursorPtr->winCursor == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * Hmm, it is not in the system cursor set.  Check to see
-	     * if it is one of our application resources.
+	     * Hmm, it is not in the system cursor set. Check to see if it is
+	     * one of our application resources.
 	     */
+
 	    cursorPtr->winCursor = LoadCursor(Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), argv[0]);
 	} else {
 	    cursorPtr->system = 1;
@@ -161,8 +164,7 @@ TkGetCursorByName(interp, tkwin, string)
 	ckfree((char *) cursorPtr);
     badCursorSpec:
 	ckfree((char *) argv);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad cursor spec \"", string, "\"",
-		(char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad cursor spec \"", string, "\"", NULL);
 	return NULL;
     } else {
 	ckfree((char *) argv);
@@ -187,15 +189,14 @@ TkGetCursorByName(interp, tkwin, string)
  */
 
 TkCursor *
-TkCreateCursorFromData(tkwin, source, mask, width, height, xHot, yHot,
-	fgColor, bgColor)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
-    CONST char *source;		/* Bitmap data for cursor shape. */
-    CONST char *mask;		/* Bitmap data for cursor mask. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of cursor. */
-    int xHot, yHot;		/* Location of hot-spot in cursor. */
-    XColor fgColor;		/* Foreground color for cursor. */
-    XColor bgColor;		/* Background color for cursor. */
+TkCreateCursorFromData(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
+    CONST char *source,		/* Bitmap data for cursor shape. */
+    CONST char *mask,		/* Bitmap data for cursor mask. */
+    int width, int height,	/* Dimensions of cursor. */
+    int xHot, int yHot,		/* Location of hot-spot in cursor. */
+    XColor fgColor,		/* Foreground color for cursor. */
+    XColor bgColor)		/* Background color for cursor. */
 {
     return NULL;
 }
@@ -218,8 +219,8 @@ TkCreateCursorFromData(tkwin, source, mask, width, height, xHot, yHot,
  */
 
 void
-TkpFreeCursor(cursorPtr)
-    TkCursor *cursorPtr;
+TkpFreeCursor(
+    TkCursor *cursorPtr)
 {
     TkWinCursor *winCursorPtr = (TkWinCursor *) cursorPtr;
 }
@@ -229,8 +230,8 @@ TkpFreeCursor(cursorPtr)
  *
  * TkpSetCursor --
  *
- *	Set the global cursor.  If the cursor is None, then use the
- *	default Tk cursor.
+ *	Set the global cursor. If the cursor is None, then use the default Tk
+ *	cursor.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -242,8 +243,8 @@ TkpFreeCursor(cursorPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkpSetCursor(cursor)
-    TkpCursor cursor;
+TkpSetCursor(
+    TkpCursor cursor)
 {
     HCURSOR hcursor;
     TkWinCursor *winCursor = (TkWinCursor *) cursor;
@@ -258,3 +259,11 @@ TkpSetCursor(cursor)
 	SetCursor(hcursor);
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinDialog.c b/win/tkWinDialog.c
index 2664351..9183f20 100644
--- a/win/tkWinDialog.c
+++ b/win/tkWinDialog.c
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
  * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
  * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinDialog.c,v 1.42 2005/11/11 05:13:44 chengyemao Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinDialog.c,v 1.43 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  *
  */
 
@@ -121,6 +121,26 @@ static const struct {int type; int btnIds[3];} allowedTypes[] = {
 #define NUM_TYPES (sizeof(allowedTypes) / sizeof(allowedTypes[0]))
 
 /*
+ * Abstract trivial differences between Win32 and Win64.
+ */
+
+#ifdef _WIN64
+#define TkWinGetHInstance(from) \
+	((HINSTANCE) GetWindowLongPtr((from), GWLP_HINSTANCE))
+#define TkWinGetUserData(from) \
+	GetWindowLongPtr((from), GWLP_USERDATA)
+#define TkWinSetUserData(to,what) \
+	SetWindowLongPtr((to), GWLP_USERDATA, (LPARAM)(what))
+#else
+#define TkWinGetHInstance(from) \
+	((HINSTANCE) GetWindowLong((from), GWL_HINSTANCE))
+#define TkWinGetUserData(from) \
+	GetWindowLong((from), GWL_USERDATA)
+#define TkWinSetUserData(to,what) \
+	SetWindowLong((to), GWL_USERDATA, (LPARAM)(what))
+#endif
+
+/*
  * The value of TK_MULTI_MAX_PATH dictactes how many files can be retrieved
  * with tk_get*File -multiple 1. It must be allocated on the stack, so make it
  * large enough but not too large. - hobbs
@@ -697,11 +717,7 @@ GetFileNameW(
     ZeroMemory(&ofn, sizeof(OPENFILENAMEW));
     ofn.lStructSize = sizeof(OPENFILENAMEW);
     ofn.hwndOwner = hWnd;
-#ifdef _WIN64
-    ofn.hInstance = (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLongPtr(ofn.hwndOwner,GWLP_HINSTANCE);
-#else
-    ofn.hInstance = (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLong(ofn.hwndOwner, GWL_HINSTANCE);
-#endif
+    ofn.hInstance = TkWinGetHInstance(ofn.hwndOwner);
     ofn.lpstrFile = (WCHAR *) file;
     ofn.nMaxFile = TK_MULTI_MAX_PATH;
     ofn.Flags = OFN_HIDEREADONLY | OFN_PATHMUSTEXIST | OFN_NOCHANGEDIR
@@ -935,11 +951,7 @@ OFNHookProcW(
     OPENFILENAMEW *ofnPtr;
 
     if (uMsg == WM_INITDIALOG) {
-#ifdef _WIN64
-	SetWindowLongPtr(hdlg, GWLP_USERDATA, lParam);
-#else
-	SetWindowLong(hdlg, GWL_USERDATA, lParam);
-#endif
+	TkWinSetUserData(hdlg, lParam);
     } else if (uMsg == WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED) {
 	/*
 	 * This message is delivered at the right time to enable Tk to set the
@@ -947,20 +959,12 @@ OFNHookProcW(
 	 * information every time it gets a WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED message.
 	 */
 
-#ifdef _WIN64
-	ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAMEW *) GetWindowLongPtr(hdlg, GWLP_USERDATA);
-#else
-	ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAMEW *) GetWindowLong(hdlg, GWL_USERDATA);
-#endif
+	ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAMEW *) TkWinGetUserData(hdlg);
 	if (ofnPtr != NULL) {
 	    hdlg = GetParent(hdlg);
 	    tsdPtr->debugInterp = (Tcl_Interp *) ofnPtr->lCustData;
 	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SetTkDialog, (ClientData) hdlg);
-#ifdef _WIN64
-	    SetWindowLongPtr(hdlg, GWLP_USERDATA, (LPARAM) NULL);
-#else
-	    SetWindowLong(hdlg, GWL_USERDATA, (LPARAM) NULL);
-#endif
+	    TkWinSetUserData(hdlg, NULL);
 	}
     }
     return 0;
@@ -1132,11 +1136,7 @@ GetFileNameA(
 
     ofn.lStructSize = sizeof(ofn);
     ofn.hwndOwner = hWnd;
-#ifdef _WIN64
-    ofn.hInstance = (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLongPtr(ofn.hwndOwner,GWLP_HINSTANCE);
-#else
-    ofn.hInstance = (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLong(ofn.hwndOwner, GWL_HINSTANCE);
-#endif
+    ofn.hInstance = TkWinGetHInstance(ofn.hwndOwner);
     ofn.lpstrFilter = NULL;
     ofn.lpstrCustomFilter = NULL;
     ofn.nMaxCustFilter = 0;
@@ -1379,11 +1379,7 @@ OFNHookProc(
     OPENFILENAME *ofnPtr;
 
     if (uMsg == WM_INITDIALOG) {
-#ifdef _WIN64
-	SetWindowLongPtr(hdlg, GWLP_USERDATA, lParam);
-#else
-	SetWindowLong(hdlg, GWL_USERDATA, lParam);
-#endif
+	TkWinSetUserData(hdlg, lParam);
     } else if (uMsg == WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED) {
 	/*
 	 * This message is delivered at the right time to both old-style and
@@ -1392,22 +1388,14 @@ OFNHookProc(
 	 * every time it gets a WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED message.
 	 */
 
-#ifdef _WIN64
-	ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAME *) GetWindowLongPtr(hdlg, GWLP_USERDATA);
-#else
-	ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAME *) GetWindowLong(hdlg, GWL_USERDATA);
-#endif
+	ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAME *) TkWinGetUserData(hdlg);
 	if (ofnPtr != NULL) {
 	    if (ofnPtr->Flags & OFN_EXPLORER) {
 		hdlg = GetParent(hdlg);
 	    }
 	    tsdPtr->debugInterp = (Tcl_Interp *) ofnPtr->lCustData;
 	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SetTkDialog, (ClientData) hdlg);
-#ifdef _WIN64
-	    SetWindowLongPtr(hdlg, GWLP_USERDATA, (LPARAM) NULL);
-#else
-	    SetWindowLong(hdlg, GWL_USERDATA, (LPARAM) NULL);
-#endif
+	    TkWinSetUserData(hdlg, NULL);
 	}
     }
     return 0;
@@ -1859,11 +1847,7 @@ ChooseDirectoryValidateProc(
 
     chooseDirSharedData = (CHOOSEDIRDATA *)lpData;
 
-#ifdef _WIN64
-    SetWindowLongPtr(hwnd, GWLP_USERDATA, lpData);
-#else
-    SetWindowLong(hwnd, GWL_USERDATA, lpData);
-#endif
+    TkWinSetUserData(hwnd, lpData);
 
     if (tsdPtr->debugFlag) {
 	tsdPtr->debugInterp = (Tcl_Interp *) chooseDirSharedData->interp;
@@ -2264,6 +2248,7 @@ ConvertExternalFilename(
 	 * Change the pathname to the Tcl "normalized" pathname, where back
 	 * slashes are used instead of forward slashes
 	 */
+
 	if (*p == '\\') {
 	    *p = '/';
 	}
diff --git a/win/tkWinDraw.c b/win/tkWinDraw.c
index e1ef315..cf97f8f 100644
--- a/win/tkWinDraw.c
+++ b/win/tkWinDraw.c
@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinDraw.c --
  *
- *	This file contains the Xlib emulation functions pertaining to
- *	actually drawing objects on a window.
+ *	This file contains the Xlib emulation functions pertaining to actually
+ *	drawing objects on a window.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1994 Software Research Associates, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinDraw.c,v 1.15 2005/08/09 07:39:23 das Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinDraw.c,v 1.16 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
@@ -46,9 +46,9 @@ int tkpWinRopModes[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Translation table between X gc functions and Win32 BitBlt op modes.  Some
- * of the operations defined in X don't have names, so we have to construct
- * new opcodes for those functions.  This is arcane and probably not all that
+ * Translation table between X gc functions and Win32 BitBlt op modes. Some of
+ * the operations defined in X don't have names, so we have to construct new
+ * opcodes for those functions. This is arcane and probably not all that
  * useful, but at least it's accurate.
  */
 
@@ -77,9 +77,9 @@ int tkpWinBltModes[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * The following raster op uses the source bitmap as a mask for the
- * pattern.  This is used to draw in a foreground color but leave the
- * background color transparent.
+ * The following raster op uses the source bitmap as a mask for the pattern.
+ * This is used to draw in a foreground color but leave the background color
+ * transparent.
  */
 
 #define MASKPAT		0x00E20746 /* dest = (src & pat) | (!src & dst) */
@@ -103,29 +103,27 @@ int tkpWinBltModes[] = {
  * The followng typedef is used to pass Windows GDI drawing functions.
  */
 
-typedef BOOL (CALLBACK *WinDrawFunc) _ANSI_ARGS_((HDC dc,
-			    CONST POINT* points, int npoints));
+typedef BOOL (CALLBACK *WinDrawFunc)(HDC dc, CONST POINT* points, int npoints);
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    POINT *winPoints;    /* Array of points that is reused. */
-    int nWinPoints;	/* Current size of point array. */
+    POINT *winPoints;		/* Array of points that is reused. */
+    int nWinPoints;		/* Current size of point array. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static POINT *		ConvertPoints _ANSI_ARGS_((XPoint *points, int npoints,
-			    int mode, RECT *bbox));
-static void		DrawOrFillArc _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
-			    Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y,
-			    unsigned int width, unsigned int height,
-			    int start, int extent, int fill));
-static void		RenderObject _ANSI_ARGS_((HDC dc, GC gc,
-			    XPoint* points, int npoints, int mode, HPEN pen,
-			    WinDrawFunc func));
-static HPEN		SetUpGraphicsPort _ANSI_ARGS_((GC gc));
+static POINT *		ConvertPoints(XPoint *points, int npoints, int mode,
+			    RECT *bbox);
+static void		DrawOrFillArc(Display *display, Drawable d, GC gc,
+			    int x, int y, unsigned int width,
+			    unsigned int height, int start, int extent,
+			    int fill);
+static void		RenderObject(HDC dc, GC gc, XPoint* points,
+			    int npoints, int mode, HPEN pen, WinDrawFunc func);
+static HPEN		SetUpGraphicsPort(GC gc);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -135,21 +133,21 @@ static HPEN		SetUpGraphicsPort _ANSI_ARGS_((GC gc));
  *	Retrieve the DC from a drawable.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns the window DC for windows.  Returns a new memory DC
- *	for pixmaps.
+ *	Returns the window DC for windows. Returns a new memory DC for
+ *	pixmaps.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Sets up the palette for the device context, and saves the old
- *	device context state in the passed in TkWinDCState structure.
+ *	Sets up the palette for the device context, and saves the old device
+ *	context state in the passed in TkWinDCState structure.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 HDC
-TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, d, state)
-    Display *display;
-    Drawable d;
-    TkWinDCState* state;
+TkWinGetDrawableDC(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable d,
+    TkWinDCState *state)
 {
     HDC dc;
     TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)d;
@@ -157,7 +155,7 @@ TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, d, state)
 
     if (twdPtr->type == TWD_WINDOW) {
 	TkWindow *winPtr = twdPtr->window.winPtr;
-    
+
  	dc = GetDC(twdPtr->window.handle);
 	if (winPtr == NULL) {
 	    cmap = DefaultColormap(display, DefaultScreen(display));
@@ -194,12 +192,13 @@ TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, d, state)
  */
 
 void
-TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(d, dc, state)
-    Drawable d;
-    HDC dc;
-    TkWinDCState *state;
+TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(
+    Drawable d,
+    HDC dc,
+    TkWinDCState *state)
 {
     TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)d;
+
     SetBkMode(dc, state->bkmode);
     SelectPalette(dc, state->palette, TRUE);
     RealizePalette(dc);
@@ -221,26 +220,26 @@ TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(d, dc, state)
  *	Returns the converted array of POINTs.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Allocates a block of memory in thread local storage that 
- *      should not be freed.
+ *	Allocates a block of memory in thread local storage that should not be
+ *	freed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static POINT *
-ConvertPoints(points, npoints, mode, bbox)
-    XPoint *points;
-    int npoints;
-    int mode;			/* CoordModeOrigin or CoordModePrevious. */
-    RECT *bbox;			/* Bounding box of points. */
+ConvertPoints(
+    XPoint *points,
+    int npoints,
+    int mode,			/* CoordModeOrigin or CoordModePrevious. */
+    RECT *bbox)			/* Bounding box of points. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     int i;
 
     /*
-     * To avoid paying the cost of a malloc on every drawing routine,
-     * we reuse the last array if it is large enough.
+     * To avoid paying the cost of a malloc on every drawing routine, we reuse
+     * the last array if it is large enough.
      */
 
     if (npoints > tsdPtr->nWinPoints) {
@@ -257,7 +256,7 @@ ConvertPoints(points, npoints, mode, bbox)
 
     bbox->left = bbox->right = points[0].x;
     bbox->top = bbox->bottom = points[0].y;
-    
+
     if (mode == CoordModeOrigin) {
 	for (i = 0; i < npoints; i++) {
 	    tsdPtr->winPoints[i].x = points[i].x;
@@ -294,21 +293,20 @@ ConvertPoints(points, npoints, mode, bbox)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Data is moved from a window or bitmap to a second window or
- *	bitmap.
+ *	Data is moved from a window or bitmap to a second window or bitmap.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-XCopyArea(display, src, dest, gc, src_x, src_y, width, height, dest_x, dest_y)
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable src;
-    Drawable dest;
-    GC gc;
-    int src_x, src_y;
-    unsigned int width, height;
-    int dest_x, dest_y;
+XCopyArea(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable src,
+    Drawable dest,
+    GC gc,
+    int src_x, int src_y,
+    unsigned int width, unsigned int height,
+    int dest_x, int dest_y)
 {
     HDC srcDC, destDC;
     TkWinDCState srcState, destState;
@@ -343,10 +341,9 @@ XCopyArea(display, src, dest, gc, src_x, src_y, width, height, dest_x, dest_y)
  *
  * XCopyPlane --
  *
- *	Copies a bitmap from a source drawable to a destination
- *	drawable.  The plane argument specifies which bit plane of
- *	the source contains the bitmap.  Note that this implementation
- *	ignores the gc->function.
+ *	Copies a bitmap from a source drawable to a destination drawable. The
+ *	plane argument specifies which bit plane of the source contains the
+ *	bitmap. Note that this implementation ignores the gc->function.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -358,16 +355,15 @@ XCopyArea(display, src, dest, gc, src_x, src_y, width, height, dest_x, dest_y)
  */
 
 void
-XCopyPlane(display, src, dest, gc, src_x, src_y, width, height, dest_x,
-	dest_y, plane)
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable src;
-    Drawable dest;
-    GC gc;
-    int src_x, src_y;
-    unsigned int width, height;
-    int dest_x, dest_y;
-    unsigned long plane;
+XCopyPlane(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable src,
+    Drawable dest,
+    GC gc,
+    int src_x, int src_y,
+    unsigned int width, unsigned int height,
+    int dest_x, int dest_y,
+    unsigned long plane)
 {
     HDC srcDC, destDC;
     TkWinDCState srcState, destState;
@@ -389,12 +385,10 @@ XCopyPlane(display, src, dest, gc, src_x, src_y, width, height, dest_x,
     }
 
     if (clipPtr == NULL || clipPtr->type == TKP_CLIP_REGION) {
-
 	/*
-	 * Case 1: opaque bitmaps.  Windows handles the conversion
-	 * from one bit to multiple bits by setting 0 to the
-	 * foreground color, and 1 to the background color (seems
-	 * backwards, but there you are).
+	 * Case 1: opaque bitmaps. Windows handles the conversion from one bit
+	 * to multiple bits by setting 0 to the foreground color, and 1 to the
+	 * background color (seems backwards, but there you are).
 	 */
 
 	if (clipPtr && clipPtr->type == TKP_CLIP_REGION) {
@@ -414,8 +408,8 @@ XCopyPlane(display, src, dest, gc, src_x, src_y, width, height, dest_x,
 
 	    /*
 	     * Case 2: transparent bitmaps are handled by setting the
-	     * destination to the foreground color whenever the source
-	     * pixel is set.
+	     * destination to the foreground color whenever the source pixel
+	     * is set.
 	     */
 
 	    fgBrush = CreateSolidBrush(gc->foreground);
@@ -427,9 +421,9 @@ XCopyPlane(display, src, dest, gc, src_x, src_y, width, height, dest_x,
 	} else {
 
 	    /*
-	     * Case 3: two arbitrary bitmaps.  Copy the source rectangle
-	     * into a color pixmap.  Use the result as a brush when
-	     * copying the clip mask into the destination.	 
+	     * Case 3: two arbitrary bitmaps. Copy the source rectangle into a
+	     * color pixmap. Use the result as a brush when copying the clip
+	     * mask into the destination.
 	     */
 
 	    HDC memDC, maskDC;
@@ -445,9 +439,9 @@ XCopyPlane(display, src, dest, gc, src_x, src_y, width, height, dest_x,
 	    SelectObject(memDC, bitmap);
 
 	    /*
-	     * Set foreground bits.  We create a new bitmap containing
-	     * (source AND mask), then use it to set the foreground color
-	     * into the destination.
+	     * Set foreground bits. We create a new bitmap containing (source
+	     * AND mask), then use it to set the foreground color into the
+	     * destination.
 	     */
 
 	    BitBlt(memDC, 0, 0, width, height, srcDC, src_x, src_y, SRCCOPY);
@@ -459,8 +453,8 @@ XCopyPlane(display, src, dest, gc, src_x, src_y, width, height, dest_x,
 		    MASKPAT);
 
 	    /*
-	     * Set background bits.  Same as foreground, except we use
-	     * ((NOT source) AND mask) and the background brush.
+	     * Set background bits. Same as foreground, except we use ((NOT
+	     * source) AND mask) and the background brush.
 	     */
 
 	    BitBlt(memDC, 0, 0, width, height, srcDC, src_x, src_y,
@@ -491,8 +485,8 @@ XCopyPlane(display, src, dest, gc, src_x, src_y, width, height, dest_x,
  *
  * TkPutImage --
  *
- *	Copies a subimage from an in-memory image to a rectangle of
- *	of the specified drawable.
+ *	Copies a subimage from an in-memory image to a rectangle of of the
+ *	specified drawable.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -504,19 +498,18 @@ XCopyPlane(display, src, dest, gc, src_x, src_y, width, height, dest_x,
  */
 
 void
-TkPutImage(colors, ncolors, display, d, gc, image, src_x, src_y, dest_x,
-	dest_y, width, height)
-    unsigned long *colors;		/* Array of pixel values used by this
-					 * image.  May be NULL. */
-    int ncolors;			/* Number of colors used, or 0. */
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable d;				/* Destination drawable. */
-    GC gc;
-    XImage* image;			/* Source image. */
-    int src_x, src_y;			/* Offset of subimage. */      
-    int dest_x, dest_y;			/* Position of subimage origin in
-					 * drawable.  */
-    unsigned int width, height;		/* Dimensions of subimage. */
+TkPutImage(
+    unsigned long *colors,	/* Array of pixel values used by this image.
+				 * May be NULL. */
+    int ncolors,		/* Number of colors used, or 0. */
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable d,			/* Destination drawable. */
+    GC gc,
+    XImage *image,		/* Source image. */
+    int src_x, int src_y,	/* Offset of subimage. */
+    int dest_x, int dest_y,	/* Position of subimage origin in drawable. */
+    unsigned int width, unsigned int height)
+				/* Dimensions of subimage. */
 {
     HDC dc, dcMem;
     TkWinDCState state;
@@ -532,8 +525,8 @@ TkPutImage(colors, ncolors, display, d, gc, image, src_x, src_y, dest_x,
 
     if (image->bits_per_pixel == 1) {
 	/*
-	 * If the image isn't in the right format, we have to copy
-	 * it into a new buffer in MSBFirst and word-aligned format.
+	 * If the image isn't in the right format, we have to copy it into a
+	 * new buffer in MSBFirst and word-aligned format.
 	 */
 
 	if ((image->bitmap_bit_order != MSBFirst)
@@ -547,22 +540,22 @@ TkPutImage(colors, ncolors, display, d, gc, image, src_x, src_y, dest_x,
 	}
 	SetTextColor(dc, gc->foreground);
 	SetBkColor(dc, gc->background);
-    } else {    
+    } else {
 	int i, usePalette;
 
 	/*
 	 * Do not use a palette for TrueColor images.
 	 */
-	
+
 	usePalette = (image->bits_per_pixel < 16);
-	
+
 	if (usePalette) {
-	    infoPtr = (BITMAPINFO*) ckalloc(sizeof(BITMAPINFOHEADER)
+	    infoPtr = (BITMAPINFO *) ckalloc(sizeof(BITMAPINFOHEADER)
 		    + sizeof(RGBQUAD)*ncolors);
 	} else {
-	    infoPtr = (BITMAPINFO*) ckalloc(sizeof(BITMAPINFOHEADER));
+	    infoPtr = (BITMAPINFO *) ckalloc(sizeof(BITMAPINFOHEADER));
 	}
-	
+
 	infoPtr->bmiHeader.biSize = sizeof(BITMAPINFOHEADER);
 	infoPtr->bmiHeader.biWidth = image->width;
 	infoPtr->bmiHeader.biHeight = -image->height; /* Top-down order */
@@ -589,7 +582,7 @@ TkPutImage(colors, ncolors, display, d, gc, image, src_x, src_y, dest_x,
 		image->data, infoPtr, DIB_RGB_COLORS);
 	ckfree((char *) infoPtr);
     }
-    if(!bitmap) {
+    if (!bitmap) {
 	Tcl_Panic("Fail to allocate bitmap\n");
 	DeleteDC(dcMem);
     	TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(d, dc, &state);
@@ -619,12 +612,12 @@ TkPutImage(colors, ncolors, display, d, gc, image, src_x, src_y, dest_x,
  */
 
 void
-XFillRectangles(display, d, gc, rectangles, nrectangles)
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable d;
-    GC gc;
-    XRectangle* rectangles;
-    int nrectangles;
+XFillRectangles(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable d,
+    GC gc,
+    XRectangle *rectangles,
+    int nrectangles)
 {
     HDC dc;
     int i;
@@ -656,7 +649,7 @@ XFillRectangles(display, d, gc, rectangles, nrectangles)
 	/*
 	 * Select stipple pattern into destination dc.
 	 */
-	
+
 	stipple = CreatePatternBrush(twdPtr->bitmap.handle);
 	SetBrushOrgEx(dc, gc->ts_x_origin, gc->ts_y_origin, NULL);
 	oldBrush = SelectObject(dc, stipple);
@@ -664,7 +657,7 @@ XFillRectangles(display, d, gc, rectangles, nrectangles)
 
 	/*
 	 * For each rectangle, create a drawing surface which is the size of
-	 * the rectangle and fill it with the background color.  Then merge the
+	 * the rectangle and fill it with the background color. Then merge the
 	 * result with the stipple pattern.
 	 */
 
@@ -688,7 +681,7 @@ XFillRectangles(display, d, gc, rectangles, nrectangles)
 	    SelectObject(dcMem, oldBitmap);
 	    DeleteObject(bitmap);
 	}
-	
+
 	DeleteDC(dcMem);
 	SelectObject(dc, oldBrush);
 	DeleteObject(stipple);
@@ -706,7 +699,7 @@ XFillRectangles(display, d, gc, rectangles, nrectangles)
 	    HPEN newPen = CreatePen(PS_NULL, 0, gc->foreground);
 	    HPEN oldPen = SelectObject(dc, newPen);
 	    oldBrush = SelectObject(dc, brush);
-	    
+
 	    for (i = 0; i < nrectangles; i++) {
 		Rectangle(dc, rectangles[i].x, rectangles[i].y,
 		    rectangles[i].x + rectangles[i].width + 1,
@@ -727,8 +720,8 @@ XFillRectangles(display, d, gc, rectangles, nrectangles)
  *
  * RenderObject --
  *
- *	This function draws a shape using a list of points, a
- *	stipple pattern, and the specified drawing function.
+ *	This function draws a shape using a list of points, a stipple pattern,
+ *	and the specified drawing function.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -740,20 +733,20 @@ XFillRectangles(display, d, gc, rectangles, nrectangles)
  */
 
 static void
-RenderObject(dc, gc, points, npoints, mode, pen, func)
-    HDC dc;
-    GC gc;
-    XPoint* points;
-    int npoints;
-    int mode;
-    HPEN pen;
-    WinDrawFunc func;
+RenderObject(
+    HDC dc,
+    GC gc,
+    XPoint *points,
+    int npoints,
+    int mode,
+    HPEN pen,
+    WinDrawFunc func)
 {
     RECT rect;
     HPEN oldPen;
     HBRUSH oldBrush;
     POINT *winPoints = ConvertPoints(points, npoints, mode, &rect);
-    
+
     if ((gc->fill_style == FillStippled
 	    || gc->fill_style == FillOpaqueStippled)
 	    && gc->stipple != None) {
@@ -764,7 +757,7 @@ RenderObject(dc, gc, points, npoints, mode, pen, func)
 	HBITMAP oldBitmap;
 	int i;
 	HBRUSH oldMemBrush;
-	
+
 	if (twdPtr->type != TWD_BITMAP) {
 	    Tcl_Panic("unexpected drawable type in stipple");
 	}
@@ -784,7 +777,7 @@ RenderObject(dc, gc, points, npoints, mode, pen, func)
 	/*
 	 * Select stipple pattern into destination dc.
 	 */
-	
+
 	SetBrushOrgEx(dc, gc->ts_x_origin, gc->ts_y_origin, NULL);
 	oldBrush = SelectObject(dc, CreatePatternBrush(twdPtr->bitmap.handle));
 
@@ -792,7 +785,7 @@ RenderObject(dc, gc, points, npoints, mode, pen, func)
 	 * Create temporary drawing surface containing a copy of the
 	 * destination equal in size to the bounding box of the object.
 	 */
-	
+
 	dcMem = CreateCompatibleDC(dc);
 	oldBitmap = SelectObject(dcMem, CreateCompatibleBitmap(dc, width,
 		height));
@@ -801,7 +794,7 @@ RenderObject(dc, gc, points, npoints, mode, pen, func)
 
 	/*
 	 * Translate the object for rendering in the temporary drawing
-	 * surface. 
+	 * surface.
 	 */
 
 	for (i = 0; i < npoints; i++) {
@@ -822,8 +815,8 @@ RenderObject(dc, gc, points, npoints, mode, pen, func)
 
 	/*
 	 * If we are rendering an opaque stipple, then draw the polygon in the
-	 * background color and copy it to the destination wherever the pattern
-	 * is clear.
+	 * background color and copy it to the destination wherever the
+	 * pattern is clear.
 	 */
 
 	if (gc->fill_style == FillOpaqueStippled) {
@@ -870,18 +863,18 @@ RenderObject(dc, gc, points, npoints, mode, pen, func)
  */
 
 void
-XDrawLines(display, d, gc, points, npoints, mode)
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable d;
-    GC gc;
-    XPoint* points;
-    int npoints;
-    int mode;
+XDrawLines(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable d,
+    GC gc,
+    XPoint *points,
+    int npoints,
+    int mode)
 {
     HPEN pen;
     TkWinDCState state;
     HDC dc;
-    
+
     if (d == None) {
 	return;
     }
@@ -892,7 +885,7 @@ XDrawLines(display, d, gc, points, npoints, mode)
     SetBkMode(dc, TRANSPARENT);
     RenderObject(dc, gc, points, npoints, mode, pen, Polyline);
     DeleteObject(pen);
-    
+
     TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(d, dc, &state);
 }
 
@@ -913,14 +906,14 @@ XDrawLines(display, d, gc, points, npoints, mode)
  */
 
 void
-XFillPolygon(display, d, gc, points, npoints, shape, mode)
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable d;
-    GC gc;
-    XPoint* points;
-    int npoints;
-    int shape;
-    int mode;
+XFillPolygon(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable d,
+    GC gc,
+    XPoint *points,
+    int npoints,
+    int shape,
+    int mode)
 {
     HPEN pen;
     TkWinDCState state;
@@ -955,14 +948,12 @@ XFillPolygon(display, d, gc, points, npoints, shape, mode)
  */
 
 void
-XDrawRectangle(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height)
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable d;
-    GC gc;
-    int x;
-    int y;
-    unsigned int width;
-    unsigned int height;
+XDrawRectangle(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable d,
+    GC gc,
+    int x, int y,
+    unsigned int width, unsigned int height)
 {
     HPEN pen, oldPen;
     TkWinDCState state;
@@ -1005,16 +996,13 @@ XDrawRectangle(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height)
  */
 
 void
-XDrawArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent)
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable d;
-    GC gc;
-    int x;
-    int y;
-    unsigned int width;
-    unsigned int height;
-    int start;
-    int extent;
+XDrawArc(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable d,
+    GC gc,
+    int x, int y,
+    unsigned int width, unsigned int height,
+    int start, int extent)
 {
     display->request++;
 
@@ -1038,16 +1026,13 @@ XDrawArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent)
  */
 
 void
-XFillArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent)
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable d;
-    GC gc;
-    int x;
-    int y;
-    unsigned int width;
-    unsigned int height;
-    int start;
-    int extent;
+XFillArc(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable d,
+    GC gc,
+    int x, int y,
+    unsigned int width, unsigned int height,
+    int start, int extent)
 {
     display->request++;
 
@@ -1059,8 +1044,8 @@ XFillArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent)
  *
  * DrawOrFillArc --
  *
- *	This procedure handles the rendering of drawn or filled
- *	arcs and chords.
+ *	This function handles the rendering of drawn or filled arcs and
+ *	chords.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1072,15 +1057,15 @@ XFillArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent)
  */
 
 static void
-DrawOrFillArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent, fill)
-    Display *display;
-    Drawable d;
-    GC gc;
-    int x, y;			/* left top */
-    unsigned int width, height;
-    int start;			/* start: three-o'clock (deg*64) */
-    int extent;			/* extent: relative (deg*64) */
-    int fill;			/* ==0 draw, !=0 fill */
+DrawOrFillArc(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable d,
+    GC gc,
+    int x, int y,		/* left top */
+    unsigned int width, unsigned int height,
+    int start,			/* start: three-o'clock (deg*64) */
+    int extent,			/* extent: relative (deg*64) */
+    int fill)			/* ==0 draw, !=0 fill */
 {
     HDC dc;
     HBRUSH brush, oldBrush;
@@ -1121,7 +1106,7 @@ DrawOrFillArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent, fill)
 
     /*
      * Now compute points on the radial lines that define the starting and
-     * ending angles.  Be sure to take into account that the y-coordinate
+     * ending angles. Be sure to take into account that the y-coordinate
      * system is inverted.
      */
 
@@ -1133,18 +1118,18 @@ DrawOrFillArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent, fill)
     yend = (int)((yr + sin(-radian_end)*height/2.0) + 0.5);
 
     /*
-     * Now draw a filled or open figure.  Note that we have to
-     * increase the size of the bounding box by one to account for the
-     * difference in pixel definitions between X and Windows.
+     * Now draw a filled or open figure. Note that we have to increase the
+     * size of the bounding box by one to account for the difference in pixel
+     * definitions between X and Windows.
      */
 
     pen = SetUpGraphicsPort(gc);
     oldPen = SelectObject(dc, pen);
     if (!fill) {
 	/*
-	 * Note that this call will leave a gap of one pixel at the
-	 * end of the arc for thin arcs.  We can't use ArcTo because
-	 * it's only supported under Windows NT.
+	 * Note that this call will leave a gap of one pixel at the end of the
+	 * arc for thin arcs. We can't use ArcTo because it's only supported
+	 * under Windows NT.
 	 */
 
 	SetBkMode(dc, TRANSPARENT);
@@ -1180,8 +1165,8 @@ DrawOrFillArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent, fill)
  */
 
 static HPEN
-SetUpGraphicsPort(gc)
-    GC gc;
+SetUpGraphicsPort(
+    GC gc)
 {
     DWORD style;
 
@@ -1190,10 +1175,9 @@ SetUpGraphicsPort(gc)
 				/* pointer to the dash-list */
 
 	/*
-	 * Below is a simple translation of serveral dash patterns
-	 * to valid windows pen types. Far from complete,
-	 * but I don't know how to do it better.
-	 * Any ideas: <mailto:j.nijtmans@chello.nl>
+	 * Below is a simple translation of serveral dash patterns to valid
+	 * windows pen types. Far from complete, but I don't know how to do it
+	 * better. Any ideas: <mailto:j.nijtmans@chello.nl>
 	 */
 
 	if (p[1] && p[2]) {
@@ -1223,27 +1207,27 @@ SetUpGraphicsPort(gc)
 
 	style |= PS_GEOMETRIC;
 	switch (gc->cap_style) {
-	    case CapNotLast:
-	    case CapButt:
-		style |= PS_ENDCAP_FLAT; 
-		break;
-	    case CapRound:
-		style |= PS_ENDCAP_ROUND; 
-		break;
-	    default:
-		style |= PS_ENDCAP_SQUARE; 
-		break;
+	case CapNotLast:
+	case CapButt:
+	    style |= PS_ENDCAP_FLAT;
+	    break;
+	case CapRound:
+	    style |= PS_ENDCAP_ROUND;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    style |= PS_ENDCAP_SQUARE;
+	    break;
 	}
 	switch (gc->join_style) {
-	    case JoinMiter: 
-		style |= PS_JOIN_MITER; 
-		break;
-	    case JoinRound:
-		style |= PS_JOIN_ROUND; 
-		break;
-	    default:
-		style |= PS_JOIN_BEVEL; 
-		break;
+	case JoinMiter:
+	    style |= PS_JOIN_MITER;
+	    break;
+	case JoinRound:
+	    style |= PS_JOIN_ROUND;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    style |= PS_JOIN_BEVEL;
+	    break;
 	}
 	return ExtCreatePen(style, gc->line_width, &lb, 0, NULL);
     }
@@ -1254,13 +1238,13 @@ SetUpGraphicsPort(gc)
  *
  * TkScrollWindow --
  *
- *	Scroll a rectangle of the specified window and accumulate
- *	a damage region.
+ *	Scroll a rectangle of the specified window and accumulate a damage
+ *	region.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns 0 if the scroll genereated no additional damage.
- *	Otherwise, sets the region that needs to be repainted after
- *	scrolling and returns 1.
+ *	Returns 0 if the scroll genereated no additional damage. Otherwise,
+ *	sets the region that needs to be repainted after scrolling and returns
+ *	1.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Scrolls the bits in the window.
@@ -1269,12 +1253,13 @@ SetUpGraphicsPort(gc)
  */
 
 int
-TkScrollWindow(tkwin, gc, x, y, width, height, dx, dy, damageRgn)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window to be scrolled. */
-    GC gc;			/* GC for window to be scrolled. */
-    int x, y, width, height;	/* Position rectangle to be scrolled. */
-    int dx, dy;			/* Distance rectangle should be moved. */
-    TkRegion damageRgn;		/* Region to accumulate damage in. */
+TkScrollWindow(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The window to be scrolled. */
+    GC gc,			/* GC for window to be scrolled. */
+    int x, int y, int width, int height,
+				/* Position rectangle to be scrolled. */
+    int dx, int dy,		/* Distance rectangle should be moved. */
+    TkRegion damageRgn)		/* Region to accumulate damage in. */
 {
     HWND hwnd = TkWinGetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
     RECT scrollRect;
@@ -1292,9 +1277,9 @@ TkScrollWindow(tkwin, gc, x, y, width, height, dx, dy, damageRgn)
  *
  * TkWinFillRect --
  *
- *	This routine fills a rectangle with the foreground color
- *	from the specified GC ignoring all other GC values.  This
- *	is the fastest way to fill a drawable with a solid color.
+ *	This routine fills a rectangle with the foreground color from the
+ *	specified GC ignoring all other GC values. This is the fastest way to
+ *	fill a drawable with a solid color.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1306,10 +1291,10 @@ TkScrollWindow(tkwin, gc, x, y, width, height, dx, dy, damageRgn)
  */
 
 void
-TkWinFillRect(dc, x, y, width, height, pixel)
-    HDC dc;
-    int x, y, width, height;
-    int pixel;
+TkWinFillRect(
+    HDC dc,
+    int x, int y, int width, int height,
+    int pixel)
 {
     RECT rect;
     COLORREF oldColor;
@@ -1329,30 +1314,30 @@ TkWinFillRect(dc, x, y, width, height, pixel)
  *
  * TkpDrawHighlightBorder --
  *
- *	This procedure draws a rectangular ring around the outside of
- *	a widget to indicate that it has received the input focus.
+ *	This function draws a rectangular ring around the outside of a widget
+ *	to indicate that it has received the input focus.
  *
- *      On Windows, we just draw the simple inset ring.  On other sytems,
- *      e.g. the Mac, the focus ring is a little more complicated, so we
- *      need this abstraction.
+ *      On Windows, we just draw the simple inset ring. On other sytems, e.g.
+ *      the Mac, the focus ring is a little more complicated, so we need this
+ *      abstraction.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A rectangle "width" pixels wide is drawn in "drawable",
- *	corresponding to the outer area of "tkwin".
+ *	A rectangle "width" pixels wide is drawn in "drawable", corresponding
+ *	to the outer area of "tkwin".
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void 
-TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, highlightWidth, drawable)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    GC fgGC;
-    GC bgGC;
-    int highlightWidth;
-    Drawable drawable;
+void
+TkpDrawHighlightBorder(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    GC fgGC,
+    GC bgGC,
+    int highlightWidth,
+    Drawable drawable)
 {
     TkDrawInsetFocusHighlight(tkwin, fgGC, highlightWidth, drawable, 0);
 }
@@ -1362,7 +1347,7 @@ TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, highlightWidth, drawable)
  *
  * TkpDrawFrame --
  *
- *	This procedure draws the rectangular frame area.
+ *	This function draws the rectangular frame area.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1374,12 +1359,22 @@ TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, highlightWidth, drawable)
  */
 
 void
-TkpDrawFrame (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border,
-	int highlightWidth, int borderWidth, int relief)
+TkpDrawFrame(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    Tk_3DBorder border,
+    int highlightWidth,
+    int borderWidth,
+    int relief)
 {
-    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
-	    border, highlightWidth, highlightWidth,
-	    Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * highlightWidth,
-	    Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * highlightWidth,
-	    borderWidth, relief);
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), border, highlightWidth,
+	    highlightWidth, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * highlightWidth,
+	    Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * highlightWidth, borderWidth, relief);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinEmbed.c b/win/tkWinEmbed.c
index 40cbd3a..9b5150c 100644
--- a/win/tkWinEmbed.c
+++ b/win/tkWinEmbed.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinEmbed.c --
  *
  *	This file contains platform specific procedures for Windows platforms
@@ -8,52 +8,50 @@
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinEmbed.c,v 1.28 2005/01/27 15:29:22 chengyemao Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinEmbed.c,v 1.29 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 
 /*
  * One of the following structures exists for each container in this
- * application.  It keeps track of the container window and its
- * associated embedded window.
+ * application. It keeps track of the container window and its associated
+ * embedded window.
  */
 
 typedef struct Container {
-    HWND parentHWnd;			/* Windows HWND to the parent window */
-    TkWindow *parentPtr;		/* Tk's information about the container
-					 * or NULL if the container isn't
-					 * in this process. */
-    HWND embeddedHWnd;			/* Windows HWND to the embedded window
-					 */
-    TkWindow *embeddedPtr;		/* Tk's information about the embedded
-					 * window, or NULL if the
-					 * embedded application isn't in
-					 * this process. */
-    HWND embeddedMenuHWnd;		/* Tk's embedded menu window handler */
-    struct Container *nextPtr;		/* Next in list of all containers in
-					 * this process. */
+    HWND parentHWnd;		/* Windows HWND to the parent window */
+    TkWindow *parentPtr;	/* Tk's information about the container or
+				 * NULL if the container isn't in this
+				 * process. */
+    HWND embeddedHWnd;		/* Windows HWND to the embedded window. */
+    TkWindow *embeddedPtr;	/* Tk's information about the embedded window,
+				 * or NULL if the embedded application isn't
+				 * in this process. */
+    HWND embeddedMenuHWnd;	/* Tk's embedded menu window handler. */
+    struct Container *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all containers in this
+				 * process. */
 } Container;
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    Container *firstContainerPtr;       /* First in list of all containers
-					 * managed by this process.  */
+    Container *firstContainerPtr;
+				/* First in list of all containers managed by
+				 * this process. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
-static void		ContainerEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		EmbeddedEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		EmbedGeometryRequest _ANSI_ARGS_((
-    			    Container*containerPtr, int width, int height));
-static void		EmbedWindowDeleted _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
-static void		Tk_MapEmbeddedWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow* winPtr));
-HWND			Tk_GetEmbeddedHWnd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow* winPtr));
-
+static void		ContainerEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		EmbeddedEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		EmbedGeometryRequest(Container *containerPtr,
+			    int width, int height);
+static void		EmbedWindowDeleted(TkWindow *winPtr);
+static void		Tk_MapEmbeddedWindow(TkWindow* winPtr);
+HWND			Tk_GetEmbeddedHWnd(TkWindow* winPtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -71,15 +69,15 @@ HWND			Tk_GetEmbeddedHWnd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow* winPtr));
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void TkWinCleanupContainerList(void)
+void
+TkWinCleanupContainerList(void)
 {
     Container *nextPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
-    
-    for (;
-        tsdPtr->firstContainerPtr != (Container *) NULL;
-        tsdPtr->firstContainerPtr = nextPtr) {
+
+    for (; tsdPtr->firstContainerPtr != (Container *) NULL;
+	    tsdPtr->firstContainerPtr = nextPtr) {
         nextPtr = tsdPtr->firstContainerPtr->nextPtr;
         ckfree((char *) tsdPtr->firstContainerPtr);
     }
@@ -104,11 +102,11 @@ void TkWinCleanupContainerList(void)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 int
-TkpTestembedCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    int argc;
-    CONST char **argv;
+TkpTestembedCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    int argc,
+    CONST char **argv)
 {
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -128,14 +126,15 @@ TkpTestembedCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static 
-void Tk_DetachEmbeddedWindow(winPtr, detachFlag)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;	    /* an embedded window */
-    BOOL detachFlag;	    /* a flag of truely detaching */
+
+static
+void
+Tk_DetachEmbeddedWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* an embedded window */
+    BOOL detachFlag)		/* a flag of truely detaching */
 {
     TkpWinToplevelDetachWindow(winPtr);
-    if(detachFlag)
-    {
+    if(detachFlag) {
 	TkpWinToplevelOverrideRedirect(winPtr, 0);
     }
 }
@@ -145,9 +144,9 @@ void Tk_DetachEmbeddedWindow(winPtr, detachFlag)
  *
  * Tk_MapEmbeddedWindow --
  *
- *	This function is required for mapping an embedded window during
- *	idle.  The input winPtr must be preserved using Tcl_Preserve before
- *	call this function and will be released by this function.
+ *	This function is required for mapping an embedded window during idle.
+ *	The input winPtr must be preserved using Tcl_Preserve before call this
+ *	function and will be released by this function.
  *
  * Results:
  *	No return value. Map the embedded window if it is not dead.
@@ -157,66 +156,71 @@ void Tk_DetachEmbeddedWindow(winPtr, detachFlag)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static 
-void Tk_MapEmbeddedWindow(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window that's about to
-				 * be mapped. */
+
+static
+void Tk_MapEmbeddedWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Top-level window that's about to be
+				 * mapped. */
 {
     if(!(winPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)) {
 	HWND hwnd = (HWND)winPtr->privatePtr;
 	int state = SendMessage(hwnd, TK_STATE, -1, -1) - 1;
-	if(state < 0 || state > 3) {
+
+	if (state < 0 || state > 3) {
 	    state = NormalState;
-	} 
-	while(Tcl_DoOneEvent(TCL_IDLE_EVENTS)); 
-	TkpWmSetState(winPtr, state);	
+	}
+
+	while (Tcl_DoOneEvent(TCL_IDLE_EVENTS)) {
+	    /* empty body */
+	}
+
+	TkpWmSetState(winPtr, state);
 	TkWmMapWindow(winPtr);
     }
     Tcl_Release((ClientData)winPtr);
 }
-
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkpUseWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure causes a Tk window to use a given Windows handle
- *	for a window as its underlying window, rather than a new Windows
- *	window being created automatically. It is invoked by an embedded
- *	application to specify the window in which the application is
- *	embedded.
+ *	This procedure causes a Tk window to use a given Windows handle for a
+ *	window as its underlying window, rather than a new Windows window
+ *	being created automatically. It is invoked by an embedded application
+ *	to specify the window in which the application is embedded.
  *
- *	This procedure uses a simple attachment protocol by sending 
- *	TK_INFO messages to the window to use with two sub messages:
+ *	This procedure uses a simple attachment protocol by sending TK_INFO
+ *	messages to the window to use with two sub messages:
  *
- *	    TK_CONTAINER_VERIFY - if a window handles this message,
- *		it should return either a (long)hwnd for a container or
- *		a -(long)hwnd for a non-container. 
+ *	    TK_CONTAINER_VERIFY - if a window handles this message, it should
+ *		return either a (long)hwnd for a container or a -(long)hwnd
+ *		for a non-container.
  *
- *	    TK_CONTAINER_ISAVAILABLE - a container window should return 
- *		either a TRUE (non-zero) if it is available for use or
- *		a FALSE (zero) othersize.
+ *	    TK_CONTAINER_ISAVAILABLE - a container window should return either
+ *		a TRUE (non-zero) if it is available for use or a FALSE (zero)
+ *		othersize.
  *
- *	The TK_INFO messages are required in order to verify if the window 
- *	to use is a valid container. Without an id verification, an invalid 
+ *	The TK_INFO messages are required in order to verify if the window to
+ *	use is a valid container. Without an id verification, an invalid
  *	window attachment may cause unexpected crashes/panics (bug 1096074).
- *	Additional sub messages may be definded/used in future for other 
+ *	Additional sub messages may be definded/used in future for other
  *	needs.
- *	
- *	We do not enforce the above protocol for the reason of backward 
- *	compatibility. If the window to use is unable to handle TK_INFO 
- *	messages (e.g., legacy Tk container applications before 8.5),
- *	a dialog box with a warning message pops up and the user is asked 
- *	to confirm if the attachment should proceed.  However, we may have 
- *	to enforce it in future.
- *	
+ *
+ *	We do not enforce the above protocol for the reason of backward
+ *	compatibility. If the window to use is unable to handle TK_INFO
+ *	messages (e.g., legacy Tk container applications before 8.5), a dialog
+ *	box with a warning message pops up and the user is asked to confirm if
+ *	the attachment should proceed. However, we may have to enforce it in
+ *	future.
+ *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is normally TCL_OK. If an error occurred (such as
- *	if the argument does not identify a legal Windows window handle or
- *	it is already in use or a cancel button is pressed by a user in 
- *	confirming the use window as a Tk container) the return value is 
- *	TCL_ERROR and an error message is left in the the interp's result 
- *	if interp is not NULL.
+ *	The return value is normally TCL_OK. If an error occurred (such as if
+ *	the argument does not identify a legal Windows window handle or it is
+ *	already in use or a cancel button is pressed by a user in confirming
+ *	the use window as a Tk container) the return value is TCL_ERROR and an
+ *	error message is left in the the interp's result if interp is not
+ *	NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -224,28 +228,30 @@ void Tk_MapEmbeddedWindow(winPtr)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-int 
-TkpUseWindow(interp, tkwin, string)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* If not NULL, used for error reporting
-				 * if string is bogus. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk window that does not yet have an
+int
+TkpUseWindow(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* If not NULL, used for error reporting if
+				 * string is bogus. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Tk window that does not yet have an
 				 * associated X window. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String identifying an X window to use
-				 * for tkwin;  must be an integer value. */
+    CONST char *string)		/* String identifying an X window to use for
+				 * tkwin; must be an integer value. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     int id;
     HWND hwnd;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+
 /*
-    if(winPtr->window != None) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't modify container after widget is created", (char *) NULL);
+    if (winPtr->window != None) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't modify container after widget is created", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 */
-    if(strcmp(string, "") == 0) {
-	if(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+
+    if (strcmp(string, "") == 0) {
+	if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
 	    Tk_DetachEmbeddedWindow(winPtr, TRUE);
 	}
 	return TCL_OK;
@@ -255,7 +261,9 @@ TkpUseWindow(interp, tkwin, string)
         return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     hwnd = (HWND) id;
-    if((HWND)winPtr->privatePtr == hwnd) return TCL_OK;
+    if ((HWND)winPtr->privatePtr == hwnd) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
 
     /*
      * Check if the window is a valid handle. If it is invalid, return
@@ -264,32 +272,35 @@ TkpUseWindow(interp, tkwin, string)
      */
 
     if (!IsWindow(hwnd)) {
-        if (interp != (Tcl_Interp *) NULL) {
-            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", string,
-                    "\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
+        if (interp != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", string,
+		    "\" doesn't exist", NULL);
         }
         return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     id = SendMessage(hwnd, TK_INFO, TK_CONTAINER_VERIFY, 0);
-    if(id == (long)hwnd) {
-        if(!SendMessage(hwnd, TK_INFO, TK_CONTAINER_ISAVAILABLE, 0)) {
+    if (id == (long)hwnd) {
+        if (!SendMessage(hwnd, TK_INFO, TK_CONTAINER_ISAVAILABLE, 0)) {
     	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "The container is already in use", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-    } else if(id == -(long)hwnd) {
-        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "the window to use is not a Tk container", NULL);
-	    return TCL_ERROR;
+    } else if (id == -(long)hwnd) {
+        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "the window to use is not a Tk container",
+		NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     } else {
         /*
-         * Proceed if the user decide to do so because it can be a legacy 
-         * container application.  However we may have to return a TCL_ERROR 
-         * in order to avoid bug 1096074 in future.
+         * Proceed if the user decide to do so because it can be a legacy
+         * container application. However we may have to return a TCL_ERROR in
+         * order to avoid bug 1096074 in future.
          */
+
         char msg[256];
         sprintf(msg, "Unable to get information of window \"%s\".  Attach to this\nwindow may have unpredictable results if it is not a valid container.\n\nPress Ok to proceed or Cancel to abort attaching.", string);
-        if(IDCANCEL == MessageBox(hwnd, msg, "Tk Warning", MB_OKCANCEL | MB_ICONWARNING)) {
-    	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "Operation has been canceled", TCL_STATIC); 
+        if (IDCANCEL == MessageBox(hwnd, msg, "Tk Warning",
+		MB_OKCANCEL | MB_ICONWARNING)) {
+    	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "Operation has been canceled", TCL_STATIC);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     }
@@ -306,9 +317,10 @@ TkpUseWindow(interp, tkwin, string)
     winPtr->flags &= (~(TK_MAPPED));
 
     /*
-     * Preserve the winPtr and create an idle handler to 
-     * map the embedded window
-     */ 
+     * Preserve the winPtr and create an idle handler to map the embedded
+     * window.
+     */
+
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData)winPtr);
     Tcl_DoWhenIdle(Tk_MapEmbeddedWindow,(ClientData)winPtr);
 
@@ -320,10 +332,10 @@ TkpUseWindow(interp, tkwin, string)
  *
  * TkpMakeContainer --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to indicate that a particular window will
- *	be a container for an embedded application. This changes certain
- *	aspects of the window's behavior, such as whether it will receive
- *	events anymore.
+ *	This procedure is called to indicate that a particular window will be
+ *	a container for an embedded application. This changes certain aspects
+ *	of the window's behavior, such as whether it will receive events
+ *	anymore.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -335,17 +347,17 @@ TkpUseWindow(interp, tkwin, string)
  */
 
 void
-TkpMakeContainer(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
+TkpMakeContainer(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     Container *containerPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
-    
+
     /*
-     * Register the window as a container so that, for example, we can
-     * find out later if the embedded app. is in the same process.
+     * Register the window as a container so that, for example, we can find
+     * out later if the embedded app. is in the same process.
      */
 
     Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin);
@@ -360,18 +372,17 @@ TkpMakeContainer(tkwin)
     winPtr->flags |= TK_CONTAINER;
 
     /*
-     * Unlike in tkUnixEmbed.c, we don't make any requests for events
-     * in the embedded window here.  Now we just allow the embedding
-     * of another TK application into TK windows. When the embedded
-     * window makes a request, that will be done by sending to the
-     * container window a WM_USER message, which will be intercepted
-     * by TkWinContainerProc.
+     * Unlike in tkUnixEmbed.c, we don't make any requests for events in the
+     * embedded window here. Now we just allow the embedding of another TK
+     * application into TK windows. When the embedded window makes a request,
+     * that will be done by sending to the container window a WM_USER message,
+     * which will be intercepted by TkWinContainerProc.
      *
      * We need to get structure events of the container itself, though.
      */
 
     Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
-	ContainerEventProc, (ClientData) containerPtr);
+	    ContainerEventProc, (ClientData) containerPtr);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -380,8 +391,8 @@ TkpMakeContainer(tkwin)
  * EmbeddedEventProc --
  *
  *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher when various
- *	useful events are received for a window that is embedded in
- *	another application.
+ *	useful events are received for a window that is embedded in another
+ *	application.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -394,9 +405,9 @@ TkpMakeContainer(tkwin)
  */
 
 static void
-EmbeddedEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Token for container window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* ResizeRequest event. */
+EmbeddedEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Token for container window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* ResizeRequest event. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
 
@@ -410,32 +421,31 @@ EmbeddedEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkWinEmbeddedEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher when
- *	various useful events are received for the *children* of a
- *	container window. It forwards relevant information, such as
- *	geometry requests, from the events into the container's
- *	application.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher when various
+ *	useful events are received for the *children* of a container window.
+ *	It forwards relevant information, such as geometry requests, from the
+ *	events into the container's application.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Depends on the event.  For example, when ConfigureRequest events
- *	occur, geometry information gets set for the container window.
+ *	Depends on the event. For example, when ConfigureRequest events occur,
+ *	geometry information gets set for the container window.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 LRESULT
-TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
-    HWND hwnd;
-    UINT message;
-    WPARAM wParam;
-    LPARAM lParam;
+TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(
+    HWND hwnd,
+    UINT message,
+    WPARAM wParam,
+    LPARAM lParam)
 {
     int result = 1;
     Container *containerPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
@@ -454,76 +464,80 @@ TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	    topwinPtr = containerPtr->parentPtr;
 	}
 	switch (message) {
-	    case TK_INFO:
-	    /* An embedded window may send this message for container
-	     * verification and availability before attach. 
+	case TK_INFO:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded window may send this message for container
+	     * verification and availability before attach.
 	     *
 	     * wParam - a sub message
 	     *
-	     *	    TK_CONTAINER_ISAVAILABLE - if the container is 
-	     *		available for use?
+	     *	    TK_CONTAINER_ISAVAILABLE - if the container is available
+	     *		for use?
 	     *		result = 1 for yes and 0 for no;
 	     *
-	     *	    TK_CONTAINER_VERIFY - request the container to
-	     *		verify its identification
+	     *	    TK_CONTAINER_VERIFY - request the container to verify its
+	     *		identification
 	     *		result =  (long)hwnd if this window is a container
 	     *			 -(long)hwnd otherwise
 	     *
 	     * lParam - N/A
 	     */
+
 	    switch(wParam) {
-		case TK_CONTAINER_ISAVAILABLE:
+	    case TK_CONTAINER_ISAVAILABLE:
 		result = containerPtr->embeddedHWnd == NULL? 1:0;
 		break;
-
-		case TK_CONTAINER_VERIFY:
+	    case TK_CONTAINER_VERIFY:
 		result = (long)containerPtr->parentHWnd;
 		break;
-		
-		default:
+	    default:
 		result = 0;
 	    }
 	    break;
 
-	    case TK_ATTACHWINDOW:
-	    /* An embedded window (either from this application or from
-	     * another application) is trying to attach to this container.
-	     * We attach it only if this container is not yet containing any
+	case TK_ATTACHWINDOW:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded window (either from this application or from
+	     * another application) is trying to attach to this container. We
+	     * attach it only if this container is not yet containing any
 	     * window.
 	     *
 	     * wParam - a handle of an embedded window
 	     * lParam - N/A
 	     *
 	     * An embedded window may send this message with a wParam of NULL
-	     * to test if a window is able to provide embedding service. The 
-	     * container returns its window handle for accepting the attachment 
-	     * and identifying itself or a zero for being already in use.
+	     * to test if a window is able to provide embedding service. The
+	     * container returns its window handle for accepting the
+	     * attachment and identifying itself or a zero for being already
+	     * in use.
 	     *
 	     * Return value:
 	     * 0    - the container is unable to be used.
-	     * hwnd - the container is ready to be used. 
+	     * hwnd - the container is ready to be used.
 	     */
 	    if (containerPtr->embeddedHWnd == NULL) {
-		if(wParam) {
-		    TkWindow* winPtr = (TkWindow*)Tk_HWNDToWindow((HWND)wParam);
-		    if(winPtr) {
+		if (wParam) {
+		    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)
+			    Tk_HWNDToWindow((HWND) wParam);
+		    if (winPtr) {
 			winPtr->flags |= TK_BOTH_HALVES;
 			containerPtr->embeddedPtr = winPtr;
 			containerPtr->parentPtr->flags |= TK_BOTH_HALVES;
 		    }
 		    containerPtr->embeddedHWnd = (HWND)wParam;
 		}
-		result =  (long)containerPtr->parentHWnd;
+		result = (long)containerPtr->parentHWnd;
 	    } else {
 		result = 0;
 	    }
 	    break;
 
-	    case TK_DETACHWINDOW:
-	    /* An embedded window notifies the container that it is detached.
+	case TK_DETACHWINDOW:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded window notifies the container that it is detached.
 	     * The container should clearn the related variables and redraw
 	     * its window.
-	     * 
+	     *
 	     * wParam - N/A
 	     * lParam - N/A
 	     *
@@ -531,15 +545,19 @@ TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	     * 0	- the message is not processed.
 	     * others	- the message is processed.
 	     */
+
 	    containerPtr->embeddedMenuHWnd = NULL;
 	    containerPtr->embeddedHWnd = NULL;
 	    containerPtr->parentPtr->flags &= ~TK_BOTH_HALVES;
-	    if(topwinPtr) TkWinSetMenu((Tk_Window)topwinPtr, 0);
+	    if (topwinPtr) {
+		TkWinSetMenu((Tk_Window) topwinPtr, 0);
+	    }
 	    InvalidateRect(hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
 	    break;
 
-	    case TK_GEOMETRYREQ:
-	    /* An embedded window requests a window size change.
+	case TK_GEOMETRYREQ:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded window requests a window size change.
 	     *
 	     * wParam - window width
 	     * lParam - window height
@@ -548,41 +566,46 @@ TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	     * 0	- the message is not processed.
 	     * others	- the message is processed.
 	     */
+
 	    EmbedGeometryRequest(containerPtr, (int)wParam, lParam);
 	    break;
 
-	    case TK_RAISEWINDOW:
-	    /* An embedded window requests to change its Z-order
-	     * 
-	     * wParam - a window handle as a z-order stack reference 
+	case TK_RAISEWINDOW:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded window requests to change its Z-order.
+	     *
+	     * wParam - a window handle as a z-order stack reference
 	     * lParam - a flag of above-below: 0 - above; 1 or others: - below
-	     * 
+	     *
 	     * Return value:
 	     * 0	- the message is not processed.
 	     * others	- the message is processed.
 	     */
-	    TkWinSetWindowPos(GetParent(containerPtr->parentHWnd), (HWND)wParam, (int)lParam);
+
+	    TkWinSetWindowPos(GetParent(containerPtr->parentHWnd),
+		    (HWND)wParam, (int)lParam);
 	    break;
 
-	    case TK_GETFRAMEWID:
-	    /* An embedded window requests to get the frame window's id
+	case TK_GETFRAMEWID:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded window requests to get the frame window's id.
 	     *
 	     * wParam - N/A
 	     * lParam - N/A
 	     *
 	     * Return vlaue:
 	     *
-	     * A handle of the frame window. If it is not availble, a 
-	     * zeor is returned.
+	     * A handle of the frame window. If it is not availble, a zero is
+	     * returned.
 	     */
-	    if(topwinPtr) {
+	    if (topwinPtr) {
 		result = (long)GetParent(containerPtr->parentHWnd);
 	    } else {
 		topwinPtr = containerPtr->parentPtr;
 		while (!(topwinPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)) {
 		    topwinPtr = topwinPtr->parentPtr;
 		}
-		if(topwinPtr && topwinPtr->window) {
+		if (topwinPtr && topwinPtr->window) {
 		    result = (long)GetParent(Tk_GetHWND(topwinPtr->window));
 		} else {
 		    result = 0;
@@ -590,26 +613,29 @@ TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	    }
 	    break;
 
-	    case TK_CLAIMFOCUS:
-	    /* An embedded window requests a focus
-	     * 
-	     * wParam - a flag of forcing focus 
+	case TK_CLAIMFOCUS:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded window requests a focus.
+	     *
+	     * wParam - a flag of forcing focus
 	     * lParam - N/A
 	     *
 	     * Return value:
 	     * 0    - the message is not processed
 	     * 1    - the message is processed
 	     */
-	    if(!SetFocus(containerPtr->embeddedHWnd) && wParam) {
+
+	    if (!SetFocus(containerPtr->embeddedHWnd) && wParam) {
 		/*
 		 * forcing focus TBD
 		 */
 	    }
 	    break;
 
-	    case TK_WITHDRAW:
-	    /* An embedded window requests withdraw
-	     * 
+	case TK_WITHDRAW:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded window requests withdraw.
+	     *
 	     * wParam	- N/A
 	     * lParam	- N/A
 	     *
@@ -617,15 +643,18 @@ TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	     * 0    - the message is not processed
 	     * 1    - the message is processed
 	     */
-	    if(topwinPtr) 
+
+	    if (topwinPtr) {
 		TkpWinToplevelWithDraw(topwinPtr);
-	    else
+	    } else {
 		result = 0;
+	    }
 	    break;
 
-	    case TK_ICONIFY:
-	    /* An embedded window requests iconification
-	     * 
+	case TK_ICONIFY:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded window requests iconification.
+	     *
 	     * wParam	- N/A
 	     * lParam	- N/A
 	     *
@@ -633,15 +662,18 @@ TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	     * 0    - the message is not processed
 	     * 1    - the message is processed
 	     */
-	    if(topwinPtr) 
+
+	    if (topwinPtr) {
 		TkpWinToplevelIconify(topwinPtr);
-	    else
+	    } else {
 		result = 0;
+	    }
 	    break;
 
-	    case TK_DEICONIFY:
-	    /* An embedded window requests deiconification
-	     * 
+	case TK_DEICONIFY:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded window requests deiconification.
+	     *
 	     * wParam	- N/A
 	     * lParam	- N/A
 	     *
@@ -649,31 +681,35 @@ TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	     * 0    - the message is not processed
 	     * 1    - the message is processed
 	     */
-	    if(topwinPtr) 
+	    if (topwinPtr) {
 		TkpWinToplevelDeiconify(topwinPtr);
-	    else
+	    } else {
 		result = 0;
+	    }
 	    break;
 
-	    case TK_MOVEWINDOW:
-	    /* An embedded window requests to move position if
-	     * both wParam and lParam are greater or equal to 0.
+	case TK_MOVEWINDOW:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded window requests to move position if both wParam and
+	     * lParam are greater or equal to 0.
 	     *	    wParam - x value of the frame's upper left
 	     *	    lParam - y value of the frame's upper left
 	     *
-	     * Otherwise an embedded window requests the current 
-	     * position
+	     * Otherwise an embedded window requests the current position
+	     *
+	     * Return value: an encoded window position in a 32bit long, i.e,
+	     * ((x << 16) & 0xffff0000) | (y & 0xffff)
 	     *
-	     * Return value: an encoded window position in a 32bit long, 
-	     * i.e, ((x << 16) & 0xffff0000) | (y & 0xffff)
-	     * 
 	     * Only a toplevel container may move the embedded.
 	     */
-	    result = TkpWinToplevelMove(containerPtr->parentPtr, wParam, lParam);
+
+	    result = TkpWinToplevelMove(containerPtr->parentPtr,
+		    wParam, lParam);
 	    break;
 
-	    case TK_OVERRIDEREDIRECT:
-	    /* An embedded window request overrideredirect.
+	case TK_OVERRIDEREDIRECT:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded window request overrideredirect.
 	     *
 	     * wParam
 	     *	0	- add a frame if there is no one
@@ -683,18 +719,19 @@ TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	     * lParam	- N/A
 	     *
 	     * Return value:
-	     * 1 + the current value of overrideredirect if the container is
-	     * a toplevel.  Otherwise 0.
+	     * 1 + the current value of overrideredirect if the container is a
+	     * toplevel. Otherwise 0.
 	     */
-	    if(topwinPtr) {
-		result = 1+TkpWinToplevelOverrideRedirect(topwinPtr, wParam);
+	    if (topwinPtr) {
+		result = 1 + TkpWinToplevelOverrideRedirect(topwinPtr, wParam);
 	    } else {
 		result = 0;
 	    }
 	    break;
 
-	    case TK_SETMENU:
-	    /* An embedded requests to set a menu
+	case TK_SETMENU:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded requests to set a menu.
 	     *
 	     * wParam	- a menu handle
 	     * lParam	- a menu window handle
@@ -703,7 +740,7 @@ TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	     * 1    - the message is processed
 	     * 0    - the message is not processed
 	     */
-	    if(topwinPtr) {
+	    if (topwinPtr) {
 		containerPtr->embeddedMenuHWnd = (HWND)lParam;
 		TkWinSetMenu((Tk_Window)topwinPtr, (HMENU)wParam);
 	    } else {
@@ -711,8 +748,9 @@ TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	    }
 	    break;
 
-	    case TK_STATE:
-	    /* An embedded window request set/get state services
+	case TK_STATE:
+	    /*
+	     * An embedded window request set/get state services.
 	     *
 	     * wParam	- service directive
 	     *	    0 - 3 for setting state
@@ -727,8 +765,9 @@ TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	     * Return value
 	     * 1 + the current state or 0 if the container is not a toplevel
 	     */
-	    if(topwinPtr) {
-		if(wParam >= 0 && wParam <= 3) {
+
+	    if (topwinPtr) {
+		if (wParam >= 0 && wParam <= 3) {
 		    TkpWmSetState(topwinPtr, wParam);
 		}
 		result = 1+TkpWmGetState(topwinPtr);
@@ -738,19 +777,19 @@ TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	    break;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Return 0 since the current Tk container implementation 
-	     * is unable to provide following services.
-	     *  
+	     * Return 0 since the current Tk container implementation is
+	     * unable to provide following services.
 	     */
-	    default:
-	    result = 0;  
+	default:
+	    result = 0;
 	    break;
 	}
     } else {
-	if(message == TK_INFO && wParam == TK_CONTAINER_VERIFY) {
+	if ((message == TK_INFO) && (wParam == TK_CONTAINER_VERIFY)) {
 	    /*
 	     * Reply the message sender: this is not a Tk container
 	     */
+
 	    return -(long)hwnd;
 	} else {
 	    result = 0;
@@ -765,39 +804,40 @@ TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
  *
  * EmbedGeometryRequest --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when an embedded application requests
- *	a particular size.  It processes the request (which may or may
- *	not actually resize the window) and reflects the results back
- *	to the embedded application.
+ *	This procedure is invoked when an embedded application requests a
+ *	particular size. It processes the request (which may or may not
+ *	actually resize the window) and reflects the results back to the
+ *	embedded application.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If we deny the child's size change request, a Configure event
- *	is synthesized to let the child know that the size is the same
- *	as it used to be.  Events get processed while we're waiting for
- *	the geometry managers to do their thing.
+ *	If we deny the child's size change request, a Configure event is
+ *	synthesized to let the child know that the size is the same as it used
+ *	to be. Events get processed while we're waiting for the geometry
+ *	managers to do their thing.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-EmbedGeometryRequest(containerPtr, width, height)
-    Container *containerPtr;	/* Information about the container window. */
-    int width, height;		/* Size that the child has requested. */
+EmbedGeometryRequest(
+    Container *containerPtr,	/* Information about the container window. */
+    int width, int height)	/* Size that the child has requested. */
 {
-    TkWindow * winPtr = containerPtr->parentPtr;
-    
+    TkWindow *winPtr = containerPtr->parentPtr;
+
     /*
-     * Forward the requested size into our geometry management hierarchy
-     * via the container window.  We need to send a Configure event back
-     * to the embedded application even if we decide not to resize
-     * the window;  to make this happen, process all idle event handlers
-     * synchronously here (so that the geometry managers have had a
-     * chance to do whatever they want to do), and if the window's size
-     * didn't change then generate a configure event.
+     * Forward the requested size into our geometry management hierarchy via
+     * the container window. We need to send a Configure event back to the
+     * embedded application even if we decide not to resize the window; to
+     * make this happen, process all idle event handlers synchronously here
+     * (so that the geometry managers have had a chance to do whatever they
+     * want to do), and if the window's size didn't change then generate a
+     * configure event.
      */
+
     Tk_GeometryRequest((Tk_Window)winPtr, width, height);
 
     if (containerPtr->embeddedHWnd != NULL) {
@@ -805,8 +845,8 @@ EmbedGeometryRequest(containerPtr, width, height)
 	    /* Empty loop body. */
 	}
 
-	SetWindowPos(containerPtr->embeddedHWnd, NULL,
-	    0, 0, winPtr->changes.width, winPtr->changes.height, SWP_NOZORDER);
+	SetWindowPos(containerPtr->embeddedHWnd, NULL, 0, 0,
+		winPtr->changes.width, winPtr->changes.height, SWP_NOZORDER);
     }
 }
 
@@ -815,35 +855,41 @@ EmbedGeometryRequest(containerPtr, width, height)
  *
  * ContainerEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher when
- *	various useful events are received for the container window.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher when various
+ *	useful events are received for the container window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Depends on the event.  For example, when ConfigureRequest events
- *	occur, geometry information gets set for the container window.
+ *	Depends on the event. For example, when ConfigureRequest events occur,
+ *	geometry information gets set for the container window.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-ContainerEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Token for container window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* ResizeRequest event. */
+ContainerEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Token for container window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* ResizeRequest event. */
 {
     Container *containerPtr = (Container *)clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)containerPtr->parentPtr;
 
     if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
-	/* Resize the embedded window, if there is any */
+	/*
+	 * Resize the embedded window, if there is any.
+	 */
+
 	if (containerPtr->embeddedHWnd) {
-	    SetWindowPos(containerPtr->embeddedHWnd, NULL,
-	        0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), SWP_NOZORDER);
+	    SetWindowPos(containerPtr->embeddedHWnd, NULL, 0, 0,
+		    Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), SWP_NOZORDER);
 	}
     } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
-	/* The container is gone, remove it from the list */
+	/*
+	 * The container is gone, remove it from the list.
+	 */
+
 	EmbedWindowDeleted(containerPtr->parentPtr);
     }
 }
@@ -853,13 +899,13 @@ ContainerEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkpGetOtherWindow --
  *
- *	If both the container and embedded window are in the same
- *	process, this procedure will return either one, given the other.
+ *	If both the container and embedded window are in the same process,
+ *	this procedure will return either one, given the other.
  *
  * Results:
  *	If winPtr is a container, the return value is the token for the
- *	embedded window, and vice versa.  If the "other" window isn't in
- *	this process, NULL is returned.
+ *	embedded window, and vice versa. If the "other" window isn't in this
+ *	process, NULL is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -868,12 +914,12 @@ ContainerEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  */
 
 TkWindow *
-TkpGetOtherWindow(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Tk's structure for a container or
-				 * embedded window. */
+TkpGetOtherWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Tk's structure for a container or embedded
+				 * window. */
 {
     Container *containerPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     for (containerPtr = tsdPtr->firstContainerPtr; containerPtr != NULL;
@@ -906,11 +952,11 @@ TkpGetOtherWindow(winPtr)
  */
 
 HWND
-Tk_GetEmbeddedHWnd(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+Tk_GetEmbeddedHWnd(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
     Container *containerPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     for (containerPtr = tsdPtr->firstContainerPtr; containerPtr != NULL;
@@ -940,12 +986,12 @@ Tk_GetEmbeddedHWnd(winPtr)
  */
 
 HWND
-Tk_GetEmbeddedMenuHWND(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
+Tk_GetEmbeddedMenuHWND(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow*)tkwin;
     Container *containerPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     for (containerPtr = tsdPtr->firstContainerPtr; containerPtr != NULL;
@@ -962,10 +1008,10 @@ Tk_GetEmbeddedMenuHWND(tkwin)
  *
  * TkpClaimFocus --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when someone asks or the input focus
- *	to be put on a window in an embedded application, but the
- *	application doesn't currently have the focus.  It requests the
- *	input focus from the container application.
+ *	This procedure is invoked when someone asks or the input focus to be
+ *	put on a window in an embedded application, but the application
+ *	doesn't currently have the focus. It requests the input focus from the
+ *	container application.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -977,12 +1023,12 @@ Tk_GetEmbeddedMenuHWND(tkwin)
  */
 
 void
-TkpClaimFocus(topLevelPtr, force)
-    TkWindow *topLevelPtr;		/* Top-level window containing desired
-					 * focus window; should be embedded. */
-    int force;				/* One means that the container should
-					 * claim the focus if it doesn't
-					 * currently have it. */
+TkpClaimFocus(
+    TkWindow *topLevelPtr,	/* Top-level window containing desired focus
+				 * window; should be embedded. */
+    int force)			/* One means that the container should claim
+				 * the focus if it doesn't currently have
+				 * it. */
 {
     HWND hwnd = GetParent(Tk_GetHWND(topLevelPtr->window));
     SendMessage(hwnd, TK_CLAIMFOCUS, (WPARAM) force, 0);
@@ -993,13 +1039,13 @@ TkpClaimFocus(topLevelPtr, force)
  *
  * TkpRedirectKeyEvent --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a key press or release event
- *	arrives for an application that does not believe it owns the
- *	input focus.  This can happen because of embedding; for example,
- *	X can send an event to an embedded application when the real
- *	focus window is in the container application and is an ancestor
- *	of the container.  This procedure's job is to forward the event
- *	back to the application where it really belongs.
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a key press or release event arrives
+ *	for an application that does not believe it owns the input focus.
+ *	This can happen because of embedding; for example, X can send an event
+ *	to an embedded application when the real focus window is in the
+ *	container application and is an ancestor of the container. This
+ *	procedure's job is to forward the event back to the application where
+ *	it really belongs.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1011,11 +1057,11 @@ TkpClaimFocus(topLevelPtr, force)
  */
 
 void
-TkpRedirectKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to which the event was originally
+TkpRedirectKeyEvent(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Window to which the event was originally
 				 * reported. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X event to redirect (should be KeyPress
-				 * or KeyRelease). */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* X event to redirect (should be KeyPress or
+				 * KeyRelease). */
 {
     /* not implemented */
 }
@@ -1025,9 +1071,9 @@ TkpRedirectKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
  *
  * EmbedWindowDeleted --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a window involved in embedding
- *	(as either the container or the embedded application) is
- *	destroyed.  It cleans up the Container structure for the window.
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a window involved in embedding (as
+ *	either the container or the embedded application) is destroyed. It
+ *	cleans up the Container structure for the window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1039,19 +1085,18 @@ TkpRedirectKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-EmbedWindowDeleted(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Tk's information about window that
-				 * was deleted. */
+EmbedWindowDeleted(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Tk's information about window that was
+				 * deleted. */
 {
     Container *containerPtr, *prevPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * Find the Container structure for this window work.  Delete the
+     * Find the Container structure for this window work. Delete the
      * information about the embedded application and free the container's
-     * record.
-     * The main container may be null. [Bug #476176]
+     * record. The main container may be null. [Bug #476176]
      */
 
     prevPtr = NULL;
@@ -1085,3 +1130,11 @@ EmbedWindowDeleted(winPtr)
 	ckfree((char *) containerPtr);
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinFont.c b/win/tkWinFont.c
index 98b24eb..35619c7 100644
--- a/win/tkWinFont.c
+++ b/win/tkWinFont.c
@@ -1,29 +1,29 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinFont.c --
  *
- *	Contains the Windows implementation of the platform-independant
- *	font package interface.
+ *	Contains the Windows implementation of the platform-independant font
+ *	package interface.
  *
- * Copyright (c) 1994 Software Research Associates, Inc. 
+ * Copyright (c) 1994 Software Research Associates, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinFont.c,v 1.25 2004/08/09 23:45:58 mdejong Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinFont.c,v 1.26 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 #include "tkFont.h"
 
 /*
- * The following structure represents a font family.  It is assumed that
- * all screen fonts constructed from the same "font family" share certain
- * properties; all screen fonts with the same "font family" point to a
- * shared instance of this structure.  The most important shared property
- * is the character existence metrics, used to determine if a screen font
- * can display a given Unicode character.
+ * The following structure represents a font family. It is assumed that all
+ * screen fonts constructed from the same "font family" share certain
+ * properties; all screen fonts with the same "font family" point to a shared
+ * instance of this structure. The most important shared property is the
+ * character existence metrics, used to determine if a screen font can display
+ * a given Unicode character.
  *
  * Under Windows, a "font family" is uniquely identified by its face name.
  */
@@ -36,69 +36,69 @@
 typedef struct FontFamily {
     struct FontFamily *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all known font families. */
     int refCount;		/* How many SubFonts are referring to this
-				 * FontFamily.  When the refCount drops to
+				 * FontFamily. When the refCount drops to
 				 * zero, this FontFamily may be freed. */
     /*
      * Key.
      */
-     
+
     Tk_Uid faceName;		/* Face name key for this FontFamily. */
 
     /*
      * Derived properties.
      */
-     
+
     Tcl_Encoding encoding;	/* Encoding for this font family. */
     int isSymbolFont;		/* Non-zero if this is a symbol font. */
-    int isWideFont;		/* 1 if this is a double-byte font, 0 
+    int isWideFont;		/* 1 if this is a double-byte font, 0
 				 * otherwise. */
     BOOL (WINAPI *textOutProc)(HDC, int, int, TCHAR *, int);
-				/* The procedure to use to draw text after
-				 * it has been converted from UTF-8 to the 
+				/* The procedure to use to draw text after it
+				 * has been converted from UTF-8 to the
 				 * encoding of this font. */
     BOOL (WINAPI *getTextExtentPoint32Proc)(HDC, TCHAR *, int, LPSIZE);
 				/* The procedure to use to measure text after
-				 * it has been converted from UTF-8 to the 
+				 * it has been converted from UTF-8 to the
 				 * encoding of this font. */
 
     char *fontMap[FONTMAP_PAGES];
 				/* Two-level sparse table used to determine
 				 * quickly if the specified character exists.
 				 * As characters are encountered, more pages
-				 * in this table are dynamically added.  The
+				 * in this table are dynamically added. The
 				 * contents of each page is a bitmask
 				 * consisting of FONTMAP_BITSPERPAGE bits,
 				 * representing whether this font can be used
 				 * to display the given character at the
-				 * corresponding bit position.  The high bits
+				 * corresponding bit position. The high bits
 				 * of the character are used to pick which
 				 * page of the table is used. */
 
     /*
      * Cached Truetype font info.
      */
-     
+
     int segCount;		/* The length of the following arrays. */
     USHORT *startCount;		/* Truetype information about the font, */
-    USHORT *endCount;		/* indicating which characters this font
-				 * can display (malloced).  The format of
-				 * this information is (relatively) compact,
-				 * but would take longer to search than 
-				 * indexing into the fontMap[][] table. */
+    USHORT *endCount;		/* indicating which characters this font can
+				 * display (malloced). The format of this
+				 * information is (relatively) compact, but
+				 * would take longer to search than indexing
+				 * into the fontMap[][] table. */
 } FontFamily;
 
 /*
- * The following structure encapsulates an individual screen font.  A font
+ * The following structure encapsulates an individual screen font. A font
  * object is made up of however many SubFonts are necessary to display a
  * stream of multilingual characters.
  */
 
 typedef struct SubFont {
-    char **fontMap;		/* Pointer to font map from the FontFamily, 
+    char **fontMap;		/* Pointer to font map from the FontFamily,
 				 * cached here to save a dereference. */
-    HFONT hFont;		/* The specific screen font that will be
-				 * used when displaying/measuring chars
-				 * belonging to the FontFamily. */
+    HFONT hFont;		/* The specific screen font that will be used
+				 * when displaying/measuring chars belonging
+				 * to the FontFamily. */
     FontFamily *familyPtr;	/* The FontFamily for this SubFont. */
 } SubFont;
 
@@ -111,18 +111,18 @@ typedef struct SubFont {
 #define BASE_CHARS		128
 
 typedef struct WinFont {
-    TkFont font;		/* Stuff used by generic font package.  Must
-				 * be first in structure. */
+    TkFont font;		/* Stuff used by generic font package. Must be
+				 * first in structure. */
     SubFont staticSubFonts[SUBFONT_SPACE];
 				/* Builtin space for a limited number of
 				 * SubFonts. */
     int numSubFonts;		/* Length of following array. */
-    SubFont *subFontArray;	/* Array of SubFonts that have been loaded
-				 * in order to draw/measure all the characters
-				 * encountered by this font so far.  All fonts
+    SubFont *subFontArray;	/* Array of SubFonts that have been loaded in
+				 * order to draw/measure all the characters
+				 * encountered by this font so far. All fonts
 				 * start off with one SubFont initialized by
 				 * AllocFont() from the original set of font
-				 * attributes.  Usually points to
+				 * attributes. Usually points to
 				 * staticSubFonts, but may point to malloced
 				 * space if there are lots of SubFonts. */
 
@@ -131,10 +131,10 @@ typedef struct WinFont {
 				 * offscreen measurements. */
     int pixelSize;		/* Original pixel size used when font was
 				 * constructed. */
-    int widths[BASE_CHARS];	/* Widths of first 128 chars in the base
-				 * font, for handling common case.  The base
-				 * font is always used to draw characters
-				 * between 0x0000 and 0x007f. */
+    int widths[BASE_CHARS];	/* Widths of first 128 chars in the base font,
+				 * for handling common case. The base font is
+				 * always used to draw characters between
+				 * 0x0000 and 0x007f. */
 } WinFont;
 
 /*
@@ -168,11 +168,11 @@ static TkStateMap systemMap[] = {
 };
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    FontFamily *fontFamilyList; /* The list of font families that are 
-				 * currently loaded.  As screen fonts
-				 * are loaded, this list grows to hold 
-				 * information about what characters
-				 * exist in each font family.  */
+    FontFamily *fontFamilyList; /* The list of font families that are
+				 * currently loaded. As screen fonts are
+				 * loaded, this list grows to hold information
+				 * about what characters exist in each font
+				 * family.  */
     Tcl_HashTable uidTable;
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
@@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 /*
  * Information cached about the system at startup time.
  */
- 
+
 static Tcl_Encoding systemEncoding;
 
 /*
@@ -188,10 +188,10 @@ static Tcl_Encoding systemEncoding;
  */
 
 static FontFamily *	AllocFontFamily(HDC hdc, HFONT hFont, int base);
-static SubFont *	CanUseFallback(HDC hdc, WinFont *fontPtr, 
+static SubFont *	CanUseFallback(HDC hdc, WinFont *fontPtr,
 			    char *fallbackName,	int ch,
 			    SubFont **subFontPtrPtr);
-static SubFont *	CanUseFallbackWithAliases(HDC hdc, WinFont *fontPtr, 
+static SubFont *	CanUseFallbackWithAliases(HDC hdc, WinFont *fontPtr,
 			    char *faceName, int ch, Tcl_DString *nameTriedPtr,
 			    SubFont **subFontPtrPtr);
 static int		FamilyExists(HDC hdc, CONST char *faceName);
@@ -204,44 +204,44 @@ static int		FontMapLookup(SubFont *subFontPtr, int ch);
 static void		FreeFontFamily(FontFamily *familyPtr);
 static HFONT		GetScreenFont(CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr,
 			    CONST char *faceName, int pixelSize);
-static void		InitFont(Tk_Window tkwin, HFONT hFont, 
+static void		InitFont(Tk_Window tkwin, HFONT hFont,
 			    int overstrike, WinFont *tkFontPtr);
-static void		InitSubFont(HDC hdc, HFONT hFont, int base, 
+static void		InitSubFont(HDC hdc, HFONT hFont, int base,
 			    SubFont *subFontPtr);
-static int		LoadFontRanges(HDC hdc, HFONT hFont, 
+static int		LoadFontRanges(HDC hdc, HFONT hFont,
 			    USHORT **startCount, USHORT **endCount,
 			    int *symbolPtr);
-static void		MultiFontTextOut(HDC hdc, WinFont *fontPtr, 
+static void		MultiFontTextOut(HDC hdc, WinFont *fontPtr,
 			    CONST char *source, int numBytes, int x, int y);
 static void		ReleaseFont(WinFont *fontPtr);
 static void		ReleaseSubFont(SubFont *subFontPtr);
 static int		SeenName(CONST char *name, Tcl_DString *dsPtr);
 static void		SwapLong(PULONG p);
 static void		SwapShort(USHORT *p);
-static int CALLBACK	WinFontCanUseProc(ENUMLOGFONT *lfPtr, 
-			    NEWTEXTMETRIC *tmPtr, int fontType, 
+static int CALLBACK	WinFontCanUseProc(ENUMLOGFONT *lfPtr,
+			    NEWTEXTMETRIC *tmPtr, int fontType,
 			    LPARAM lParam);
-static int CALLBACK	WinFontExistProc(ENUMLOGFONT *lfPtr, 
-			    NEWTEXTMETRIC *tmPtr, int fontType, 
+static int CALLBACK	WinFontExistProc(ENUMLOGFONT *lfPtr,
+			    NEWTEXTMETRIC *tmPtr, int fontType,
 			    LPARAM lParam);
-static int CALLBACK	WinFontFamilyEnumProc(ENUMLOGFONT *lfPtr, 
-			    NEWTEXTMETRIC *tmPtr, int fontType, 
+static int CALLBACK	WinFontFamilyEnumProc(ENUMLOGFONT *lfPtr,
+			    NEWTEXTMETRIC *tmPtr, int fontType,
 			    LPARAM lParam);
 
 /*
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
- * 
+ *
  * TkpFontPkgInit --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is created.  It
- *	initializes all the structures that are used by the 
- *	platform-dependent code on a per application basis.
+ *	This procedure is called when an application is created. It
+ *	initializes all the structures that are used by the platform-dependent
+ *	code on a per application basis.
  *
  * Results:
- *	None.  
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	
+ *
  *	None.
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -253,9 +253,9 @@ TkpFontPkgInit(
 {
     if (TkWinGetPlatformId() == VER_PLATFORM_WIN32_NT) {
 	/*
-	 * If running NT, then we will be calling some Unicode functions 
-	 * explictly.  So, even if the Tcl system encoding isn't Unicode, 
-	 * make sure we convert to/from the Unicode char set. 
+	 * If running NT, then we will be calling some Unicode functions
+	 * explictly. So, even if the Tcl system encoding isn't Unicode, make
+	 * sure we convert to/from the Unicode char set.
 	 */
 
 	systemEncoding = TkWinGetUnicodeEncoding();
@@ -270,17 +270,18 @@ TkpFontPkgInit(
  *	Map a platform-specific native font name to a TkFont.
  *
  * Results:
- * 	The return value is a pointer to a TkFont that represents the
- *	native font.  If a native font by the given name could not be
- *	found, the return value is NULL.  
+
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a TkFont that represents the native
+ *	font. If a native font by the given name could not be found, the
+ *	return value is NULL.
  *
- *	Every call to this procedure returns a new TkFont structure,
- *	even if the name has already been seen before.  The caller should
- *	call TkpDeleteFont() when the font is no longer needed.
+ *	Every call to this procedure returns a new TkFont structure, even if
+ *	the name has already been seen before. The caller should call
+ *	TkpDeleteFont() when the font is no longer needed.
  *
- *	The caller is responsible for initializing the memory associated
- *	with the generic TkFont when this function returns and releasing
- *	the contents of the generic TkFont before calling TkpDeleteFont().
+ *	The caller is responsible for initializing the memory associated with
+ *	the generic TkFont when this function returns and releasing the
+ *	contents of the generic TkFont before calling TkpDeleteFont().
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory allocated.
@@ -311,25 +312,25 @@ TkpGetNativeFont(
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * TkpGetFontFromAttributes -- 
+ * TkpGetFontFromAttributes --
  *
- *	Given a desired set of attributes for a font, find a font with
- *	the closest matching attributes.
+ *	Given a desired set of attributes for a font, find a font with the
+ *	closest matching attributes.
  *
  * Results:
- * 	The return value is a pointer to a TkFont that represents the
- *	font with the desired attributes.  If a font with the desired
- *	attributes could not be constructed, some other font will be
- *	substituted automatically.  NULL is never returned.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a TkFont that represents the font
+ *	with the desired attributes. If a font with the desired attributes
+ *	could not be constructed, some other font will be substituted
+ *	automatically. NULL is never returned.
  *
- *	Every call to this procedure returns a new TkFont structure,
- *	even if the specified attributes have already been seen before.
- *	The caller should call TkpDeleteFont() to free the platform-
- *	specific data when the font is no longer needed.  
+ *	Every call to this procedure returns a new TkFont structure, even if
+ *	the specified attributes have already been seen before. The caller
+ *	should call TkpDeleteFont() to free the platform- specific data when
+ *	the font is no longer needed.
  *
- *	The caller is responsible for initializing the memory associated
- *	with the generic TkFont when this function returns and releasing
- *	the contents of the generic TkFont before calling TkpDeleteFont().
+ *	The caller is responsible for initializing the memory associated with
+ *	the generic TkFont when this function returns and releasing the
+ *	contents of the generic TkFont before calling TkpDeleteFont().
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory allocated.
@@ -339,11 +340,11 @@ TkpGetNativeFont(
 
 TkFont *
 TkpGetFontFromAttributes(
-    TkFont *tkFontPtr,		/* If non-NULL, store the information in
-				 * this existing TkFont structure, rather than
+    TkFont *tkFontPtr,		/* If non-NULL, store the information in this
+				 * existing TkFont structure, rather than
 				 * allocating a new structure to hold the
 				 * font; the existing contents of the font
-				 * will be released.  If NULL, a new TkFont
+				 * will be released. If NULL, a new TkFont
 				 * structure is allocated. */
     Tk_Window tkwin,		/* For display where font will be used. */
     CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr)
@@ -399,10 +400,11 @@ TkpGetFontFromAttributes(
 	}
     }
 
-    found:
+  found:
     ReleaseDC(hwnd, hdc);
 
-    hFont = GetScreenFont(faPtr, faceName, TkFontGetPixels(tkwin, faPtr->size));
+    hFont = GetScreenFont(faPtr, faceName,
+	    TkFontGetPixels(tkwin, faPtr->size));
     if (tkFontPtr == NULL) {
 	fontPtr = (WinFont *) ckalloc(sizeof(WinFont));
     } else {
@@ -420,9 +422,9 @@ TkpGetFontFromAttributes(
  * TkpDeleteFont --
  *
  *	Called to release a font allocated by TkpGetNativeFont() or
- *	TkpGetFontFromAttributes().  The caller should have already
- *	released the fields of the TkFont that are used exclusively by
- *	the generic TkFont code.
+ *	TkpGetFontFromAttributes(). The caller should have already released
+ *	the fields of the TkFont that are used exclusively by the generic
+ *	TkFont code.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -448,8 +450,8 @@ TkpDeleteFont(
  *
  * TkpGetFontFamilies, WinFontFamilyEnumProc --
  *
- *	Return information about the font families that are available
- *	on the display of the given window.
+ *	Return information about the font families that are available on the
+ *	display of the given window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Modifies interp's result object to hold a list of all the available
@@ -460,12 +462,12 @@ TkpDeleteFont(
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 void
 TkpGetFontFamilies(
     Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp to hold result. */
     Tk_Window tkwin)		/* For display to query. */
-{    
+{
     HDC hdc;
     HWND hwnd;
     Window window;
@@ -475,18 +477,18 @@ TkpGetFontFamilies(
     hdc	    = GetDC(hwnd);
 
     /*
-     * On any version NT, there may fonts with international names.  
-     * Use the NT-only Unicode version of EnumFontFamilies to get the 
-     * font names.  If we used the ANSI version on a non-internationalized 
-     * version of NT, we would get font names with '?' replacing all 
-     * the international characters.
+     * On any version NT, there may fonts with international names. Use the
+     * NT-only Unicode version of EnumFontFamilies to get the font names. If
+     * we used the ANSI version on a non-internationalized version of NT, we
+     * would get font names with '?' replacing all the international
+     * characters.
      *
-     * On a non-internationalized verson of 95, fonts with international
-     * names are not allowed, so the ANSI version of EnumFontFamilies will 
-     * work.  On an internationalized version of 95, there may be fonts with 
-     * international names; the ANSI version will work, fetching the 
-     * name in the system code page.  Can't use the Unicode version of 
-     * EnumFontFamilies because it only exists under NT.
+     * On a non-internationalized verson of 95, fonts with international names
+     * are not allowed, so the ANSI version of EnumFontFamilies will work. On
+     * an internationalized version of 95, there may be fonts with
+     * international names; the ANSI version will work, fetching the name in
+     * the system code page. Can't use the Unicode version of EnumFontFamilies
+     * because it only exists under NT.
      */
 
     if (TkWinGetPlatformId() == VER_PLATFORM_WIN32_NT) {
@@ -495,10 +497,10 @@ TkpGetFontFamilies(
     } else {
 	EnumFontFamiliesA(hdc, NULL, (FONTENUMPROCA) WinFontFamilyEnumProc,
 		(LPARAM) interp);
-    }	    
+    }
     ReleaseDC(hwnd, hdc);
 }
-
+
 static int CALLBACK
 WinFontFamilyEnumProc(
     ENUMLOGFONT *lfPtr,		/* Logical-font data. */
@@ -526,19 +528,19 @@ WinFontFamilyEnumProc(
  *
  * TkpGetSubFonts --
  *
- *	A function used by the testing package for querying the actual 
- *	screen fonts that make up a font object.
+ *	A function used by the testing package for querying the actual screen
+ *	fonts that make up a font object.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Modifies interp's result object to hold a list containing the 
- *	names of the screen fonts that make up the given font object.
+ *	Modifies interp's result object to hold a list containing the names of
+ *	the screen fonts that make up the given font object.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-	
+
 void
 TkpGetSubFonts(
     Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interp to hold result. */
@@ -549,7 +551,7 @@ TkpGetSubFonts(
     FontFamily *familyPtr;
     Tcl_Obj *resultPtr, *strPtr;
 
-    resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);    
+    resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
     fontPtr = (WinFont *) tkfont;
     for (i = 0; i < fontPtr->numSubFonts; i++) {
 	familyPtr = fontPtr->subFontArray[i].familyPtr;
@@ -563,16 +565,14 @@ TkpGetSubFonts(
  *
  *  Tk_MeasureChars --
  *
- *	Determine the number of bytes from the string that will fit
- *	in the given horizontal span.  The measurement is done under the
- *	assumption that Tk_DrawChars() will be used to actually display
- *	the characters.
+ *	Determine the number of bytes from the string that will fit in the
+ *	given horizontal span. The measurement is done under the assumption
+ *	that Tk_DrawChars() will be used to actually display the characters.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the number of bytes from source that
- *	fit into the span that extends from 0 to maxLength.  *lengthPtr is
- *	filled with the x-coordinate of the right edge of the last
- *	character that did fit.
+ *	The return value is the number of bytes from source that fit into the
+ *	span that extends from 0 to maxLength. *lengthPtr is filled with the
+ *	x-coordinate of the right edge of the last character that did fit.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -583,25 +583,25 @@ TkpGetSubFonts(
 int
 Tk_MeasureChars(
     Tk_Font tkfont,		/* Font in which characters will be drawn. */
-    CONST char *source,		/* UTF-8 string to be displayed.  Need not be
+    CONST char *source,		/* UTF-8 string to be displayed. Need not be
 				 * '\0' terminated. */
-    int numBytes,		/* Maximum number of bytes to consider
-				 * from source string. */
+    int numBytes,		/* Maximum number of bytes to consider from
+				 * source string. */
     int maxLength,		/* If >= 0, maxLength specifies the longest
 				 * permissible line length in pixels; don't
 				 * consider any character that would cross
-				 * this x-position.  If < 0, then line length
+				 * this x-position. If < 0, then line length
 				 * is unbounded and the flags argument is
 				 * ignored. */
     int flags,			/* Various flag bits OR-ed together:
 				 * TK_PARTIAL_OK means include the last char
 				 * which only partially fits on this line.
 				 * TK_WHOLE_WORDS means stop on a word
-				 * boundary, if possible.
-                                 * TK_AT_LEAST_ONE means return at least one
-				 * character (or at least the first partial
-				 * word in case TK_WHOLE_WORDS is also set)
-				 * even if no characters (words) fit. */
+				 * boundary, if possible. TK_AT_LEAST_ONE
+				 * means return at least one character (or at
+				 * least the first partial word in case
+				 * TK_WHOLE_WORDS is also set) even if no
+				 * characters (words) fit. */
     int *lengthPtr)		/* Filled with x-location just after the
 				 * terminating character. */
 {
@@ -618,10 +618,9 @@ Tk_MeasureChars(
     SubFont *lastSubFontPtr;
     CONST char *p, *end, *next, *start;
 
-
     if (numBytes == 0) {
-        *lengthPtr = 0;
-        return 0;
+	*lengthPtr = 0;
+	return 0;
     }
 
     fontPtr = (WinFont *) tkfont;
@@ -632,8 +631,8 @@ Tk_MeasureChars(
 
     /*
      * A three step process:
-     * 1. Find a contiguous range of characters that can all be
-     *    represented by a single screen font.
+     * 1. Find a contiguous range of characters that can all be represented by
+     *    a single screen font.
      * 2. Convert those chars to the encoding of that font.
      * 3. Measure converted chars.
      */
@@ -643,107 +642,103 @@ Tk_MeasureChars(
     start = source;
     end = start + numBytes;
     for (p = start; p < end; ) {
-        next = p + Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch);
-        thisSubFontPtr = FindSubFontForChar(fontPtr, ch, &lastSubFontPtr);
-        if (thisSubFontPtr != lastSubFontPtr) {
-            familyPtr = lastSubFontPtr->familyPtr;
-            Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(familyPtr->encoding, start, 
-                    (int) (p - start), &runString);
-            size.cx = 0;
-            (*familyPtr->getTextExtentPoint32Proc)(hdc, 
-                    Tcl_DStringValue(&runString),
-                    Tcl_DStringLength(&runString) >> familyPtr->isWideFont,
-                    &size);
-            Tcl_DStringFree(&runString);
-            if (maxLength >= 0 && (curX+size.cx) > maxLength) {
-                moretomeasure = 1;
-                break;
-            }
-            curX += size.cx;
-            lastSubFontPtr = thisSubFontPtr;
-            start = p;
-                
-            SelectObject(hdc, lastSubFontPtr->hFont);
-        }
-        p = next;
+	next = p + Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch);
+	thisSubFontPtr = FindSubFontForChar(fontPtr, ch, &lastSubFontPtr);
+	if (thisSubFontPtr != lastSubFontPtr) {
+	    familyPtr = lastSubFontPtr->familyPtr;
+	    Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(familyPtr->encoding, start,
+		    (int) (p - start), &runString);
+	    size.cx = 0;
+	    (*familyPtr->getTextExtentPoint32Proc)(hdc,
+		    Tcl_DStringValue(&runString),
+		    Tcl_DStringLength(&runString) >> familyPtr->isWideFont,
+		    &size);
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&runString);
+	    if (maxLength >= 0 && (curX+size.cx) > maxLength) {
+		moretomeasure = 1;
+		break;
+	    }
+	    curX += size.cx;
+	    lastSubFontPtr = thisSubFontPtr;
+	    start = p;
+
+	    SelectObject(hdc, lastSubFontPtr->hFont);
+	}
+	p = next;
     }
 
     if (!moretomeasure) {
-        /*
-         * We get here if the previous loop was just finished
-         * normally, without a break.  Just measure the last run and
-         * that's it.
-         */
+	/*
+	 * We get here if the previous loop was just finished normally,
+	 * without a break. Just measure the last run and that's it.
+	 */
 
 	familyPtr = lastSubFontPtr->familyPtr;
-        Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(familyPtr->encoding, start,
-                (int) (p - start), &runString);
-        size.cx = 0;
+	Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(familyPtr->encoding, start,
+		(int) (p - start), &runString);
+	size.cx = 0;
 	(*familyPtr->getTextExtentPoint32Proc)(hdc,
 		Tcl_DStringValue(&runString),
-		Tcl_DStringLength(&runString) >> familyPtr->isWideFont, 
+		Tcl_DStringLength(&runString) >> familyPtr->isWideFont,
 		&size);
-        Tcl_DStringFree(&runString);
-        if (maxLength >= 0 && (curX+size.cx) > maxLength) {
-            moretomeasure = 1;
-        } else {
+	Tcl_DStringFree(&runString);
+	if (maxLength >= 0 && (curX+size.cx) > maxLength) {
+	    moretomeasure = 1;
+	} else {
 	    curX += size.cx;
-            p = end;
-        }
+	    p = end;
+	}
     }
 
     if (moretomeasure) {
 	/*
-         * We get here if the measurement of the last run was over the
-         * maxLength limit.  We need to restart this run and do it
-         * char by char, but always in context with the previous text
-         * to account for kerning (especially italics).
+	 * We get here if the measurement of the last run was over the
+	 * maxLength limit. We need to restart this run and do it char by
+	 * char, but always in context with the previous text to account for
+	 * kerning (especially italics).
 	 */
 
-        char buf[16];
-        int dstWrote;
-        int lastSize = 0;
+	char buf[16];
+	int dstWrote;
+	int lastSize = 0;
 
 	familyPtr = lastSubFontPtr->familyPtr;
-        Tcl_DStringInit(&runString);
-        for (p = start; p < end; ) {
-            next = p + Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch);
-            Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, familyPtr->encoding, p,
-                    (int) (next - p), 0, NULL, buf, sizeof(buf), NULL,
-                    &dstWrote, NULL);
-            Tcl_DStringAppend(&runString,buf,dstWrote);
-            size.cx = 0;
-            (*familyPtr->getTextExtentPoint32Proc)(hdc, 
-                    Tcl_DStringValue(&runString),
-                    Tcl_DStringLength(&runString) >> familyPtr->isWideFont,
-                    &size);
-            if ((curX+size.cx) > maxLength) {
+	Tcl_DStringInit(&runString);
+	for (p = start; p < end; ) {
+	    next = p + Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch);
+	    Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, familyPtr->encoding, p,
+		    (int) (next - p), 0, NULL, buf, sizeof(buf), NULL,
+		    &dstWrote, NULL);
+	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&runString,buf,dstWrote);
+	    size.cx = 0;
+	    (*familyPtr->getTextExtentPoint32Proc)(hdc,
+		    Tcl_DStringValue(&runString),
+		    Tcl_DStringLength(&runString) >> familyPtr->isWideFont,
+		    &size);
+	    if ((curX+size.cx) > maxLength) {
 		break;
 	    }
-            lastSize = size.cx;
+	    lastSize = size.cx;
 	    p = next;
 	}
-        Tcl_DStringFree(&runString);
-
-        /*
-         * "p" points to the first character that doesn't fit in the
-         * desired span.  Look at the flags to figure out whether to
-         * include this next character.
-         */
-
-        if ((p < end)
-                && (((flags & TK_PARTIAL_OK) && (curX != maxLength))
-                        || ((p == source) && (flags & TK_AT_LEAST_ONE)
-                                && (curX == 0)))) {
-
-            /*
-             * Include the first character that didn't quite fit in
-             * the desired span.  The width returned will include the
-             * width of that extra character.
-             */
-
-            p = next;
-            curX += size.cx;
+	Tcl_DStringFree(&runString);
+
+	/*
+	 * "p" points to the first character that doesn't fit in the desired
+	 * span. Look at the flags to figure out whether to include this next
+	 * character.
+	 */
+
+	if ((p < end) && (((flags & TK_PARTIAL_OK) && (curX != maxLength))
+		|| ((p==source) && (flags&TK_AT_LEAST_ONE) && (curX==0)))) {
+	    /*
+	     * Include the first character that didn't quite fit in the
+	     * desired span. The width returned will include the width of that
+	     * extra character.
+	     */
+
+	    p = next;
+	    curX += size.cx;
 	} else {
 	    curX += lastSize;
 	}
@@ -753,38 +748,36 @@ Tk_MeasureChars(
     ReleaseDC(fontPtr->hwnd, hdc);
 
     if ((flags & TK_WHOLE_WORDS) && (p < end)) {
+	/*
+	 * Scan the string for the last word break and than repeat the whole
+	 * procedure without the maxLength limit or any flags.
+	 */
 
-        /*
-         * Scan the string for the last word break and than repeat the
-         * whole procedure without the maxLength limit or any flags.
-         */
-
-        CONST char *lastWordBreak = NULL;
-        Tcl_UniChar ch2;
-
-        end = p;
-        p = source;
-        ch = ' ';
-        while (p < end) {
-            next = p + Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch2);
-            if ((ch != ' ') && (ch2 == ' ')) {
-                lastWordBreak = p;
-            }
-            p = next;
-            ch = ch2;
-        }
-
-        if (lastWordBreak != NULL) {
-            return Tk_MeasureChars(
-                tkfont, source, lastWordBreak-source, -1, 0, lengthPtr);
-        } else {
-            if (flags & TK_AT_LEAST_ONE) {
-                p = end;
-            } else {
-                p = source;
-                curX = 0;
-            }
-        }
+	CONST char *lastWordBreak = NULL;
+	Tcl_UniChar ch2;
+
+	end = p;
+	p = source;
+	ch = ' ';
+	while (p < end) {
+	    next = p + Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch2);
+	    if ((ch != ' ') && (ch2 == ' ')) {
+		lastWordBreak = p;
+	    }
+	    p = next;
+	    ch = ch2;
+	}
+
+	if (lastWordBreak != NULL) {
+	    return Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, source, lastWordBreak-source,
+		    -1, 0, lengthPtr);
+	}
+	if (flags & TK_AT_LEAST_ONE) {
+	    p = end;
+	} else {
+	    p = source;
+	    curX = 0;
+	}
     }
 
     *lengthPtr = curX;
@@ -796,7 +789,7 @@ Tk_MeasureChars(
  *
  * Tk_DrawChars --
  *
- *	Draw a string of characters on the screen.  
+ *	Draw a string of characters on the screen.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -814,12 +807,12 @@ Tk_DrawChars(
     GC gc,			/* Graphics context for drawing characters. */
     Tk_Font tkfont,		/* Font in which characters will be drawn;
 				 * must be the same as font used in GC. */
-    CONST char *source,		/* UTF-8 string to be displayed.  Need not be
-				 * '\0' terminated.  All Tk meta-characters
+    CONST char *source,		/* UTF-8 string to be displayed. Need not be
+				 * '\0' terminated. All Tk meta-characters
 				 * (tabs, control characters, and newlines)
 				 * should be stripped out of the string that
-				 * is passed to this function.  If they are
-				 * not stripped out, they will be displayed as
+				 * is passed to this function. If they are not
+				 * stripped out, they will be displayed as
 				 * regular printing characters. */
     int numBytes,		/* Number of bytes in string. */
     int x, int y)		/* Coordinates at which to place origin of
@@ -839,10 +832,10 @@ Tk_DrawChars(
     dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, drawable, &state);
 
     SetROP2(dc, tkpWinRopModes[gc->function]);
-    
-    if ((gc->clip_mask != None) && 
-            ((TkpClipMask*)gc->clip_mask)->type == TKP_CLIP_REGION) {
-        SelectClipRgn(dc, (HRGN)((TkpClipMask*)gc->clip_mask)->value.region);
+
+    if ((gc->clip_mask != None) &&
+	    ((TkpClipMask*)gc->clip_mask)->type == TKP_CLIP_REGION) {
+	SelectClipRgn(dc, (HRGN)((TkpClipMask*)gc->clip_mask)->value.region);
     }
 
     if ((gc->fill_style == FillStippled
@@ -862,7 +855,7 @@ Tk_DrawChars(
 	/*
 	 * Select stipple pattern into destination dc.
 	 */
-	
+
 	dcMem = CreateCompatibleDC(dc);
 
 	stipple = CreatePatternBrush(twdPtr->bitmap.handle);
@@ -886,8 +879,8 @@ Tk_DrawChars(
 
 	/*
 	 * The following code is tricky because fonts are rendered in multiple
-	 * colors.  First we draw onto a black background and copy the white
-	 * bits.  Then we draw onto a white background and copy the black bits.
+	 * colors. First we draw onto a black background and copy the white
+	 * bits. Then we draw onto a white background and copy the black bits.
 	 * Both the foreground and background bits of the font are ANDed with
 	 * the stipple pattern as they are copied.
 	 */
@@ -958,18 +951,17 @@ Tk_DrawChars(
  *
  * MultiFontTextOut --
  *
- *	Helper function for Tk_DrawChars.  Draws characters, using the 
- *	various screen fonts in fontPtr to draw multilingual characters.
- *	Note: No bidirectional support.
+ *	Helper function for Tk_DrawChars. Draws characters, using the various
+ *	screen fonts in fontPtr to draw multilingual characters. Note: No
+ *	bidirectional support.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Information gets drawn on the screen.  
- *	Contents of fontPtr may be modified if more subfonts were loaded 
- *	in order to draw all the multilingual characters in the given 
- *	string.
+ *	Information gets drawn on the screen. Contents of fontPtr may be
+ *	modified if more subfonts were loaded in order to draw all the
+ *	multilingual characters in the given string.
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -981,8 +973,8 @@ MultiFontTextOut(
 				 * following string. */
     CONST char *source,		/* Potentially multilingual UTF-8 string. */
     int numBytes,		/* Length of string in bytes. */
-    int x, int y)		/* Coordinates at which to place origin *
-				 * of string when drawing. */
+    int x, int y)		/* Coordinates at which to place origin of
+				 * string when drawing. */
 {
     Tcl_UniChar ch;
     SIZE size;
@@ -999,27 +991,27 @@ MultiFontTextOut(
 
     end = source + numBytes;
     for (p = source; p < end; ) {
-        next = p + Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch);
-        thisSubFontPtr = FindSubFontForChar(fontPtr, ch, &lastSubFontPtr);
-        if (thisSubFontPtr != lastSubFontPtr) {
-            if (p > source) {
+	next = p + Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch);
+	thisSubFontPtr = FindSubFontForChar(fontPtr, ch, &lastSubFontPtr);
+	if (thisSubFontPtr != lastSubFontPtr) {
+	    if (p > source) {
 		familyPtr = lastSubFontPtr->familyPtr;
  		Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(familyPtr->encoding, source,
 			(int) (p - source), &runString);
-		(*familyPtr->textOutProc)(hdc, x-(tm.tmOverhang/2), y, 
+		(*familyPtr->textOutProc)(hdc, x-(tm.tmOverhang/2), y,
 			Tcl_DStringValue(&runString),
-			Tcl_DStringLength(&runString) >> familyPtr->isWideFont);
-		(*familyPtr->getTextExtentPoint32Proc)(hdc, 
+			Tcl_DStringLength(&runString)>>familyPtr->isWideFont);
+		(*familyPtr->getTextExtentPoint32Proc)(hdc,
 			Tcl_DStringValue(&runString),
-			Tcl_DStringLength(&runString) >> familyPtr->isWideFont, 
+			Tcl_DStringLength(&runString) >> familyPtr->isWideFont,
 			&size);
 		x += size.cx;
 		Tcl_DStringFree(&runString);
 	    }
-            lastSubFontPtr = thisSubFontPtr;
-            source = p;
+	    lastSubFontPtr = thisSubFontPtr;
+	    source = p;
 	    SelectObject(hdc, lastSubFontPtr->hFont);
-            GetTextMetrics(hdc, &tm);
+	    GetTextMetrics(hdc, &tm);
 	}
 	p = next;
     }
@@ -1028,7 +1020,7 @@ MultiFontTextOut(
  	Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(familyPtr->encoding, source,
 		(int) (p - source), &runString);
 	(*familyPtr->textOutProc)(hdc, x-(tm.tmOverhang/2), y,
-                Tcl_DStringValue(&runString),
+		Tcl_DStringValue(&runString),
 		Tcl_DStringLength(&runString) >> familyPtr->isWideFont);
 	Tcl_DStringFree(&runString);
     }
@@ -1041,12 +1033,12 @@ MultiFontTextOut(
  * InitFont --
  *
  *	Helper for TkpGetNativeFont() and TkpGetFontFromAttributes().
- *	Initializes the memory for a new WinFont that wraps the 
+ *	Initializes the memory for a new WinFont that wraps the
  *	platform-specific data.
  *
- *	The caller is responsible for initializing the fields of the
- *	WinFont that are used exclusively by the generic TkFont code, and
- *	for releasing those fields before calling TkpDeleteFont().
+ *	The caller is responsible for initializing the fields of the WinFont
+ *	that are used exclusively by the generic TkFont code, and for
+ *	releasing those fields before calling TkpDeleteFont().
  *
  * Results:
  *	Fills the WinFont structure.
@@ -1055,17 +1047,17 @@ MultiFontTextOut(
  *	Memory allocated.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
- */ 
+ */
 
 static void
 InitFont(
-    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Main window of interp in which font will 
-				 * be used, for getting HDC. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Main window of interp in which font will be
+				 * used, for getting HDC. */
     HFONT hFont,		/* Windows token for font. */
-    int overstrike,		/* The overstrike attribute of logfont used
-				 * to allocate this font.  For some reason,
-				 * the TEXTMETRICs may contain incorrect info
-				 * in the tmStruckOut field. */
+    int overstrike,		/* The overstrike attribute of logfont used to
+				 * allocate this font. For some reason, the
+				 * TEXTMETRICs may contain incorrect info in
+				 * the tmStruckOut field. */
     WinFont *fontPtr)		/* Filled with information constructed from
 				 * the above arguments. */
 {
@@ -1079,7 +1071,7 @@ InitFont(
     Tcl_DString faceString;
     TkFontAttributes *faPtr;
     char buf[LF_FACESIZE * sizeof(WCHAR)];
- 
+
     window  = Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
     hwnd    = (window == None) ? NULL : TkWinGetHWND(window);
     hdc	    = GetDC(hwnd);
@@ -1088,18 +1080,18 @@ InitFont(
     GetTextMetrics(hdc, &tm);
 
     /*
-     * On any version NT, there may fonts with international names.  
-     * Use the NT-only Unicode version of GetTextFace to get the font's 
-     * name.  If we used the ANSI version on a non-internationalized 
-     * version of NT, we would get a font name with '?' replacing all 
-     * the international characters.
+     * On any version NT, there may fonts with international names. Use the
+     * NT-only Unicode version of GetTextFace to get the font's name. If we
+     * used the ANSI version on a non-internationalized version of NT, we
+     * would get a font name with '?' replacing all the international
+     * characters.
      *
-     * On a non-internationalized verson of 95, fonts with international
-     * names are not allowed, so the ANSI version of GetTextFace will work.
-     * On an internationalized version of 95, there may be fonts with 
-     * international names; the ANSI version will work, fetching the 
-     * name in the international system code page.  Can't use the Unicode 
-     * version of GetTextFace because it only exists under NT.
+     * On a non-internationalized verson of 95, fonts with international names
+     * are not allowed, so the ANSI version of GetTextFace will work. On an
+     * internationalized version of 95, there may be fonts with international
+     * names; the ANSI version will work, fetching the name in the
+     * international system code page. Can't use the Unicode version of
+     * GetTextFace because it only exists under NT.
      */
 
     if (TkWinGetPlatformId() == VER_PLATFORM_WIN32_NT) {
@@ -1113,12 +1105,14 @@ InitFont(
 
     faPtr		= &fontPtr->font.fa;
     faPtr->family	= Tk_GetUid(Tcl_DStringValue(&faceString));
-    faPtr->size		= TkFontGetPoints(tkwin, -(tm.tmHeight - tm.tmInternalLeading));
-    faPtr->weight	= (tm.tmWeight > FW_MEDIUM) ? TK_FW_BOLD : TK_FW_NORMAL;
+    faPtr->size =
+	    TkFontGetPoints(tkwin, -(tm.tmHeight - tm.tmInternalLeading));
+    faPtr->weight =
+	    (tm.tmWeight > FW_MEDIUM) ? TK_FW_BOLD : TK_FW_NORMAL;
     faPtr->slant	= (tm.tmItalic != 0) ? TK_FS_ITALIC : TK_FS_ROMAN;
     faPtr->underline	= (tm.tmUnderlined != 0) ? 1 : 0;
     faPtr->overstrike	= overstrike;
-    
+
     fmPtr		= &fontPtr->font.fm;
     fmPtr->ascent	= tm.tmAscent;
     fmPtr->descent	= tm.tmDescent;
@@ -1137,7 +1131,7 @@ InitFont(
 	GetCharWidthW(hdc, 0, BASE_CHARS - 1, fontPtr->widths);
     } else {
 	GetCharWidthA(hdc, 0, BASE_CHARS - 1, fontPtr->widths);
-    } 
+    }
     Tcl_DStringFree(&faceString);
 
     SelectObject(hdc, oldFont);
@@ -1148,10 +1142,9 @@ InitFont(
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * ReleaseFont --
- * 
- *	Called to release the windows-specific contents of a TkFont.
- *	The caller is responsible for freeing the memory used by the
- *	font itself.
+ *
+ *	Called to release the windows-specific contents of a TkFont. The
+ *	caller is responsible for freeing the memory used by the font itself.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1161,7 +1154,7 @@ InitFont(
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 static void
 ReleaseFont(
     WinFont *fontPtr)		/* The font to delete. */
@@ -1181,9 +1174,9 @@ ReleaseFont(
  *
  * InitSubFont --
  *
- *	Wrap a screen font and load the FontFamily that represents
- *	it.  Used to prepare a SubFont so that characters can be mapped
- *	from UTF-8 to the charset of the font.
+ *	Wrap a screen font and load the FontFamily that represents it. Used to
+ *	prepare a SubFont so that characters can be mapped from UTF-8 to the
+ *	charset of the font.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The subFontPtr is filled with information about the font.
@@ -1198,10 +1191,10 @@ static void
 InitSubFont(
     HDC hdc,			/* HDC in which font can be selected. */
     HFONT hFont,		/* The screen font. */
-    int base,			/* Non-zero if this SubFont is being used
-				 * as the base font for a font object. */
-    SubFont *subFontPtr)	/* Filled with SubFont constructed from 
-    				 * above attributes. */
+    int base,			/* Non-zero if this SubFont is being used as
+				 * the base font for a font object. */
+    SubFont *subFontPtr)	/* Filled with SubFont constructed from above
+    				 * attributes. */
 {
     subFontPtr->hFont	    = hFont;
     subFontPtr->familyPtr   = AllocFontFamily(hdc, hFont, base);
@@ -1213,8 +1206,8 @@ InitSubFont(
  *
  * ReleaseSubFont --
  *
- *	Called to release the contents of a SubFont.  The caller is 
- *	responsible for freeing the memory used by the SubFont itself.
+ *	Called to release the contents of a SubFont. The caller is responsible
+ *	for freeing the memory used by the SubFont itself.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1238,26 +1231,24 @@ ReleaseSubFont(
  *
  * AllocFontFamily --
  *
- *	Find the FontFamily structure associated with the given font
- *	name.  The information should be stored by the caller in a 
- *	SubFont and used when determining if that SubFont supports a 
- *	character.
+ *	Find the FontFamily structure associated with the given font name.
+ *	The information should be stored by the caller in a SubFont and used
+ *	when determining if that SubFont supports a character.
  *
- *	Cannot use the string name used to construct the font as the 
- *	key, because the capitalization may not be canonical.  Therefore
- *	use the face name actually retrieved from the font metrics as
- *	the key.
+ *	Cannot use the string name used to construct the font as the key,
+ *	because the capitalization may not be canonical. Therefore use the
+ *	face name actually retrieved from the font metrics as the key.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A pointer to a FontFamily.  The reference count in the FontFamily
- *	is automatically incremented.  When the SubFont is released, the
- *	reference count is decremented.  When no SubFont is using this
- *	FontFamily, it may be deleted.
+ *	A pointer to a FontFamily. The reference count in the FontFamily is
+ *	automatically incremented. When the SubFont is released, the reference
+ *	count is decremented. When no SubFont is using this FontFamily, it may
+ *	be deleted.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new FontFamily structure will be allocated if this font family
- *	has not been seen.  TrueType character existence metrics are
- *	loaded into the FontFamily structure.
+ *	A new FontFamily structure will be allocated if this font family has
+ *	not been seen. TrueType character existence metrics are loaded into
+ *	the FontFamily structure.
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1267,16 +1258,16 @@ AllocFontFamily(
     HDC hdc,			/* HDC in which font can be selected. */
     HFONT hFont,		/* Screen font whose FontFamily is to be
 				 * returned. */
-    int base)			/* Non-zero if this font family is to be
-				 * used in the base font of a font object. */
+    int base)			/* Non-zero if this font family is to be used
+				 * in the base font of a font object. */
 {
     Tk_Uid faceName;
     FontFamily *familyPtr;
     Tcl_DString faceString;
     Tcl_Encoding encoding;
     char buf[LF_FACESIZE * sizeof(WCHAR)];
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     hFont = SelectObject(hdc, hFont);
     if (TkWinGetPlatformId() == VER_PLATFORM_WIN32_NT) {
@@ -1289,7 +1280,7 @@ AllocFontFamily(
     Tcl_DStringFree(&faceString);
     hFont = SelectObject(hdc, hFont);
 
-    familyPtr = tsdPtr->fontFamilyList; 
+    familyPtr = tsdPtr->fontFamilyList;
     for ( ; familyPtr != NULL; familyPtr = familyPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (familyPtr->faceName == faceName) {
 	    familyPtr->refCount++;
@@ -1302,38 +1293,38 @@ AllocFontFamily(
     familyPtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->fontFamilyList;
     tsdPtr->fontFamilyList = familyPtr;
 
-    /* 
-     * Set key for this FontFamily. 
+    /*
+     * Set key for this FontFamily.
      */
 
     familyPtr->faceName = faceName;
 
-    /* 
-     * An initial refCount of 2 means that FontFamily information will
-     * persist even when the SubFont that loaded the FontFamily is released.
-     * Change it to 1 to cause FontFamilies to be unloaded when not in use.
+    /*
+     * An initial refCount of 2 means that FontFamily information will persist
+     * even when the SubFont that loaded the FontFamily is released. Change it
+     * to 1 to cause FontFamilies to be unloaded when not in use.
      */
 
     familyPtr->refCount = 2;
 
-    familyPtr->segCount = LoadFontRanges(hdc, hFont, &familyPtr->startCount, 
+    familyPtr->segCount = LoadFontRanges(hdc, hFont, &familyPtr->startCount,
 	    &familyPtr->endCount, &familyPtr->isSymbolFont);
 
     encoding = NULL;
     if (familyPtr->isSymbolFont != 0) {
 	/*
-	 * Symbol fonts are handled specially.  For instance, Unicode 0393
+	 * Symbol fonts are handled specially. For instance, Unicode 0393
 	 * (GREEK CAPITAL GAMMA) must be mapped to Symbol character 0047
-	 * (GREEK CAPITAL GAMMA), because the Symbol font doesn't have a
-	 * GREEK CAPITAL GAMMA at location 0393.  If Tk interpreted the
-	 * Symbol font using the Unicode encoding, it would decide that
-	 * the Symbol font has no GREEK CAPITAL GAMMA, because the Symbol
-	 * encoding (of course) reports that character 0393 doesn't exist.  
+	 * (GREEK CAPITAL GAMMA), because the Symbol font doesn't have a GREEK
+	 * CAPITAL GAMMA at location 0393. If Tk interpreted the Symbol font
+	 * using the Unicode encoding, it would decide that the Symbol font
+	 * has no GREEK CAPITAL GAMMA, because the Symbol encoding (of course)
+	 * reports that character 0393 doesn't exist.
 	 *
-	 * With non-symbol Windows fonts, such as Times New Roman, if the
-	 * font has a GREEK CAPITAL GAMMA, it will be found in the correct
-	 * Unicode location (0393); the GREEK CAPITAL GAMMA will not be off
-	 * hiding at some other location.
+	 * With non-symbol Windows fonts, such as Times New Roman, if the font
+	 * has a GREEK CAPITAL GAMMA, it will be found in the correct Unicode
+	 * location (0393); the GREEK CAPITAL GAMMA will not be off hiding at
+	 * some other location.
 	 */
 
 	encoding = Tcl_GetEncoding(NULL, faceName);
@@ -1343,16 +1334,16 @@ AllocFontFamily(
 	encoding = Tcl_GetEncoding(NULL, "unicode");
 	familyPtr->textOutProc =
 	    (BOOL (WINAPI *)(HDC, int, int, TCHAR *, int)) TextOutW;
-	familyPtr->getTextExtentPoint32Proc = 
+	familyPtr->getTextExtentPoint32Proc =
 	    (BOOL (WINAPI *)(HDC, TCHAR *, int, LPSIZE)) GetTextExtentPoint32W;
 	familyPtr->isWideFont = 1;
     } else {
-	familyPtr->textOutProc = 
+	familyPtr->textOutProc =
 	    (BOOL (WINAPI *)(HDC, int, int, TCHAR *, int)) TextOutA;
-	familyPtr->getTextExtentPoint32Proc = 
+	familyPtr->getTextExtentPoint32Proc =
 	    (BOOL (WINAPI *)(HDC, TCHAR *, int, LPSIZE)) GetTextExtentPoint32A;
 	familyPtr->isWideFont = 0;
-    } 
+    }
 
     familyPtr->encoding = encoding;
 
@@ -1376,27 +1367,27 @@ AllocFontFamily(
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 static void
 FreeFontFamily(
     FontFamily *familyPtr)	/* The FontFamily to delete. */
 {
     int i;
     FontFamily **familyPtrPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (familyPtr == NULL) {
-        return;
+	return;
     }
     familyPtr->refCount--;
     if (familyPtr->refCount > 0) {
     	return;
     }
     for (i = 0; i < FONTMAP_PAGES; i++) {
-        if (familyPtr->fontMap[i] != NULL) {
-            ckfree(familyPtr->fontMap[i]);
-        }
+	if (familyPtr->fontMap[i] != NULL) {
+	    ckfree(familyPtr->fontMap[i]);
+	}
     }
     if (familyPtr->startCount != NULL) {
 	ckfree((char *) familyPtr->startCount);
@@ -1407,19 +1398,19 @@ FreeFontFamily(
     if (familyPtr->encoding != TkWinGetUnicodeEncoding()) {
 	Tcl_FreeEncoding(familyPtr->encoding);
     }
-    
-    /* 
-     * Delete from list. 
+
+    /*
+     * Delete from list.
      */
-         
+
     for (familyPtrPtr = &tsdPtr->fontFamilyList; ; ) {
-        if (*familyPtrPtr == familyPtr) {
+	if (*familyPtrPtr == familyPtr) {
   	    *familyPtrPtr = familyPtr->nextPtr;
 	    break;
 	}
 	familyPtrPtr = &(*familyPtrPtr)->nextPtr;
     }
-    
+
     ckfree((char *) familyPtr);
 }
 
@@ -1428,19 +1419,17 @@ FreeFontFamily(
  *
  * FindSubFontForChar --
  *
- *	Determine which screen font is necessary to use to display the 
- *	given character.  If the font object does not have a screen font 
- *	that can display the character, another screen font may be loaded 
- *	into the font object, following a set of preferred fallback rules.
+ *	Determine which screen font is necessary to use to display the given
+ *	character. If the font object does not have a screen font that can
+ *	display the character, another screen font may be loaded into the font
+ *	object, following a set of preferred fallback rules.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the SubFont to use to display the given 
- *	character. 
+ *	The return value is the SubFont to use to display the given character.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The contents of fontPtr are modified to cache the results
- *	of the lookup and remember any SubFonts that were dynamically 
- *	loaded.
+ *	The contents of fontPtr are modified to cache the results of the
+ *	lookup and remember any SubFonts that were dynamically loaded.
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1461,7 +1450,7 @@ FindSubFontForChar(
     char *fallbackName;
     SubFont *subFontPtr;
     Tcl_DString ds;
-    
+
     if (ch < BASE_CHARS) {
 	return &fontPtr->subFontArray[0];
     }
@@ -1473,13 +1462,13 @@ FindSubFontForChar(
     }
 
     /*
-     * Keep track of all face names that we check, so we don't check some
-     * name multiple times if it can be reached by multiple paths.
+     * Keep track of all face names that we check, so we don't check some name
+     * multiple times if it can be reached by multiple paths.
      */
-     
+
     Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
     hdc = GetDC(fontPtr->hwnd);
-        
+
     aliases = TkFontGetAliasList(fontPtr->font.fa.family);
 
     fontFallbacks = TkFontGetFallbacks();
@@ -1493,25 +1482,25 @@ FindSubFontForChar(
 
 		goto tryfallbacks;
 	    } else if (aliases != NULL) {
-		/* 
+		/*
 		 * Or if an alias for the base font has a fallback...
 		 */
 
 		for (k = 0; aliases[k] != NULL; k++) {
 		    if (strcasecmp(aliases[k], fallbackName) == 0) {
-		        goto tryfallbacks;
+			goto tryfallbacks;
 		    }
 		}
 	    }
 	}
 	continue;
 
-	/* 
-	 * ...then see if we can use one of the fallbacks, or an
-	 * alias for one of the fallbacks.
+	/*
+	 * ...then see if we can use one of the fallbacks, or an alias for one
+	 * of the fallbacks.
 	 */
 
-	tryfallbacks:
+    tryfallbacks:
 	for (j = 0; fontFallbacks[i][j] != NULL; j++) {
 	    fallbackName = fontFallbacks[i][j];
 	    subFontPtr = CanUseFallbackWithAliases(hdc, fontPtr, fallbackName,
@@ -1523,13 +1512,13 @@ FindSubFontForChar(
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if we can use something from the global fallback list. 
+     * See if we can use something from the global fallback list.
      */
 
     anyFallbacks = TkFontGetGlobalClass();
     for (i = 0; anyFallbacks[i] != NULL; i++) {
 	fallbackName = anyFallbacks[i];
-	subFontPtr = CanUseFallbackWithAliases(hdc, fontPtr, fallbackName, 
+	subFontPtr = CanUseFallbackWithAliases(hdc, fontPtr, fallbackName,
 		ch, &ds, subFontPtrPtr);
 	if (subFontPtr != NULL) {
 	    goto end;
@@ -1537,8 +1526,8 @@ FindSubFontForChar(
     }
 
     /*
-     * Try all face names available in the whole system until we
-     * find one that can be used.
+     * Try all face names available in the whole system until we find one that
+     * can be used.
      */
 
     canUse.hdc = hdc;
@@ -1556,22 +1545,22 @@ FindSubFontForChar(
     }
     subFontPtr = canUse.subFontPtr;
 
-    end:
+  end:
     Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
-    
+
     if (subFontPtr == NULL) {
-        /* 
-         * No font can display this character.  We will use the base font
-         * and have it display the "unknown" character.
-         */
+	/*
+	 * No font can display this character.  We will use the base font and
+	 * have it display the "unknown" character.
+	 */
 
 	subFontPtr = &fontPtr->subFontArray[0];
-        FontMapInsert(subFontPtr, ch);
+	FontMapInsert(subFontPtr, ch);
     }
     ReleaseDC(fontPtr->hwnd, hdc);
     return subFontPtr;
 }
-
+
 static int CALLBACK
 WinFontCanUseProc(
     ENUMLOGFONT *lfPtr,		/* Logical-font data. */
@@ -1619,15 +1608,14 @@ WinFontCanUseProc(
  *	See if the screen font can display the given character.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the screen font cannot display the
- *	character, non-zero otherwise.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the screen font cannot display the character,
+ *	non-zero otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	New pages are added to the font mapping cache whenever the
- *	character belongs to a page that hasn't been seen before.
- *	When a page is loaded, information about all the characters on
- *	that page is stored, not just for the single character in
- *	question.
+ *	New pages are added to the font mapping cache whenever the character
+ *	belongs to a page that hasn't been seen before. When a page is loaded,
+ *	information about all the characters on that page is stored, not just
+ *	for the single character in question.
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1653,29 +1641,28 @@ FontMapLookup(
  *
  * FontMapInsert --
  *
- *	Tell the font mapping cache that the given screen font should be
- *	used to display the specified character.  This is called when no
- *	font on the system can be be found that can display that 
- *	character; we lie to the font and tell it that it can display
- *	the character, otherwise we would end up re-searching the entire
- *	fallback hierarchy every time that character was seen.
+ *	Tell the font mapping cache that the given screen font should be used
+ *	to display the specified character. This is called when no font on the
+ *	system can be be found that can display that character; we lie to the
+ *	font and tell it that it can display the character, otherwise we would
+ *	end up re-searching the entire fallback hierarchy every time that
+ *	character was seen.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	New pages are added to the font mapping cache whenever the
- *	character belongs to a page that hasn't been seen before.
- *	When a page is loaded, information about all the characters on
- *	that page is stored, not just for the single character in
- *	question.
+ *	New pages are added to the font mapping cache whenever the character
+ *	belongs to a page that hasn't been seen before. When a page is loaded,
+ *	information about all the characters on that page is stored, not just
+ *	for the single character in question.
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 FontMapInsert(
-    SubFont *subFontPtr,	/* Contains font mapping cache to be 
+    SubFont *subFontPtr,	/* Contains font mapping cache to be
 				 * updated. */
     int ch)			/* Character to be added to cache. */
 {
@@ -1694,10 +1681,10 @@ FontMapInsert(
  *
  * FontMapLoadPage --
  *
- *	Load information about all the characters on a given page.
- *	This information consists of one bit per character that indicates
- *	whether the associated HFONT can (1) or cannot (0) display the
- *	characters on the page.
+ *	Load information about all the characters on a given page. This
+ *	information consists of one bit per character that indicates whether
+ *	the associated HFONT can (1) or cannot (0) display the characters on
+ *	the page.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1707,12 +1694,13 @@ FontMapInsert(
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static void 
+
+static void
 FontMapLoadPage(
-    SubFont *subFontPtr,	/* Contains font mapping cache to be 
+    SubFont *subFontPtr,	/* Contains font mapping cache to be
 				 * updated. */
-    int row)			/* Index of the page to be loaded into 
-				 * the cache. */
+    int row)			/* Index of the page to be loaded into the
+				 * cache. */
 {
     FontFamily *familyPtr;
     Tcl_Encoding encoding;
@@ -1728,9 +1716,9 @@ FontMapLoadPage(
 
     if (familyPtr->encoding == TkWinGetUnicodeEncoding()) {
 	/*
-	 * Font is Unicode.  Few fonts are going to have all characters, so 
-	 * examine the TrueType character existence metrics to determine 
-	 * what characters actually exist in this font.
+	 * Font is Unicode. Few fonts are going to have all characters, so
+	 * examine the TrueType character existence metrics to determine what
+	 * characters actually exist in this font.
 	 */
 
 	segCount    = familyPtr->segCount;
@@ -1752,24 +1740,23 @@ FontMapLoadPage(
 	}
     } else if (familyPtr->isSymbolFont) {
 	/*
-	 * Assume that a symbol font with a known encoding has all the 
-	 * characters that its encoding claims it supports.  
-	 *	 
-	 * The test for "encoding == unicodeEncoding"
-	 * must occur before this case, to catch all symbol fonts (such 
-	 * as {Comic Sans MS} or Wingdings) for which we don't have 
-	 * encoding information; those symbol fonts are treated as if
-	 * they were in the Unicode encoding and their symbolic
-	 * character existence metrics are treated as if they were Unicode
-	 * character existence metrics.  This way, although we don't know
-	 * the proper Unicode -> symbol font mapping, we can install the
-	 * symbol font as the base font and access its glyphs.
+	 * Assume that a symbol font with a known encoding has all the
+	 * characters that its encoding claims it supports.
+	 *
+	 * The test for "encoding == unicodeEncoding" must occur before this
+	 * case, to catch all symbol fonts (such as {Comic Sans MS} or
+	 * Wingdings) for which we don't have encoding information; those
+	 * symbol fonts are treated as if they were in the Unicode encoding
+	 * and their symbolic character existence metrics are treated as if
+	 * they were Unicode character existence metrics. This way, although
+	 * we don't know the proper Unicode -> symbol font mapping, we can
+	 * install the symbol font as the base font and access its glyphs.
 	 */
 
-        end = (row + 1) << FONTMAP_SHIFT;
+	end = (row + 1) << FONTMAP_SHIFT;
 	for (i = row << FONTMAP_SHIFT; i < end; i++) {
-	    if (Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, encoding, src, 
-		    Tcl_UniCharToUtf(i, src), TCL_ENCODING_STOPONERROR, NULL, 
+	    if (Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, encoding, src,
+		    Tcl_UniCharToUtf(i, src), TCL_ENCODING_STOPONERROR, NULL,
 		    buf, sizeof(buf), NULL, NULL, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 		continue;
 	    }
@@ -1784,18 +1771,16 @@ FontMapLoadPage(
  *
  * CanUseFallbackWithAliases --
  *
- *	Helper function for FindSubFontForChar.  Determine if the
- *	specified face name (or an alias of the specified face name)
- *	can be used to construct a screen font that can display the
- *	given character.
+ *	Helper function for FindSubFontForChar. Determine if the specified
+ *	face name (or an alias of the specified face name) can be used to
+ *	construct a screen font that can display the given character.
  *
  * Results:
  *	See CanUseFallback().
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the name and/or one of its aliases was rejected, the
- *	rejected string is recorded in nameTriedPtr so that it won't
- *	be tried again.
+ *	If the name and/or one of its aliases was rejected, the rejected
+ *	string is recorded in nameTriedPtr so that it won't be tried again.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1806,11 +1791,11 @@ CanUseFallbackWithAliases(
     WinFont *fontPtr,		/* The font object that will own the new
 				 * screen font. */
     char *faceName,		/* Desired face name for new screen font. */
-    int ch,			/* The Unicode character that the new
-				 * screen font must be able to display. */
-    Tcl_DString *nameTriedPtr,	/* Records face names that have already
-				 * been tried.  It is possible for the same
-				 * face name to be queried multiple times when
+    int ch,			/* The Unicode character that the new screen
+				 * font must be able to display. */
+    Tcl_DString *nameTriedPtr,	/* Records face names that have already been
+				 * tried. It is possible for the same face
+				 * name to be queried multiple times when
 				 * trying to find a suitable screen font. */
     SubFont **subFontPtrPtr)	/* Variable to fixup if we reallocate the
 				 * array of subfonts. */
@@ -1818,7 +1803,7 @@ CanUseFallbackWithAliases(
     int i;
     char **aliases;
     SubFont *subFontPtr;
-    
+
     if (SeenName(faceName, nameTriedPtr) == 0) {
 	subFontPtr = CanUseFallback(hdc, fontPtr, faceName, ch, subFontPtrPtr);
 	if (subFontPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1845,9 +1830,9 @@ CanUseFallbackWithAliases(
  *
  * SeenName --
  *
- *	Used to determine we have already tried and rejected the given
- *	face name when looking for a screen font that can support some
- *	Unicode character.
+ *	Used to determine we have already tried and rejected the given face
+ *	name when looking for a screen font that can support some Unicode
+ *	character.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is 0 if this face name has not already been seen,
@@ -1884,21 +1869,21 @@ SeenName(
  *
  * CanUseFallback --
  *
- *	If the specified screen font has not already been loaded into 
- *	the font object, determine if it can display the given character.
+ *	If the specified screen font has not already been loaded into the font
+ *	object, determine if it can display the given character.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to a newly allocated SubFont, owned
- *	by the font object.  This SubFont can be used to display the given
- *	character.  The SubFont represents the screen font with the base set 
- *	of font attributes from the font object, but using the specified 
- *	font name.  NULL is returned if the font object already holds
- *	a reference to the specified physical font or if the specified 
- *	physical font cannot display the given character.
- *
- * Side effects:				       
- *	The font object's subFontArray is updated to contain a reference
- *	to the newly allocated SubFont.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a newly allocated SubFont, owned by
+ *	the font object. This SubFont can be used to display the given
+ *	character. The SubFont represents the screen font with the base set of
+ *	font attributes from the font object, but using the specified font
+ *	name. NULL is returned if the font object already holds a reference to
+ *	the specified physical font or if the specified physical font cannot
+ *	display the given character.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The font object's subFontArray is updated to contain a reference to
+ *	the newly allocated SubFont.
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1909,8 +1894,8 @@ CanUseFallback(
     WinFont *fontPtr,		/* The font object that will own the new
 				 * screen font. */
     char *faceName,		/* Desired face name for new screen font. */
-    int ch,			/* The Unicode character that the new
-				 * screen font must be able to display. */
+    int ch,			/* The Unicode character that the new screen
+				 * font must be able to display. */
     SubFont **subFontPtrPtr)	/* Variable to fix-up if we realloc the array
 				 * of subfonts. */
 {
@@ -1922,10 +1907,10 @@ CanUseFallback(
 	return NULL;
     }
 
-    /* 
+    /*
      * Skip all fonts we've already used.
      */
-     
+
     for (i = 0; i < fontPtr->numSubFonts; i++) {
 	if (faceName == fontPtr->subFontArray[i].familyPtr->faceName) {
 	    return NULL;
@@ -1938,7 +1923,7 @@ CanUseFallback(
 
     hFont = GetScreenFont(&fontPtr->font.fa, faceName, fontPtr->pixelSize);
     InitSubFont(hdc, hFont, 0, &subFont);
-    if (((ch < 256) && (subFont.familyPtr->isSymbolFont)) 
+    if (((ch < 256) && (subFont.familyPtr->isSymbolFont))
 	    || (FontMapLookup(&subFont, ch) == 0)) {
 	/*
 	 * Don't use a symbol font as a fallback font for characters below
@@ -1952,17 +1937,19 @@ CanUseFallback(
     if (fontPtr->numSubFonts >= SUBFONT_SPACE) {
 	SubFont *newPtr;
 
-    	newPtr = (SubFont *) ckalloc(sizeof(SubFont) 
+    	newPtr = (SubFont *) ckalloc(sizeof(SubFont)
 		* (fontPtr->numSubFonts + 1));
 	memcpy((char *) newPtr, fontPtr->subFontArray,
 		fontPtr->numSubFonts * sizeof(SubFont));
 	if (fontPtr->subFontArray != fontPtr->staticSubFonts) {
 	    ckfree((char *) fontPtr->subFontArray);
 	}
+
 	/*
-	 * Fix up the variable pointed to by subFontPtrPtr so it still
-	 * points into the live array.  [Bug 618872]
+	 * Fix up the variable pointed to by subFontPtrPtr so it still points
+	 * into the live array. [Bug 618872]
 	 */
+
 	*subFontPtrPtr = newPtr + (*subFontPtrPtr - fontPtr->subFontArray);
 	fontPtr->subFontArray = newPtr;
     }
@@ -1976,9 +1963,8 @@ CanUseFallback(
  *
  * GetScreenFont --
  *
- *	Given the name and other attributes, construct an HFONT.
- *	This is where all the alias and fallback substitution bottoms
- *	out.
+ *	Given the name and other attributes, construct an HFONT. This is where
+ *	all the alias and fallback substitution bottoms out.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The screen font that corresponds to the attributes.
@@ -1989,13 +1975,13 @@ CanUseFallback(
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static HFONT 
+static HFONT
 GetScreenFont(
     CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr,
 				/* Desired font attributes for new HFONT. */
     CONST char *faceName,	/* Overrides font family specified in font
 				 * attributes. */
-    int pixelSize)		/* Overrides size specified in font 
+    int pixelSize)		/* Overrides size specified in font
 				 * attributes. */
 {
     Tcl_DString ds;
@@ -2007,7 +1993,7 @@ GetScreenFont(
     lf.lfWidth		= 0;
     lf.lfEscapement	= 0;
     lf.lfOrientation	= 0;
-    lf.lfWeight		= (faPtr->weight == TK_FW_NORMAL) ? FW_NORMAL : FW_BOLD;
+    lf.lfWeight = (faPtr->weight == TK_FW_NORMAL) ? FW_NORMAL : FW_BOLD;
     lf.lfItalic		= faPtr->slant;
     lf.lfUnderline	= faPtr->underline;
     lf.lfStrikeOut	= faPtr->overstrike;
@@ -2025,6 +2011,7 @@ GetScreenFont(
 	/*
 	 * We can only store up to LF_FACESIZE wide characters
 	 */
+
 	if (Tcl_DStringLength(&ds) >= (LF_FACESIZE * sizeof(WCHAR))) {
 	    Tcl_DStringSetLength(&ds, LF_FACESIZE);
 	}
@@ -2039,6 +2026,7 @@ GetScreenFont(
 	/*
 	 * We can only store up to LF_FACESIZE characters
 	 */
+
 	if (Tcl_DStringLength(&ds) >= LF_FACESIZE) {
 	    Tcl_DStringSetLength(&ds, LF_FACESIZE);
 	}
@@ -2054,10 +2042,9 @@ GetScreenFont(
  *
  * FamilyExists, FamilyOrAliasExists, WinFontExistsProc --
  *
- *	Determines if any physical screen font exists on the system with 
- *	the given family name.  If the family exists, then it should be
- *	possible to construct some physical screen font with that family
- *	name.
+ *	Determines if any physical screen font exists on the system with the
+ *	given family name. If the family exists, then it should be possible to
+ *	construct some physical screen font with that family name.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is 0 if the specified font family does not exist,
@@ -2079,7 +2066,7 @@ FamilyExists(
 
     /*
      * Just immediately rule out the following fonts, because they look so
-     * ugly on windows.  The caller's fallback mechanism will cause the
+     * ugly on windows. The caller's fallback mechanism will cause the
      * corresponding appropriate TrueType fonts to be selected.
      */
 
@@ -2092,18 +2079,18 @@ FamilyExists(
     if (strcasecmp(faceName, "Helvetica") == 0) {
 	return 0;
     }
-    
+
     Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(systemEncoding, faceName, -1, &faceString);
 
     /*
-     * If the family exists, WinFontExistProc() will be called and 
-     * EnumFontFamilies() will return whatever WinFontExistProc() returns.  
-     * If the family doesn't exist, EnumFontFamilies() will just return a 
+     * If the family exists, WinFontExistProc() will be called and
+     * EnumFontFamilies() will return whatever WinFontExistProc() returns. If
+     * the family doesn't exist, EnumFontFamilies() will just return a
      * non-zero value.
      */
 
     if (TkWinGetPlatformId() == VER_PLATFORM_WIN32_NT) {
-	result = EnumFontFamiliesW(hdc, (WCHAR *) Tcl_DStringValue(&faceString),
+	result = EnumFontFamiliesW(hdc, (WCHAR*) Tcl_DStringValue(&faceString),
 		(FONTENUMPROCW) WinFontExistProc, 0);
     } else {
 	result = EnumFontFamiliesA(hdc, (char *) Tcl_DStringValue(&faceString),
@@ -2112,10 +2099,10 @@ FamilyExists(
     Tcl_DStringFree(&faceString);
     return (result == 0);
 }
-
+
 static char *
 FamilyOrAliasExists(
-    HDC hdc, 
+    HDC hdc,
     CONST char *faceName)
 {
     char **aliases;
@@ -2134,7 +2121,7 @@ FamilyOrAliasExists(
     }
     return NULL;
 }
-
+
 static int CALLBACK
 WinFontExistProc(
     ENUMLOGFONT *lfPtr,		/* Logical-font data. */
@@ -2160,25 +2147,25 @@ typedef struct CMAPTABLE {
 } CMAPTABLE;
 
 typedef struct ENCODINGTABLE {
-    USHORT platform;		/* Platform for which data is targeted.  
-				 * 3 means data is for Windows. */
-    USHORT encoding;		/* How characters in font are encoded.  
-				 * 1 means that the following subtable is 
-				 * keyed based on Unicode. */
-    ULONG offset;		/* Byte offset from beginning of CMAPTABLE 
-				 * to the subtable for this encoding. */
+    USHORT platform;		/* Platform for which data is targeted. 3
+				 * means data is for Windows. */
+    USHORT encoding;		/* How characters in font are encoded. 1 means
+				 * that the following subtable is keyed based
+				 * on Unicode. */
+    ULONG offset;		/* Byte offset from beginning of CMAPTABLE to
+				 * the subtable for this encoding. */
 } ENCODINGTABLE;
 
 typedef struct ANYTABLE {
     USHORT format;		/* Format number. */
-    USHORT length;		/* The actual length in bytes of this 
+    USHORT length;		/* The actual length in bytes of this
 				 * subtable. */
     USHORT version;		/* Version number (starts at 0). */
 } ANYTABLE;
 
 typedef struct BYTETABLE {
     USHORT format;		/* Format number is set to 0. */
-    USHORT length;		/* The actual length in bytes of this 
+    USHORT length;		/* The actual length in bytes of this
 				 * subtable. */
     USHORT version;		/* Version number (starts at 0). */
     BYTE glyphIdArray[256];	/* Array that maps up to 256 single-byte char
@@ -2189,7 +2176,7 @@ typedef struct SUBHEADER {
     USHORT firstCode;		/* First valid low byte for subHeader. */
     USHORT entryCount;		/* Number valid low bytes for subHeader. */
     SHORT idDelta;		/* Constant adder to get base glyph index. */
-    USHORT idRangeOffset;	/* Byte offset from here to appropriate 
+    USHORT idRangeOffset;	/* Byte offset from here to appropriate
 				 * glyphIndexArray. */
 } SUBHEADER;
 
@@ -2198,12 +2185,12 @@ typedef struct HIBYTETABLE {
     USHORT length;		/* The actual length in bytes of this
 				 * subtable. */
     USHORT version;		/* Version number (starts at 0). */
-    USHORT subHeaderKeys[256];	/* Maps high bytes to subHeaders: value is 
+    USHORT subHeaderKeys[256];	/* Maps high bytes to subHeaders: value is
 				 * subHeader index * 8. */
 #if 0
     SUBHEADER subHeaders[];	/* Variable-length array of SUBHEADERs. */
-    USHORT glyphIndexArray[];	/* Variable-length array containing subarrays 
-				 * used for mapping the low byte of 2-byte 
+    USHORT glyphIndexArray[];	/* Variable-length array containing subarrays
+				 * used for mapping the low byte of 2-byte
 				 * characters. */
 #endif
 } HIBYTETABLE;
@@ -2235,8 +2222,8 @@ typedef struct TRIMMEDTABLE {
     USHORT firstCode;		/* First character code of subrange. */
     USHORT entryCount;		/* Number of character codes in subrange. */
 #if 0
-    USHORT glyphIdArray[];	/* Array of glyph index values for 
-				        character codes in the range. */
+    USHORT glyphIdArray[];	/* Array of glyph index values for
+				 * character codes in the range. */
 #endif
 } TRIMMEDTABLE;
 
@@ -2255,16 +2242,16 @@ typedef union SUBTABLE {
  *
  * LoadFontRanges --
  *
- *	Given an HFONT, get the information about the characters that 
- *	this font can display.
+ *	Given an HFONT, get the information about the characters that this
+ *	font can display.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the font has no Unicode character information, the return value
- *	is 0 and *startCountPtr and *endCountPtr are filled with NULL.  
- *	Otherwise, *startCountPtr and *endCountPtr are set to pointers to 
- *	arrays of TrueType character existence information and the return 
- *	value is the length of the arrays (the two arrays are always the 
- *	same length as each other).
+ *	If the font has no Unicode character information, the return value is
+ *	0 and *startCountPtr and *endCountPtr are filled with NULL. Otherwise,
+ *	*startCountPtr and *endCountPtr are set to pointers to arrays of
+ *	TrueType character existence information and the return value is the
+ *	length of the arrays (the two arrays are always the same length as
+ *	each other).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2276,10 +2263,10 @@ static int
 LoadFontRanges(
     HDC hdc,			/* HDC into which font can be selected. */
     HFONT hFont,		/* HFONT to query. */
-    USHORT **startCountPtr,	/* Filled with malloced pointer to 
-				 * character range information. */
-    USHORT **endCountPtr,	/* Filled with malloced pointer to 
-				 * character range information. */
+    USHORT **startCountPtr,	/* Filled with malloced pointer to character
+				 * range information. */
+    USHORT **endCountPtr,	/* Filled with malloced pointer to character
+				 * range information. */
     int *symbolPtr)
  {
     int n, i, swapped, offset, cbData, segCount;
@@ -2325,7 +2312,7 @@ LoadFontRanges(
 		SwapLong(&encTable.offset);
 	    }
 	    if (encTable.platform != 3) {
-		/* 
+		/*
 		 * Not Microsoft encoding.
 		 */
 
@@ -2337,7 +2324,7 @@ LoadFontRanges(
 		continue;
 	    }
 
-	    GetFontData(hdc, cmapKey, encTable.offset, &subTable, 
+	    GetFontData(hdc, cmapKey, encTable.offset, &subTable,
 		    sizeof(subTable));
 	    if (swapped) {
 		SwapShort(&subTable.any.format);
@@ -2364,16 +2351,15 @@ LoadFontRanges(
 		}
 		if (*symbolPtr != 0) {
 		    /*
-		     * Empirically determined:  When a symbol font is
-		     * loaded, the character existence metrics obtained
-		     * from the system are mildly wrong.  If the real range
-		     * of the symbol font is from 0020 to 00FE, then the
-		     * metrics are reported as F020 to F0FE.  When we load
-		     * a symbol font, we must fix the character existence
-		     * metrics.
+		     * Empirically determined: When a symbol font is loaded,
+		     * the character existence metrics obtained from the
+		     * system are mildly wrong. If the real range of the
+		     * symbol font is from 0020 to 00FE, then the metrics are
+		     * reported as F020 to F0FE. When we load a symbol font,
+		     * we must fix the character existence metrics.
 		     *
-		     * Symbol fonts should only use the symbol encoding
-		     * for 8-bit characters [note Bug: 2406]
+		     * Symbol fonts should only use the symbol encoding for
+		     * 8-bit characters [note Bug: 2406]
 		     */
 
 		    for (i = 0; i < segCount; i++) {
@@ -2388,9 +2374,10 @@ LoadFontRanges(
 	}
     } else if (GetTextCharset(hdc) == ANSI_CHARSET) {
 	/*
-	 * Bitmap font.  We should also support ranges for the other
-	 * *_CHARSET values.
+	 * Bitmap font. We should also support ranges for the other *_CHARSET
+	 * values.
 	 */
+
 	segCount = 1;
 	cbData = segCount * sizeof(USHORT);
 	startCount = (USHORT *) ckalloc(cbData);
@@ -2407,11 +2394,11 @@ LoadFontRanges(
 
 /*
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
- * 
+ *
  * SwapShort, SwapLong --
  *
- *	Helper functions to convert the data loaded from TrueType font
- *	files to Intel byte ordering.
+ *	Helper functions to convert the data loaded from TrueType font files
+ *	to Intel byte ordering.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Bytes of input value are swapped and stored back in argument.
@@ -2423,14 +2410,16 @@ LoadFontRanges(
  */
 
 static void
-SwapShort(PUSHORT p)
+SwapShort(
+    PUSHORT p)
 {
     *p = (SHORT)(HIBYTE(*p) + (LOBYTE(*p) << 8));
 }
 
-static void 
-SwapLong(PULONG p)
-{					     
+static void
+SwapLong(
+    PULONG p)
+{
     ULONG temp;
 
     temp = (LONG) ((BYTE) *p);
@@ -2448,3 +2437,11 @@ SwapLong(PULONG p)
     temp += (LONG) ((BYTE) *p);
     *p = temp;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinImage.c b/win/tkWinImage.c
index 70d937c..e07fcdf 100644
--- a/win/tkWinImage.c
+++ b/win/tkWinImage.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinImage.c --
  *
  *	This file contains routines for manipulation full-color images.
@@ -8,23 +8,23 @@
  * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
  * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinImage.c,v 1.8 2003/10/28 22:52:01 hobbs Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinImage.c,v 1.9 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 
-static int		DestroyImage _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage* data));
-static unsigned long	ImageGetPixel _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image, int x, int y));
-static int		PutPixel _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image, int x, int y,
-			    unsigned long pixel));
+static int		DestroyImage(XImage* data);
+static unsigned long	ImageGetPixel(XImage *image, int x, int y);
+static int		PutPixel(XImage *image, int x, int y,
+			    unsigned long pixel);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * DestroyImage --
  *
- *	This is a trivial wrapper around ckfree to make it possible to
- *	pass ckfree as a pointer.
+ *	This is a trivial wrapper around ckfree to make it possible to pass
+ *	ckfree as a pointer.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ static int		PutPixel _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image, int x, int y,
  */
 
 static int
-DestroyImage(imagePtr)
-     XImage *imagePtr;		/* image to free */
+DestroyImage(
+    XImage *imagePtr)		/* Image to free. */
 {
     if (imagePtr) {
 	if (imagePtr->data) {
@@ -65,33 +65,33 @@ DestroyImage(imagePtr)
  */
 
 static unsigned long
-ImageGetPixel(image, x, y)
-    XImage *image;
-    int x, y;
+ImageGetPixel(
+    XImage *image,
+    int x, int y)
 {
     unsigned long pixel = 0;
     unsigned char *srcPtr = &(image->data[(y * image->bytes_per_line)
 	    + ((x * image->bits_per_pixel) / NBBY)]);
 
     switch (image->bits_per_pixel) {
-	case 32:
-	case 24:
-	    pixel = RGB(srcPtr[2], srcPtr[1], srcPtr[0]);
-	    break;
-	case 16:
-	    pixel = RGB(((((WORD*)srcPtr)[0]) >> 7) & 0xf8,
-		    ((((WORD*)srcPtr)[0]) >> 2) & 0xf8,
-		    ((((WORD*)srcPtr)[0]) << 3) & 0xf8);
-	    break;
-	case 8:
-	    pixel = srcPtr[0];
-	    break;
-	case 4:
-	    pixel = ((x%2) ? (*srcPtr) : ((*srcPtr) >> 4)) & 0x0f;
-	    break;
-	case 1:
-	    pixel = ((*srcPtr) & (0x80 >> (x%8))) ? 1 : 0;
-	    break;
+    case 32:
+    case 24:
+	pixel = RGB(srcPtr[2], srcPtr[1], srcPtr[0]);
+	break;
+    case 16:
+	pixel = RGB(((((WORD*)srcPtr)[0]) >> 7) & 0xf8,
+		((((WORD*)srcPtr)[0]) >> 2) & 0xf8,
+		((((WORD*)srcPtr)[0]) << 3) & 0xf8);
+	break;
+    case 8:
+	pixel = srcPtr[0];
+	break;
+    case 4:
+	pixel = ((x%2) ? (*srcPtr) : ((*srcPtr) >> 4)) & 0x0f;
+	break;
+    case 1:
+	pixel = ((*srcPtr) & (0x80 >> (x%8))) ? 1 : 0;
+	break;
     }
     return pixel;
 }
@@ -113,73 +113,74 @@ ImageGetPixel(image, x, y)
  */
 
 static int
-PutPixel(image, x, y, pixel)
-    XImage *image;
-    int x, y;
-    unsigned long pixel;
+PutPixel(
+    XImage *image,
+    int x, int y,
+    unsigned long pixel)
 {
     unsigned char *destPtr = &(image->data[(y * image->bytes_per_line)
 	    + ((x * image->bits_per_pixel) / NBBY)]);
 
     switch  (image->bits_per_pixel) {
-	case 32:
-	    /*
-	     * Pixel is DWORD: 0x00BBGGRR
-	     */
+    case 32:
+	/*
+	 * Pixel is DWORD: 0x00BBGGRR
+	 */
 
-	    destPtr[3] = 0;
-	case 24:
-	    /*
-	     * Pixel is triplet: 0xBBGGRR.
-	     */
+	destPtr[3] = 0;
+    case 24:
+	/*
+	 * Pixel is triplet: 0xBBGGRR.
+	 */
 
-	    destPtr[0] = (unsigned char) GetBValue(pixel);
-	    destPtr[1] = (unsigned char) GetGValue(pixel);
-	    destPtr[2] = (unsigned char) GetRValue(pixel);
-	    break;
-	case 16:
-	    /*
-	     * Pixel is WORD: 5-5-5 (R-G-B)
-	     */
+	destPtr[0] = (unsigned char) GetBValue(pixel);
+	destPtr[1] = (unsigned char) GetGValue(pixel);
+	destPtr[2] = (unsigned char) GetRValue(pixel);
+	break;
+    case 16:
+	/*
+	 * Pixel is WORD: 5-5-5 (R-G-B)
+	 */
 
-	    (*(WORD*)destPtr) = 
-		((GetRValue(pixel) & 0xf8) << 7)
+	(*(WORD*)destPtr) = ((GetRValue(pixel) & 0xf8) << 7)
 		| ((GetGValue(pixel) & 0xf8) <<2)
 		| ((GetBValue(pixel) & 0xf8) >> 3);
-	    break;
-	case 8:
-	    /*
-	     * Pixel is 8-bit index into color table.
-	     */
+	break;
+    case 8:
+	/*
+	 * Pixel is 8-bit index into color table.
+	 */
 
-	    (*destPtr) = (unsigned char) pixel;
-	    break;
-	case 4:
-	    /*
-	     * Pixel is 4-bit index in MSBFirst order.
-	     */
-	    if (x%2) {
-		(*destPtr) = (unsigned char) (((*destPtr) & 0xf0)
+	(*destPtr) = (unsigned char) pixel;
+	break;
+    case 4:
+	/*
+	 * Pixel is 4-bit index in MSBFirst order.
+	 */
+
+	if (x%2) {
+	    (*destPtr) = (unsigned char) (((*destPtr) & 0xf0)
 		    | (pixel & 0x0f));
-	    } else {
-		(*destPtr) = (unsigned char) (((*destPtr) & 0x0f)
+	} else {
+	    (*destPtr) = (unsigned char) (((*destPtr) & 0x0f)
 		    | ((pixel << 4) & 0xf0));
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case 1: {
-	    /*
-	     * Pixel is bit in MSBFirst order.
-	     */
+	}
+	break;
+    case 1: {
+	/*
+	 * Pixel is bit in MSBFirst order.
+	 */
 
-	    int mask = (0x80 >> (x%8));
-	    if (pixel) {
-		(*destPtr) |= mask;
-	    } else {
-		(*destPtr) &= ~mask;
-	    }
+	int mask = (0x80 >> (x%8));
+
+	if (pixel) {
+	    (*destPtr) |= mask;
+	} else {
+	    (*destPtr) &= ~mask;
 	}
 	break;
     }
+    }
     return 0;
 }
 
@@ -200,18 +201,17 @@ PutPixel(image, x, y, pixel)
  */
 
 XImage *
-XCreateImage(display, visual, depth, format, offset, data, width, height,
-	bitmap_pad, bytes_per_line)
-    Display* display;
-    Visual* visual;
-    unsigned int depth;
-    int format;
-    int offset;
-    char* data;
-    unsigned int width;
-    unsigned int height;
-    int bitmap_pad;
-    int bytes_per_line;
+XCreateImage(
+    Display *display,
+    Visual *visual,
+    unsigned int depth,
+    int format,
+    int offset,
+    char *data,
+    unsigned int width,
+    unsigned int height,
+    int bitmap_pad,
+    int bytes_per_line)
 {
     XImage* imagePtr = (XImage *) ckalloc(sizeof(XImage));
     imagePtr->width = width;
@@ -255,40 +255,39 @@ XCreateImage(display, visual, depth, format, offset, data, width, height,
     imagePtr->f.create_image = NULL;
     imagePtr->f.sub_image = NULL;
     imagePtr->f.add_pixel = NULL;
-    
+
     return imagePtr;
 }
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
  * XGetImageZPixmap --
  *
- *	This function copies data from a pixmap or window into an
- *	XImage.  This handles the ZPixmap case only.
+ *	This function copies data from a pixmap or window into an XImage. This
+ *	handles the ZPixmap case only.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a newly allocated image containing the data from the
- *	given rectangle of the given drawable.
+ *	Returns a newly allocated image containing the data from the given
+ *	rectangle of the given drawable.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
- * This procedure is adapted from the XGetImage implementation in TkNT.
- * That code is Copyright (c) 1994 Software Research Associates, Inc.
+ * This procedure is adapted from the XGetImage implementation in TkNT. That
+ * code is Copyright (c) 1994 Software Research Associates, Inc.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static XImage *
-XGetImageZPixmap(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable d;
-    int x;
-    int y;
-    unsigned int width;
-    unsigned int height;
-    unsigned long plane_mask;
-    int	format;
+XGetImageZPixmap(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable d,
+    int x, int y,
+    unsigned int width, unsigned int height,
+    unsigned long plane_mask,
+    int	format)
 {
     TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)d;
     XImage *ret_image;
@@ -305,29 +304,32 @@ XGetImageZPixmap(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
 
     if (format != ZPixmap) {
 	TkpDisplayWarning(
-	    "XGetImageZPixmap: only ZPixmap types are implemented",
-	    "XGetImageZPixmap Failure");
+		"XGetImageZPixmap: only ZPixmap types are implemented",
+		"XGetImageZPixmap Failure");
 	return NULL;
     }
 
     hdc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, d, &state);
 
-    /* Need to do a Blt operation to copy into a new bitmap */
+    /*
+     * Need to do a Blt operation to copy into a new bitmap.
+     */
+
     hbmp = CreateCompatibleBitmap(hdc, width, height);
     hdcMem = CreateCompatibleDC(hdc);
     hbmpPrev = SelectObject(hdcMem, hbmp);
     hPal = state.palette;
     if (hPal) {
-        hPalPrev1 = SelectPalette(hdcMem, hPal, FALSE);
-        n = RealizePalette(hdcMem);
-        if (n > 0) {
-            UpdateColors (hdcMem);
-        }
+	hPalPrev1 = SelectPalette(hdcMem, hPal, FALSE);
+	n = RealizePalette(hdcMem);
+	if (n > 0) {
+	    UpdateColors (hdcMem);
+	}
 	hPalPrev2 = SelectPalette(hdc, hPal, FALSE);
-        n = RealizePalette(hdc);
-        if (n > 0) {
-            UpdateColors (hdc);
-        }
+	n = RealizePalette(hdc);
+	if (n > 0) {
+	    UpdateColors (hdc);
+	}
     }
 
     ret = BitBlt(hdcMem, 0, 0, width, height, hdc, x, y, SRCCOPY);
@@ -351,20 +353,21 @@ XGetImageZPixmap(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
     }
     bmInfo = (BITMAPINFO *) ckalloc(size);
 
-    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biSize               = sizeof(BITMAPINFOHEADER);
-    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biWidth              = width;
-    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biHeight             = -(int) height;
-    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biPlanes             = 1;
-    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biBitCount           = depth;
-    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biCompression        = BI_RGB;
-    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biSizeImage          = 0;
-    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biXPelsPerMeter      = 0;
-    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biYPelsPerMeter      = 0;
-    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biClrUsed            = 0;
-    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biClrImportant       = 0;
+    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biSize		= sizeof(BITMAPINFOHEADER);
+    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biWidth		= width;
+    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biHeight		= -(int) height;
+    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biPlanes		= 1;
+    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biBitCount	= depth;
+    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biCompression	= BI_RGB;
+    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biSizeImage	= 0;
+    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biXPelsPerMeter	= 0;
+    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biYPelsPerMeter	= 0;
+    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biClrUsed		= 0;
+    bmInfo->bmiHeader.biClrImportant	= 0;
 
     if (depth == 1) {
 	unsigned char *p, *pend;
+
 	GetDIBits(hdcMem, hbmp, 0, height, NULL, bmInfo, DIB_PAL_COLORS);
 	data = ckalloc(bmInfo->bmiHeader.biSizeImage);
 	if (!data) {
@@ -379,7 +382,10 @@ XGetImageZPixmap(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
 	    goto cleanup;
 	}
 
-	/* Get the BITMAP info into the Image. */
+	/*
+	 * Get the BITMAP info into the Image.
+	 */
+
 	if (GetDIBits(hdcMem, hbmp, 0, height, data, bmInfo,
 		DIB_PAL_COLORS) == 0) {
 	    ckfree((char *) ret_image->data);
@@ -412,7 +418,10 @@ XGetImageZPixmap(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
 	    goto cleanup;
 	}
 
-	/* Get the BITMAP info into the Image. */
+	/*
+	 * Get the BITMAP info into the Image.
+	 */
+
 	if (GetDIBits(hdcMem, hbmp, 0, height, data, bmInfo,
 		DIB_PAL_COLORS) == 0) {
 	    ckfree((char *) ret_image->data);
@@ -440,7 +449,10 @@ XGetImageZPixmap(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
 	    goto cleanup;
 	}
 
-	/* Get the BITMAP info directly into the Image. */
+	/*
+	 * Get the BITMAP info directly into the Image.
+	 */
+
 	if (GetDIBits(hdcMem, hbmp, 0, height, ret_image->data, bmInfo,
 		    DIB_RGB_COLORS) == 0) {
 	    ckfree((char *) ret_image->data);
@@ -465,9 +477,10 @@ XGetImageZPixmap(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
 
 	if (depth <= 24) {
 	    /*
-	     * This used to handle 16 and 24 bpp, but now just handles 24.
-	     * It can likely be optimized for that. -- hobbs
+	     * This used to handle 16 and 24 bpp, but now just handles 24. It
+	     * can likely be optimized for that. -- hobbs
 	     */
+
 	    unsigned char *smallBitData, *smallBitBase, *bigBitData;
 	    unsigned int byte_width, h, w;
 
@@ -481,7 +494,10 @@ XGetImageZPixmap(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
 	    }
 	    smallBitData = smallBitBase;
 
-	    /* Get the BITMAP info into the Image. */
+	    /*
+	     * Get the BITMAP info into the Image.
+	     */
+
 	    if (GetDIBits(hdcMem, hbmp, 0, height, smallBitData, bmInfo,
 		    DIB_RGB_COLORS) == 0) {
 		ckfree((char *) ret_image->data);
@@ -491,11 +507,14 @@ XGetImageZPixmap(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
 		goto cleanup;
 	    }
 
-	    /* Copy the 24 Bit Pixmap to a 32-Bit one. */
+	    /*
+	     * Copy the 24 Bit Pixmap to a 32-Bit one.
+	     */
+
 	    for (h = 0; h < height; h++) {
 		bigBitData   = ret_image->data + h * ret_image->bytes_per_line;
 		smallBitData = smallBitBase + h * byte_width;
-		
+
 		for (w = 0; w < width; w++) {
 		    *bigBitData++ = ((*smallBitData++));
 		    *bigBitData++ = ((*smallBitData++));
@@ -503,10 +522,17 @@ XGetImageZPixmap(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
 		    *bigBitData++ = 0;
 		}
 	    }
-	    /* Free the Device contexts, and the Bitmap */
+
+	    /*
+	     * Free the Device contexts, and the Bitmap.
+	     */
+
 	    ckfree((char *) smallBitBase);
 	} else {
-	    /* Get the BITMAP info directly into the Image. */
+	    /*
+	     * Get the BITMAP info directly into the Image.
+	     */
+
 	    if (GetDIBits(hdcMem, hbmp, 0, height, ret_image->data, bmInfo,
 		    DIB_RGB_COLORS) == 0) {
 		ckfree((char *) ret_image->data);
@@ -535,12 +561,11 @@ XGetImageZPixmap(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
  *
  * XGetImage --
  *
- *	This function copies data from a pixmap or window into an
- *	XImage.
+ *	This function copies data from a pixmap or window into an XImage.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a newly allocated image containing the data from the
- *	given rectangle of the given drawable.
+ *	Returns a newly allocated image containing the data from the given
+ *	rectangle of the given drawable.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -549,15 +574,13 @@ XGetImageZPixmap(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
  */
 
 XImage *
-XGetImage(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable d;
-    int x;
-    int y;
-    unsigned int width;
-    unsigned int height;
-    unsigned long plane_mask;
-    int	format;
+XGetImage(
+    Display* display,
+    Drawable d,
+    int x, int y,
+    unsigned int width, unsigned int height,
+    unsigned long plane_mask,
+    int	format)
 {
     TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)d;
     XImage *imagePtr;
@@ -569,26 +592,28 @@ XGetImage(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
 	/*
 	 * Avoid unmapped windows or bad drawables
 	 */
+
 	return NULL;
     }
 
     if (twdPtr->type != TWD_BITMAP) {
 	/*
 	 * This handles TWD_WINDOW or TWD_WINDC, always creating a 32bit
-	 * image.  If the window being copied isn't visible (unmapped or
-	 * obscured), we quietly stop copying (no user error).
-	 * The user will see black where the widget should be.
-	 * This branch is likely followed in favor of XGetImageZPixmap as
-	 * postscript printed widgets require RGB data.
+	 * image. If the window being copied isn't visible (unmapped or
+	 * obscured), we quietly stop copying (no user error). The user will
+	 * see black where the widget should be. This branch is likely
+	 * followed in favor of XGetImageZPixmap as postscript printed widgets
+	 * require RGB data.
 	 */
+
 	TkWinDCState state;
 	unsigned int xx, yy, size;
 	COLORREF pixel;
 
 	dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, d, &state);
 
-	imagePtr = XCreateImage(display, NULL, 32,
-		format, 0, NULL, width, height, 32, 0);
+	imagePtr = XCreateImage(display, NULL, 32, format, 0, NULL,
+		width, height, 32, 0);
 	size = imagePtr->bytes_per_line * imagePtr->height;
 	imagePtr->data = ckalloc(size);
 	ZeroMemory(imagePtr->data, size);
@@ -606,11 +631,12 @@ XGetImage(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
 	TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(d, dc, &state);
     } else if (format == ZPixmap) {
 	/*
-	 * This actually handles most TWD_WINDOW requests, but it varies
-	 * from the above in that it really does a screen capture of
-	 * an area, which is consistent with the Unix behavior, but does
-	 * not appear to handle all bit depths correctly. -- hobbs
+	 * This actually handles most TWD_WINDOW requests, but it varies from
+	 * the above in that it really does a screen capture of an area, which
+	 * is consistent with the Unix behavior, but does not appear to handle
+	 * all bit depths correctly. -- hobbs
 	 */
+
 	imagePtr = XGetImageZPixmap(display, d, x, y,
 		width, height, plane_mask, format);
     } else {
@@ -629,6 +655,7 @@ XGetImage(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
 	    /*
 	     * Do a soft warning for the unsupported XGetImage types.
 	     */
+
 	    TkpDisplayWarning(errMsg, "XGetImage Failure");
 	    return NULL;
 	}
@@ -661,3 +688,11 @@ XGetImage(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
 
     return imagePtr;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinInit.c b/win/tkWinInit.c
index bdedb2b..71c98af 100644
--- a/win/tkWinInit.c
+++ b/win/tkWinInit.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinInit.c --
  *
  *	This file contains Windows-specific interpreter initialization
@@ -9,17 +9,17 @@
  * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
  * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinInit.c,v 1.11 2003/02/18 19:18:33 hobbs Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinInit.c,v 1.12 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 
 /*
- * The Init script (common to Windows and Unix platforms) is
- * defined in tkInitScript.h
+ * The Init script (common to Windows and Unix platforms) is defined in
+ * tkInitScript.h
  */
-#include "tkInitScript.h"
 
+#include "tkInitScript.h"
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -30,8 +30,8 @@
  *      tk_library variable.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl completion code (TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR).  Also
- *	leaves information in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl completion code (TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR). Also leaves
+ *	information in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Sets "tk_library" Tcl variable, runs "tk.tcl" script.
@@ -40,13 +40,14 @@
  */
 
 int
-TkpInit(interp)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+TkpInit(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)
 {
     /*
      * This is necessary for static initialization, and is ok otherwise
      * because TkWinXInit flips a static bit to do its work just once.
      */
+
     TkWinXInit(Tk_GetHINSTANCE());
     return Tcl_Eval(interp, initScript);
 }
@@ -56,9 +57,9 @@ TkpInit(interp)
  *
  * TkpGetAppName --
  *
- *	Retrieves the name of the current application from a platform
- *	specific location.  For Windows, the application name is the
- *	root of the tail of the path contained in the tcl variable argv0.
+ *	Retrieves the name of the current application from a platform specific
+ *	location. For Windows, the application name is the root of the tail of
+ *	the path contained in the tcl variable argv0.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the application name in the given Tcl_DString.
@@ -70,9 +71,9 @@ TkpInit(interp)
  */
 
 void
-TkpGetAppName(interp, namePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tcl_DString *namePtr;	/* A previously initialized Tcl_DString. */
+TkpGetAppName(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_DString *namePtr)	/* A previously initialized Tcl_DString. */
 {
     int argc, namelength;
     CONST char **argv = NULL, *name, *p;
@@ -106,8 +107,8 @@ TkpGetAppName(interp, namePtr)
  *
  * TkpDisplayWarning --
  *
- *	This routines is called from Tk_Main to display warning
- *	messages that occur during startup.
+ *	This routines is called from Tk_Main to display warning messages that
+ *	occur during startup.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -119,17 +120,18 @@ TkpGetAppName(interp, namePtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkpDisplayWarning(msg, title)
-    CONST char *msg;		/* Message to be displayed. */
-    CONST char *title;		/* Title of warning. */
+TkpDisplayWarning(
+    CONST char *msg,		/* Message to be displayed. */
+    CONST char *title)		/* Title of warning. */
 {
     Tcl_DString msgString, titleString;
     Tcl_Encoding unicodeEncoding = TkWinGetUnicodeEncoding();
 
     /*
-     * Truncate MessageBox string if it is too long to not overflow
-     * the screen and cause possible oversized window error.
+     * Truncate MessageBox string if it is too long to not overflow the screen
+     * and cause possible oversized window error.
      */
+
 #define TK_MAX_WARN_LEN (1024 * sizeof(WCHAR))
     Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(unicodeEncoding, msg, -1, &msgString);
     Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(unicodeEncoding, title, -1, &titleString);
@@ -144,3 +146,11 @@ TkpDisplayWarning(msg, title)
     Tcl_DStringFree(&msgString);
     Tcl_DStringFree(&titleString);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinInt.h b/win/tkWinInt.h
index 50bbd52..eb04dec 100644
--- a/win/tkWinInt.h
+++ b/win/tkWinInt.h
@@ -2,16 +2,15 @@
  * tkWinInt.h --
  *
  *	This file contains declarations that are shared among the
- *	Windows-specific parts of Tk, but aren't used by the rest of
- *	Tk.
+ *	Windows-specific parts of Tk, but aren't used by the rest of Tk.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinInt.h,v 1.24 2005/06/01 17:54:16 hobbs Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinInt.h,v 1.25 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #ifndef _TKWININT
@@ -33,18 +32,17 @@
 #include "tkPort.h"
 #endif
 
-
 /*
  * Define constants missing from older Win32 SDK header files.
  */
 
 #ifndef WS_EX_TOOLWINDOW
-#define WS_EX_TOOLWINDOW	0x00000080L 
+#define WS_EX_TOOLWINDOW	0x00000080L
 #endif
 
 /*
- * The TkWinDCState is used to save the state of a device context
- * so that it can be restored later.
+ * The TkWinDCState is used to save the state of a device context so that it
+ * can be restored later.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkWinDCState {
@@ -53,8 +51,8 @@ typedef struct TkWinDCState {
 } TkWinDCState;
 
 /*
- * The TkWinDrawable is the internal implementation of an X Drawable (either
- * a Window or a Pixmap).  The following constants define the valid Drawable
+ * The TkWinDrawable is the internal implementation of an X Drawable (either a
+ * Window or a Pixmap). The following constants define the valid Drawable
  * types.
  */
 
@@ -105,11 +103,11 @@ typedef struct {
     HPALETTE palette;		/* Palette handle used when drawing. */
     UINT size;			/* Number of entries in the palette. */
     int stale;			/* 1 if palette needs to be realized,
-				 * otherwise 0.  If the palette is stale,
-				 * then an idle handler is scheduled to
-				 * realize the palette. */
-    Tcl_HashTable refCounts;	/* Hash table of palette entry reference counts
-				 * indexed by pixel value. */
+				 * otherwise 0. If the palette is stale, then
+				 * an idle handler is scheduled to realize the
+				 * palette. */
+    Tcl_HashTable refCounts;	/* Hash table of palette entry reference
+				 * counts indexed by pixel value. */
 } TkWinColormap;
 
 /*
@@ -135,8 +133,8 @@ extern int tkpWinRopModes[];
 extern int tkpWinBltModes[];
 
 /*
- * The following defines are used with TkWinGetBorderPixels to get the
- * extra 2 border colors from a Tk_3DBorder.
+ * The following defines are used with TkWinGetBorderPixels to get the extra 2
+ * border colors from a Tk_3DBorder.
  */
 
 #define TK_3D_LIGHT2 TK_3D_DARK_GC+1
@@ -152,46 +150,51 @@ extern int tkpWinBltModes[];
  * We need to specially add the TkWinChildProc because of the special
  * prototype it has (doesn't fit into stubs schema)
  */
+
 #ifdef BUILD_tk
 #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS
 #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT
 #endif
 
-EXTERN LRESULT CALLBACK	TkWinChildProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message,
-			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
+EXTERN LRESULT CALLBACK	TkWinChildProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
 
 /*
  * Special proc needed as tsd accessor function between
  * tkWinX.c:GenerateXEvent and tkWinClipboard.c:UpdateClipboard
  */
-EXTERN void	TkWinUpdatingClipboard(int mode);
+
+EXTERN void		TkWinUpdatingClipboard(int mode);
 
 /*
  * Used by tkWinDialog.c to associate the right icon with tk_messageBox
  */
-EXTERN HICON	TkWinGetIcon(Tk_Window tkw, DWORD iconsize);
+
+EXTERN HICON		TkWinGetIcon(Tk_Window tkw, DWORD iconsize);
 
 /*
- * Used by tkWinX.c on for certain system display change messages
- * and cleanup up containers
+ * Used by tkWinX.c on for certain system display change messages and cleanup
+ * up containers
  */
-EXTERN void	TkWinDisplayChanged(Display *display);
-void	TkWinCleanupContainerList(void);
+
+EXTERN void		TkWinDisplayChanged(Display *display);
+void			TkWinCleanupContainerList(void);
 
 /*
- * Used by tkWinWm.c for embedded menu handling.  May become public.
+ * Used by tkWinWm.c for embedded menu handling. May become public.
  */
-EXTERN HWND	Tk_GetMenuHWND(Tk_Window tkwin);
-EXTERN HWND	Tk_GetEmbeddedMenuHWND(Tk_Window tkwin);
+
+EXTERN HWND		Tk_GetMenuHWND(Tk_Window tkwin);
+EXTERN HWND		Tk_GetEmbeddedMenuHWND(Tk_Window tkwin);
 
 /*
- * The following structure keeps track of whether we are using the 
- * multi-byte or the wide-character interfaces to the operating system.
- * System calls should be made through the following function table.
+ * The following structure keeps track of whether we are using the multi-byte
+ * or the wide-character interfaces to the operating system. System calls
+ * should be made through the following function table.
  *
  * While some system calls need to use this A/W jump-table, it is not
- * necessary for all calls to do it, which is why you won't see this
- * used throughout the Tk code, but only in key areas. -- hobbs
+ * necessary for all calls to do it, which is why you won't see this used
+ * throughout the Tk code, but only in key areas. -- hobbs
  */
 
 typedef struct TkWinProcs {
@@ -221,24 +224,28 @@ EXTERN TkWinProcs *tkWinProcs;
  */
 
 
-extern Tcl_Encoding TkWinGetKeyInputEncoding _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
-extern Tcl_Encoding TkWinGetUnicodeEncoding _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+extern Tcl_Encoding	TkWinGetKeyInputEncoding(void);
+extern Tcl_Encoding	TkWinGetUnicodeEncoding(void);
 
 /*
  * Values returned by TkWinGetPlatformTheme.
  */
+
 #define TK_THEME_WIN_CLASSIC    1
 #define TK_THEME_WIN_XP         2
 
 /*
- *  The following is implemented in tkWinWm and used by tkWinEmbed.c
+ * The following is implemented in tkWinWm and used by tkWinEmbed.c
  */
-void	TkpWinToplevelWithDraw		_ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
-void	TkpWinToplevelIconify		_ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
-void	TkpWinToplevelDeiconify		_ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
-long	TkpWinToplevelIsControlledByWm	_ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
-long	TkpWinToplevelMove		_ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int x, int y));
-long	TkpWinToplevelOverrideRedirect	_ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int reqValue));
-void	TkpWinToplevelDetachWindow	_ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
-int	TkpWmGetState			_ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+
+void			TkpWinToplevelWithDraw(TkWindow *winPtr);
+void			TkpWinToplevelIconify(TkWindow *winPtr);
+void			TkpWinToplevelDeiconify(TkWindow *winPtr);
+long			TkpWinToplevelIsControlledByWm(TkWindow *winPtr);
+long			TkpWinToplevelMove(TkWindow *winPtr, int x, int y);
+long			TkpWinToplevelOverrideRedirect(TkWindow *winPtr,
+			    int reqValue);
+void			TkpWinToplevelDetachWindow(TkWindow *winPtr);
+int			TkpWmGetState(TkWindow *winPtr);
+
 #endif /* _TKWININT */
diff --git a/win/tkWinKey.c b/win/tkWinKey.c
index 7f5a338..f43c6e9 100644
--- a/win/tkWinKey.c
+++ b/win/tkWinKey.c
@@ -9,58 +9,60 @@
  * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
  * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinKey.c,v 1.14 2001/05/30 22:41:11 hobbs Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinKey.c,v 1.15 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
+
 /*
- * The keymap table holds mappings of Windows keycodes to X keysyms.
- * If Windows ever comes along and changes the value of their keycodes,
- * this will break all kinds of things.  However, this table lookup is much
- * faster than the alternative, in which we walked a list of keycodes looking
- * for a match.  Since this lookup is performed for every Windows keypress
- * event, it seems like a worthwhile improvement to use the table.
+ * The keymap table holds mappings of Windows keycodes to X keysyms. If
+ * Windows ever comes along and changes the value of their keycodes, this will
+ * break all kinds of things. However, this table lookup is much faster than
+ * the alternative, in which we walked a list of keycodes looking for a match.
+ * Since this lookup is performed for every Windows keypress event, it seems
+ * like a worthwhile improvement to use the table.
  */
+
 #define MAX_KEYCODE 145 /* VK_SCROLL is the last entry in our table below */
 static KeySym keymap[] = {
     NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, XK_Cancel, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, XK_BackSpace, XK_Tab,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, XK_Clear, XK_Return, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, XK_Shift_L, XK_Control_L, XK_Alt_L, XK_Pause,
-	XK_Caps_Lock, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, XK_Escape, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, XK_space, XK_Prior, XK_Next,
-	XK_End, XK_Home, XK_Left, XK_Up, XK_Right,
-	XK_Down, XK_Select, XK_Print, XK_Execute, NoSymbol,
-	XK_Insert, XK_Delete, XK_Help, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, XK_Win_L, XK_Win_R, XK_App, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, XK_F1, XK_F2, XK_F3,
-	XK_F4, XK_F5, XK_F6, XK_F7, XK_F8,
-	XK_F9, XK_F10, XK_F11, XK_F12, XK_F13,
-	XK_F14, XK_F15, XK_F16, XK_F17, XK_F18,
-	XK_F19,	XK_F20, XK_F21, XK_F22, XK_F23,
-	XK_F24,	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
-	NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, XK_Num_Lock,
-	XK_Scroll_Lock
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, XK_BackSpace, XK_Tab,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, XK_Clear, XK_Return, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, XK_Shift_L, XK_Control_L, XK_Alt_L, XK_Pause,
+    XK_Caps_Lock, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, XK_Escape, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, XK_space, XK_Prior, XK_Next,
+    XK_End, XK_Home, XK_Left, XK_Up, XK_Right,
+    XK_Down, XK_Select, XK_Print, XK_Execute, NoSymbol,
+    XK_Insert, XK_Delete, XK_Help, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, XK_Win_L, XK_Win_R, XK_App, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, XK_F1, XK_F2, XK_F3,
+    XK_F4, XK_F5, XK_F6, XK_F7, XK_F8,
+    XK_F9, XK_F10, XK_F11, XK_F12, XK_F13,
+    XK_F14, XK_F15, XK_F16, XK_F17, XK_F18,
+    XK_F19, XK_F20, XK_F21, XK_F22, XK_F23,
+    XK_F24, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol,
+    NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, NoSymbol, XK_Num_Lock,
+    XK_Scroll_Lock
 };
 
 /*
  * Prototypes for local procedures defined in this file:
  */
 
-static KeySym		KeycodeToKeysym _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned int keycode,
-			    int state, int noascii));
+static KeySym		KeycodeToKeysym(unsigned int keycode,
+			    int state, int noascii);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -79,11 +81,11 @@ static KeySym		KeycodeToKeysym _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned int keycode,
  */
 
 char *
-TkpGetString(winPtr, eventPtr, dsPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window where event occurred:  needed to
-				 * get input context. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X keyboard event. */
-    Tcl_DString *dsPtr;		/* Uninitialized or empty string to hold
+TkpGetString(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Window where event occurred: needed to get
+				 * input context. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr,		/* X keyboard event. */
+    Tcl_DString *dsPtr)		/* Uninitialized or empty string to hold
 				 * result. */
 {
     KeySym keysym;
@@ -97,7 +99,7 @@ TkpGetString(winPtr, eventPtr, dsPtr)
         }
     } else if (eventPtr->xkey.send_event == -2) {
         /*
-         * Special case for win2000 multi-lingal IME input. 
+         * Special case for win2000 multi-lingal IME input.
          * xkey.trans_chars[] already contains a UNICODE char.
          */
 
@@ -112,19 +114,20 @@ TkpGetString(winPtr, eventPtr, dsPtr)
         len = Tcl_UniCharToUtf((Tcl_UniChar) unichar, buf);
 
         Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, buf, len);
-    } else  {
+    } else {
 	/*
-	 * This is an event generated from generic code.  It has no
-	 * nchars or trans_chars members. 
+	 * This is an event generated from generic code. It has no nchars or
+	 * trans_chars members.
 	 */
 
 	keysym = KeycodeToKeysym(eventPtr->xkey.keycode,
 		eventPtr->xkey.state, 0);
-	if (((keysym != NoSymbol) && (keysym > 0) && (keysym < 256)) 
-		|| (keysym == XK_Return)
-		|| (keysym == XK_Tab)) {
+	if (((keysym != NoSymbol) && (keysym > 0) && (keysym < 256))
+		|| (keysym == XK_Return) || (keysym == XK_Tab)) {
 	    char buf[TCL_UTF_MAX];
-	    int len = Tcl_UniCharToUtf((Tcl_UniChar) (keysym & 255), buf);
+	    int len;
+
+	    len = Tcl_UniCharToUtf((Tcl_UniChar) (keysym & 255), buf);
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, buf, len);
 	}
     }
@@ -136,8 +139,8 @@ TkpGetString(winPtr, eventPtr, dsPtr)
  *
  * XKeycodeToKeysym --
  *
- *	Translate from a system-dependent keycode to a
- *	system-independent keysym.
+ *	Translate from a system-dependent keycode to a system-independent
+ *	keysym.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the translated keysym, or NoSymbol on failure.
@@ -149,10 +152,10 @@ TkpGetString(winPtr, eventPtr, dsPtr)
  */
 
 KeySym
-XKeycodeToKeysym(display, keycode, index)
-    Display* display;
-    unsigned int keycode;
-    int index;
+XKeycodeToKeysym(
+    Display *display,
+    unsigned int keycode,
+    int index)
 {
     int state = 0;
 
@@ -161,32 +164,30 @@ XKeycodeToKeysym(display, keycode, index)
     }
     return KeycodeToKeysym(keycode, state, 0);
 }
-
 
-
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * KeycodeToKeysym --
  *
- *	Translate from a system-dependent keycode to a
- *	system-independent keysym.
+ *	Translate from a system-dependent keycode to a system-independent
+ *	keysym.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the translated keysym, or NoSymbol on failure.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	It may affect the internal state of the keyboard, such as
- *      remembered dead key or lock indicator lamps.
+ *	It may affect the internal state of the keyboard, such as remembered
+ *	dead key or lock indicator lamps.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static KeySym
-KeycodeToKeysym(keycode, state, noascii)
-    unsigned int keycode;
-    int state;
-    int noascii;
+KeycodeToKeysym(
+    unsigned int keycode,
+    int state,
+    int noascii)
 {
     BYTE keys[256];
     int result, deadkey, shift;
@@ -194,14 +195,15 @@ KeycodeToKeysym(keycode, state, noascii)
     unsigned int scancode = MapVirtualKey(keycode, 0);
 
     /*
-     * Do not run keycodes of lock keys through ToAscii().
-     * One of ToAscii()'s side effects is to handle the lights
-     * on the keyboard, and we don't want to mess that up.
+     * Do not run keycodes of lock keys through ToAscii(). One of ToAscii()'s
+     * side effects is to handle the lights on the keyboard, and we don't want
+     * to mess that up.
      */
 
     if (noascii || keycode == VK_CAPITAL || keycode == VK_SCROLL ||
-	    keycode == VK_NUMLOCK)
+	    keycode == VK_NUMLOCK) {
         goto skipToAscii;
+    }
 
     /*
      * Use MapVirtualKey() to detect some dead keys.
@@ -222,27 +224,28 @@ KeycodeToKeysym(keycode, state, noascii)
     if (state & Mod2Mask)
 	keys[VK_MENU] = 0x80;
 
-    /* 
+    /*
      * Make sure all lock button info is correct so we don't mess up the
-     * lights
+     * lights.
      */
 
-    if (state & LockMask)
+    if (state & LockMask) {
 	keys[VK_CAPITAL] = 1;
-    if (state & Mod3Mask)
+    }
+    if (state & Mod3Mask) {
 	keys[VK_SCROLL] = 1;
-    if (state & Mod1Mask)
+    }
+    if (state & Mod1Mask) {
 	keys[VK_NUMLOCK] = 1;
+    }
 
     result = ToAscii(keycode, scancode, keys, (LPWORD) buf, 0);
 
     if (result < 0) {
         /*
-         * Win95/98:
-         * This was a dead char, which is now remembered by the keyboard.
-         * Call ToAscii() again to forget it.
-         * WinNT:
-         * This was a dead char, overwriting any previously remembered
+         * Win95/98: This was a dead char, which is now remembered by the
+         * keyboard. Call ToAscii() again to forget it.
+         * WinNT: This was a dead char, overwriting any previously remembered
          * key. Calling ToAscii() again does not affect anything.
          */
 
@@ -251,12 +254,10 @@ KeycodeToKeysym(keycode, state, noascii)
     }
     if (result == 2) {
         /*
-         * This was a dead char, and there were one previously remembered
-         * by the keyboard.
-         * Call ToAscii() again with proper parameters to restore it.
-         */
-
-        /* 
+         * This was a dead char, and there were one previously remembered by
+         * the keyboard. Call ToAscii() again with proper parameters to
+         * restore it.
+         *
 	 * Get information about the old char
 	 */
 
@@ -270,39 +271,42 @@ KeycodeToKeysym(keycode, state, noascii)
 	 */
 
         memset(keys, 0, 256);
-        if (shift & 1)
+        if (shift & 1) {
             keys[VK_SHIFT] = 0x80;
-        if (shift & 2)
+	}
+        if (shift & 2) {
             keys[VK_CONTROL] = 0x80;
-        if (shift & 4)
+	}
+        if (shift & 4) {
             keys[VK_MENU] = 0x80;
+	}
         ToAscii(deadkey, scancode, keys, (LPWORD) buf, 0);
         return XK_Multi_key;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Keycode mapped to a valid Latin-1 character.  Since the keysyms
-     * for alphanumeric characters map onto Latin-1, we just return it.
+     * Keycode mapped to a valid Latin-1 character. Since the keysyms for
+     * alphanumeric characters map onto Latin-1, we just return it.
      *
-     * We treat 0x7F as a special case mostly for backwards compatibility.
-     * In versions of Tk<=8.2, Control-Backspace returned "XK_BackSpace"
-     * as the X Keysym.  This was due to the fact that we did not
-     * initialize the keys array properly when we passed it to ToAscii, above.
-     * We had previously not been setting the state bit for the Control key.
-     * When we fixed that, we found that Control-Backspace on Windows is
-     * interpreted as ASCII-127 (0x7F), which corresponds to the Delete key.
+     * We treat 0x7F as a special case mostly for backwards compatibility. In
+     * versions of Tk<=8.2, Control-Backspace returned "XK_BackSpace" as the X
+     * Keysym. This was due to the fact that we did not initialize the keys
+     * array properly when we passed it to ToAscii, above. We had previously
+     * not been setting the state bit for the Control key. When we fixed that,
+     * we found that Control-Backspace on Windows is interpreted as ASCII-127
+     * (0x7F), which corresponds to the Delete key.
      *
-     * Upon discovering this, we realized we had two choices:  return XK_Delete
-     * or return XK_BackSpace.  If we returned XK_Delete, that could be
+     * Upon discovering this, we realized we had two choices: return XK_Delete
+     * or return XK_BackSpace. If we returned XK_Delete, that could be
      * considered "more correct" (although the correctness would be dependant
      * on whether you believe that ToAscii is doing the right thing in that
-     * case); however, this would break backwards compatibility, and worse,
-     * it would limit application programmers -- they would effectively be
-     * unable to bind to <Control-Backspace> on Windows.  We therefore chose
-     * instead to return XK_BackSpace (handled here by letting the code
-     * "fall-through" to the return statement below, which works because the
-     * keycode for this event is VK_BACKSPACE, and the keymap table maps that
-     * keycode to XK_BackSpace).
+     * case); however, this would break backwards compatibility, and worse, it
+     * would limit application programmers -- they would effectively be unable
+     * to bind to <Control-Backspace> on Windows. We therefore chose instead
+     * to return XK_BackSpace (handled here by letting the code "fall-through"
+     * to the return statement below, which works because the keycode for this
+     * event is VK_BACKSPACE, and the keymap table maps that keycode to
+     * XK_BackSpace).
      */
 
     if (result == 1 && UCHAR(buf[0]) >= 0x20 && UCHAR(buf[0]) != 0x7F) {
@@ -313,69 +317,63 @@ KeycodeToKeysym(keycode, state, noascii)
      * Keycode is a non-alphanumeric key, so we have to do the lookup.
      */
 
-    skipToAscii:
+  skipToAscii:
     if (keycode < 0 || keycode > MAX_KEYCODE) {
 	return NoSymbol;
     }
     switch (keycode) {
 	/*
-	 * Windows only gives us an undifferentiated VK_CONTROL
-	 * code (for example) when either Control key is pressed.
-	 * To distinguish between left and right, we have to query the
-	 * state of one of the two to determine which was actually
-	 * pressed.  So if the keycode indicates Control, Shift, or Menu
-	 * (the key that everybody else calls Alt), do this extra test.
-	 * If the right-side key was pressed, return the appropriate
-	 * keycode.  Otherwise, we fall through and rely on the
+	 * Windows only gives us an undifferentiated VK_CONTROL code (for
+	 * example) when either Control key is pressed. To distinguish between
+	 * left and right, we have to query the state of one of the two to
+	 * determine which was actually pressed. So if the keycode indicates
+	 * Control, Shift, or Menu (the key that everybody else calls Alt), do
+	 * this extra test. If the right-side key was pressed, return the
+	 * appropriate keycode. Otherwise, we fall through and rely on the
 	 * keymap table to hold the correct keysym value.
 	 */
-	case VK_CONTROL: {
-	    if (GetKeyState(VK_RCONTROL) & 0x80) {
-		return XK_Control_R;
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case VK_CONTROL:
+	if (GetKeyState(VK_RCONTROL) & 0x80) {
+	    return XK_Control_R;
 	}
-	case VK_SHIFT: {
-	    if (GetKeyState(VK_RSHIFT) & 0x80) {
-		return XK_Shift_R;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	break;
+    case VK_SHIFT:
+	if (GetKeyState(VK_RSHIFT) & 0x80) {
+	    return XK_Shift_R;
 	}
-	case VK_MENU: {
-	    if (GetKeyState(VK_RMENU) & 0x80) {
-		return XK_Alt_R;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	break;
+    case VK_MENU:
+	if (GetKeyState(VK_RMENU) & 0x80) {
+	    return XK_Alt_R;
 	}
+	break;
     }
     return keymap[keycode];
 }
 
-
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkpGetKeySym --
  *
- *	Given an X KeyPress or KeyRelease event, map the
- *	keycode in the event into a KeySym.
+ *	Given an X KeyPress or KeyRelease event, map the keycode in the event
+ *	into a KeySym.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the KeySym corresponding to
- *	eventPtr, or NoSymbol if no matching Keysym could be
- *	found.
+ *	The return value is the KeySym corresponding to eventPtr, or NoSymbol
+ *	if no matching Keysym could be found.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	In the first call for a given display, keycode-to-
- *	KeySym maps get loaded.
+ *	In the first call for a given display, keycode-to-KeySym maps get
+ *	loaded.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 KeySym
-TkpGetKeySym(dispPtr, eventPtr)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display in which to map keycode. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Description of X event. */
+TkpGetKeySym(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr,		/* Display in which to map keycode. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Description of X event. */
 {
     KeySym sym;
     int state = eventPtr->xkey.state;
@@ -391,16 +389,16 @@ TkpGetKeySym(dispPtr, eventPtr)
     sym = KeycodeToKeysym(eventPtr->xkey.keycode, state, 0);
 
     /*
-     * Special handling: if this is a ctrl-alt or shifted key, and there
-     * is no keysym defined, try without the modifiers.
+     * Special handling: if this is a ctrl-alt or shifted key, and there is no
+     * keysym defined, try without the modifiers.
      */
 
     if ((sym == NoSymbol) && ((state & ControlMask) || (state & Mod2Mask))) {
-        state &=  ~(ControlMask | Mod2Mask);
+        state &= ~(ControlMask | Mod2Mask);
         sym = KeycodeToKeysym(eventPtr->xkey.keycode, state, 0);
     }
     if ((sym == NoSymbol) && (state & ShiftMask)) {
-        state &=  ~ShiftMask;
+        state &= ~ShiftMask;
         sym = KeycodeToKeysym(eventPtr->xkey.keycode, state, 0);
     }
     return sym;
@@ -411,10 +409,9 @@ TkpGetKeySym(dispPtr, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkpInitKeymapInfo --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to scan keymap information
- *	to recompute stuff that's important for binding, such
- *	as the modifier key (if any) that corresponds to "mode
- *	switch".
+ *	This procedure is invoked to scan keymap information to recompute
+ *	stuff that's important for binding, such as the modifier key (if any)
+ *	that corresponds to "mode switch".
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -426,8 +423,8 @@ TkpGetKeySym(dispPtr, eventPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkpInitKeymapInfo(dispPtr)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display for which to recompute keymap
+TkpInitKeymapInfo(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr)		/* Display for which to recompute keymap
 				 * information. */
 {
     XModifierKeymap *modMapPtr;
@@ -440,9 +437,9 @@ TkpInitKeymapInfo(dispPtr)
     modMapPtr = XGetModifierMapping(dispPtr->display);
 
     /*
-     * Check the keycodes associated with the Lock modifier.  If
-     * any of them is associated with the XK_Shift_Lock modifier,
-     * then Lock has to be interpreted as Shift Lock, not Caps Lock.
+     * Check the keycodes associated with the Lock modifier. If any of them is
+     * associated with the XK_Shift_Lock modifier, then Lock has to be
+     * interpreted as Shift Lock, not Caps Lock.
      */
 
     dispPtr->lockUsage = LU_IGNORE;
@@ -463,9 +460,9 @@ TkpInitKeymapInfo(dispPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Look through the keycodes associated with modifiers to see if
-     * the the "mode switch", "meta", or "alt" keysyms are associated
-     * with any modifiers.  If so, remember their modifier mask bits.
+     * Look through the keycodes associated with modifiers to see if the the
+     * "mode switch", "meta", or "alt" keysyms are associated with any
+     * modifiers. If so, remember their modifier mask bits.
      */
 
     dispPtr->modeModMask = 0;
@@ -518,7 +515,7 @@ TkpInitKeymapInfo(dispPtr)
 	    KeyCode *new;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Ran out of space in the array;  grow it.
+	     * Ran out of space in the array; grow it.
 	     */
 
 	    arraySize *= 2;
@@ -537,34 +534,32 @@ TkpInitKeymapInfo(dispPtr)
 }
 
 /*
- * When mapping from a keysym to a keycode, need
- * information about the modifier state that should be used
- * so that when they call XKeycodeToKeysym taking into
- * account the xkey.state, they will get back the original
- * keysym.
+ * When mapping from a keysym to a keycode, need information about the
+ * modifier state that should be used so that when they call XKeycodeToKeysym
+ * taking into account the xkey.state, they will get back the original keysym.
  */
 
 void
-TkpSetKeycodeAndState(tkwin, keySym, eventPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    KeySym keySym;
-    XEvent *eventPtr;
+TkpSetKeycodeAndState(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    KeySym keySym,
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
 {
     int i;
     SHORT result;
     int shift;
-    
+
     eventPtr->xkey.keycode = 0;
     if (keySym == NoSymbol) {
         return;
     }
 
     /*
-     * We check our private map first for a virtual keycode,
-     * as VkKeyScan will return values that don't map to X
-     * for the "extended" Syms.  This may be due to just casting
-     * problems below, but this works.
+     * We check our private map first for a virtual keycode, as VkKeyScan will
+     * return values that don't map to X for the "extended" Syms. This may be
+     * due to just casting problems below, but this works.
      */
+
     for (i = 0; i <= MAX_KEYCODE; i++) {
 	if (keymap[i] == keySym) {
             eventPtr->xkey.keycode = i;
@@ -603,19 +598,19 @@ TkpSetKeycodeAndState(tkwin, keySym, eventPtr)
  */
 
 KeyCode
-XKeysymToKeycode(display, keysym)
-    Display* display;
-    KeySym keysym;
+XKeysymToKeycode(
+    Display *display,
+    KeySym keysym)
 {
     int i;
     SHORT result;
 
     /*
-     * We check our private map first for a virtual keycode,
-     * as VkKeyScan will return values that don't map to X
-     * for the "extended" Syms.  This may be due to just casting
-     * problems below, but this works.
+     * We check our private map first for a virtual keycode, as VkKeyScan will
+     * return values that don't map to X for the "extended" Syms. This may be
+     * due to just casting problems below, but this works.
      */
+
     if (keysym == NoSymbol) {
 	return 0;
     }
@@ -651,10 +646,11 @@ XKeysymToKeycode(display, keysym)
  */
 
 XModifierKeymap	*
-XGetModifierMapping(display)
-    Display* display;
+XGetModifierMapping(
+    Display *display)
 {
-    XModifierKeymap *map = (XModifierKeymap *)ckalloc(sizeof(XModifierKeymap));
+    XModifierKeymap *map = (XModifierKeymap *)
+	    ckalloc(sizeof(XModifierKeymap));
 
     map->max_keypermod = 1;
     map->modifiermap = (KeyCode *) ckalloc(sizeof(KeyCode)*8);
@@ -674,8 +670,7 @@ XGetModifierMapping(display)
  *
  * XFreeModifiermap --
  *
- *	Deallocate a modifier map that was created by
- *	XGetModifierMapping.
+ *	Deallocate a modifier map that was created by XGetModifierMapping.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -687,8 +682,8 @@ XGetModifierMapping(display)
  */
 
 void
-XFreeModifiermap(modmap)
-    XModifierKeymap* modmap;
+XFreeModifiermap(
+    XModifierKeymap *modmap)
 {
     ckfree((char *) modmap->modifiermap);
     ckfree((char *) modmap);
@@ -699,11 +694,11 @@ XFreeModifiermap(modmap)
  *
  * XStringToKeysym --
  *
- *	Translate a keysym name to the matching keysym. 
+ *	Translate a keysym name to the matching keysym.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns the keysym.  Since this is already handled by
- *	Tk's StringToKeysym function, we just return NoSymbol.
+ *	Returns the keysym. Since this is already handled by Tk's
+ *	StringToKeysym function, we just return NoSymbol.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -712,8 +707,8 @@ XFreeModifiermap(modmap)
  */
 
 KeySym
-XStringToKeysym(string)
-    _Xconst char *string;
+XStringToKeysym(
+    _Xconst char *string)
 {
     return NoSymbol;
 }
@@ -735,8 +730,16 @@ XStringToKeysym(string)
  */
 
 char *
-XKeysymToString(keysym)
-    KeySym keysym;
+XKeysymToString(
+    KeySym keysym)
 {
     return NULL;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinPixmap.c b/win/tkWinPixmap.c
index d1fc569..73882b1 100644
--- a/win/tkWinPixmap.c
+++ b/win/tkWinPixmap.c
@@ -1,15 +1,15 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinPixmap.c --
  *
- *	This file contains the Xlib emulation functions pertaining to
- *	creating and destroying pixmaps.
+ *	This file contains the Xlib emulation functions pertaining to creating
+ *	and destroying pixmaps.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinPixmap.c,v 1.4 2004/01/13 02:06:02 davygrvy Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinPixmap.c,v 1.5 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
@@ -32,17 +32,17 @@
  */
 
 Pixmap
-Tk_GetPixmap(display, d, width, height, depth)
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable d;
-    int width;
-    int height;
-    int depth;
+Tk_GetPixmap(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable d,
+    int width,
+    int height,
+    int depth)
 {
     TkWinDrawable *newTwdPtr, *twdPtr;
     int planes;
     Screen *screen;
-    
+
     display->request++;
 
     newTwdPtr = (TkWinDrawable*) ckalloc(sizeof(TkWinDrawable));
@@ -65,13 +65,14 @@ Tk_GetPixmap(display, d, width, height, depth)
 	planes = (int) screen->ext_data;
 	depth /= planes;
     }
-    newTwdPtr->bitmap.handle = CreateBitmap(width, height, planes, depth, NULL);
+    newTwdPtr->bitmap.handle =
+	    CreateBitmap(width, height, planes, depth, NULL);
 
     if (newTwdPtr->bitmap.handle == NULL) {
 	ckfree((char *) newTwdPtr);
 	return None;
     }
-    
+
     return (Pixmap)newTwdPtr;
 }
 
@@ -92,9 +93,9 @@ Tk_GetPixmap(display, d, width, height, depth)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreePixmap(display, pixmap)
-    Display* display;
-    Pixmap pixmap;
+Tk_FreePixmap(
+    Display *display,
+    Pixmap pixmap)
 {
     TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *) pixmap;
 
@@ -123,9 +124,9 @@ Tk_FreePixmap(display, pixmap)
  */
 
 void
-TkSetPixmapColormap(pixmap, colormap)
-    Pixmap pixmap;
-    Colormap colormap;
+TkSetPixmapColormap(
+    Pixmap pixmap,
+    Colormap colormap)
 {
     TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)pixmap;
     twdPtr->bitmap.colormap = colormap;
@@ -136,9 +137,9 @@ TkSetPixmapColormap(pixmap, colormap)
  *
  * XGetGeometry --
  *
- *	Retrieve the geometry of the given drawable.  Note that
- *	this is a degenerate implementation that only returns the
- *	size of a pixmap or window.
+ *	Retrieve the geometry of the given drawable. Note that this is a
+ *	degenerate implementation that only returns the size of a pixmap or
+ *	window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns 0.
@@ -150,17 +151,16 @@ TkSetPixmapColormap(pixmap, colormap)
  */
 
 int
-XGetGeometry(display, d, root_return, x_return, y_return, width_return,
-	height_return, border_width_return, depth_return)
-    Display* display;
-    Drawable d;
-    Window* root_return;
-    int* x_return;
-    int* y_return;
-    unsigned int* width_return;
-    unsigned int* height_return;
-    unsigned int* border_width_return;
-    unsigned int* depth_return;
+XGetGeometry(
+    Display *display,
+    Drawable d,
+    Window *root_return,
+    int *x_return,
+    int *y_return,
+    unsigned int *width_return,
+    unsigned int *height_return,
+    unsigned int *border_width_return,
+    unsigned int *depth_return)
 {
     TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)d;
 
@@ -196,3 +196,11 @@ XGetGeometry(display, d, root_return, x_return, y_return, width_return,
     }
     return 1;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinPointer.c b/win/tkWinPointer.c
index 28591cd..6788c71 100644
--- a/win/tkWinPointer.c
+++ b/win/tkWinPointer.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinPointer.c --
  *
  *	Windows specific mouse tracking code.
@@ -6,10 +6,10 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinPointer.c,v 1.9 2004/01/13 02:06:02 davygrvy Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinPointer.c,v 1.10 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ static int mouseTimerSet = 0;		/* 1 if the mouse timer is active. */
  * Forward declarations of procedures used in this file.
  */
 
-static void		MouseTimerProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+static void		MouseTimerProc(ClientData clientData);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ static void		MouseTimerProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
  */
 
 int
-TkWinGetModifierState()
+TkWinGetModifierState(void)
 {
     int state = 0;
 
@@ -91,10 +91,9 @@ TkWinGetModifierState()
  *
  * Tk_PointerEvent --
  *
- *	This procedure is called for each pointer-related event.
- *	It converts the position to root coords and updates the
- *	global pointer state machine.  It also ensures that the
- *	mouse timer is scheduled.
+ *	This procedure is called for each pointer-related event. It converts
+ *	the position to root coords and updates the global pointer state
+ *	machine. It also ensures that the mouse timer is scheduled.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -106,11 +105,11 @@ TkWinGetModifierState()
  */
 
 void
-Tk_PointerEvent(hwnd, x, y)
-    HWND hwnd;				/* Window for coords, or NULL for
-					 * the root window. */
-    int x, y;				/* Coords relative to hwnd, or screen
-					 * if hwnd is NULL. */
+Tk_PointerEvent(
+    HWND hwnd,			/* Window for coords, or NULL for the root
+				 * window. */
+    int x, int y)		/* Coords relative to hwnd, or screen if hwnd
+				 * is NULL. */
 {
     POINT pos;
     int state;
@@ -128,11 +127,11 @@ Tk_PointerEvent(hwnd, x, y)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the mouse is captured, Windows will report all pointer
-     * events to the capture window.  So, we need to determine which
-     * window the mouse is really over and change the event.  Note
-     * that the computed hwnd may point to a window not owned by Tk,
-     * or a toplevel decorative frame, so tkwin can be NULL.
+     * If the mouse is captured, Windows will report all pointer events to the
+     * capture window. So, we need to determine which window the mouse is
+     * really over and change the event. Note that the computed hwnd may point
+     * to a window not owned by Tk, or a toplevel decorative frame, so tkwin
+     * can be NULL.
      */
 
     if (captured || hwnd == NULL) {
@@ -168,14 +167,13 @@ Tk_PointerEvent(hwnd, x, y)
  */
 
 int
-XGrabKeyboard(display, grab_window, owner_events, pointer_mode,
-	keyboard_mode, time)
-    Display* display;
-    Window grab_window;
-    Bool owner_events;
-    int pointer_mode;
-    int keyboard_mode;
-    Time time;
+XGrabKeyboard(
+    Display *display,
+    Window grab_window,
+    Bool owner_events,
+    int pointer_mode,
+    int keyboard_mode,
+    Time time)
 {
     keyboardWinPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(grab_window);
     return GrabSuccess;
@@ -198,9 +196,9 @@ XGrabKeyboard(display, grab_window, owner_events, pointer_mode,
  */
 
 void
-XUngrabKeyboard(display, time)
-    Display* display;
-    Time time;
+XUngrabKeyboard(
+    Display *display,
+    Time time)
 {
     keyboardWinPtr = NULL;
 }
@@ -210,8 +208,7 @@ XUngrabKeyboard(display, time)
  *
  * MouseTimerProc --
  *
- *	Check the current mouse position and look for enter/leave 
- *	events.
+ *	Check the current mouse position and look for enter/leave events.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -223,16 +220,16 @@ XUngrabKeyboard(display, time)
  */
 
 void
-MouseTimerProc(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;
+MouseTimerProc(
+    ClientData clientData)
 {
     POINT pos;
 
     mouseTimerSet = 0;
 
     /*
-     * Get the current mouse position and window.  Don't do anything
-     * if the mouse hasn't moved since the last time we looked.
+     * Get the current mouse position and window. Don't do anything if the
+     * mouse hasn't moved since the last time we looked.
      */
 
     GetCursorPos(&pos);
@@ -256,7 +253,7 @@ MouseTimerProc(clientData)
  */
 
 void
-TkWinCancelMouseTimer()
+TkWinCancelMouseTimer(void)
 {
     if (mouseTimerSet) {
 	Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(mouseTimer);
@@ -272,8 +269,8 @@ TkWinCancelMouseTimer()
  *	Fetch the position of the mouse pointer.
  *
  * Results:
- *	*xPtr and *yPtr are filled in with the root coordinates
- *	of the mouse pointer for the display.
+ *	*xPtr and *yPtr are filled in with the root coordinates of the mouse
+ *	pointer for the display.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -282,10 +279,10 @@ TkWinCancelMouseTimer()
  */
 
 void
-TkGetPointerCoords(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that identifies screen on which
+TkGetPointerCoords(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window that identifies screen on which
 				 * lookup is to be done. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;		/* Store pointer coordinates here. */
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr)	/* Store pointer coordinates here. */
 {
     POINT point;
 
@@ -299,13 +296,13 @@ TkGetPointerCoords(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr)
  *
  * XQueryPointer --
  *
- *	Check the current state of the mouse.  This is not a complete
- *	implementation of this function.  It only computes the root
- *	coordinates and the current mask.
+ *	Check the current state of the mouse. This is not a complete
+ *	implementation of this function. It only computes the root coordinates
+ *	and the current mask.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Sets root_x_return, root_y_return, and mask_return.  Returns
- *	true on success.
+ *	Sets root_x_return, root_y_return, and mask_return. Returns true on
+ *	success.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -314,17 +311,16 @@ TkGetPointerCoords(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr)
  */
 
 Bool
-XQueryPointer(display, w, root_return, child_return, root_x_return,
-	root_y_return, win_x_return, win_y_return, mask_return)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
-    Window* root_return;
-    Window* child_return;
-    int* root_x_return;
-    int* root_y_return;
-    int* win_x_return;
-    int* win_y_return;
-    unsigned int* mask_return;
+XQueryPointer(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w,
+    Window *root_return,
+    Window *child_return,
+    int *root_x_return,
+    int *root_y_return,
+    int *win_x_return,
+    int *win_y_return,
+    unsigned int *mask_return)
 {
     display->request++;
     TkGetPointerCoords(NULL, root_x_return, root_y_return);
@@ -337,8 +333,8 @@ XQueryPointer(display, w, root_return, child_return, root_x_return,
  *
  * XWarpPointer --
  *
- *	Move pointer to new location.  This is not a complete
- *	implementation of this function.
+ *	Move pointer to new location. This is not a complete implementation of
+ *	this function.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -350,22 +346,21 @@ XQueryPointer(display, w, root_return, child_return, root_x_return,
  */
 
 void
-XWarpPointer(display, src_w, dest_w, src_x, src_y, src_width,
-	src_height, dest_x, dest_y)
-    Display* display;
-    Window src_w;
-    Window dest_w;
-    int src_x;
-    int src_y;
-    unsigned int src_width;
-    unsigned int src_height;
-    int dest_x;
-    int dest_y;
+XWarpPointer(
+    Display *display,
+    Window src_w,
+    Window dest_w,
+    int src_x,
+    int src_y,
+    unsigned int src_width,
+    unsigned int src_height,
+    int dest_x,
+    int dest_y)
 {
     RECT r;
 
     GetWindowRect(Tk_GetHWND(dest_w), &r);
-    SetCursorPos(r.left+dest_x, r.top+dest_y);    
+    SetCursorPos(r.left+dest_x, r.top+dest_y);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -385,12 +380,13 @@ XWarpPointer(display, src_w, dest_w, src_x, src_y, src_width,
  */
 
 void
-XGetInputFocus(display, focus_return, revert_to_return)
-    Display *display;
-    Window *focus_return;
-    int *revert_to_return;
+XGetInputFocus(
+    Display *display,
+    Window *focus_return,
+    int *revert_to_return)
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = Tk_HWNDToWindow(GetFocus());
+
     *focus_return = tkwin ? Tk_WindowId(tkwin) : None;
     *revert_to_return = RevertToParent;
     display->request++;
@@ -414,11 +410,11 @@ XGetInputFocus(display, focus_return, revert_to_return)
  */
 
 void
-XSetInputFocus(display, focus, revert_to, time)
-    Display* display;
-    Window focus;
-    int revert_to;
-    Time time;
+XSetInputFocus(
+    Display *display,
+    Window focus,
+    int revert_to,
+    Time time)
 {
     display->request++;
     if (focus != None) {
@@ -431,29 +427,28 @@ XSetInputFocus(display, focus, revert_to, time)
  *
  * TkpChangeFocus --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to move the system focus from
- *	one window to another.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to move the system focus from one window to
+ *	another.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the serial number of the command that
- *	changed the focus.  It may be needed by the caller to filter
- *	out focus change events that were queued before the command.
- *	If the procedure doesn't actually change the focus then
- *	it returns 0.
+ *	The return value is the serial number of the command that changed the
+ *	focus. It may be needed by the caller to filter out focus change
+ *	events that were queued before the command. If the procedure doesn't
+ *	actually change the focus then it returns 0.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The official Windows focus window changes;  the application's focus
+ *	The official Windows focus window changes; the application's focus
  *	window isn't changed by this procedure.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
-TkpChangeFocus(winPtr, force)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that is to receive the X focus. */
-    int force;			/* Non-zero means claim the focus even
-				 * if it didn't originally belong to
-				 * topLevelPtr's application. */
+TkpChangeFocus(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Window that is to receive the X focus. */
+    int force)			/* Non-zero means claim the focus even if it
+				 * didn't originally belong to topLevelPtr's
+				 * application. */
 {
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
     Window focusWindow;
@@ -471,10 +466,10 @@ TkpChangeFocus(winPtr, force)
     if (winPtr->window == None) {
 	Tcl_Panic("ChangeXFocus got null X window");
     }
- 
+
     /*
-     * Change the foreground window so the focus window is raised to the top of
-     * the system stacking order and gets the keyboard focus.
+     * Change the foreground window so the focus window is raised to the top
+     * of the system stacking order and gets the keyboard focus.
      */
 
     if (force) {
@@ -484,10 +479,10 @@ TkpChangeFocus(winPtr, force)
 	    CurrentTime);
 
     /*
-     * Remember the current serial number for the X server and issue
-     * a dummy server request.  This marks the position at which we
-     * changed the focus, so we can distinguish FocusIn and FocusOut
-     * events on either side of the mark.
+     * Remember the current serial number for the X server and issue a dummy
+     * server request. This marks the position at which we changed the focus,
+     * so we can distinguish FocusIn and FocusOut events on either side of the
+     * mark.
      */
 
     serial = NextRequest(winPtr->display);
@@ -500,10 +495,9 @@ TkpChangeFocus(winPtr, force)
  *
  * TkpSetCapture --
  *
- *	This function captures the mouse so that all future events
- *	will be reported to this window, even if the mouse is outside
- *	the window.  If the specified window is NULL, then the mouse
- *	is released. 
+ *	This function captures the mouse so that all future events will be
+ *	reported to this window, even if the mouse is outside the window. If
+ *	the specified window is NULL, then the mouse is released.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -515,8 +509,8 @@ TkpChangeFocus(winPtr, force)
  */
 
 void
-TkpSetCapture(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;			/* Capture window, or NULL. */
+TkpSetCapture(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Capture window, or NULL. */
 {
     if (winPtr) {
 	SetCapture(Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(winPtr)));
@@ -526,3 +520,11 @@ TkpSetCapture(winPtr)
 	ReleaseCapture();
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinRegion.c b/win/tkWinRegion.c
index c3914e2..7cbdb9d 100644
--- a/win/tkWinRegion.c
+++ b/win/tkWinRegion.c
@@ -1,14 +1,14 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinRegion.c --
  *
  *	Tk Region emulation code.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinRegion.c,v 1.5 2004/10/26 14:07:57 patthoyts Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinRegion.c,v 1.6 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
  */
 
 TkRegion
-TkCreateRegion()
+TkCreateRegion(void)
 {
     RECT rect;
     memset(&rect, 0, sizeof(RECT));
@@ -55,8 +55,8 @@ TkCreateRegion()
  */
 
 void
-TkDestroyRegion(r)
-    TkRegion r;
+TkDestroyRegion(
+    TkRegion r)
 {
     DeleteObject((HRGN) r);
 }
@@ -78,11 +78,12 @@ TkDestroyRegion(r)
  */
 
 void
-TkClipBox(r, rect_return)
-    TkRegion r;
-    XRectangle* rect_return;
+TkClipBox(
+    TkRegion r,
+    XRectangle* rect_return)
 {
     RECT rect;
+
     GetRgnBox((HRGN)r, &rect);
     rect_return->x = (short) rect.left;
     rect_return->y = (short) rect.top;
@@ -107,10 +108,10 @@ TkClipBox(r, rect_return)
  */
 
 void
-TkIntersectRegion(sra, srb, dr_return)
-    TkRegion sra;
-    TkRegion srb;
-    TkRegion dr_return;
+TkIntersectRegion(
+    TkRegion sra,
+    TkRegion srb,
+    TkRegion dr_return)
 {
     CombineRgn((HRGN) dr_return, (HRGN) sra, (HRGN) srb, RGN_AND);
 }
@@ -132,13 +133,14 @@ TkIntersectRegion(sra, srb, dr_return)
  */
 
 void
-TkUnionRectWithRegion(rectangle, src_region, dest_region_return)
-    XRectangle* rectangle;
-    TkRegion src_region;
-    TkRegion dest_region_return;
+TkUnionRectWithRegion(
+    XRectangle *rectangle,
+    TkRegion src_region,
+    TkRegion dest_region_return)
 {
     HRGN rectRgn = CreateRectRgn(rectangle->x, rectangle->y,
 	    rectangle->x + rectangle->width, rectangle->y + rectangle->height);
+
     CombineRgn((HRGN) dest_region_return, (HRGN) src_region,
 	    (HRGN) rectRgn, RGN_OR);
     DeleteObject(rectRgn);
@@ -149,8 +151,8 @@ TkUnionRectWithRegion(rectangle, src_region, dest_region_return)
  *
  * TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData --
  *
- *	Set up a rectangle of the given region based on the supplied
- *	alpha data.
+ *	Set up a rectangle of the given region based on the supplied alpha
+ *	data.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None
@@ -162,16 +164,17 @@ TkUnionRectWithRegion(rectangle, src_region, dest_region_return)
  */
 
 void
-TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData(region, x, y, width, height, dataPtr,
-	pixelStride, lineStride)
-    TkRegion region;
-    unsigned int x, y;			/* Where in region to update. */
-    unsigned int width, height;		/* Size of rectangle to update. */
-    unsigned char *dataPtr;		/* Data to read from. */
-    unsigned int pixelStride;		/* num bytes from one piece of alpha
-					 * data to the next in the line. */
-    unsigned int lineStride;		/* num bytes from one line of alpha
-					 * data to the next line. */
+TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData(
+    TkRegion region,
+    unsigned int x, unsigned int y,
+				/* Where in region to update. */
+    unsigned int width, unsigned int height,
+				/* Size of rectangle to update. */
+    unsigned char *dataPtr,	/* Data to read from. */
+    unsigned int pixelStride,	/* Num bytes from one piece of alpha data to
+				 * the next in the line. */
+    unsigned int lineStride)	/* Num bytes from one line of alpha data to
+				 * the next line. */
 {
     unsigned char *lineDataPtr;
     unsigned int x1, y1, end;
@@ -180,13 +183,20 @@ TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData(region, x, y, width, height, dataPtr,
     for (y1 = 0; y1 < height; y1++) {
 	lineDataPtr = dataPtr;
 	for (x1 = 0; x1 < width; x1 = end) {
-	    /* search for first non-transparent pixel */
+	    /*
+	     * Search for first non-transparent pixel.
+	     */
+
 	    while ((x1 < width) && !*lineDataPtr) {
 		x1++;
 		lineDataPtr += pixelStride;
 	    }
 	    end = x1;
-	    /* search for first transparent pixel */
+
+	    /*
+	     * Search for first transparent pixel.
+	     */
+
 	    while ((end < width) && *lineDataPtr) {
 		end++;
 		lineDataPtr += pixelStride;
@@ -195,6 +205,7 @@ TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData(region, x, y, width, height, dataPtr,
 		/*
 		 * Manipulate Win32 regions directly; it's more efficient.
 		 */
+
 		SetRectRgn(rectRgn, x+x1, y+y1, x+end, y+y1+1);
 		CombineRgn((HRGN) region, (HRGN) region, rectRgn, RGN_OR);
 	    }
@@ -213,9 +224,8 @@ TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData(region, x, y, width, height, dataPtr,
  *	Test whether a given rectangle overlaps with a region.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns RectanglePart or RectangleOut.  Note that this is
- *	not a complete implementation since it doesn't test for
- *	RectangleIn.
+ *	Returns RectanglePart or RectangleOut. Note that this is not a
+ *	complete implementation since it doesn't test for RectangleIn.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -224,12 +234,11 @@ TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData(region, x, y, width, height, dataPtr,
  */
 
 int
-TkRectInRegion(r, x, y, width, height)
-    TkRegion r;
-    int x;
-    int y;
-    unsigned int width;
-    unsigned int height;
+TkRectInRegion(
+    TkRegion r,			/* Region to inspect */
+    int x, int y,		/* Top-left of rectangle */
+    unsigned int width,		/* Width of rectangle */
+    unsigned int height)	/* Height of rectangle */
 {
     RECT rect;
     rect.top = y;
@@ -256,10 +265,18 @@ TkRectInRegion(r, x, y, width, height)
  */
 
 void
-TkSubtractRegion(sra, srb, dr_return)
-    TkRegion sra;
-    TkRegion srb;
-    TkRegion dr_return;
+TkSubtractRegion(
+    TkRegion sra,
+    TkRegion srb,
+    TkRegion dr_return)
 {
     CombineRgn((HRGN) dr_return, (HRGN) sra, (HRGN) srb, RGN_DIFF);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinScrlbr.c b/win/tkWinScrlbr.c
index 7ad61d8..e76a299 100644
--- a/win/tkWinScrlbr.c
+++ b/win/tkWinScrlbr.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinScrollbar.c --
  *
  *	This file implements the Windows specific portion of the scrollbar
@@ -6,21 +6,20 @@
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinScrlbr.c,v 1.10 2004/01/13 02:06:02 davygrvy Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinScrlbr.c,v 1.11 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 #include "tkScrollbar.h"
 
-
 /*
- * The following constant is used to specify the maximum scroll position.
- * This value is limited by the Win32 API to either 16-bits or 32-bits,
- * depending on the context.  For now we'll just use a value small
- * enough to fit in 16-bits, but which gives us 4-digits of precision.
+ * The following constant is used to specify the maximum scroll position. This
+ * value is limited by the Win32 API to either 16-bits or 32-bits, depending
+ * on the context. For now we'll just use a value small enough to fit in
+ * 16-bits, but which gives us 4-digits of precision.
  */
 
 #define MAX_SCROLL 10000
@@ -39,7 +38,7 @@ typedef struct WinScrollbar {
 
 /*
  * Flag bits for native scrollbars:
- * 
+ *
  * IN_MODAL_LOOP:		Non-zero means this scrollbar is in the middle
  *				of a modal loop.
  * ALREADY_DEAD:		Non-zero means this scrollbar has been
@@ -60,8 +59,8 @@ static int vArrowWidth, vArrowHeight, vThumb; /* Vertical control metrics. */
 TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(winScrlbrMutex)
 
 /*
- * This variable holds the default width for a scrollbar in string
- * form for use in a Tk_ConfigSpec.
+ * This variable holds the default width for a scrollbar in string form for
+ * use in a Tk_ConfigSpec.
  */
 
 static char defWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
@@ -70,18 +69,16 @@ static char defWidth[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
  * Declarations for functions defined in this file.
  */
 
-static Window		CreateProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    Window parent, ClientData instanceData));
-static void		ModalLoopProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int		ScrollbarBindProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+static Window		CreateProc(Tk_Window tkwin, Window parent,
+			    ClientData instanceData);
+static void		ModalLoopProc(Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		ScrollbarBindProc(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, XEvent *eventPtr,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym));
-static LRESULT CALLBACK	ScrollbarProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message,
-			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
-static void		UpdateScrollbar _ANSI_ARGS_((
-    			    WinScrollbar *scrollPtr));
-static void		UpdateScrollbarMetrics _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym);
+static LRESULT CALLBACK	ScrollbarProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam,
+			    LPARAM lParam);
+static void		UpdateScrollbar(WinScrollbar *scrollPtr);
+static void		UpdateScrollbarMetrics(void);
 
 /*
  * The class procedure table for the scrollbar widget.
@@ -112,12 +109,12 @@ Tk_ClassProcs tkpScrollbarProcs = {
  */
 
 TkScrollbar *
-TkpCreateScrollbar(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
+TkpCreateScrollbar(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)
 {
     WinScrollbar *scrollPtr;
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
-    
+
     if (!initialized) {
         Tcl_MutexLock(&winScrlbrMutex);
 	UpdateScrollbarMetrics();
@@ -142,7 +139,7 @@ TkpCreateScrollbar(tkwin)
 		ScrollbarBindProc, NULL, NULL);
     }
 
-    return (TkScrollbar*) scrollPtr;
+    return (TkScrollbar *) scrollPtr;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -150,8 +147,8 @@ TkpCreateScrollbar(tkwin)
  *
  * UpdateScrollbar --
  *
- *	This function updates the position and size of the scrollbar
- *	thumb based on the current settings.
+ *	This function updates the position and size of the scrollbar thumb
+ *	based on the current settings.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -163,8 +160,8 @@ TkpCreateScrollbar(tkwin)
  */
 
 static void
-UpdateScrollbar(scrollPtr)
-    WinScrollbar *scrollPtr;
+UpdateScrollbar(
+    WinScrollbar *scrollPtr)
 {
     SCROLLINFO scrollInfo;
     double thumbSize;
@@ -181,15 +178,17 @@ UpdateScrollbar(scrollPtr)
     scrollInfo.nPage = ((UINT) (thumbSize * (double) MAX_SCROLL)) + 1;
     if (thumbSize < 1.0) {
 	scrollInfo.nPos = (int)
-	    ((scrollPtr->info.firstFraction / (1.0-thumbSize))
-		    * (MAX_SCROLL - (scrollInfo.nPage - 1)));
+		((scrollPtr->info.firstFraction / (1.0-thumbSize))
+		* (MAX_SCROLL - (scrollInfo.nPage - 1)));
     } else {
 	scrollInfo.nPos = 0;
+
 	/*
-	 * Disable the scrollbar when there is nothing to scroll.
-	 * This is standard Windows style (see eg Notepad).
-	 * Also prevents possible crash on XP+ systems [Bug #624116].
+	 * Disable the scrollbar when there is nothing to scroll. This is
+	 * standard Windows style (see eg Notepad). Also prevents possible
+	 * crash on XP+ systems [Bug #624116].
 	 */
+
 	scrollInfo.fMask |= SIF_DISABLENOSCROLL;
     }
     SetScrollInfo(scrollPtr->hwnd, SB_CTL, &scrollInfo, TRUE);
@@ -200,8 +199,8 @@ UpdateScrollbar(scrollPtr)
  *
  * CreateProc --
  *
- *	This function creates a new Scrollbar control, subclasses
- *	the instance, and generates a new Window object.
+ *	This function creates a new Scrollbar control, subclasses the
+ *	instance, and generates a new Window object.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the newly allocated Window object, or None on failure.
@@ -213,10 +212,10 @@ UpdateScrollbar(scrollPtr)
  */
 
 static Window
-CreateProc(tkwin, parentWin, instanceData)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window. */
-    Window parentWin;		/* Parent of new window. */
-    ClientData instanceData;	/* Scrollbar instance data. */
+CreateProc(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window. */
+    Window parentWin,		/* Parent of new window. */
+    ClientData instanceData)	/* Scrollbar instance data. */
 {
     DWORD style;
     Window window;
@@ -228,10 +227,10 @@ CreateProc(tkwin, parentWin, instanceData)
 
     if (scrollPtr->info.vertical) {
 	style = WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPCHILDREN | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS
-	    | SBS_VERT | SBS_RIGHTALIGN;
+		| SBS_VERT | SBS_RIGHTALIGN;
     } else {
 	style = WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPCHILDREN | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS
-	    | SBS_HORZ | SBS_BOTTOMALIGN;
+		| SBS_HORZ | SBS_BOTTOMALIGN;
     }
 
     scrollPtr->hwnd = CreateWindow("SCROLLBAR", NULL, style,
@@ -240,14 +239,14 @@ CreateProc(tkwin, parentWin, instanceData)
 
     /*
      * Ensure new window is inserted into the stacking order at the correct
-     * place. 
+     * place.
      */
 
     SetWindowPos(scrollPtr->hwnd, HWND_TOP, 0, 0, 0, 0,
 		    SWP_NOACTIVATE | SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE);
 
     for (winPtr = ((TkWindow*)tkwin)->nextPtr; winPtr != NULL;
-	 winPtr = winPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    winPtr = winPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if ((winPtr->window != None) && !(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)) {
 	    TkWinSetWindowPos(scrollPtr->hwnd, Tk_GetHWND(winPtr->window),
 		    Below);
@@ -274,9 +273,9 @@ CreateProc(tkwin, parentWin, instanceData)
  *
  * TkpDisplayScrollbar --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws the contents of a scrollbar window.
- *	It is invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs
- *	when there's nothing else for the application to do.
+ *	This procedure redraws the contents of a scrollbar window. It is
+ *	invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs when there's
+ *	nothing else for the application to do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -288,8 +287,8 @@ CreateProc(tkwin, parentWin, instanceData)
  */
 
 void
-TkpDisplayScrollbar(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
+TkpDisplayScrollbar(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Information about window. */
 {
     WinScrollbar *scrollPtr = (WinScrollbar *) clientData;
     Tk_Window tkwin = scrollPtr->info.tkwin;
@@ -300,8 +299,8 @@ TkpDisplayScrollbar(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Destroy and recreate the scrollbar control if the orientation
-     * has changed.
+     * Destroy and recreate the scrollbar control if the orientation has
+     * changed.
      */
 
     if (scrollPtr->lastVertical != scrollPtr->info.vertical) {
@@ -338,11 +337,12 @@ TkpDisplayScrollbar(clientData)
  */
 
 void
-TkpDestroyScrollbar(scrollPtr)
-    TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;
+TkpDestroyScrollbar(
+    TkScrollbar *scrollPtr)
 {
     WinScrollbar *winScrollPtr = (WinScrollbar *)scrollPtr;
     HWND hwnd = winScrollPtr->hwnd;
+
     if (hwnd) {
 #ifdef _WIN64
 	SetWindowLongPtr(hwnd, GWLP_WNDPROC, (LONG_PTR) winScrollPtr->oldProc);
@@ -362,8 +362,7 @@ TkpDestroyScrollbar(scrollPtr)
  *
  * UpdateScrollbarMetrics --
  *
- *	This function retrieves the current system metrics for a
- *	scrollbar.
+ *	This function retrieves the current system metrics for a scrollbar.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -375,7 +374,7 @@ TkpDestroyScrollbar(scrollPtr)
  */
 
 void
-UpdateScrollbarMetrics()
+UpdateScrollbarMetrics(void)
 {
     Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;
 
@@ -399,9 +398,9 @@ UpdateScrollbarMetrics()
  *
  * TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry --
  *
- *	After changes in a scrollbar's size or configuration, this
- *	procedure recomputes various geometry information used in
- *	displaying the scrollbar.
+ *	After changes in a scrollbar's size or configuration, this procedure
+ *	recomputes various geometry information used in displaying the
+ *	scrollbar.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -413,15 +412,16 @@ UpdateScrollbarMetrics()
  */
 
 void
-TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(scrollPtr)
-    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;	/* Scrollbar whose geometry may
-					 * have changed. */
+TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(
+    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr)
+				/* Scrollbar whose geometry may have
+				 * changed. */
 {
     int fieldLength, minThumbSize;
 
     /*
-     * Windows doesn't use focus rings on scrollbars, but we still
-     * perform basic sanity checks to appease backwards compatibility.
+     * Windows doesn't use focus rings on scrollbars, but we still perform
+     * basic sanity checks to appease backwards compatibility.
      */
 
     if (scrollPtr->highlightWidth < 0) {
@@ -447,9 +447,9 @@ TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(scrollPtr)
 	    * scrollPtr->lastFraction);
 
     /*
-     * Adjust the slider so that some piece of it is always
-     * displayed in the scrollbar and so that it has at least
-     * a minimal width (so it can be grabbed with the mouse).
+     * Adjust the slider so that some piece of it is always displayed in the
+     * scrollbar and so that it has at least a minimal width (so it can be
+     * grabbed with the mouse).
      */
 
     if (scrollPtr->sliderFirst > fieldLength) {
@@ -469,10 +469,9 @@ TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(scrollPtr)
     scrollPtr->sliderLast += scrollPtr->arrowLength;
 
     /*
-     * Register the desired geometry for the window (leave enough space
-     * for the two arrows plus a minimum-size slider, plus border around
-     * the whole window, if any).  Then arrange for the window to be
-     * redisplayed.
+     * Register the desired geometry for the window (leave enough space for
+     * the two arrows plus a minimum-size slider, plus border around the whole
+     * window, if any). Then arrange for the window to be redisplayed.
      */
 
     if (scrollPtr->vertical) {
@@ -490,8 +489,8 @@ TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(scrollPtr)
  *
  * ScrollbarProc --
  *
- *	This function is call by Windows whenever an event occurs on
- *	a scrollbar control created by Tk.
+ *	This function is call by Windows whenever an event occurs on a
+ *	scrollbar control created by Tk.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Windows return value.
@@ -503,11 +502,11 @@ TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(scrollPtr)
  */
 
 static LRESULT CALLBACK
-ScrollbarProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
-    HWND hwnd;
-    UINT message;
-    WPARAM wParam;
-    LPARAM lParam;
+ScrollbarProc(
+    HWND hwnd,
+    UINT message,
+    WPARAM wParam,
+    LPARAM lParam)
 {
     LRESULT result;
     POINT point;
@@ -520,85 +519,84 @@ ScrollbarProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
     scrollPtr = (WinScrollbar *)((TkWindow*)tkwin)->instanceData;
 
     switch(message) {
-	case WM_HSCROLL:
-	case WM_VSCROLL: {
-	    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-	    Tcl_DString cmdString;
-	    int command = LOWORD(wParam);
-	    int code;
-
-	    GetCursorPos(&point);
-	    Tk_TranslateWinEvent(NULL, WM_MOUSEMOVE, 0,
-		    MAKELPARAM(point.x, point.y), &result);
-
-	    if (command == SB_ENDSCROLL) {
-		return 0;
-	    }
-
-	    /*
-	     * Bail out immediately if there isn't a command to invoke.
-	     */
-
-	    if (scrollPtr->info.commandSize == 0) {
-		Tcl_ServiceAll();
-		return 0;
-	    }
-		
-	    Tcl_DStringInit(&cmdString);
-	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&cmdString, scrollPtr->info.command,
-		    scrollPtr->info.commandSize);
-		
-	    if (command == SB_LINELEFT || command == SB_LINERIGHT) {
-		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "scroll");
-		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString,
-			(command == SB_LINELEFT ) ? "-1" : "1");
-		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "units");
-	    } else if (command == SB_PAGELEFT || command == SB_PAGERIGHT) {
-		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "scroll");
-		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString,
-			(command == SB_PAGELEFT ) ? "-1" : "1");
-		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "pages");
-	    } else {
-		char valueString[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
-		double pos = 0.0;
-		switch (command) {
-		    case SB_THUMBPOSITION:
-			pos = ((double)HIWORD(wParam)) / MAX_SCROLL;
-			break;
-
-		    case SB_THUMBTRACK:
-			pos = ((double)HIWORD(wParam)) / MAX_SCROLL;
-			break;
-
-		    case SB_TOP:
-			pos = 0.0;
-			break;
-
-		    case SB_BOTTOM:
-			pos = 1.0;
-			break;
-		}
-		sprintf(valueString, "%g", pos);
-		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "moveto");
-		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, valueString);
-	    }
+    case WM_HSCROLL:
+    case WM_VSCROLL: {
+	Tcl_Interp *interp;
+	Tcl_DString cmdString;
+	int command = LOWORD(wParam);
+	int code;
+
+	GetCursorPos(&point);
+	Tk_TranslateWinEvent(NULL, WM_MOUSEMOVE, 0,
+		MAKELPARAM(point.x, point.y), &result);
+
+	if (command == SB_ENDSCROLL) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
 
-	    interp = scrollPtr->info.interp;
-	    code = Tcl_GlobalEval(interp, cmdString.string);
-	    if (code != TCL_OK && code != TCL_CONTINUE && code != TCL_BREAK) {
-		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (scrollbar command)");
-		Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
-	    }		
-	    Tcl_DStringFree(&cmdString);		
+	/*
+	 * Bail out immediately if there isn't a command to invoke.
+	 */
 
+	if (scrollPtr->info.commandSize == 0) {
 	    Tcl_ServiceAll();
 	    return 0;
 	}
 
-	default:
-	    if (Tk_TranslateWinEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam, &result)) {
-		return result;
+	Tcl_DStringInit(&cmdString);
+	Tcl_DStringAppend(&cmdString, scrollPtr->info.command,
+		scrollPtr->info.commandSize);
+
+	if (command == SB_LINELEFT || command == SB_LINERIGHT) {
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "scroll");
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString,
+		    (command == SB_LINELEFT ) ? "-1" : "1");
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "units");
+	} else if (command == SB_PAGELEFT || command == SB_PAGERIGHT) {
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "scroll");
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString,
+		    (command == SB_PAGELEFT ) ? "-1" : "1");
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "pages");
+	} else {
+	    char valueString[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
+	    double pos = 0.0;
+
+	    switch (command) {
+	    case SB_THUMBPOSITION:
+		pos = ((double)HIWORD(wParam)) / MAX_SCROLL;
+		break;
+	    case SB_THUMBTRACK:
+		pos = ((double)HIWORD(wParam)) / MAX_SCROLL;
+		break;
+	    case SB_TOP:
+		pos = 0.0;
+		break;
+	    case SB_BOTTOM:
+		pos = 1.0;
+		break;
 	    }
+
+	    sprintf(valueString, "%g", pos);
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "moveto");
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, valueString);
+	}
+
+	interp = scrollPtr->info.interp;
+	code = Tcl_GlobalEval(interp, cmdString.string);
+	if (code != TCL_OK && code != TCL_CONTINUE && code != TCL_BREAK) {
+	    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (scrollbar command)");
+	    Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+	}
+	Tcl_DStringFree(&cmdString);
+
+	Tcl_ServiceAll();
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    default:
+	if (Tk_TranslateWinEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam, &result)) {
+	    return result;
+	}
     }
     return CallWindowProc(scrollPtr->oldProc, hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
 }
@@ -609,8 +607,8 @@ ScrollbarProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
  * TkpConfigureScrollbar --
  *
  *	This procedure is called after the generic code has finished
- *	processing configuration options, in order to configure
- *	platform specific options.
+ *	processing configuration options, in order to configure platform
+ *	specific options.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -622,10 +620,10 @@ ScrollbarProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
  */
 
 void
-TkpConfigureScrollbar(scrollPtr)
-    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or
-					 * may not already have values for
-					 * some fields. */
+TkpConfigureScrollbar(
+    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr)
+				/* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
 {
 }
 
@@ -634,8 +632,8 @@ TkpConfigureScrollbar(scrollPtr)
  *
  * ScrollbarBindProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when the default <ButtonPress>
- *	binding on the Scrollbar bind tag fires.
+ *	This procedure is invoked when the default <ButtonPress> binding on
+ *	the Scrollbar bind tag fires.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -647,14 +645,15 @@ TkpConfigureScrollbar(scrollPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-ScrollbarBindProc(clientData, interp, eventPtr, tkwin, keySym)
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    XEvent *eventPtr;
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    KeySym keySym;
+ScrollbarBindProc(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    XEvent *eventPtr,
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    KeySym keySym)
 {
-    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow*)tkwin;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+
     if (eventPtr->type == ButtonPress) {
 	winPtr->flags |= TK_DEFER_MODAL;
     }
@@ -666,9 +665,8 @@ ScrollbarBindProc(clientData, interp, eventPtr, tkwin, keySym)
  *
  * ModalLoopProc --
  *
- *	This function is invoked at the end of the event processing
- *	whenever the ScrollbarBindProc has been invoked for a ButtonPress
- *	event. 
+ *	This function is invoked at the end of the event processing whenever
+ *	the ScrollbarBindProc has been invoked for a ButtonPress event.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -680,9 +678,9 @@ ScrollbarBindProc(clientData, interp, eventPtr, tkwin, keySym)
  */
 
 static void
-ModalLoopProc(tkwin, eventPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    XEvent *eventPtr;
+ModalLoopProc(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow*)tkwin;
     WinScrollbar *scrollPtr = (WinScrollbar *) winPtr->instanceData;
@@ -707,14 +705,12 @@ ModalLoopProc(tkwin, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkpScrollbarPosition --
  *
- *	Determine the scrollbar element corresponding to a
- *	given position.
+ *	Determine the scrollbar element corresponding to a given position.
  *
  * Results:
- *	One of TOP_ARROW, TOP_GAP, etc., indicating which element
- *	of the scrollbar covers the position given by (x, y).  If
- *	(x,y) is outside the scrollbar entirely, then OUTSIDE is
- *	returned.
+ *	One of TOP_ARROW, TOP_GAP, etc., indicating which element of the
+ *	scrollbar covers the position given by (x, y). If (x,y) is outside the
+ *	scrollbar entirely, then OUTSIDE is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -723,10 +719,10 @@ ModalLoopProc(tkwin, eventPtr)
  */
 
 int
-TkpScrollbarPosition(scrollPtr, x, y)
-    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;	/* Scrollbar widget record. */
-    int x, y;				/* Coordinates within scrollPtr's
-					 * window. */
+TkpScrollbarPosition(
+    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr,
+				/* Scrollbar widget record. */
+    int x, int y)		/* Coordinates within scrollPtr's window. */
 {
     int length, width, tmp;
 
@@ -748,7 +744,7 @@ TkpScrollbarPosition(scrollPtr, x, y)
 
     /*
      * All of the calculations in this procedure mirror those in
-     * TkpDisplayScrollbar.  Be sure to keep the two consistent.
+     * TkpDisplayScrollbar. Be sure to keep the two consistent.
      */
 
     if (y < (scrollPtr->inset + scrollPtr->arrowLength)) {
@@ -765,3 +761,11 @@ TkpScrollbarPosition(scrollPtr, x, y)
     }
     return BOTTOM_GAP;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinSend.c b/win/tkWinSend.c
index 51d947e..2269512 100644
--- a/win/tkWinSend.c
+++ b/win/tkWinSend.c
@@ -1,114 +1,120 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinSend.c --
  *
- *	This file provides procedures that implement the "send"
- *	command, allowing commands to be passed from interpreter
- *	to interpreter.
+ *	This file provides functions that implement the "send" command,
+ *	allowing commands to be passed from interpreter to interpreter.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 2003 Pat Thoyts <patthoyts@users.sourceforge.net>
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinSend.c,v 1.10 2005/10/14 11:59:19 patthoyts Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinSend.c,v 1.11 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinSendCom.h"
 
-/* Should be defined in WTypes.h but mingw 1.0 is missing them */
+/*
+ * Should be defined in WTypes.h but mingw 1.0 is missing them.
+ */
+
 #ifndef _ROTFLAGS_DEFINED
 #define _ROTFLAGS_DEFINED
-#define ROTFLAGS_REGISTRATIONKEEPSALIVE   0x01
-#define ROTFLAGS_ALLOWANYCLIENT           0x02
+#define ROTFLAGS_REGISTRATIONKEEPSALIVE 0x01
+#define ROTFLAGS_ALLOWANYCLIENT		0x02
 #endif /* ! _ROTFLAGS_DEFINED */
 
-#define TKWINSEND_CLASS_NAME         "TclEval"
-#define TKWINSEND_REGISTRATION_BASE L"TclEval"
+#define TKWINSEND_CLASS_NAME		"TclEval"
+#define TKWINSEND_REGISTRATION_BASE	L"TclEval"
 
 #define MK_E_MONIKERALREADYREGISTERED \
-    MAKE_HRESULT(SEVERITY_ERROR, FACILITY_ITF, 0x02A1)
+	MAKE_HRESULT(SEVERITY_ERROR, FACILITY_ITF, 0x02A1)
 
 /*
- * Package information structure.
- * This is used to keep interpreter specific details for use when releasing
- * the package resources upon interpreter deletion or package removal.
+ * Package information structure. This is used to keep interpreter specific
+ * details for use when releasing the package resources upon interpreter
+ * deletion or package removal.
  */
+
 typedef struct {
-    char *name;			/* the registered application name */
-    DWORD cookie;               /* ROT cookie returned on registration */
-    LPUNKNOWN obj;              /* Interface for the registration object */
+    char *name;			/* The registered application name */
+    DWORD cookie;		/* ROT cookie returned on registration */
+    LPUNKNOWN obj;		/* Interface for the registration object */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tcl_Command token;          /* Winsend command token */
+    Tcl_Command token;		/* Winsend command token */
 } RegisteredInterp;
 
 typedef struct SendEvent {
-    Tcl_Event     header;
-    Tcl_Interp    *interp;
-    Tcl_Obj       *cmdPtr;
+    Tcl_Event header;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+    Tcl_Obj *cmdPtr;
 } SendEvent;
 
 typedef struct {
-    int            initialized;
+    int initialized;
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
-static void	CmdDeleteProc(ClientData clientData);
-static void     InterpDeleteProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp);
-static void     RevokeObjectRegistration(RegisteredInterp *riPtr);
-static HRESULT  BuildMoniker(CONST char *name, LPMONIKER *pmk);
-static HRESULT  RegisterInterp(CONST char *name, RegisteredInterp *riPtr);
-static int      FindInterpreterObject(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name,
-		    LPDISPATCH *ppdisp);
-static int      Send(LPDISPATCH pdispInterp, Tcl_Interp *interp, int async,
-		    ClientData clientData, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
-static Tcl_Obj* Win32ErrorObj(HRESULT hrError);
-static void     SendTrace(const char *format, ...);
-
-static Tcl_EventProc      SendEventProc;
+/*
+ * Functions internal to this file.
+ */
 
+static void		CmdDeleteProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		InterpDeleteProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static void		RevokeObjectRegistration(RegisteredInterp *riPtr);
+static HRESULT		BuildMoniker(CONST char *name, LPMONIKER *pmk);
+static HRESULT		RegisterInterp(CONST char *name,
+			    RegisteredInterp *riPtr);
+static int		FindInterpreterObject(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    CONST char *name, LPDISPATCH *ppdisp);
+static int		Send(LPDISPATCH pdispInterp, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int async, ClientData clientData, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static Tcl_Obj *	Win32ErrorObj(HRESULT hrError);
+static void		SendTrace(const char *format, ...);
+static Tcl_EventProc	SendEventProc;
 
 #if defined(DEBUG) || defined(_DEBUG)
 #define TRACE SendTrace
 #else
 #define TRACE 1 ? ((void)0) : SendTrace
 #endif
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_SetAppName --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to associate an ASCII name with a Tk
- *	application.  If the application has already been named, the
- *	name replaces the old one.
+ *	This function is called to associate an ASCII name with a Tk
+ *	application. If the application has already been named, the name
+ *	replaces the old one.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the name actually given to the application.
- *	This will normally be the same as name, but if name was already
- *	in use for an application then a name of the form "name #2" will
- *	be chosen,  with a high enough number to make the name unique.
+ *	The return value is the name actually given to the application. This
+ *	will normally be the same as name, but if name was already in use for
+ *	an application then a name of the form "name #2" will be chosen, with
+ *	a high enough number to make the name unique.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Registration info is saved, thereby allowing the "send" command
- *	to be used later to invoke commands in the application.  In
- *	addition, the "send" command is created in the application's
- *	interpreter.  The registration will be removed automatically
- *	if the interpreter is deleted or the "send" command is removed.
+ *	Registration info is saved, thereby allowing the "send" command to be
+ *	used later to invoke commands in the application. In addition, the
+ *	"send" command is created in the application's interpreter. The
+ *	registration will be removed automatically if the interpreter is
+ *	deleted or the "send" command is removed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 CONST char *
-Tk_SetAppName(tkwin, name)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for any window in the application
-				 * to be named:  it is just used to identify
-				 * the application and the display.  */
-    CONST char *name;		/* The name that will be used to
-				 * refer to the interpreter in later
-				 * "send" commands.  Must be globally
-				 * unique. */
+Tk_SetAppName(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for any window in the application to
+				 * be named: it is just used to identify the
+				 * application and the display.  */
+    CONST char *name)		/* The name that will be used to refer to the
+				 * interpreter in later "send" commands. Must
+				 * be globally unique. */
 {
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = NULL;
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
@@ -118,59 +124,61 @@ Tk_SetAppName(tkwin, name)
 
     interp = winPtr->mainPtr->interp;
 
+#ifndef TK_SEND_ENABLED_ON_WINDOWS
     /*
      * Temporarily disabled for bug #858822
      */
+
     return name;
+#else /* TK_SEND_ENABLED_ON_WINDOWS */
 
     tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
-	Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
-    /* 
+    /*
      * Initialise the COM library for this interpreter just once.
      */
+
     if (tsdPtr->initialized == 0) {
-        hr = CoInitialize(0);
-        if (FAILED(hr)) {
-            Tcl_SetResult(interp,
-		"failed to initialize the COM library", TCL_STATIC);
-            return "";
-        }
-        tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
-        TRACE("Initialized COM library for interp 0x%08X\n", (long)interp);
+	hr = CoInitialize(0);
+	if (FAILED(hr)) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+		    "failed to initialize the COM library", TCL_STATIC);
+	    return "";
+	}
+	tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
+	TRACE("Initialized COM library for interp 0x%08X\n", (long)interp);
     }
-    
-    /* 
-     * If the interp hasn't been registered before then we need to create
-     * the registration structure and the COM object. If it has been
-     * registered already then we can reuse all and just register the new
-     * name.
+
+    /*
+     * If the interp hasn't been registered before then we need to create the
+     * registration structure and the COM object. If it has been registered
+     * already then we can reuse all and just register the new name.
      */
-    
+
     riPtr = Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, "tkWinSend::ri", NULL);
     if (riPtr == NULL) {
-        
-        riPtr = (RegisteredInterp *)ckalloc(sizeof(RegisteredInterp));
-        memset(riPtr, 0, sizeof(RegisteredInterp));
-        riPtr->interp = interp;
-        
-        hr = TkWinSendCom_CreateInstance(interp, &IID_IUnknown,
-                (void **)&riPtr->obj);
-        
-        Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "send", Tk_SendObjCmd,
-                (ClientData)riPtr, CmdDeleteProc);
-        if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
-            Tcl_HideCommand(interp, "send", "send");
-        }
-        Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, "tkWinSend::ri", NULL, (ClientData)riPtr);
-        
+
+	riPtr = (RegisteredInterp *)ckalloc(sizeof(RegisteredInterp));
+	memset(riPtr, 0, sizeof(RegisteredInterp));
+	riPtr->interp = interp;
+
+	hr = TkWinSendCom_CreateInstance(interp, &IID_IUnknown,
+		(void **)&riPtr->obj);
+
+	Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "send", Tk_SendObjCmd,
+		(ClientData)riPtr, CmdDeleteProc);
+	if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+	    Tcl_HideCommand(interp, "send", "send");
+	}
+	Tcl_SetAssocData(interp, "tkWinSend::ri", NULL, (ClientData)riPtr);
     } else {
-        
-        RevokeObjectRegistration(riPtr);
+	RevokeObjectRegistration(riPtr);
     }
-    
+
     RegisterInterp(name, riPtr);
-    return (CONST char *)riPtr->name;
+    return (CONST char *) riPtr->name;
+#endif /* TK_SEND_ENABLED_ON_WINDOWS */
 }
 
 /*
@@ -178,15 +186,14 @@ Tk_SetAppName(tkwin, name)
  *
  * TkGetInterpNames --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to fetch a list of all the
- *	interpreter names currently registered for the display
- *	of a particular window.
+ *	This function is invoked to fetch a list of all the interpreter names
+ *	currently registered for the display of a particular window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  Interp->result will be set
- *	to hold a list of all the interpreter names defined for
- *	tkwin's display.  If an error occurs, then TCL_ERROR
- *	is returned and interp->result will hold an error message.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. Interp->result will be set to hold a list
+ *	of all the interpreter names defined for tkwin's display. If an error
+ *	occurs, then TCL_ERROR is returned and interp->result will hold an
+ *	error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -195,49 +202,56 @@ Tk_SetAppName(tkwin, name)
  */
 
 int
-TkGetInterpNames(interp, tkwin)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for returning a result. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose display is to be used
-				 * for the lookup. */
+TkGetInterpNames(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter for returning a result. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Window whose display is to be used for the
+				 * lookup. */
 {
     LPRUNNINGOBJECTTABLE pROT = NULL;
     LPCOLESTR oleszStub = TKWINSEND_REGISTRATION_BASE;
     HRESULT hr = S_OK;
     Tcl_Obj *objList = NULL;
     int result = TCL_OK;
-    
+
+#ifndef TK_SEND_ENABLED_ON_WINDOWS
     /*
      * Temporarily disabled for bug #858822
      */
+
     return TCL_OK;
+#else /* TK_SEND_ENABLED_ON_WINDOWS */
 
     hr = GetRunningObjectTable(0, &pROT);
-    if(SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
+    if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
 	IBindCtx* pBindCtx = NULL;
 	objList = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
 	hr = CreateBindCtx(0, &pBindCtx);
+
 	if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
-	    
 	    IEnumMoniker* pEnum;
+
 	    hr = pROT->lpVtbl->EnumRunning(pROT, &pEnum);
-	    if(SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
+	    if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
 		IMoniker* pmk = NULL;
-		while (pEnum->lpVtbl->Next(pEnum, 1, &pmk, (ULONG*)NULL) 
-		       == S_OK) {
+
+		while (pEnum->lpVtbl->Next(pEnum, 1, &pmk, NULL) == S_OK) {
 		    LPOLESTR olestr;
-		    hr = pmk->lpVtbl->GetDisplayName(pmk, pBindCtx, 
-						     NULL, &olestr);
+
+		    hr = pmk->lpVtbl->GetDisplayName(pmk, pBindCtx, NULL,
+			    &olestr);
 		    if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
 			IMalloc *pMalloc = NULL;
-			
-			if (wcsncmp(olestr, oleszStub, wcslen(oleszStub)) == 0) {
+
+			if (wcsncmp(olestr, oleszStub,
+				wcslen(oleszStub)) == 0) {
 			    LPOLESTR p = olestr + wcslen(oleszStub);
+
 			    if (*p) {
-			        result = Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, 
-				  objList, Tcl_NewUnicodeObj(p + 1, -1));
+				result = Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp,
+					objList, Tcl_NewUnicodeObj(p + 1, -1));
 			    }
 			}
-			
+
 			hr = CoGetMalloc(1, &pMalloc);
 			if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
 			    pMalloc->lpVtbl->Free(pMalloc, (void*)olestr);
@@ -254,19 +268,23 @@ TkGetInterpNames(interp, tkwin)
     }
 
     if (FAILED(hr)) {
-        /* expire the list if set */
-        if (objList != NULL) {
-            Tcl_DecrRefCount(objList);
-        }
-        Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Win32ErrorObj(hr));
-        result = TCL_ERROR;
+	/*
+	 * Expire the list if set.
+	 */
+
+	if (objList != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(objList);
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Win32ErrorObj(hr));
+	result = TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     if (result == TCL_OK) {
-        Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objList);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objList);
     }
-    
+
     return result;
+#endif /* TK_SEND_ENABLED_ON_WINDOWS */
 }
 
 /*
@@ -274,8 +292,8 @@ TkGetInterpNames(interp, tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_SendCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "send" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "send" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -287,24 +305,27 @@ TkGetInterpNames(interp, tkwin)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_SendObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-     ClientData clientData;	/* Information about sender (only
-				 * dispPtr field is used). */
-     Tcl_Interp *interp;	/* Current interpreter. */
-     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-     Tcl_Obj  *CONST objv[];	/* Argument strings. */
+Tk_SendObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Information about sender (only dispPtr
+				 * field is used). */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument strings. */
 {
     enum {
 	SEND_ASYNC, SEND_DISPLAYOF, SEND_LAST
     };
     static CONST char *sendOptions[] = {
-	"-async",   "-displayof",   "--",  (CONST char *)NULL
+	"-async",   "-displayof",   "--",  NULL
     };
     int result = TCL_OK;
     int i, optind, async = 0;
     Tcl_Obj *displayPtr = NULL;
 
-    /* process the command options */
+    /*
+     * Process the command options.
+     */
+
     for (i = 1; i < objc; i++) {
 	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], sendOptions,
 		"option", 0, &optind) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -319,12 +340,15 @@ Tk_SendObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    break;
 	}
     }
-    
-    /* ensure we still have a valid command */
+
+    /*
+     * Ensure we still have a valid command.
+     */
+
     if ((objc - i) < 2) {
-	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, 
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv,
 		"?-async? ?-displayof? ?--? interpName arg ?arg ...?");
-        result = TCL_ERROR;
+	result = TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -333,24 +357,25 @@ Tk_SendObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
     if (displayPtr) {
 	Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-	    "option not implemented: \"displayof\" is not available "
-	    "for this platform.", -1);
+		"option not implemented: \"displayof\" is not available "
+		"for this platform.", -1);
 	result = TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
-    /* send the arguments to the foreign interp */
+
+    /*
+     * Send the arguments to the foreign interp.
+     */
     /* FIX ME: we need to check for local interp */
     if (result == TCL_OK) {
 	LPDISPATCH pdisp;
 	result = FindInterpreterObject(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), &pdisp);
 	if (result == TCL_OK) {
 	    i++;
-	    result = Send(pdisp, interp, async, clientData, 
-			  (objc - i), &objv[i]);
+	    result = Send(pdisp, interp, async, clientData, objc-i, objv+i);
 	    pdisp->lpVtbl->Release(pdisp);
 	}
     }
-    
+
     return result;
 }
 
@@ -359,16 +384,14 @@ Tk_SendObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * FindInterpreterObject --
  *
- *	Search the set of objects currently registered with the
- *	Running Object Table for one which matches the registered
- *	name. Tk objects are named using BuildMoniker by always
- *	prefixing with TclEval.
+ *	Search the set of objects currently registered with the Running Object
+ *	Table for one which matches the registered name. Tk objects are named
+ *	using BuildMoniker by always prefixing with TclEval.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If a matching object registration is found, then the
- *	registered IDispatch interface pointer is returned.
- *	If not, then an error message is placed in the interpreter
- *	and TCL_ERROR is returned.
+ *	If a matching object registration is found, then the registered
+ *	IDispatch interface pointer is returned. If not, then an error message
+ *	is placed in the interpreter and TCL_ERROR is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -377,19 +400,26 @@ Tk_SendObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-FindInterpreterObject(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name, LPDISPATCH *ppdisp)
+FindInterpreterObject(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    CONST char *name,
+    LPDISPATCH *ppdisp)
 {
     LPRUNNINGOBJECTTABLE pROT = NULL;
     int result = TCL_OK;
     HRESULT hr = GetRunningObjectTable(0, &pROT);
+
     if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
 	IBindCtx* pBindCtx = NULL;
+
 	hr = CreateBindCtx(0, &pBindCtx);
 	if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
 	    LPMONIKER pmk = NULL;
+
 	    hr = BuildMoniker(name, &pmk);
 	    if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
 		IUnknown* punkInterp = NULL;
+
 		hr = pROT->lpVtbl->IsRunning(pROT, pmk);
 		hr = pmk->lpVtbl->BindToObject(pmk, pBindCtx, NULL,
 			&IID_IUnknown, (void**)&punkInterp);
@@ -401,10 +431,10 @@ FindInterpreterObject(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name, LPDISPATCH *ppdisp)
 		} else {
 		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-			"no application named \"", name, "\"", NULL);
+			    "no application named \"", name, "\"", NULL);
 		    result = TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		
+
 		pmk->lpVtbl->Release(pmk);
 	    }
 	    pBindCtx->lpVtbl->Release(pBindCtx);
@@ -423,38 +453,50 @@ FindInterpreterObject(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name, LPDISPATCH *ppdisp)
  *
  * CmdDeleteProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl when the "send" command
- *	is deleted in an interpreter.  It unregisters the interpreter.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tcl when the "send" command is deleted in
+ *	an interpreter. It unregisters the interpreter.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The interpreter given by riPtr is unregistered, the
- *      registration structure is free'd and the COM object
- *      unregistered and released.
+ *	The interpreter given by riPtr is unregistered, the registration
+ *	structure is free'd and the COM object unregistered and released.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-CmdDeleteProc(ClientData clientData)
+CmdDeleteProc(
+    ClientData clientData)
 {
     RegisteredInterp *riPtr = (RegisteredInterp *)clientData;
 
-    /* Lock the package structure in memory */
+    /*
+     * Lock the package structure in memory.
+     */
+
     Tcl_Preserve(clientData);
 
-    /* Revoke the ROT registration */
+    /*
+     * Revoke the ROT registration.
+     */
+
     RevokeObjectRegistration(riPtr);
 
-    /* Release the registration object */
+    /*
+     * Release the registration object.
+     */
+
     riPtr->obj->lpVtbl->Release(riPtr->obj);
     riPtr->obj = NULL;
 
     Tcl_DeleteAssocData(riPtr->interp, "tkWinSend::ri");
 
-    /* unlock the package data structure. */
+    /*
+     * Unlock the package data structure.
+     */
+
     Tcl_Release(clientData);
 
     ckfree(clientData);
@@ -465,37 +507,42 @@ CmdDeleteProc(ClientData clientData)
  *
  * RevokeObjectRegistration --
  *
- *	Releases the interpreters registration object from the
- *	Running Object Table.
+ *	Releases the interpreters registration object from the Running Object
+ *	Table.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The stored cookie value is zeroed and the name is free'd
- *	and the pointer set to NULL.
+ *	The stored cookie value is zeroed and the name is free'd and the
+ *	pointer set to NULL.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-RevokeObjectRegistration(RegisteredInterp *riPtr)
+RevokeObjectRegistration(
+    RegisteredInterp *riPtr)
 {
     LPRUNNINGOBJECTTABLE pROT = NULL;
     HRESULT hr = S_OK;
+
     if (riPtr->cookie != 0) {
-        hr = GetRunningObjectTable(0, &pROT);
-        if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
-            hr = pROT->lpVtbl->Revoke(pROT, riPtr->cookie);
-            pROT->lpVtbl->Release(pROT);
-            riPtr->cookie = 0;
-        }
+	hr = GetRunningObjectTable(0, &pROT);
+	if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
+	    hr = pROT->lpVtbl->Revoke(pROT, riPtr->cookie);
+	    pROT->lpVtbl->Release(pROT);
+	    riPtr->cookie = 0;
+	}
     }
 
-    /* release the name storage */
+    /*
+     * Release the name storage.
+     */
+
     if (riPtr->name != NULL) {
 	free(riPtr->name);
-        riPtr->name = NULL;
+	riPtr->name = NULL;
     }
 }
 
@@ -504,8 +551,8 @@ RevokeObjectRegistration(RegisteredInterp *riPtr)
  *
  * InterpDeleteProc --
  *
- *	This is called when the interpreter is deleted and used to 
- *	unregister the COM libraries.
+ *	This is called when the interpreter is deleted and used to unregister
+ *	the COM libraries.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -517,7 +564,9 @@ RevokeObjectRegistration(RegisteredInterp *riPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-InterpDeleteProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp)
+InterpDeleteProc(
+    ClientData clientData,
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)
 {
     CoUninitialize();
 }
@@ -526,13 +575,13 @@ InterpDeleteProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp)
  * ----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * BuildMoniker --
- * 
+ *
  *	Construct a moniker from the given name. This ensures that all our
  *	monikers have the same prefix.
  *
  * Results:
- *	S_OK. If the name cannot be turned into a moniker then a
- *	COM error code is returned.
+ *	S_OK. If the name cannot be turned into a moniker then a COM error
+ *	code is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The moniker created is stored at the address given by ppmk.
@@ -541,23 +590,26 @@ InterpDeleteProc(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp)
  */
 
 static HRESULT
-BuildMoniker(CONST char *name, LPMONIKER *ppmk)
+BuildMoniker(
+    CONST char *name,
+    LPMONIKER *ppmk)
 {
     LPMONIKER pmkClass = NULL;
     HRESULT hr = CreateFileMoniker(TKWINSEND_REGISTRATION_BASE, &pmkClass);
+
     if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
-        LPMONIKER pmkItem = NULL;
+	LPMONIKER pmkItem = NULL;
 	Tcl_DString dString;
 
 	Tcl_DStringInit(&dString);
 	Tcl_UtfToUniCharDString(name, -1, &dString);
-        hr = CreateFileMoniker((LPOLESTR)Tcl_DStringValue(&dString), &pmkItem);
+	hr = CreateFileMoniker((LPOLESTR)Tcl_DStringValue(&dString), &pmkItem);
 	Tcl_DStringFree(&dString);
-        if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
-            hr = pmkClass->lpVtbl->ComposeWith(pmkClass, pmkItem, FALSE, ppmk);
+	if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
+	    hr = pmkClass->lpVtbl->ComposeWith(pmkClass, pmkItem, FALSE, ppmk);
 	    pmkItem->lpVtbl->Release(pmkItem);
-        }
-        pmkClass->lpVtbl->Release(pmkClass);
+	}
+	pmkClass->lpVtbl->Release(pmkClass);
     }
     return hr;
 }
@@ -566,23 +618,25 @@ BuildMoniker(CONST char *name, LPMONIKER *ppmk)
  * ----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * RegisterInterp --
- * 
- *	Attempts to register the provided name for this interpreter.
- *	If the given name is already in use, then a numeric suffix is
- *	appended as " #n" until we identify a unique name.
- * 
+ *
+ *	Attempts to register the provided name for this interpreter. If the
+ *	given name is already in use, then a numeric suffix is appended as
+ *	" #n" until we identify a unique name.
+ *
  * Results:
  *	Returns S_OK if successful, else a COM error code.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Registration returns a cookie value which is stored. We also store
- *	a copy of the name.
+ *	Registration returns a cookie value which is stored. We also store a
+ *	copy of the name.
  *
  * ----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static HRESULT
-RegisterInterp(CONST char *name, RegisteredInterp *riPtr)
+RegisterInterp(
+    CONST char *name,
+    RegisteredInterp *riPtr)
 {
     HRESULT hr = S_OK;
     LPRUNNINGOBJECTTABLE pROT = NULL;
@@ -594,9 +648,7 @@ RegisterInterp(CONST char *name, RegisteredInterp *riPtr)
 
     hr = GetRunningObjectTable(0, &pROT);
     if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
-
 	offset = 0;
-
 	for (i = 1; SUCCEEDED(hr); i++) {
 	    if (i > 1) {
 		if (i == 2) {
@@ -609,11 +661,11 @@ RegisterInterp(CONST char *name, RegisteredInterp *riPtr)
 		}
 		sprintf(Tcl_DStringValue(&dString) + offset, "%d", i);
 	    }
-	    
+
 	    hr = BuildMoniker(actualName, &pmk);
 	    if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
 
-		hr = pROT->lpVtbl->Register(pROT, 
+		hr = pROT->lpVtbl->Register(pROT,
 		    ROTFLAGS_REGISTRATIONKEEPSALIVE,
 		    riPtr->obj, pmk, &riPtr->cookie);
 
@@ -621,17 +673,17 @@ RegisterInterp(CONST char *name, RegisteredInterp *riPtr)
 	    }
 
 	    if (hr == MK_S_MONIKERALREADYREGISTERED) {
-	        pROT->lpVtbl->Revoke(pROT, riPtr->cookie);
+		pROT->lpVtbl->Revoke(pROT, riPtr->cookie);
 	    } else if (hr == S_OK) {
 		break;
 	    }
 	}
-	
+
 	pROT->lpVtbl->Release(pROT);
     }
 
     if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
-        riPtr->name = strdup(actualName);
+	riPtr->name = strdup(actualName);
     }
 
     Tcl_DStringFree(&dString);
@@ -643,9 +695,9 @@ RegisterInterp(CONST char *name, RegisteredInterp *riPtr)
  *
  * Send --
  *
- *   Perform an interface call to the server object. We convert the
- *   Tcl arguments into a BSTR using 'concat'. The result should be a
- *   BSTR that we can set as the interp's result string.
+ *	Perform an interface call to the server object. We convert the Tcl
+ *	arguments into a BSTR using 'concat'. The result should be a BSTR that
+ *	we can set as the interp's result string.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -654,15 +706,18 @@ RegisterInterp(CONST char *name, RegisteredInterp *riPtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * ----------------------------------------------------------------------
- */   
+ */
 
 static int
-Send(LPDISPATCH pdispInterp,   /* pointer to the remote interp's COM object */
-     Tcl_Interp *interp,       /* the local interpreter */
-     int async,                /* flag for the calling style */
-     ClientData clientData,    /* the RegisteredInterp structure for this interp */
-     int objc,                 /* number of arguments to be sent */
-     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])    /* the arguments to be sent */
+Send(
+    LPDISPATCH pdispInterp,	/* Pointer to the remote interp's COM
+				 * object. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The local interpreter. */
+    int async,			/* Flag for the calling style. */
+    ClientData clientData,	/* The RegisteredInterp structure for this
+				 * interp. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments to be sent. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* The arguments to be sent. */
 {
     VARIANT vCmd, vResult;
     DISPPARAMS dp;
@@ -690,8 +745,7 @@ Send(LPDISPATCH pdispInterp,   /* pointer to the remote interp's COM object */
     dp.rgvarg = &vCmd;
 
     /*
-     * Select the method to use based upon the async flag and
-     * call the method.
+     * Select the method to use based upon the async flag and call the method.
      */
 
     dispid = async ? TKWINSENDCOM_DISPID_ASYNC : TKWINSENDCOM_DISPID_SEND;
@@ -703,36 +757,36 @@ Send(LPDISPATCH pdispInterp,   /* pointer to the remote interp's COM object */
     /*
      * Convert the result into a string and place in the interps result.
      */
-    
+
     ehr = VariantChangeType(&vResult, &vResult, 0, VT_BSTR);
     if (SUCCEEDED(ehr)) {
-        Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewUnicodeObj(vResult.bstrVal, -1));
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewUnicodeObj(vResult.bstrVal, -1));
     }
 
     /*
      * Errors are returned as dispatch exceptions. If an error code was
-     * returned then we decode the exception and setup the Tcl
-     * error variables.
+     * returned then we decode the exception and setup the Tcl error
+     * variables.
      */
 
     if (hr == DISP_E_EXCEPTION) {
-        Tcl_Obj *opError, *opErrorCode, *opErrorInfo;
-	
-        if (ei.bstrSource != NULL) {
-            int len;
-            char * szErrorInfo;
-	    
-            opError = Tcl_NewUnicodeObj(ei.bstrSource, -1);
-            Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, opError, 0, &opErrorCode);
-            Tcl_SetObjErrorCode(interp, opErrorCode);
-
-            Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, opError, 1, &opErrorInfo);
-            szErrorInfo = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(opErrorInfo, &len);
-            Tcl_AddObjErrorInfo(interp, szErrorInfo, len);
-        }
+	Tcl_Obj *opError, *opErrorCode, *opErrorInfo;
+
+	if (ei.bstrSource != NULL) {
+	    int len;
+	    char *szErrorInfo;
+
+	    opError = Tcl_NewUnicodeObj(ei.bstrSource, -1);
+	    Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, opError, 0, &opErrorCode);
+	    Tcl_SetObjErrorCode(interp, opErrorCode);
+
+	    Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, opError, 1, &opErrorInfo);
+	    szErrorInfo = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(opErrorInfo, &len);
+	    Tcl_AddObjErrorInfo(interp, szErrorInfo, len);
+	}
     }
 
-    /* 
+    /*
      * Clean up any COM allocated resources.
      */
 
@@ -749,8 +803,7 @@ Send(LPDISPATCH pdispInterp,   /* pointer to the remote interp's COM object */
  *
  * Win32ErrorObj --
  *
- *	Returns a string object containing text from a COM or 
- *	Win32 error code
+ *	Returns a string object containing text from a COM or Win32 error code
  *
  * Results:
  *	A Tcl_Obj containing the Win32 error message.
@@ -762,7 +815,8 @@ Send(LPDISPATCH pdispInterp,   /* pointer to the remote interp's COM object */
  */
 
 static Tcl_Obj*
-Win32ErrorObj(HRESULT hrError)
+Win32ErrorObj(
+    HRESULT hrError)
 {
     LPTSTR lpBuffer = NULL, p = NULL;
     TCHAR  sBuffer[30];
@@ -778,7 +832,7 @@ Win32ErrorObj(HRESULT hrError)
     }
 
     if ((p = _tcsrchr(lpBuffer, _T('\r'))) != NULL) {
-        *p = _T('\0');
+	*p = _T('\0');
     }
 
 #ifdef _UNICODE
@@ -788,7 +842,7 @@ Win32ErrorObj(HRESULT hrError)
 #endif
 
     if (lpBuffer != sBuffer) {
-        LocalFree((HLOCAL)lpBuffer);
+	LocalFree((HLOCAL)lpBuffer);
     }
 
     return errPtr;
@@ -800,8 +854,8 @@ Win32ErrorObj(HRESULT hrError)
  * SetErrorInfo --
  *
  *	Convert the error information from a Tcl interpreter into a COM
- *	exception structure. This information is then registered with the
- *	COM thread exception object so that it can be used for rich error
+ *	exception structure. This information is then registered with the COM
+ *	thread exception object so that it can be used for rich error
  *	reporting by COM clients.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -814,43 +868,47 @@ Win32ErrorObj(HRESULT hrError)
  */
 
 void
-SetExcepInfo(Tcl_Interp* interp, EXCEPINFO *pExcepInfo)
+SetExcepInfo(
+    Tcl_Interp* interp,
+    EXCEPINFO *pExcepInfo)
 {
     if (pExcepInfo) {
-        Tcl_Obj *opError, *opErrorInfo, *opErrorCode;
-        ICreateErrorInfo *pCEI;
-        IErrorInfo *pEI;
-        HRESULT hr;
+	Tcl_Obj *opError, *opErrorInfo, *opErrorCode;
+	ICreateErrorInfo *pCEI;
+	IErrorInfo *pEI;
+	HRESULT hr;
 
-        opError = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
-	opErrorInfo = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp, "errorInfo", NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
-        opErrorCode = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp, "errorCode", NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	opError = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+	opErrorInfo = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp, "errorInfo",NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	opErrorCode = Tcl_GetVar2Ex(interp, "errorCode",NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
 
 	if (Tcl_IsShared(opErrorCode)) {
 	    Tcl_Obj *ec = Tcl_DuplicateObj(opErrorCode);
+
 	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(ec);
 	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(opErrorCode);
 	    opErrorCode = ec;
 	}
-        Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, opErrorCode, opErrorInfo);
-
-        pExcepInfo->bstrDescription = SysAllocString(Tcl_GetUnicode(opError));
-        pExcepInfo->bstrSource = SysAllocString(Tcl_GetUnicode(opErrorCode));
-        pExcepInfo->scode = E_FAIL;
-
-        hr = CreateErrorInfo(&pCEI);
-        if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
-            hr = pCEI->lpVtbl->SetGUID(pCEI, &IID_IDispatch);
-            hr = pCEI->lpVtbl->SetDescription(pCEI, pExcepInfo->bstrDescription);
-            hr = pCEI->lpVtbl->SetSource(pCEI, pExcepInfo->bstrSource);
-            hr = pCEI->lpVtbl->QueryInterface(pCEI, &IID_IErrorInfo, 
-					      (void**)&pEI);
-            if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
-                SetErrorInfo(0, pEI);
-                pEI->lpVtbl->Release(pEI);
-            }
-            pCEI->lpVtbl->Release(pCEI);
-        }
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, opErrorCode, opErrorInfo);
+
+	pExcepInfo->bstrDescription = SysAllocString(Tcl_GetUnicode(opError));
+	pExcepInfo->bstrSource = SysAllocString(Tcl_GetUnicode(opErrorCode));
+	pExcepInfo->scode = E_FAIL;
+
+	hr = CreateErrorInfo(&pCEI);
+	if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
+	    hr = pCEI->lpVtbl->SetGUID(pCEI, &IID_IDispatch);
+	    hr = pCEI->lpVtbl->SetDescription(pCEI,
+		    pExcepInfo->bstrDescription);
+	    hr = pCEI->lpVtbl->SetSource(pCEI, pExcepInfo->bstrSource);
+	    hr = pCEI->lpVtbl->QueryInterface(pCEI, &IID_IErrorInfo,
+		    (void**) &pEI);
+	    if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {
+		SetErrorInfo(0, pEI);
+		pEI->lpVtbl->Release(pEI);
+	    }
+	    pCEI->lpVtbl->Release(pCEI);
+	}
     }
 }
 
@@ -859,8 +917,8 @@ SetExcepInfo(Tcl_Interp* interp, EXCEPINFO *pExcepInfo)
  *
  * TkWinSend_QueueCommand --
  *
- *	Queue a script for asynchronous evaluation. This is called from 
- *	the COM objects Async method.
+ *	Queue a script for asynchronous evaluation. This is called from the
+ *	COM objects Async method.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -871,8 +929,10 @@ SetExcepInfo(Tcl_Interp* interp, EXCEPINFO *pExcepInfo)
  * ----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-int 
-TkWinSend_QueueCommand(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *cmdPtr)
+int
+TkWinSend_QueueCommand(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_Obj *cmdPtr)
 {
     SendEvent *evPtr;
 
@@ -885,10 +945,10 @@ TkWinSend_QueueCommand(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *cmdPtr)
     Tcl_Preserve(evPtr->interp);
 
     if (Tcl_IsShared(cmdPtr)) {
-        evPtr->cmdPtr = Tcl_DuplicateObj(cmdPtr);
+	evPtr->cmdPtr = Tcl_DuplicateObj(cmdPtr);
     } else {
-        evPtr->cmdPtr = cmdPtr;
-        Tcl_IncrRefCount(evPtr->cmdPtr);
+	evPtr->cmdPtr = cmdPtr;
+	Tcl_IncrRefCount(evPtr->cmdPtr);
     }
 
     Tcl_QueueEvent((Tcl_Event *)evPtr, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
@@ -901,12 +961,12 @@ TkWinSend_QueueCommand(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *cmdPtr)
  *
  * SendEventProc --
  *
- *	Handle a request for an asynchronous send. Nothing is returned
- *	to the caller so the result is discarded.
+ *	Handle a request for an asynchronous send. Nothing is returned to the
+ *	caller so the result is discarded.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns 1 if the event was handled or 0 to indicate it has
- *	been deferred.
+ *	Returns 1 if the event was handled or 0 to indicate it has been
+ *	deferred.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The target interpreter's result will be modified.
@@ -915,16 +975,18 @@ TkWinSend_QueueCommand(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *cmdPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-SendEventProc(Tcl_Event *eventPtr, int flags)
+SendEventProc(
+    Tcl_Event *eventPtr,
+    int flags)
 {
     int result = TCL_OK;
     SendEvent *evPtr = (SendEvent *)eventPtr;
 
     TRACE("SendEventProc\n");
-    
+
     result = Tcl_EvalObjEx(evPtr->interp, evPtr->cmdPtr,
-                      TCL_EVAL_DIRECT | TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
-        
+	    TCL_EVAL_DIRECT | TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
+
     Tcl_DecrRefCount(evPtr->cmdPtr);
     Tcl_Release(evPtr->interp);
 
@@ -936,9 +998,9 @@ SendEventProc(Tcl_Event *eventPtr, int flags)
  *
  * SendTrace --
  *
- *	Provide trace information to the Windows debug stream.
- *	To use this - use the TRACE macro, which compiles to nothing
- *	when DEBUG is not defined.
+ *	Provide trace information to the Windows debug stream. To use this -
+ *	use the TRACE macro, which compiles to nothing when DEBUG is not
+ *	defined.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -950,13 +1012,22 @@ SendEventProc(Tcl_Event *eventPtr, int flags)
  */
 
 static void
-SendTrace(const char *format, ...)
+SendTrace(
+    const char *format, ...)
 {
-    va_list args;    
+    va_list args;
     static char buffer[1024];
-    va_start (args, format);
+
+    va_start(args, format);
     _vsnprintf(buffer, 1023, format, args);
     OutputDebugString(buffer);
     va_end(args);
 }
 
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinTest.c b/win/tkWinTest.c
index ce7694d..600f490 100644
--- a/win/tkWinTest.c
+++ b/win/tkWinTest.c
@@ -1,41 +1,40 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinTest.c --
  *
- *	Contains commands for platform specific tests for
- *	the Windows platform.
+ *	Contains commands for platform specific tests for the Windows
+ *	platform.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
  * Copyright (c) 2001 by ActiveState Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinTest.c,v 1.8 2005/11/27 02:36:16 das Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinTest.c,v 1.9 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 
 HWND tkWinCurrentDialog;
- 
+
 /*
- * Forward declarations of procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations of functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
 static int		TestclipboardObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
 			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
-static int		TestwineventCmd(ClientData clientData, 
+static int		TestwineventCmd(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST char **argv);
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkplatformtestInit --
  *
- *	Defines commands that test platform specific functionality for
- *	Unix platforms.
+ *	Defines commands that test platform specific functionality for Windows
+ *	platforms.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -53,11 +52,11 @@ TkplatformtestInit(
     /*
      * Add commands for platform specific tests on MacOS here.
      */
-    
+
     Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "testclipboard", TestclipboardObjCmd,
-	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
+	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
     Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "testwinevent", TestwineventCmd,
-            (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
+            (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), NULL);
 
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -67,8 +66,8 @@ TkplatformtestInit(
  *
  * AppendSystemError --
  *
- *	This routine formats a Windows system error message and places
- *	it into the interpreter result.  Originally from tclWinReg.c.
+ *	This routine formats a Windows system error message and places it into
+ *	the interpreter result. Originally from tclWinReg.c.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -129,6 +128,7 @@ AppendSystemError(
 	/*
 	 * Trim the trailing CR/LF from the system message.
 	 */
+
 	if (msg[length-1] == '\n') {
 	    msg[--length] = 0;
 	}
@@ -151,8 +151,8 @@ AppendSystemError(
  *
  * TestclipboardObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the testclipboard command. It provides
- *	a way to determine the actual contents of the Windows clipboard.
+ *	This function implements the testclipboard command. It provides a way
+ *	to determine the actual contents of the Windows clipboard.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -164,11 +164,11 @@ AppendSystemError(
  */
 
 static int
-TestclipboardObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Argument values. */
+TestclipboardObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument values. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
     HGLOBAL handle;
@@ -176,29 +176,29 @@ TestclipboardObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     int code = TCL_OK;
 
     if (objc != 1) {
-	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     if (OpenClipboard(NULL)) {
 	/*
-	 * We could consider using CF_UNICODETEXT on NT, but then we
-	 * would have to convert it from External.  Instead we'll just
-	 * take this and do "bytestring" at the Tcl level for Unicode
-	 * inclusive text
+	 * We could consider using CF_UNICODETEXT on NT, but then we would
+	 * have to convert it from External. Instead we'll just take this and
+	 * do "bytestring" at the Tcl level for Unicode inclusive text
 	 */
+
 	handle = GetClipboardData(CF_TEXT);
 	if (handle != NULL) {
 	    data = GlobalLock(handle);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, data, (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, data, NULL);
 	    GlobalUnlock(handle);
 	} else {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "null clipboard handle", (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "null clipboard handle", NULL);
 	    code = TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	CloseClipboard();
 	return code;
     } else {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't open clipboard: ", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't open clipboard: ", NULL);
 	AppendSystemError(interp, GetLastError());
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -210,8 +210,8 @@ TestclipboardObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TestwineventCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the testwinevent command. It provides
- *	a way to send messages to windows dialogs.
+ *	This function implements the testwinevent command. It provides a way
+ *	to send messages to windows dialogs.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -223,11 +223,11 @@ TestclipboardObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 
 static int
-TestwineventCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window for application. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
-    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
-    CONST char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
+TestwineventCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    CONST char **argv)		/* Argument strings. */
 {
     HWND hwnd = 0;
     int id;
@@ -262,9 +262,9 @@ TestwineventCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
     TkpScanWindowId(interp, argv[1], &id);
     if (
 #ifdef _WIN64
-	(sscanf(string, "0x%p", &number) != 1) &&
-#endif
-	Tcl_GetInt(interp, string, (int *)&number) != TCL_OK) {
+	    (sscanf(string, "0x%p", &number) != 1) &&
+#endif /* _WIN64 */
+	    Tcl_GetInt(interp, string, (int *)&number) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 #endif
@@ -311,35 +311,40 @@ TestwineventCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
     }
 
     switch (message) {
-	case WM_GETTEXT: {
-	    Tcl_DString ds;
-	    char buf[256];
+    case WM_GETTEXT: {
+	Tcl_DString ds;
+	char buf[256];
 
-	    GetDlgItemText(hwnd, id, buf, 256);
-	    Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(NULL, buf, -1, &ds);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), NULL);
-	    Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case WM_SETTEXT: {
-	    Tcl_DString ds;
+	GetDlgItemText(hwnd, id, buf, 256);
+	Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(NULL, buf, -1, &ds);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), NULL);
+	Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
+	break;
+    }
+    case WM_SETTEXT: {
+	Tcl_DString ds;
 
-	    Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(NULL, argv[4], -1, &ds);
-	    SetDlgItemText(hwnd, id, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds));
-	    Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
-	    break;
-	}
-	default: {
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    
-	    sprintf(buf, "%d", 
-		    SendDlgItemMessage(hwnd, id, message, wParam, lParam));
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-	    break;
-	}
+	Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(NULL, argv[4], -1, &ds);
+	SetDlgItemText(hwnd, id, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds));
+	Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
+	break;
+    }
+    default: {
+	char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
+	sprintf(buf, "%d",
+		SendDlgItemMessage(hwnd, id, message, wParam, lParam));
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	break;
+    }
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
-    
-
-
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinWindow.c b/win/tkWinWindow.c
index da871c7..dccfd92 100644
--- a/win/tkWinWindow.c
+++ b/win/tkWinWindow.c
@@ -1,22 +1,22 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinWindow.c --
  *
- *	Xlib emulation routines for Windows related to creating,
- *	displaying and destroying windows.
+ *	Xlib emulation routines for Windows related to creating, displaying
+ *	and destroying windows.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinWindow.c,v 1.10 2002/06/14 22:25:12 jenglish Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinWindow.c,v 1.11 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
     int initialized;            /* 0 means table below needs initializing. */
-    Tcl_HashTable windowTable;  /* The windowTable maps from HWND to 
+    Tcl_HashTable windowTable;  /* The windowTable maps from HWND to
 				 * Tk_Window handles. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
@@ -25,36 +25,35 @@ static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
  * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		NotifyVisibility _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr,
-			    TkWindow *winPtr));
+static void		NotifyVisibility(XEvent *eventPtr, TkWindow *winPtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_AttachHWND --
  *
- *	This function binds an HWND and a reflection procedure to
- *	the specified Tk_Window. 
+ *	This function binds an HWND and a reflection procedure to the
+ *	specified Tk_Window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns an X Window that encapsulates the HWND.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	May allocate a new X Window.  Also enters the HWND into the
- *	global window table.
+ *	May allocate a new X Window. Also enters the HWND into the global
+ *	window table.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Window
-Tk_AttachHWND(tkwin, hwnd)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;
-    HWND hwnd;
+Tk_AttachHWND(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    HWND hwnd)
 {
     int new;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
     TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *) Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
@@ -63,12 +62,12 @@ Tk_AttachHWND(tkwin, hwnd)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Allocate a new drawable if necessary.  Otherwise, remove the
-     * previous HWND from from the window table.
+     * Allocate a new drawable if necessary. Otherwise, remove the previous
+     * HWND from from the window table.
      */
 
     if (twdPtr == NULL) {
-	twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable*) ckalloc(sizeof(TkWinDrawable));
+	twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkWinDrawable));
 	twdPtr->type = TWD_WINDOW;
 	twdPtr->window.winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     } else if (twdPtr->window.handle != NULL) {
@@ -93,8 +92,8 @@ Tk_AttachHWND(tkwin, hwnd)
  *
  * Tk_HWNDToWindow --
  *
- *	This function retrieves a Tk_Window from the window table
- *	given an HWND.
+ *	This function retrieves a Tk_Window from the window table given an
+ *	HWND.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the matching Tk_Window.
@@ -106,11 +105,11 @@ Tk_AttachHWND(tkwin, hwnd)
  */
 
 Tk_Window
-Tk_HWNDToWindow(hwnd)
-    HWND hwnd;
+Tk_HWNDToWindow(
+    HWND hwnd)
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
@@ -141,8 +140,8 @@ Tk_HWNDToWindow(hwnd)
  */
 
 HWND
-Tk_GetHWND(window)
-    Window window;
+Tk_GetHWND(
+    Window window)
 {
     return ((TkWinDrawable *) window)->window.handle;
 }
@@ -152,9 +151,8 @@ Tk_GetHWND(window)
  *
  * TkpPrintWindowId --
  *
- *	This routine stores the string representation of the
- *	platform dependent window handle for an X Window in the
- *	given buffer.
+ *	This routine stores the string representation of the platform
+ *	dependent window handle for an X Window in the given buffer.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the result in the specified buffer.
@@ -166,16 +164,18 @@ Tk_GetHWND(window)
  */
 
 void
-TkpPrintWindowId(buf, window)
-    char *buf;			/* Pointer to string large enough to hold
-				 * the hex representation of a pointer. */
-    Window window;		/* Window to be printed into buffer. */
+TkpPrintWindowId(
+    char *buf,			/* Pointer to string large enough to hold the
+				 * hex representation of a pointer. */
+    Window window)		/* Window to be printed into buffer. */
 {
     HWND hwnd = (window) ? Tk_GetHWND(window) : 0;
+
     /*
-     * Use pointer representation, because Win64 is P64 (*not* LP64).
-     * Windows doesn't print the 0x for %p, so we do it.
+     * Use pointer representation, because Win64 is P64 (*not* LP64). Windows
+     * doesn't print the 0x for %p, so we do it.
      */
+
     sprintf(buf, "0x%p", hwnd);
 }
 
@@ -184,16 +184,15 @@ TkpPrintWindowId(buf, window)
  *
  * TkpScanWindowId --
  *
- *	Given a string which represents the platform dependent window
- *	handle, produce the X Window id for the window.
+ *	Given a string which represents the platform dependent window handle,
+ *	produce the X Window id for the window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is normally TCL_OK;  in this case *idPtr
- *	will be set to the X Window id equivalent to string.  If
- *	string is improperly formed then TCL_ERROR is returned and
- *	an error message will be left in the interp's result.  If the
- *	number does not correspond to a Tk Window, then *idPtr will
- *	be set to None.
+ *	The return value is normally TCL_OK; in this case *idPtr will be set
+ *	to the X Window id equivalent to string. If string is improperly
+ *	formed then TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message will be left in
+ *	the interp's result. If the number does not correspond to a Tk Window,
+ *	then *idPtr will be set to None.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -202,28 +201,29 @@ TkpPrintWindowId(buf, window)
  */
 
 int
-TkpScanWindowId(interp, string, idPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String containing a (possibly signed)
+TkpScanWindowId(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    CONST char *string,		/* String containing a (possibly signed)
 				 * integer in a form acceptable to strtol. */
-    Window *idPtr;		/* Place to store converted result. */
+    Window *idPtr)		/* Place to store converted result. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     Window number;
 
     /*
-     * We want sscanf for the 64-bit check, but if that doesn't work,
-     * then Tcl_GetInt manages the error correctly.
+     * We want sscanf for the 64-bit check, but if that doesn't work, then
+     * Tcl_GetInt manages the error correctly.
      */
+
     if (
 #ifdef _WIN64
 	(sscanf(string, "0x%p", &number) != 1) &&
 #endif
-	Tcl_GetInt(interp, string, (int *)&number) != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_GetInt(interp, string, (int *) &number) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    tkwin = Tk_HWNDToWindow((HWND)number);
+    tkwin = Tk_HWNDToWindow((HWND) number);
     if (tkwin) {
 	*idPtr = Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
     } else {
@@ -237,8 +237,8 @@ TkpScanWindowId(interp, string, idPtr)
  *
  * TkpMakeWindow --
  *
- *	Creates a Windows window object based on the current attributes
- *	of the specified TkWindow.
+ *	Creates a Windows window object based on the current attributes of the
+ *	specified TkWindow.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns a pointer to a new TkWinDrawable cast to a Window.
@@ -250,14 +250,14 @@ TkpScanWindowId(interp, string, idPtr)
  */
 
 Window
-TkpMakeWindow(winPtr, parent)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
-    Window parent;
+TkpMakeWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,
+    Window parent)
 {
     HWND parentWin;
     int style;
     HWND hwnd;
-    
+
     if (parent != None) {
 	parentWin = Tk_GetHWND(parent);
 	style = WS_CHILD | WS_CLIPCHILDREN | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS;
@@ -267,15 +267,15 @@ TkpMakeWindow(winPtr, parent)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the window, then ensure that it is at the top of the
-     * stacking order.
+     * Create the window, then ensure that it is at the top of the stacking
+     * order.
      */
 
     hwnd = CreateWindowEx(WS_EX_NOPARENTNOTIFY, TK_WIN_CHILD_CLASS_NAME, NULL,
 	    style, Tk_X(winPtr), Tk_Y(winPtr), Tk_Width(winPtr),
 	    Tk_Height(winPtr), parentWin, NULL, Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), NULL);
     SetWindowPos(hwnd, HWND_TOP, 0, 0, 0, 0,
-		    SWP_NOACTIVATE | SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE);
+	    SWP_NOACTIVATE | SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE);
     return Tk_AttachHWND((Tk_Window)winPtr, hwnd);
 }
 
@@ -290,29 +290,29 @@ TkpMakeWindow(winPtr, parent)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Sends the WM_DESTROY message to the window and then destroys
- *	it the Win32 resources associated with the window.
+ *	Sends the WM_DESTROY message to the window and then destroys it the
+ *	Win32 resources associated with the window.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-XDestroyWindow(display, w)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
+XDestroyWindow(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w)
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
     TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)w;
     TkWindow *winPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(w);
     HWND hwnd = Tk_GetHWND(w);
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     display->request++;
 
     /*
-     * Remove references to the window in the pointer module then
-     * release the drawable.
+     * Remove references to the window in the pointer module then release the
+     * drawable.
      */
 
     TkPointerDeadWindow(winPtr);
@@ -325,8 +325,8 @@ XDestroyWindow(display, w)
     ckfree((char *)twdPtr);
 
     /*
-     * Don't bother destroying the window if we are going to destroy
-     * the parent later.
+     * Don't bother destroying the window if we are going to destroy the
+     * parent later.
      */
 
     if (hwnd != NULL && !(winPtr->flags & TK_DONT_DESTROY_WINDOW)) {
@@ -345,16 +345,15 @@ XDestroyWindow(display, w)
  *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Causes the window state to change, and generates a MapNotify
- *	event.
+ *	Causes the window state to change, and generates a MapNotify event.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-XMapWindow(display, w)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
+XMapWindow(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w)
 {
     XEvent event;
     TkWindow *parentPtr;
@@ -366,9 +365,9 @@ XMapWindow(display, w)
     winPtr->flags |= TK_MAPPED;
 
     /*
-     * Check to see if this window is visible now.  If all of the parent
-     * windows up to the first toplevel are mapped, then this window and
-     * its mapped children have just become visible.
+     * Check to see if this window is visible now. If all of the parent
+     * windows up to the first toplevel are mapped, then this window and its
+     * mapped children have just become visible.
      */
 
     if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)) {
@@ -391,7 +390,7 @@ XMapWindow(display, w)
 	event.xmap.override_redirect = winPtr->atts.override_redirect;
 	Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
     }
-    
+
     /*
      * Generate VisibilityNotify events for this window and its mapped
      * children.
@@ -412,10 +411,10 @@ XMapWindow(display, w)
  * NotifyVisibility --
  *
  *	This function recursively notifies the mapped children of the
- *	specified window of a change in visibility.  Note that we don't
- *	properly report the visibility state, since Windows does not
- *	provide that info.  The eventPtr argument must point to an event
- *	that has been completely initialized except for the window slot.
+ *	specified window of a change in visibility. Note that we don't
+ *	properly report the visibility state, since Windows does not provide
+ *	that info. The eventPtr argument must point to an event that has been
+ *	completely initialized except for the window slot.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -427,15 +426,15 @@ XMapWindow(display, w)
  */
 
 static void
-NotifyVisibility(eventPtr, winPtr)
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Initialized VisibilityNotify event. */
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to notify. */
+NotifyVisibility(
+    XEvent *eventPtr,		/* Initialized VisibilityNotify event. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Window to notify. */
 {
     if (winPtr->atts.event_mask & VisibilityChangeMask) {
 	eventPtr->xvisibility.window = winPtr->window;
 	Tk_QueueWindowEvent(eventPtr, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
     }
-    for (winPtr = winPtr->childList; winPtr != NULL; 
+    for (winPtr = winPtr->childList; winPtr != NULL;
 	    winPtr = winPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (winPtr->flags & TK_MAPPED) {
 	    NotifyVisibility(eventPtr, winPtr);
@@ -454,16 +453,15 @@ NotifyVisibility(eventPtr, winPtr)
  *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Causes the window state to change, and generates an UnmapNotify
- *	event.
+ *	Causes the window state to change, and generates an UnmapNotify event.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-XUnmapWindow(display, w)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
+XUnmapWindow(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w)
 {
     XEvent event;
     TkWindow *winPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(w);
@@ -471,8 +469,8 @@ XUnmapWindow(display, w)
     display->request++;
 
     /*
-     * Bug fix: Don't short circuit this routine based on TK_MAPPED because
-     * it will be cleared before XUnmapWindow is called.
+     * Bug fix: Don't short circuit this routine based on TK_MAPPED because it
+     * will be cleared before XUnmapWindow is called.
      */
 
     ShowWindow(Tk_GetHWND(w), SW_HIDE);
@@ -507,13 +505,11 @@ XUnmapWindow(display, w)
  */
 
 void
-XMoveResizeWindow(display, w, x, y, width, height)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
-    int x;			/* Position relative to parent. */
-    int y;
-    unsigned int width;
-    unsigned int height;
+XMoveResizeWindow(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w,
+    int x, int y,		/* Position relative to parent. */
+    unsigned int width, unsigned int height)
 {
     display->request++;
     MoveWindow(Tk_GetHWND(w), x, y, width, height, TRUE);
@@ -536,11 +532,10 @@ XMoveResizeWindow(display, w, x, y, width, height)
  */
 
 void
-XMoveWindow(display, w, x, y)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
-    int x;
-    int y;
+XMoveWindow(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w,
+    int x, int y)
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(w);
 
@@ -567,11 +562,10 @@ XMoveWindow(display, w, x, y)
  */
 
 void
-XResizeWindow(display, w, width, height)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
-    unsigned int width;
-    unsigned int height;
+XResizeWindow(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w,
+    unsigned int width, unsigned int height)
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(w);
 
@@ -598,15 +592,14 @@ XResizeWindow(display, w, width, height)
  */
 
 void
-XRaiseWindow(display, w)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
+XRaiseWindow(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w)
 {
     HWND window = Tk_GetHWND(w);
 
     display->request++;
-    SetWindowPos(window, HWND_TOPMOST, 0, 0, 0, 0,
-	    SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE);
+    SetWindowPos(window, HWND_TOPMOST, 0, 0, 0, 0, SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -621,19 +614,19 @@ XRaiseWindow(display, w)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Changes the attributes of the specified window.  Note that we
- *	ignore the passed in values and use the values stored in the
- *	TkWindow data structure.
+ *	Changes the attributes of the specified window. Note that we ignore
+ *	the passed in values and use the values stored in the TkWindow data
+ *	structure.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-XConfigureWindow(display, w, value_mask, values)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
-    unsigned int value_mask;
-    XWindowChanges* values;
+XConfigureWindow(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w,
+    unsigned int value_mask,
+    XWindowChanges *values)
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(w);
     HWND hwnd = Tk_GetHWND(w);
@@ -681,9 +674,9 @@ XConfigureWindow(display, w, value_mask, values)
  */
 
 void
-XClearWindow(display, w)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
+XClearWindow(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w)
 {
     RECT rc;
     HBRUSH brush;
@@ -715,9 +708,9 @@ XClearWindow(display, w)
  *
  * XChangeWindowAttributes --
  *
- *	This function is called when the attributes on a window are
- *	updated.  Since Tk maintains all of the window state, the only
- *	relevant value is the cursor.
+ *	This function is called when the attributes on a window are updated.
+ *	Since Tk maintains all of the window state, the only relevant value is
+ *	the cursor.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -729,11 +722,11 @@ XClearWindow(display, w)
  */
 
 void
-XChangeWindowAttributes(display, w, valueMask, attributes)
-    Display* display;
-    Window w;
-    unsigned long valueMask;
-    XSetWindowAttributes* attributes;
+XChangeWindowAttributes(
+    Display *display,
+    Window w,
+    unsigned long valueMask,
+    XSetWindowAttributes* attributes)
 {
     if (valueMask & CWCursor) {
 	XDefineCursor(display, w, attributes->cursor);
@@ -745,8 +738,8 @@ XChangeWindowAttributes(display, w, valueMask, attributes)
  *
  * TkWinSetWindowPos --
  *
- *	Adjust the stacking order of a window relative to a second
- *	window (or NULL).
+ *	Adjust the stacking order of a window relative to a second window (or
+ *	NULL).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -758,16 +751,16 @@ XChangeWindowAttributes(display, w, valueMask, attributes)
  */
 
 void
-TkWinSetWindowPos(hwnd, siblingHwnd, pos)
-    HWND hwnd;			/* Window to restack. */
-    HWND siblingHwnd;		/* Sibling window. */
-    int pos;			/* One of Above or Below. */
+TkWinSetWindowPos(
+    HWND hwnd,			/* Window to restack. */
+    HWND siblingHwnd,		/* Sibling window. */
+    int pos)			/* One of Above or Below. */
 {
     HWND temp;
 
     /*
-     * Since Windows does not support Above mode, we place the
-     * specified window below the sibling and then swap them.
+     * Since Windows does not support Above mode, we place the specified
+     * window below the sibling and then swap them.
      */
 
     if (siblingHwnd) {
@@ -792,8 +785,8 @@ TkWinSetWindowPos(hwnd, siblingHwnd, pos)
  * TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted --
  *
  *	Determines whether we know if the window given as argument was
- *	recently deleted. Called by the generic code error handler to
- *	handle BadWindow events.
+ *	recently deleted. Called by the generic code error handler to handle
+ *	BadWindow events.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Always 0. We do not keep this information on Windows.
@@ -805,9 +798,17 @@ TkWinSetWindowPos(hwnd, siblingHwnd, pos)
  */
 
 int
-TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted(win, dispPtr)
-    Window win;
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted(
+    Window win,
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr)
 {
     return 0;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinWm.c b/win/tkWinWm.c
index 3fbad34..2873794 100644
--- a/win/tkWinWm.c
+++ b/win/tkWinWm.c
@@ -2,17 +2,17 @@
  * tkWinWm.c --
  *
  *	This module takes care of the interactions between a Tk-based
- *	application and the window manager.  Among other things, it
- *	implements the "wm" command and passes geometry information
- *	to the window manager.
+ *	application and the window manager. Among other things, it implements
+ *	the "wm" command and passes geometry information to the window
+ *	manager.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinWm.c,v 1.103 2005/12/01 07:34:20 hobbs Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinWm.c,v 1.104 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
@@ -21,6 +21,7 @@
 /*
  * These next two defines are only valid on Win2K/XP+.
  */
+
 #ifndef WS_EX_LAYERED
 #define WS_EX_LAYERED	0x00080000
 #endif
@@ -29,9 +30,8 @@
 #endif
 
 /*
- * Event structure for synthetic activation events.  These events are
- * placed on the event queue whenever a toplevel gets a WM_MOUSEACTIVATE
- * message.
+ * Event structure for synthetic activation events. These events are placed on
+ * the event queue whenever a toplevel gets a WM_MOUSEACTIVATE message.
  */
 
 typedef struct ActivateEvent {
@@ -40,25 +40,23 @@ typedef struct ActivateEvent {
 } ActivateEvent;
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type holds information for
- * each window manager protocol (such as WM_DELETE_WINDOW) for
- * which a handler (i.e. a Tcl command) has been defined for a
- * particular top-level window.
+ * A data structure of the following type holds information for each window
+ * manager protocol (such as WM_DELETE_WINDOW) for which a handler (i.e. a Tcl
+ * command) has been defined for a particular top-level window.
  */
 
 typedef struct ProtocolHandler {
     Atom protocol;		/* Identifies the protocol. */
     struct ProtocolHandler *nextPtr;
-				/* Next in list of protocol handlers for
-				 * the same top-level window, or NULL for
-				 * end of list. */
+				/* Next in list of protocol handlers for the
+				 * same top-level window, or NULL for end of
+				 * list. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which to invoke command. */
-    char command[4];		/* Tcl command to invoke when a client
-				 * message for this protocol arrives.
-				 * The actual size of the structure varies
-				 * to accommodate the needs of the actual
-				 * command. THIS MUST BE THE LAST FIELD OF
-				 * THE STRUCTURE. */
+    char command[4];		/* Tcl command to invoke when a client message
+				 * for this protocol arrives. The actual size
+				 * of the structure varies to accommodate the
+				 * needs of the actual command. THIS MUST BE
+				 * THE LAST FIELD OF THE STRUCTURE. */
 } ProtocolHandler;
 
 #define HANDLER_SIZE(cmdLength) \
@@ -67,81 +65,88 @@ typedef struct ProtocolHandler {
 /*
  * Helper type passed via lParam to TkWmStackorderToplevelEnumProc
  */
+
 typedef struct TkWmStackorderToplevelPair {
     Tcl_HashTable *table;
     TkWindow **window_ptr;
 } TkWmStackorderToplevelPair;
 
 /*
- * This structure represents the contents of a icon, in terms of its
- * image.  The HICON is an internal Windows format.  Most of these
- * icon-specific-structures originated with the Winico extension.
- * We stripped out unused parts of that code, and integrated the
- * code more naturally with Tcl.
+ * This structure represents the contents of a icon, in terms of its image.
+ * The HICON is an internal Windows format. Most of these
+ * icon-specific-structures originated with the Winico extension. We stripped
+ * out unused parts of that code, and integrated the code more naturally with
+ * Tcl.
  */
+
 typedef struct {
-	UINT			Width, Height, Colors; /*  Width, Height and bpp */
-	LPBYTE			lpBits;                /*  ptr to DIB bits */
-	DWORD			dwNumBytes;            /*  how many bytes? */
-	LPBITMAPINFO	lpbi;                          /*  ptr to header */
-	LPBYTE			lpXOR;                 /*  ptr to XOR image bits */
-	LPBYTE			lpAND;                 /*  ptr to AND image bits */
-	HICON			hIcon;                 /*  DAS ICON */
+    UINT Width, Height, Colors;	/* Width, Height and bpp */
+    LPBYTE lpBits;		/* Ptr to DIB bits */
+    DWORD dwNumBytes;		/* How many bytes? */
+    LPBITMAPINFO lpbi;		/* Ptr to header */
+    LPBYTE lpXOR;		/* Ptr to XOR image bits */
+    LPBYTE lpAND;		/* Ptr to AND image bits */
+    HICON hIcon;		/* DAS ICON */
 } ICONIMAGE, *LPICONIMAGE;
+
 /*
- * This structure is how we represent a block of the above
- * items.  We will reallocate these structures according to
- * how many images they need to contain.
+ * This structure is how we represent a block of the above items. We will
+ * reallocate these structures according to how many images they need to
+ * contain.
  */
+
 typedef struct {
-	int		nNumImages;                      /*  How many images? */
-	ICONIMAGE	IconImages[1];                   /*  Image entries */
+    int nNumImages;		/* How many images? */
+    ICONIMAGE IconImages[1];	/* Image entries */
 } BlockOfIconImages, *BlockOfIconImagesPtr;
+
 /*
- * These two structures are used to read in icons from an
- * 'icon directory' (i.e. the contents of a .icr file, say).
- * We only use these structures temporarily, since we copy
- * the information we want into a BlockOfIconImages.
+ * These two structures are used to read in icons from an 'icon directory'
+ * (i.e. the contents of a .icr file, say). We only use these structures
+ * temporarily, since we copy the information we want into a
+ * BlockOfIconImages.
  */
+
 typedef struct {
-	BYTE	bWidth;               /*  Width of the image */
-	BYTE	bHeight;              /*  Height of the image (times 2) */
-	BYTE	bColorCount;          /*  Number of colors in image (0 if >=8bpp) */
-	BYTE	bReserved;            /*  Reserved */
-	WORD	wPlanes;              /*  Color Planes */
-	WORD	wBitCount;            /*  Bits per pixel */
-	DWORD	dwBytesInRes;         /*  how many bytes in this resource? */
-	DWORD	dwImageOffset;        /*  where in the file is this image */
+    BYTE bWidth;		/* Width of the image */
+    BYTE bHeight;		/* Height of the image (times 2) */
+    BYTE bColorCount;		/* Number of colors in image (0 if >=8bpp) */
+    BYTE bReserved;		/* Reserved */
+    WORD wPlanes;		/* Color Planes */
+    WORD wBitCount;		/* Bits per pixel */
+    DWORD dwBytesInRes;		/* How many bytes in this resource? */
+    DWORD dwImageOffset;	/* Where in the file is this image */
 } ICONDIRENTRY, *LPICONDIRENTRY;
+
 typedef struct {
-	WORD		idReserved;   /*  Reserved */
-	WORD		idType;       /*  resource type (1 for icons) */
-	WORD		idCount;      /*  how many images? */
-	ICONDIRENTRY	idEntries[1]; /*  the entries for each image */
+    WORD idReserved;		/* Reserved */
+    WORD idType;		/* Resource type (1 for icons) */
+    WORD idCount;		/* How many images? */
+    ICONDIRENTRY idEntries[1];	/* The entries for each image */
 } ICONDIR, *LPICONDIR;
 
 /*
- * A pointer to one of these strucutures is associated with each
- * toplevel.  This allows us to free up all memory associated with icon
- * resources when a window is deleted or if the window's icon is
- * changed.  They are simply reference counted according to:
+ * A pointer to one of these strucutures is associated with each toplevel.
+ * This allows us to free up all memory associated with icon resources when a
+ * window is deleted or if the window's icon is changed. They are simply
+ * reference counted according to:
  *
- * (i) how many WmInfo structures point to this object
- * (ii) whether the ThreadSpecificData defined in this file contains
- * a pointer to this object.
+ * (1) How many WmInfo structures point to this object
+ * (2) Whether the ThreadSpecificData defined in this file contains a pointer
+ *     to this object.
  *
- * The former count is for windows whose icons are individually
- * set, and the latter is for the global default icon choice.
+ * The former count is for windows whose icons are individually set, and the
+ * latter is for the global default icon choice.
  *
- * Icons loaded from .icr/.icr use the iconBlock field, icons
- * loaded from .exe/.dll use the hIcon field.
+ * Icons loaded from .icr/.icr use the iconBlock field, icons loaded from
+ * .exe/.dll use the hIcon field.
  */
+
 typedef struct WinIconInstance {
-    int refCount;		 /* Number of instances that share this
-				  * data structure. */
+    int refCount;		 /* Number of instances that share this data
+				  * structure. */
     BlockOfIconImagesPtr iconBlock;
-                                 /* Pointer to icon resource data for
-                                  * image. */
+                                 /* Pointer to icon resource data for image */
 } WinIconInstance;
 
 typedef struct WinIconInstance *WinIconPtr;
@@ -152,96 +157,95 @@ typedef struct WinIconInstance *WinIconPtr;
  */
 
 typedef struct TkWmInfo {
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Pointer to main Tk information for
-				 * this window. */
-    HWND wrapper;		/* This is the decorative frame window
-				 * created by the window manager to wrap
-				 * a toplevel window.  This window is
-				 * a direct child of the root window. */
-    char *title;		/* Title to display in window caption.  If
-				 * NULL, use name of widget.  Malloced. */
-    char *iconName;		/* Name to display in icon.  Malloced. */
-    XWMHints hints;		/* Various pieces of information for
-				 * window manager. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Pointer to main Tk information for this
+				 * window. */
+    HWND wrapper;		/* This is the decorative frame window created
+				 * by the window manager to wrap a toplevel
+				 * window. This window is a direct child of
+				 * the root window. */
+    char *title;		/* Title to display in window caption. If
+				 * NULL, use name of widget. Malloced. */
+    char *iconName;		/* Name to display in icon. Malloced. */
+    XWMHints hints;		/* Various pieces of information for window
+				 * manager. */
     char *leaderName;		/* Path name of leader of window group
 				 * (corresponds to hints.window_group).
-				 * Malloc-ed.  Note:  this field doesn't
-				 * get updated if leader is destroyed. */
+				 * Malloc-ed. Note: this field doesn't get
+				 * updated if leader is destroyed. */
     TkWindow *masterPtr;	/* Master window for TRANSIENT_FOR property,
 				 * or NULL. */
-    Tk_Window icon;		/* Window to use as icon for this window,
-				 * or NULL. */
+    Tk_Window icon;		/* Window to use as icon for this window, or
+				 * NULL. */
     Tk_Window iconFor;		/* Window for which this window is icon, or
 				 * NULL if this isn't an icon for anyone. */
 
     /*
-     * Information used to construct an XSizeHints structure for
-     * the window manager:
+     * Information used to construct an XSizeHints structure for the window
+     * manager:
      */
 
     int defMinWidth, defMinHeight, defMaxWidth, defMaxHeight;
 				/* Default resize limits given by system. */
-    int sizeHintsFlags;		/* Flags word for XSizeHints structure.
-				 * If the PBaseSize flag is set then the
-				 * window is gridded;  otherwise it isn't
-				 * gridded. */
-    int minWidth, minHeight;	/* Minimum dimensions of window, in
-				 * pixels or grid units. */
-    int maxWidth, maxHeight;	/* Maximum dimensions of window, in
-				 * pixels or grid units. 0 to default. */
+    int sizeHintsFlags;		/* Flags word for XSizeHints structure. If the
+				 * PBaseSize flag is set then the window is
+				 * gridded; otherwise it isn't gridded. */
+    int minWidth, minHeight;	/* Minimum dimensions of window, in pixels or
+				 * grid units. */
+    int maxWidth, maxHeight;	/* Maximum dimensions of window, in pixels or
+				 * grid units. 0 to default. */
     Tk_Window gridWin;		/* Identifies the window that controls
-				 * gridding for this top-level, or NULL if
-				 * the top-level isn't currently gridded. */
-    int widthInc, heightInc;	/* Increments for size changes (# pixels
-				 * per step). */
+				 * gridding for this top-level, or NULL if the
+				 * top-level isn't currently gridded. */
+    int widthInc, heightInc;	/* Increments for size changes (# pixels per
+				 * step). */
     struct {
 	int x;	/* numerator */
 	int y;  /* denominator */
     } minAspect, maxAspect;	/* Min/max aspect ratios for window. */
     int reqGridWidth, reqGridHeight;
-				/* The dimensions of the window (in
-				 * grid units) requested through
-				 * the geometry manager. */
+				/* The dimensions of the window (in grid
+				 * units) requested through the geometry
+				 * manager. */
     int gravity;		/* Desired window gravity. */
 
     /*
      * Information used to manage the size and location of a window.
      */
 
-    int width, height;		/* Desired dimensions of window, specified
-				 * in pixels or grid units.  These values are
-				 * set by the "wm geometry" command and by
-				 * ConfigureNotify events (for when wm
-				 * resizes window).  -1 means user hasn't
-				 * requested dimensions. */
+    int width, height;		/* Desired dimensions of window, specified in
+				 * pixels or grid units. These values are set
+				 * by the "wm geometry" command and by
+				 * ConfigureNotify events (for when wm resizes
+				 * window). -1 means user hasn't requested
+				 * dimensions. */
     int x, y;			/* Desired X and Y coordinates for window.
-				 * These values are set by "wm geometry",
-				 * plus by ConfigureNotify events (when wm
-				 * moves window).  These numbers are
-				 * different than the numbers stored in
-				 * winPtr->changes because (a) they could be
-				 * measured from the right or bottom edge
-				 * of the screen (see WM_NEGATIVE_X and
-				 * WM_NEGATIVE_Y flags) and (b) if the window
-				 * has been reparented then they refer to the
-				 * parent rather than the window itself. */
+				 * These values are set by "wm geometry", plus
+				 * by ConfigureNotify events (when wm moves
+				 * window). These numbers are different than
+				 * the numbers stored in winPtr->changes
+				 * because (a) they could be measured from the
+				 * right or bottom edge of the screen (see
+				 * WM_NEGATIVE_X and WM_NEGATIVE_Y flags) and
+				 * (b) if the window has been reparented then
+				 * they refer to the parent rather than the
+				 * window itself. */
     int borderWidth, borderHeight;
 				/* Width and height of window dressing, in
-				 * pixels for the current style/exStyle.  This
+				 * pixels for the current style/exStyle. This
 				 * includes the border on both sides of the
 				 * window. */
     int configX, configY;	/* x,y position of toplevel when window is
 				 * switched into fullscreen state, */
     int configWidth, configHeight;
 				/* Dimensions passed to last request that we
-				 * issued to change geometry of window.  Used
-				 * to eliminate redundant resize operations. */
+				 * issued to change geometry of window. Used
+				 * to eliminate redundant resize operations */
     HMENU hMenu;		/* the hMenu associated with this menu */
     DWORD style, exStyle;	/* Style flags for the wrapper window. */
     LONG styleConfig;		/* Extra user requested style bits */
     LONG exStyleConfig;		/* Extra user requested extended style bits */
-    double alpha;		/* Alpha transparency level
-				 * 0.0 (fully transparent) .. 1.0 (opaque) */
+    double alpha;		/* Alpha transparency level 0.0 (fully
+				 * transparent) .. 1.0 (opaque) */
 
     /*
      * List of children of the toplevel which have private colormaps.
@@ -254,62 +258,58 @@ typedef struct TkWmInfo {
      * Miscellaneous information.
      */
 
-    ProtocolHandler *protPtr;	/* First in list of protocol handlers for
-				 * this window (NULL means none). */
+    ProtocolHandler *protPtr;	/* First in list of protocol handlers for this
+				 * window (NULL means none). */
     int cmdArgc;		/* Number of elements in cmdArgv below. */
-    CONST char **cmdArgv;	/* Array of strings to store in the
-				 * WM_COMMAND property.  NULL means nothing
-				 * available. */
+    CONST char **cmdArgv;	/* Array of strings to store in the WM_COMMAND
+				 * property. NULL means nothing available. */
     char *clientMachine;	/* String to store in WM_CLIENT_MACHINE
 				 * property, or NULL. */
     int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags, defined below. */
-    int numTransients;		/* number of transients on this window */
-    WinIconPtr iconPtr;         /* pointer to titlebar icon structure for
-                                 * this window, or NULL. */
+    int numTransients;		/* Number of transients on this window */
+    WinIconPtr iconPtr;         /* Pointer to titlebar icon structure for this
+                                 * window, or NULL. */
     struct TkWmInfo *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all top-level windows. */
 } WmInfo;
 
 /*
  * Flag values for WmInfo structures:
  *
- * WM_NEVER_MAPPED -		non-zero means window has never been
- *				mapped;  need to update all info when
- *				window is first mapped.
- * WM_UPDATE_PENDING -		non-zero means a call to UpdateGeometryInfo
- *				has already been scheduled for this
- *				window;  no need to schedule another one.
- * WM_NEGATIVE_X -		non-zero means x-coordinate is measured in
- *				pixels from right edge of screen, rather
- *				than from left edge.
- * WM_NEGATIVE_Y -		non-zero means y-coordinate is measured in
+ * WM_NEVER_MAPPED -		Non-zero means window has never been mapped;
+ *				need to update all info when window is first
+ *				mapped.
+ * WM_UPDATE_PENDING -		Non-zero means a call to UpdateGeometryInfo
+ *				has already been scheduled for this window;
+ *				no need to schedule another one.
+ * WM_NEGATIVE_X -		Non-zero means x-coordinate is measured in
+ *				pixels from right edge of screen, rather than
+ *				from left edge.
+ * WM_NEGATIVE_Y -		Non-zero means y-coordinate is measured in
  *				pixels up from bottom of screen, rather than
  *				down from top.
- * WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS -	non-zero means that new size hints need to be
+ * WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS -	Non-zero means that new size hints need to be
  *				propagated to window manager. Not used on Win.
- * WM_SYNC_PENDING -		set to non-zero while waiting for the window
+ * WM_SYNC_PENDING -		Set to non-zero while waiting for the window
  *				manager to respond to some state change.
- * WM_MOVE_PENDING -		non-zero means the application has requested
- *				a new position for the window, but it hasn't
- *				been reflected through the window manager
- *				yet.
- * WM_COLORMAPS_EXPLICIT -	non-zero means the colormap windows were
- *				set explicitly via "wm colormapwindows".
- * WM_ADDED_TOPLEVEL_COLORMAP - non-zero means that when "wm colormapwindows"
+ * WM_MOVE_PENDING -		Non-zero means the application has requested a
+ *				new position for the window, but it hasn't
+ *				been reflected through the window manager yet.
+ * WM_COLORMAPS_EXPLICIT -	Non-zero means the colormap windows were set
+ *				explicitly via "wm colormapwindows".
+ * WM_ADDED_TOPLEVEL_COLORMAP - Non-zero means that when "wm colormapwindows"
  *				was called the top-level itself wasn't
- *				specified, so we added it implicitly at
- *				the end of the list.
- * WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE -	non-zero means that we're not supposed to
+ *				specified, so we added it implicitly at the
+ *				end of the list.
+ * WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE -	Non-zero means that we're not supposed to
  *				allow the user to change the width of the
- *				window (controlled by "wm resizable"
- *				command).
- * WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE -	non-zero means that we're not supposed to
+ *				window (controlled by "wm resizable" command).
+ * WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE -	Non-zero means that we're not supposed to
  *				allow the user to change the height of the
- *				window (controlled by "wm resizable"
- *				command).
- * WM_WITHDRAWN -		non-zero means that this window has explicitly
+ *				window (controlled by "wm resizable" command).
+ * WM_WITHDRAWN -		Non-zero means that this window has explicitly
  *				been withdrawn. If it's a transient, it should
  *				not mirror state changes in the master.
- * WM_FULLSCREEN -		non-zero means that this window has been placed
+ * WM_FULLSCREEN -		Non-zero means that this window has been placed
  *				in the full screen mode. It should be mapped at
  *				0,0 and be the width and height of the screen.
  */
@@ -347,240 +347,229 @@ typedef struct TkWmInfo {
 #define EX_TRANSIENT_STYLE (WS_EX_DLGMODALFRAME)
 
 /*
- * The following structure is the official type record for geometry
- * management of top-level windows.
+ * The following structure is the official type record for geometry management
+ * of top-level windows.
  */
 
 static void		TopLevelReqProc(ClientData dummy, Tk_Window tkwin);
 
 static Tk_GeomMgr wmMgrType = {
-    "wm",				/* name */
-    TopLevelReqProc,			/* requestProc */
-    (Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc *) NULL,	/* lostSlaveProc */
+    "wm",			/* name */
+    TopLevelReqProc,		/* requestProc */
+    NULL,			/* lostSlaveProc */
 };
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    HPALETTE systemPalette;      /* System palette; refers to the
-				  * currently installed foreground logical
-				  * palette. */
-    TkWindow *createWindow;      /* Window that is being constructed.  This
-				  * value is set immediately before a
-				  * call to CreateWindowEx, and is used
-				  * by SetLimits.  This is a gross hack
-				  * needed to work around Windows brain
-				  * damage where it sends the
-				  * WM_GETMINMAXINFO message before the
-				  * WM_CREATE window. */
-    int initialized;             /* Flag indicating whether thread-
-				  * specific elements of module have
-				  * been initialized. */
-    int firstWindow;             /* Flag, cleared when the first window
-				  * is mapped in a non-iconic state. */
-    WinIconPtr iconPtr;          /* IconPtr being used as default for all
-                                  * toplevels, or NULL. */
+    HPALETTE systemPalette;	/* System palette; refers to the currently
+				 * installed foreground logical palette. */
+    TkWindow *createWindow;	/* Window that is being constructed. This
+				 * value is set immediately before a call to
+				 * CreateWindowEx, and is used by SetLimits.
+				 * This is a gross hack needed to work around
+				 * Windows brain damage where it sends the
+				 * WM_GETMINMAXINFO message before the
+				 * WM_CREATE window. */
+    int initialized;		/* Flag indicating whether thread-specific
+				 * elements of module have been
+				 * initialized. */
+    int firstWindow;		/* Flag, cleared when the first window is
+				 * mapped in a non-iconic state. */
+    WinIconPtr iconPtr;		/* IconPtr being used as default for all
+				 * toplevels, or NULL. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * The following variables cannot be placed in thread local storage
- * because they must be shared across threads.
+ * The following variables cannot be placed in thread local storage because
+ * they must be shared across threads.
  */
 
-static int initialized;        /* Flag indicating whether module has
-				* been initialized. */
+static int initialized;		/* Flag indicating whether module has been
+				 * initialized. */
 
-/* 
- * A pointer to a shell proc which allows us to extract icons from
- * any file.  We just initialize this when we start up (if we can)
- * and then it never changes
+/*
+ * A pointer to a shell proc which allows us to extract icons from any file.
+ * We just initialize this when we start up (if we can) and then it never
+ * changes
  */
+
 DWORD* (WINAPI *shgetfileinfoProc) (LPCTSTR pszPath, DWORD dwFileAttributes,
-    SHFILEINFO* psfi, UINT cbFileInfo, UINT uFlags) = NULL;
+	SHFILEINFO* psfi, UINT cbFileInfo, UINT uFlags) = NULL;
 
 /*
- * A pointer to SetLayeredWindowAttributes (user32.dll) which we
- * retrieve dynamically because it is only valid on Win2K+.
+ * A pointer to SetLayeredWindowAttributes (user32.dll) which we retrieve
+ * dynamically because it is only valid on Win2K+.
  */
+
 BOOL (WINAPI *setLayeredWindowAttributesProc) (HWND hwnd, COLORREF crKey,
 	BYTE bAlpha, DWORD dwFlags) = NULL;
 
 TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(winWmMutex)
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static int		ActivateWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Event *evPtr,
-			    int flags));
-static void		ConfigureTopLevel _ANSI_ARGS_((WINDOWPOS *pos));
-static void		GenerateConfigureNotify _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkWindow *winPtr));
-static void		GetMaxSize _ANSI_ARGS_((WmInfo *wmPtr,
-			    int *maxWidthPtr, int *maxHeightPtr));
-static void		GetMinSize _ANSI_ARGS_((WmInfo *wmPtr,
-			    int *minWidthPtr, int *minHeightPtr));
-static TkWindow *	GetTopLevel _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd));
-static void		InitWm _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
-static int		InstallColormaps _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, int message,
-			    int isForemost));
-static void		InvalidateSubTree _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-			    Colormap colormap));
-static void		InvalidateSubTreeDepth _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
-static int		ParseGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *string, TkWindow *winPtr));
-static void		RefreshColormap _ANSI_ARGS_((Colormap colormap,
-	                    TkDisplay *dispPtr));
-static void		SetLimits _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, MINMAXINFO *info));
-static void		TkWmStackorderToplevelWrapperMap _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkWindow *winPtr,
-			    Display *display,
-			    Tcl_HashTable *table));
-static LRESULT CALLBACK	TopLevelProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message,
-			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
-static void		TopLevelEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		TopLevelReqProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		UpdateGeometryInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		UpdateWrapper _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
-static LRESULT CALLBACK	WmProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message,
-			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
-static void		WmWaitVisibilityOrMapProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr));
-static BlockOfIconImagesPtr   ReadIconOrCursorFromFile _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj* fileName, BOOL isIcon));
-static WinIconPtr       ReadIconFromFile _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *fileName));
-static WinIconPtr       GetIconFromPixmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *dsPtr,
-						       Pixmap pixmap));
-static int     		ReadICOHeader _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel channel));
-static BOOL 		AdjustIconImagePointers _ANSI_ARGS_((LPICONIMAGE lpImage));
-static HICON 		MakeIconOrCursorFromResource 
-                            _ANSI_ARGS_((LPICONIMAGE lpIcon, BOOL isIcon));
-static HICON 		GetIcon _ANSI_ARGS_((WinIconPtr titlebaricon, 
-			    int icon_size));
-static int 		WinSetIcon _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    WinIconPtr titlebaricon, Tk_Window tkw));
-static void 		FreeIconBlock _ANSI_ARGS_((BlockOfIconImagesPtr lpIR));
-static void  	 	DecrIconRefCount _ANSI_ARGS_((WinIconPtr titlebaricon));
-
-static int 		WmAspectCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+static int		ActivateWindow(Tcl_Event *evPtr, int flags);
+static void		ConfigureTopLevel(WINDOWPOS *pos);
+static void		GenerateConfigureNotify(TkWindow *winPtr);
+static void		GetMaxSize(WmInfo *wmPtr,
+			    int *maxWidthPtr, int *maxHeightPtr);
+static void		GetMinSize(WmInfo *wmPtr,
+			    int *minWidthPtr, int *minHeightPtr);
+static TkWindow *	GetTopLevel(HWND hwnd);
+static void		InitWm(void);
+static int		InstallColormaps(HWND hwnd, int message,
+			    int isForemost);
+static void		InvalidateSubTree(TkWindow *winPtr, Colormap colormap);
+static void		InvalidateSubTreeDepth(TkWindow *winPtr);
+static int		ParseGeometry(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *string,
+			    TkWindow *winPtr);
+static void		RefreshColormap(Colormap colormap, TkDisplay *dispPtr);
+static void		SetLimits(HWND hwnd, MINMAXINFO *info);
+static void		TkWmStackorderToplevelWrapperMap(TkWindow *winPtr,
+			    Display *display, Tcl_HashTable *table);
+static LRESULT CALLBACK	TopLevelProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
+static void		TopLevelEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		TopLevelReqProc(ClientData dummy, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		UpdateGeometryInfo(ClientData clientData);
+static void		UpdateWrapper(TkWindow *winPtr);
+static LRESULT CALLBACK	WmProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
+static void		WmWaitVisibilityOrMapProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static BlockOfIconImagesPtr ReadIconOrCursorFromFile(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj* fileName, BOOL isIcon);
+static WinIconPtr       ReadIconFromFile(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *fileName);
+static WinIconPtr       GetIconFromPixmap(Display *dsPtr, Pixmap pixmap);
+static int     		ReadICOHeader(Tcl_Channel channel);
+static BOOL 		AdjustIconImagePointers(LPICONIMAGE lpImage);
+static HICON 		MakeIconOrCursorFromResource(LPICONIMAGE lpIcon,
+			    BOOL isIcon);
+static HICON 		GetIcon(WinIconPtr titlebaricon, int icon_size);
+static int 		WinSetIcon(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    WinIconPtr titlebaricon, Tk_Window tkw);
+static void 		FreeIconBlock(BlockOfIconImagesPtr lpIR);
+static void  	 	DecrIconRefCount(WinIconPtr titlebaricon);
+
+static int 		WmAspectCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmAttributesCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmAttributesCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmClientCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmClientCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmColormapwindowsCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmColormapwindowsCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmCommandCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmCommandCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmDeiconifyCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmDeiconifyCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmFocusmodelCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmFocusmodelCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmFrameCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmFrameCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmGeometryCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmGeometryCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmGridCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmGridCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmGroupCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmGroupCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmIconbitmapCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmIconbitmapCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmIconifyCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmIconifyCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmIconmaskCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmIconmaskCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmIconnameCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmIconnameCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmIconphotoCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmIconphotoCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmIconpositionCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmIconpositionCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmIconwindowCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmIconwindowCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmMaxsizeCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmMaxsizeCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmMinsizeCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmMinsizeCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmOverrideredirectCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmOverrideredirectCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmPositionfromCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmPositionfromCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmProtocolCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmProtocolCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmResizableCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmResizableCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmSizefromCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmSizefromCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmStackorderCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmStackorderCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmStateCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmStateCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmTitleCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmTitleCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmTransientCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmTransientCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int 		WmWithdrawCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int 		WmWithdrawCmd(Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    TkWindow *winPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		WmUpdateGeom _ANSI_ARGS_((WmInfo *wmPtr,
-			    TkWindow *winPtr));
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		WmUpdateGeom(WmInfo *wmPtr, TkWindow *winPtr);
 
-/* Used in BytesPerLine */
-#define WIDTHBYTES(bits)      ((((bits) + 31)>>5)<<2)
+/*
+ * Used in BytesPerLine
+ */
 
+#define WIDTHBYTES(bits)      ((((bits) + 31)>>5)<<2)
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * DIBNumColors --
  *
- *	Calculates the number of entries in the color table, given by
- *	LPSTR lpbi - pointer to the CF_DIB memory block.  Used by
- *	titlebar icon code.
+ *	Calculates the number of entries in the color table, given by LPSTR
+ *	lpbi - pointer to the CF_DIB memory block. Used by titlebar icon code.
  *
  * Results:
- *
  *      WORD - Number of entries in the color table.
  *
- * Side effects: None.
- *
- *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static WORD 
-DIBNumColors( LPSTR lpbi )
+
+static WORD
+DIBNumColors(
+    LPSTR lpbi)
 {
     WORD wBitCount;
     DWORD dwClrUsed;
@@ -592,12 +581,15 @@ DIBNumColors( LPSTR lpbi )
 
     wBitCount = ((LPBITMAPINFOHEADER) lpbi)->biBitCount;
 
-    switch (wBitCount)
-    {
-	case 1: return 2;
-	case 4: return 16;
-	case 8:	return 256;
-	default:return 0;
+    switch (wBitCount) {
+    case 1:
+	return 2;
+    case 4:
+	return 16;
+    case 8:
+	return 256;
+    default:
+	return 0;
     }
 }
 
@@ -606,22 +598,19 @@ DIBNumColors( LPSTR lpbi )
  *
  * PaletteSize --
  *
- *	Calculates the number of bytes in the color table, as given by
- *	LPSTR lpbi - pointer to the CF_DIB memory block.  Used by
- *	titlebar icon code.
+ *	Calculates the number of bytes in the color table, as given by LPSTR
+ *	lpbi - pointer to the CF_DIB memory block. Used by titlebar icon code.
  *
  * Results:
- *	number of bytes in the color table
- *
- * Side effects: None.
- *
+ *	Number of bytes in the color table
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static WORD 
-PaletteSize( LPSTR lpbi )
+static WORD
+PaletteSize(
+    LPSTR lpbi)
 {
-    return ((WORD)( DIBNumColors( lpbi ) * sizeof( RGBQUAD )) );
+    return (WORD) (DIBNumColors(lpbi) * sizeof(RGBQUAD));
 }
 
 /*
@@ -629,9 +618,8 @@ PaletteSize( LPSTR lpbi )
  *
  * FindDIBits --
  *
- *	Locate the image bits in a CF_DIB format DIB, as given by
- *	LPSTR lpbi - pointer to the CF_DIB memory block.  Used by
- *	titlebar icon code.
+ *	Locate the image bits in a CF_DIB format DIB, as given by LPSTR lpbi -
+ *	pointer to the CF_DIB memory block. Used by titlebar icon code.
  *
  * Results:
  *	pointer to the image bits
@@ -641,10 +629,12 @@ PaletteSize( LPSTR lpbi )
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static LPSTR 
-FindDIBBits( LPSTR lpbi )
+
+static LPSTR
+FindDIBBits(
+   LPSTR lpbi)
 {
-   return ( lpbi + *(LPDWORD)lpbi + PaletteSize( lpbi ) );
+   return lpbi + *(LPDWORD)lpbi + PaletteSize(lpbi);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -653,19 +643,18 @@ FindDIBBits( LPSTR lpbi )
  * BytesPerLine --
  *
  *	Calculates the number of bytes in one scan line, as given by
- *	LPBITMAPINFOHEADER lpBMIH - pointer to the BITMAPINFOHEADER
- *	that begins the CF_DIB block.  Used by titlebar icon code.
+ *	LPBITMAPINFOHEADER lpBMIH - pointer to the BITMAPINFOHEADER that
+ *	begins the CF_DIB block. Used by titlebar icon code.
  *
  * Results:
  *	number of bytes in one scan line (DWORD aligned)
  *
- * Side effects: None
- *
- *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static DWORD 
-BytesPerLine( LPBITMAPINFOHEADER lpBMIH )
+
+static DWORD
+BytesPerLine(
+    LPBITMAPINFOHEADER lpBMIH)
 {
     return WIDTHBYTES(lpBMIH->biWidth * lpBMIH->biPlanes * lpBMIH->biBitCount);
 }
@@ -675,39 +664,64 @@ BytesPerLine( LPBITMAPINFOHEADER lpBMIH )
  *
  * AdjustIconImagePointers --
  *
- *	Adjusts internal pointers in icon resource struct, as given
- *	by LPICONIMAGE lpImage - the resource to handle.  Used by
- *	titlebar icon code.
+ *	Adjusts internal pointers in icon resource struct, as given by
+ *	LPICONIMAGE lpImage - the resource to handle. Used by titlebar icon
+ *	code.
  *
  * Results:
  *	BOOL - TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
  *
- * Side effects:
- *
- *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static BOOL 
-AdjustIconImagePointers( LPICONIMAGE lpImage )
+
+static BOOL
+AdjustIconImagePointers(
+    LPICONIMAGE lpImage)
 {
-    /*  Sanity check */
-    if (lpImage==NULL)
+    /*
+     * Sanity check.
+     */
+
+    if (lpImage == NULL) {
 	return FALSE;
-    /*  BITMAPINFO is at beginning of bits */
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * BITMAPINFO is at beginning of bits.
+     */
+
     lpImage->lpbi = (LPBITMAPINFO)lpImage->lpBits;
-    /*  Width - simple enough */
+
+    /*
+     * Width - simple enough.
+     */
+
     lpImage->Width = lpImage->lpbi->bmiHeader.biWidth;
-    /* 
-     * Icons are stored in funky format where height is doubled 
-     * so account for that 
+
+    /*
+     * Icons are stored in funky format where height is doubled so account for
+     * that.
      */
+
     lpImage->Height = (lpImage->lpbi->bmiHeader.biHeight)/2;
-    /*  How many colors? */
-    lpImage->Colors = lpImage->lpbi->bmiHeader.biPlanes * 
-                            lpImage->lpbi->bmiHeader.biBitCount;
-    /*  XOR bits follow the header and color table */
+
+    /*
+     * How many colors?
+     */
+
+    lpImage->Colors = lpImage->lpbi->bmiHeader.biPlanes
+	    * lpImage->lpbi->bmiHeader.biBitCount;
+
+    /*
+     * XOR bits follow the header and color table.
+     */
+
     lpImage->lpXOR = (LPBYTE)FindDIBBits(((LPSTR)lpImage->lpbi));
-    /*  AND bits follow the XOR bits */
+
+    /*
+     * AND bits follow the XOR bits.
+     */
+
     lpImage->lpAND = lpImage->lpXOR + (lpImage->Height*
 		BytesPerLine((LPBITMAPINFOHEADER)(lpImage->lpbi)));
     return TRUE;
@@ -718,50 +732,70 @@ AdjustIconImagePointers( LPICONIMAGE lpImage )
  *
  * MakeIconOrCursorFromResource --
  *
- *	Construct an actual HICON structure from the information
- *	in a resource.
+ *	Construct an actual HICON structure from the information in a
+ *	resource.
  *
  * Results:
- *
- *
- * Side effects:
- *
+ *	Icon
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static HICON 
-MakeIconOrCursorFromResource(LPICONIMAGE lpIcon, BOOL isIcon) {
+
+static HICON
+MakeIconOrCursorFromResource(
+    LPICONIMAGE lpIcon,
+    BOOL isIcon)
+{
     HICON hIcon ;
     static FARPROC pfnCreateIconFromResourceEx=NULL;
     static int initinfo=0;
-    /*  Sanity Check */
-    if (lpIcon == NULL)
+
+    /*
+     * Sanity Check
+     */
+
+    if (lpIcon == NULL) {
 	return NULL;
-    if (lpIcon->lpBits == NULL)
+    }
+    if (lpIcon->lpBits == NULL) {
 	return NULL;
+    }
+
     if (!initinfo) {
 	HMODULE hMod = GetModuleHandleA("USER32.DLL");
-	initinfo=1;
+
+	initinfo = 1;
 	if (hMod){
-	    pfnCreateIconFromResourceEx = 
-	      GetProcAddress(hMod, "CreateIconFromResourceEx");
+	    pfnCreateIconFromResourceEx = GetProcAddress(hMod,
+		    "CreateIconFromResourceEx");
 	}
     }
-    /*  Let the OS do the real work :) */
-    if (pfnCreateIconFromResourceEx!=NULL) {
-	hIcon = (HICON) (pfnCreateIconFromResourceEx)
-	(lpIcon->lpBits, lpIcon->dwNumBytes, isIcon, 0x00030000,
-	 (*(LPBITMAPINFOHEADER)(lpIcon->lpBits)).biWidth,
-	 (*(LPBITMAPINFOHEADER)(lpIcon->lpBits)).biHeight/2, 0);
+
+    /*
+     * Let the OS do the real work :)
+     */
+
+    if (pfnCreateIconFromResourceEx != NULL) {
+	hIcon = (HICON) (pfnCreateIconFromResourceEx) (lpIcon->lpBits,
+		lpIcon->dwNumBytes, isIcon, 0x00030000,
+		(*(LPBITMAPINFOHEADER)(lpIcon->lpBits)).biWidth,
+		(*(LPBITMAPINFOHEADER)(lpIcon->lpBits)).biHeight/2, 0);
     } else {
 	 hIcon = NULL;
     }
-    /*  It failed, odds are good we're on NT so try the non-Ex way */
+
+    /*
+     * It failed, odds are good we're on NT so try the non-Ex way.
+     */
+
     if (hIcon == NULL)    {
-	/*  We would break on NT if we try with a 16bpp image */
+	/*
+	 * We would break on NT if we try with a 16bpp image.
+	 */
+
 	if (lpIcon->lpbi->bmiHeader.biBitCount != 16) {
-	    hIcon = CreateIconFromResource(lpIcon->lpBits, lpIcon->dwNumBytes, 
-					   isIcon, 0x00030000);
+	    hIcon = CreateIconFromResource(lpIcon->lpBits, lpIcon->dwNumBytes,
+		    isIcon, 0x00030000);
 	}
     }
     return hIcon;
@@ -775,43 +809,56 @@ MakeIconOrCursorFromResource(LPICONIMAGE lpIcon, BOOL isIcon) {
  *	Reads the header from an ICO file, as specfied by channel.
  *
  * Results:
- *	UINT - Number of images in file, -1 for failure.
- *	If this succeeds, there is a decent chance this is a
- *	valid icon file.
- *
- * Side effects:
- *
+ *	UINT - Number of images in file, -1 for failure. If this succeeds,
+ *	there is a decent chance this is a valid icon file.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static int 
-ReadICOHeader( Tcl_Channel channel )
+
+static int
+ReadICOHeader(
+    Tcl_Channel channel)
 {
-    WORD    Input;
-    DWORD	dwBytesRead;
+    WORD Input;
+    DWORD dwBytesRead;
 
-    /*  Read the 'reserved' WORD */
-    dwBytesRead = Tcl_Read( channel, (char*)&Input, sizeof( WORD ));
-    /*  Did we get a WORD? */
-    if (dwBytesRead != sizeof( WORD ))
+    /*
+     * Read the 'reserved' WORD, which should be a zero word.
+     */
+
+    dwBytesRead = Tcl_Read(channel, (char*) &Input, sizeof(WORD));
+    if (dwBytesRead != sizeof(WORD)) {
 	return -1;
-    /*  Was it 'reserved' ?   (ie 0) */
-    if (Input != 0)
+    }
+    if (Input != 0) {
 	return -1;
-    /*  Read the type WORD */
-    dwBytesRead = Tcl_Read( channel, (char*)&Input, sizeof( WORD ));
-    /*  Did we get a WORD? */
-    if (dwBytesRead != sizeof( WORD ))
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Read the type WORD, which should be of type 1.
+     */
+
+    dwBytesRead = Tcl_Read(channel, (char*)&Input, sizeof(WORD));
+    if (dwBytesRead != sizeof(WORD)) {
 	return -1;
-    /*  Was it type 1? */
-    if (Input != 1)
+    }
+    if (Input != 1) {
 	return -1;
-    /*  Get the count of images */
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Get the count of images
+     */
+
     dwBytesRead = Tcl_Read( channel, (char*)&Input, sizeof( WORD ));
-    /*  Did we get a WORD? */
-    if (dwBytesRead != sizeof( WORD ))
+    if (dwBytesRead != sizeof(WORD)) {
 	return -1;
-    /*  Return the count */
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Return the count
+     */
+
     return (int)Input;
 }
 
@@ -830,10 +877,12 @@ ReadICOHeader( Tcl_Channel channel )
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static int 
-InitWindowClass(WinIconPtr titlebaricon)
+
+static int
+InitWindowClass(
+    WinIconPtr titlebaricon)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
 	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (! tsdPtr->initialized) {
@@ -851,37 +900,37 @@ InitWindowClass(WinIconPtr titlebaricon)
 	    if (shgetfileinfoProc == NULL) {
 		HINSTANCE hInstance = LoadLibraryA("shell32");
 		if (hInstance != NULL) {
-		    shgetfileinfoProc = 
-		    (DWORD* (WINAPI *) (LPCTSTR pszPath, DWORD dwFileAttributes,
-    SHFILEINFO* psfi, UINT cbFileInfo, UINT uFlags)) GetProcAddress(hInstance, 
-		      "SHGetFileInfo");
+		    shgetfileinfoProc = (DWORD* (WINAPI *) (LPCTSTR pszPath,
+			    DWORD dwFileAttributes, SHFILEINFO* psfi,
+			    UINT cbFileInfo, UINT uFlags))
+			GetProcAddress(hInstance, "SHGetFileInfo");
 		    FreeLibrary(hInstance);
 		}
 	    }
 	    if (setLayeredWindowAttributesProc == NULL) {
 		HINSTANCE hInstance = LoadLibraryA("user32");
 		if (hInstance != NULL) {
-		    setLayeredWindowAttributesProc =
-			(BOOL (WINAPI *) (HWND hwnd, COLORREF crKey,
-				BYTE bAlpha, DWORD dwFlags))
-			GetProcAddress(hInstance,
-				"SetLayeredWindowAttributes");
+		    setLayeredWindowAttributesProc = (BOOL (WINAPI*)(HWND hwnd,
+			    COLORREF crKey, BYTE bAlpha, DWORD dwFlags))
+			GetProcAddress(hInstance,"SetLayeredWindowAttributes");
 		    FreeLibrary(hInstance);
 		}
 	    }
+
 	    /*
-	     * The only difference between WNDCLASSW and WNDCLASSA are
-	     * in pointers, so we can use the generic structure WNDCLASS.
+	     * The only difference between WNDCLASSW and WNDCLASSA are in
+	     * pointers, so we can use the generic structure WNDCLASS.
 	     */
+
 	    ZeroMemory(&class, sizeof(WNDCLASS));
 
 	    /*
-	     * When threads are enabled, we cannot use CLASSDC because
-	     * threads will then write into the same device context.
+	     * When threads are enabled, we cannot use CLASSDC because threads
+	     * will then write into the same device context.
 	     *
-	     * This is a hack; we should add a subsystem that manages
-	     * device context on a per-thread basis.  See also tkWinX.c,
-	     * which also initializes a WNDCLASS structure.
+	     * This is a hack; we should add a subsystem that manages device
+	     * context on a per-thread basis. See also tkWinX.c, which also
+	     * initializes a WNDCLASS structure.
 	     */
 
 #ifdef TCL_THREADS
@@ -900,10 +949,12 @@ InitWindowClass(WinIconPtr titlebaricon)
 		if (class.hIcon == NULL) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
+
 		/*
-		 * Store pointer to default icon so we know when
-		 * we need to free that information
+		 * Store pointer to default icon so we know when we need to
+		 * free that information
 		 */
+
 		tsdPtr->iconPtr = titlebaricon;
 	    }
 	    class.hCursor = LoadCursor(NULL, IDC_ARROW);
@@ -914,9 +965,10 @@ InitWindowClass(WinIconPtr titlebaricon)
 
 #ifndef TCL_THREADS
 	    /*
-	     * Use of WS_EX_LAYERED disallows CS_CLASSDC, as does
-	     * TCL_THREADS usage, so only create this if necessary.
+	     * Use of WS_EX_LAYERED disallows CS_CLASSDC, as does TCL_THREADS
+	     * usage, so only create this if necessary.
 	     */
+
 	    if (setLayeredWindowAttributesProc != NULL) {
 		class.style = CS_HREDRAW | CS_VREDRAW;
 		Tcl_DStringFree(&classString);
@@ -962,33 +1014,31 @@ InitWm(void)
  *
  * WinSetIcon --
  *
- *	Sets either the default toplevel titlebar icon, or the icon
- *	for a specific toplevel (if tkw is given, then only that
- *	window is used).
+ *	Sets either the default toplevel titlebar icon, or the icon for a
+ *	specific toplevel (if tkw is given, then only that window is used).
  *
- *	The ref-count of the titlebaricon is NOT changed.  If this
- *	function returns successfully, the caller should assume
- *	the icon was used (and therefore the ref-count should
- *	be adjusted to reflect that fact).  If the function returned
- *	an error, the caller should assume the icon was not used
- *	(and may wish to free the memory associated with it).
+ *	The ref-count of the titlebaricon is NOT changed. If this function
+ *	returns successfully, the caller should assume the icon was used (and
+ *	therefore the ref-count should be adjusted to reflect that fact). If
+ *	the function returned an error, the caller should assume the icon was
+ *	not used (and may wish to free the memory associated with it).
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return code.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	One or all windows may have their icon changed.
- *	The Tcl result may be modified.
- *	The window-manager will be initialised if it wasn't already.
+ *	One or all windows may have their icon changed. The Tcl result may be
+ *	modified. The window-manager will be initialised if it wasn't already.
  *	The given window will be forced into existence.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static int
-WinSetIcon(interp, titlebaricon, tkw)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    WinIconPtr titlebaricon;
-    Tk_Window tkw;
+WinSetIcon(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    WinIconPtr titlebaricon,
+    Tk_Window tkw)
 {
     WmInfo *wmPtr;
     HWND hwnd;
@@ -1001,7 +1051,7 @@ WinSetIcon(interp, titlebaricon, tkw)
 
     if (!(Tk_IsTopLevel(tkw))) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", Tk_PathName(tkw),
-		"\" isn't a top-level window", (char *) NULL);
+		"\" isn't a top-level window", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     if (Tk_WindowId(tkw) == None) {
@@ -1015,54 +1065,59 @@ WinSetIcon(interp, titlebaricon, tkw)
 	if (hwnd == NULL) {
 	    /*
 	     * I don't actually think this is ever the correct thing, unless
-	     * perhaps the window doesn't have a wrapper.  But I believe all
+	     * perhaps the window doesn't have a wrapper. But I believe all
 	     * windows have wrappers.
 	     */
+
 	    hwnd = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkw));
 	}
+
 	/*
 	 * If we aren't initialised, then just initialise with the user's
-	 * icon.  Otherwise our icon choice will be ignored moments later
-	 * when Tk finishes initialising.
+	 * icon. Otherwise our icon choice will be ignored moments later when
+	 * Tk finishes initialising.
 	 */
+
 	if (!initialized) {
 	    if (InitWindowClass(titlebaricon) != TCL_OK) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Unable to set icon", (char*)NULL);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Unable to set icon", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr;
+
 	    if (
 #ifdef _WIN64
-		!SetClassLongPtr(hwnd, GCLP_HICONSM,
-			(LPARAM)GetIcon(titlebaricon, ICON_SMALL))
+		    !SetClassLongPtr(hwnd, GCLP_HICONSM,
+			    (LPARAM)GetIcon(titlebaricon, ICON_SMALL))
 #else
-		!SetClassLong(hwnd, GCL_HICONSM,
-			(LPARAM)GetIcon(titlebaricon, ICON_SMALL))
+		    !SetClassLong(hwnd, GCL_HICONSM,
+			    (LPARAM)GetIcon(titlebaricon, ICON_SMALL))
 #endif
-		) {
+		    ) {
 		/*
-		 * For some reason this triggers, even though it seems
-		 * to be successful This is probably related to the
-		 * WNDCLASS vs WNDCLASSEX difference.  Anyway it seems
-		 * we have to ignore errors returned here.
+		 * For some reason this triggers, even though it seems to be
+		 * successful. This is probably related to the WNDCLASS vs
+		 * WNDCLASSEX difference. Anyway it seems we have to ignore
+		 * errors returned here.
 		 */
 
 		/*
-		 * Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Unable to set new small icon", (char*)NULL);
-		 * return TCL_ERROR;
-		 */
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Unable to set new small icon",NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+		*/
 	    }
+
 	    if (
 #ifdef _WIN64
-		!SetClassLongPtr(hwnd, GCLP_HICON,
-			(LPARAM)GetIcon(titlebaricon, ICON_BIG))
+		    !SetClassLongPtr(hwnd, GCLP_HICON,
+			    (LPARAM)GetIcon(titlebaricon, ICON_BIG))
 #else
-		!SetClassLong(hwnd, GCL_HICON,
-			(LPARAM)GetIcon(titlebaricon, ICON_BIG))
+		    !SetClassLong(hwnd, GCL_HICON,
+			    (LPARAM)GetIcon(titlebaricon, ICON_BIG))
 #endif
-		) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Unable to set new icon", (char*)NULL);
+		    ) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Unable to set new icon", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
@@ -1075,31 +1130,34 @@ WinSetIcon(interp, titlebaricon, tkw)
     } else {
 	if (!initialized) {
 	    /*
-	     * Need to initialise the wm otherwise we will fail on
-	     * code which tries to set a toplevel's icon before that
-	     * happens.  Ignore return result.
+	     * Need to initialise the wm otherwise we will fail on code which
+	     * tries to set a toplevel's icon before that happens. Ignore
+	     * return result.
 	     */
-	    (void)InitWindowClass(NULL);
+
+	    (void) InitWindowClass(NULL);
 	}
 	/*
 	 * The following code is exercised if you do
 	 *
 	 *   toplevel .t ; wm titlebaricon .t foo.icr
 	 *
-	 * i.e. the wm hasn't had time to properly create
-	 * the '.t' window before you set the icon.
+	 * i.e. the wm hasn't had time to properly create the '.t' window
+	 * before you set the icon.
 	 */
+
 	if (hwnd == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * This little snippet is copied from the 'Map' function,
-	     * and should probably be placed in one proper location
+	     * This little snippet is copied from the 'Map' function, and
+	     * should probably be placed in one proper location.
 	     */
+
 	    UpdateWrapper(wmPtr->winPtr);
 	    wmPtr = ((TkWindow*)tkw)->wmInfoPtr;
 	    hwnd = wmPtr->wrapper;
 	    if (hwnd == NULL) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-			"Can't set icon; window has no wrapper.", (char*)NULL);
+			"Can't set icon; window has no wrapper.", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
@@ -1108,16 +1166,23 @@ WinSetIcon(interp, titlebaricon, tkw)
 	SendMessage(hwnd, WM_SETICON, ICON_BIG,
 		(LPARAM) GetIcon(titlebaricon, ICON_BIG));
 
-	/* Update the iconPtr we keep for each WmInfo structure. */
+	/*
+	 * Update the iconPtr we keep for each WmInfo structure.
+	 */
+
 	if (wmPtr->iconPtr != NULL) {
-	    /* Free any old icon ptr which is associated with this window. */
+	    /*
+	     * Free any old icon ptr which is associated with this window.
+	     */
+
 	    DecrIconRefCount(wmPtr->iconPtr);
 	}
+
 	/*
-	 * We do not need to increment the ref count for the
-	 * titlebaricon, because it was already incremented when we
-	 * retrieved it.
+	 * We do not need to increment the ref count for the titlebaricon,
+	 * because it was already incremented when we retrieved it.
 	 */
+
 	wmPtr->iconPtr = titlebaricon;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -1128,8 +1193,8 @@ WinSetIcon(interp, titlebaricon, tkw)
  *
  * TkWinGetIcon --
  *
- *	Gets either the default toplevel titlebar icon, or the icon
- *	for a specific toplevel (ICON_SMALL or ICON_BIG).
+ *	Gets either the default toplevel titlebar icon, or the icon for a
+ *	specific toplevel (ICON_SMALL or ICON_BIG).
  *
  * Results:
  *	A Windows HICON.
@@ -1140,21 +1205,27 @@ WinSetIcon(interp, titlebaricon, tkw)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 HICON
-TkWinGetIcon(Tk_Window tkwin, DWORD iconsize)
+TkWinGetIcon(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    DWORD iconsize)
 {
     WmInfo *wmPtr;
     HICON icon;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
 	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (tsdPtr->iconPtr != NULL) {
 	/*
 	 * return default toplevel icon
 	 */
+
 	return GetIcon(tsdPtr->iconPtr, iconsize);
     }
 
-    /* ensure we operate on the toplevel, that has the icon refs */
+    /*
+     * Ensure we operate on the toplevel, that has the icon refs.
+     */
+
     while (!Tk_IsTopLevel(tkwin)) {
 	tkwin = Tk_Parent(tkwin);
 	if (tkwin == NULL) {
@@ -1171,13 +1242,15 @@ TkWinGetIcon(Tk_Window tkwin, DWORD iconsize)
 	/*
 	 * return window toplevel icon
 	 */
+
 	return GetIcon(wmPtr->iconPtr, iconsize);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the icon otherwise associated with the toplevel, or
-     * finally with the window class.
+     * Find the icon otherwise associated with the toplevel, or finally with
+     * the window class.
      */
+
     icon = (HICON) SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, WM_GETICON, iconsize,
 	    (LPARAM) NULL);
     if (icon == (HICON) NULL) {
@@ -1197,42 +1270,42 @@ TkWinGetIcon(Tk_Window tkwin, DWORD iconsize)
  *
  * ReadIconFromFile --
  *
- *	Read the contents of a file (usually .ico, .icr) and extract an
- *	icon resource, if possible, otherwise check if the shell has an
- *	icon assigned to the given file and use that.  If both of those
- *	fail, then NULL is returned, and an error message will already be
- *	in the interpreter.
- *	
+ *	Read the contents of a file (usually .ico, .icr) and extract an icon
+ *	resource, if possible, otherwise check if the shell has an icon
+ *	assigned to the given file and use that. If both of those fail, then
+ *	NULL is returned, and an error message will already be in the
+ *	interpreter.
+ *
  * Results:
- *	A WinIconPtr structure containing the icons in the file, with
- *	its ref count already incremented. The calling procedure should
- *	either place this structure inside a WmInfo structure, or it should
- *	pass it on to DecrIconRefCount() to ensure no memory leaks occur.
+ *	A WinIconPtr structure containing the icons in the file, with its ref
+ *	count already incremented. The calling function should either place
+ *	this structure inside a WmInfo structure, or it should pass it on to
+ *	DecrIconRefCount() to ensure no memory leaks occur.
  *
  *	If the given fileName did not contain a valid icon structure,
  *	return NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Memory is allocated for the returned structure and the icons
- *	it contains.  If the structure is not wanted, it should be
- *	passed to DecrIconRefCount, and in any case a valid ref count
- *	should be ensured to avoid memory leaks.
+ *	Memory is allocated for the returned structure and the icons it
+ *	contains. If the structure is not wanted, it should be passed to
+ *	DecrIconRefCount, and in any case a valid ref count should be ensured
+ *	to avoid memory leaks.
  *
- *	Currently icon resources are not shared, so the ref count of
- *	one of these structures will always be 0 or 1.  However all we
- *	need do is implement some sort of lookup function between
- *	filenames and WinIconPtr structures and no other code will need
- *	to be changed.  The pseudo-code for this is implemented below
- *	in the 'if (0)' branch.  It did not seem necessary to implement
- *	this optimisation here, since moving to icon<->image
- *	conversions will probably make it obsolete.
+ *	Currently icon resources are not shared, so the ref count of one of
+ *	these structures will always be 0 or 1. However all we need do is
+ *	implement some sort of lookup function between filenames and
+ *	WinIconPtr structures and no other code will need to be changed. The
+ *	pseudo-code for this is implemented below in the 'if (0)' branch. It
+ *	did not seem necessary to implement this optimisation here, since
+ *	moving to icon<->image conversions will probably make it obsolete.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static WinIconPtr
-ReadIconFromFile(interp, fileName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    Tcl_Obj *fileName;
+ReadIconFromFile(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_Obj *fileName)
 {
     WinIconPtr titlebaricon = NULL;
 
@@ -1241,15 +1314,19 @@ ReadIconFromFile(interp, fileName)
 	titlebaricon->refCount++;
 	return titlebaricon;
     } else {
-	/* First check if it is a .ico file */
+	/*
+	 * First check if it is a .ico file.
+	 */
+
 	BlockOfIconImagesPtr lpIR;
 	lpIR = ReadIconOrCursorFromFile(interp, fileName, TRUE);
 
 	/*
-	 * Then see if we can ask the shell for the icon for this file.
-	 * We want both the regular and small icons so that the Alt-Tab
-	 * (task-switching) display uses the right icon.
+	 * Then see if we can ask the shell for the icon for this file. We
+	 * want both the regular and small icons so that the Alt-Tab (task-
+	 * switching) display uses the right icon.
 	 */
+
 	if (lpIR == NULL && shgetfileinfoProc != NULL) {
 	    SHFILEINFO sfiSM;
 	    Tcl_DString ds, ds2;
@@ -1257,7 +1334,9 @@ ReadIconFromFile(interp, fileName)
 	    CONST char *file;
 
 	    file = Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, Tcl_GetString(fileName), &ds);
-	    if (file == NULL) { return NULL; }
+	    if (file == NULL) {
+		return NULL;
+	    }
 	    Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(NULL, file, -1, &ds2);
 	    Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
 	    res = (*shgetfileinfoProc)(Tcl_DStringValue(&ds2), 0, &sfiSM,
@@ -1271,9 +1350,12 @@ ReadIconFromFile(interp, fileName)
 		res = (*shgetfileinfoProc)(Tcl_DStringValue(&ds2), 0, &sfi,
 			sizeof(SHFILEINFO), SHGFI_ICON);
 
-		/* Account for extra icon, if necessary */
-		size = sizeof(BlockOfIconImages) +
-		    ((res != 0) ? sizeof(ICONIMAGE) : 0);
+		/*
+		 * Account for extra icon, if necessary.
+		 */
+
+		size = sizeof(BlockOfIconImages)
+			+ ((res != 0) ? sizeof(ICONIMAGE) : 0);
 		lpIR = (BlockOfIconImagesPtr) ckalloc(size);
 		if (lpIR == NULL) {
 		    if (res != 0) {
@@ -1290,7 +1372,10 @@ ReadIconFromFile(interp, fileName)
 		lpIR->IconImages[0].Height     = 16;
 		lpIR->IconImages[0].Colors     = 4;
 		lpIR->IconImages[0].hIcon      = sfiSM.hIcon;
-		/* All other IconImages fields are ignored */
+
+		/*
+		 * All other IconImages fields are ignored.
+		 */
 
 		if (res != 0) {
 		    lpIR->IconImages[1].Width  = 32;
@@ -1315,45 +1400,45 @@ ReadIconFromFile(interp, fileName)
  *
  * GetIconFromPixmap --
  *
- *	Turn a Tk Pixmap (i.e. a bitmap) into an icon resource, if
- *	possible, otherwise NULL is returned.
+ *	Turn a Tk Pixmap (i.e. a bitmap) into an icon resource, if possible,
+ *	otherwise NULL is returned.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A WinIconPtr structure containing a conversion of the given
- *	bitmap into an icon, with its ref count already incremented.  The
- *	calling procedure should either place this structure inside a
- *	WmInfo structure, or it should pass it on to DecrIconRefCount()
- *	to ensure no memory leaks occur.
- *	
- *	If the given pixmap did not contain a valid icon structure,
- *	return NULL.
+ *	A WinIconPtr structure containing a conversion of the given bitmap
+ *	into an icon, with its ref count already incremented. The calling
+ *	function should either place this structure inside a WmInfo structure,
+ *	or it should pass it on to DecrIconRefCount() to ensure no memory
+ *	leaks occur.
+ *
+ *	If the given pixmap did not contain a valid icon structure, return
+ *	NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Memory is allocated for the returned structure and the icons
- *	it contains.  If the structure is not wanted, it should be
- *	passed to DecrIconRefCount, and in any case a valid ref count
- *	should be ensured to avoid memory leaks.
- *	
- *	Currently icon resources are not shared, so the ref count of
- *	one of these structures will always be 0 or 1.  However all we
- *	need do is implement some sort of lookup function between
- *	pixmaps and WinIconPtr structures and no other code will need
- *	to be changed.
+ *	Memory is allocated for the returned structure and the icons it
+ *	contains. If the structure is not wanted, it should be passed to
+ *	DecrIconRefCount, and in any case a valid ref count should be ensured
+ *	to avoid memory leaks.
+ *
+ *	Currently icon resources are not shared, so the ref count of one of
+ *	these structures will always be 0 or 1. However all we need do is
+ *	implement some sort of lookup function between pixmaps and WinIconPtr
+ *	structures and no other code will need to be changed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static WinIconPtr       
-GetIconFromPixmap(dsPtr, pixmap)
-    Display *dsPtr;
-    Pixmap pixmap;
+
+static WinIconPtr
+GetIconFromPixmap(
+    Display *dsPtr,
+    Pixmap pixmap)
 {
     WinIconPtr titlebaricon = NULL;
     TkWinDrawable* twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable*) pixmap;
-    
+
     if (twdPtr == NULL) {
         return NULL;
     }
-    
+
     if (0 /* If we already have an icon for this pixmap */) {
 	titlebaricon = NULL; /* Get the real value from a lookup */
 	titlebaricon->refCount++;
@@ -1388,7 +1473,11 @@ GetIconFromPixmap(dsPtr, pixmap)
 	lpIR->IconImages[0].Height = height;
 	lpIR->IconImages[0].Colors = 1 << twdPtr->bitmap.depth;
 	lpIR->IconImages[0].hIcon = hIcon;
-	/* These fields are ignored */
+
+	/*
+	 * These fields are ignored.
+	 */
+
 	lpIR->IconImages[0].lpBits = 0;
 	lpIR->IconImages[0].dwNumBytes = 0;
 	lpIR->IconImages[0].lpXOR = 0;
@@ -1412,14 +1501,17 @@ GetIconFromPixmap(dsPtr, pixmap)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the ref count falls to zero, free the memory associated
- *	with the icon resource structures.  In this case the pointer
- *	passed into this function is no longer valid.
+ *	If the ref count falls to zero, free the memory associated with the
+ *	icon resource structures. In this case the pointer passed into this
+ *	function is no longer valid.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static void 
-DecrIconRefCount(WinIconPtr titlebaricon) {
+
+static void
+DecrIconRefCount(
+    WinIconPtr titlebaricon)
+{
     titlebaricon->refCount--;
 
     if (titlebaricon->refCount <= 0) {
@@ -1437,9 +1529,8 @@ DecrIconRefCount(WinIconPtr titlebaricon) {
  *
  * FreeIconBlock --
  *
- *	Frees all memory associated with a previously loaded
- *	titlebaricon.  The icon block pointer is no longer
- *	valid once this function returns.
+ *	Frees all memory associated with a previously loaded titlebaricon.
+ *	The icon block pointer is no longer valid once this function returns.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1449,12 +1540,17 @@ DecrIconRefCount(WinIconPtr titlebaricon) {
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static void 
-FreeIconBlock(BlockOfIconImagesPtr lpIR)
+
+static void
+FreeIconBlock(
+    BlockOfIconImagesPtr lpIR)
 {
     int i;
 
-    /* Free all the bits */
+    /*
+     * Free all the bits.
+     */
+
     for (i=0; i< lpIR->nNumImages; i++) {
 	if (lpIR->IconImages[i].lpBits != NULL) {
 	    ckfree((char*)lpIR->IconImages[i].lpBits);
@@ -1476,16 +1572,16 @@ FreeIconBlock(BlockOfIconImagesPtr lpIR)
  * Results:
  *	Returns the icon, if found, else NULL.
  *
- * Side effects:
- *
- *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static HICON 
-GetIcon(WinIconPtr titlebaricon, int icon_size)
+
+static HICON
+GetIcon(
+    WinIconPtr titlebaricon,
+    int icon_size)
 {
     BlockOfIconImagesPtr lpIR;
-    
+
     if (titlebaricon == NULL) {
         return NULL;
     }
@@ -1498,7 +1594,10 @@ GetIcon(WinIconPtr titlebaricon, int icon_size)
 	int i;
 
 	for (i = 0; i < lpIR->nNumImages; i++) {
-	    /* Take the first or a 32x32 16 color icon*/
+	    /*
+	     * Take the first or a 32x32 16 color icon
+	     */
+
 	    if ((lpIR->IconImages[i].Height == size)
 	       && (lpIR->IconImages[i].Width == size)
 	       && (lpIR->IconImages[i].Colors >= 4)) {
@@ -1506,10 +1605,10 @@ GetIcon(WinIconPtr titlebaricon, int icon_size)
 	    }
 	}
 
-	/* 
-	 * If we get here, then just return the first one, 
-	 * it will have to do!
+	/*
+	 * If we get here, then just return the first one, it will have to do!
 	 */
+
 	if (lpIR->nNumImages >= 1) {
 	    return lpIR->IconImages[0].hIcon;
 	}
@@ -1517,12 +1616,14 @@ GetIcon(WinIconPtr titlebaricon, int icon_size)
     return NULL;
 }
 
-static HCURSOR 
-TclWinReadCursorFromFile(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj* fileName)
+static HCURSOR
+TclWinReadCursorFromFile(
+    Tcl_Interp* interp,
+    Tcl_Obj* fileName)
 {
     BlockOfIconImagesPtr lpIR;
     HICON res = NULL;
-    
+
     lpIR = ReadIconOrCursorFromFile(interp, fileName, FALSE);
     if (lpIR == NULL) {
         return NULL;
@@ -1539,9 +1640,8 @@ TclWinReadCursorFromFile(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj* fileName)
  *
  * ReadIconOrCursorFromFile --
  *
- *	Reads an Icon Resource from an ICO file, as given by
- *	char* fileName - Name of the ICO file. This name should
- *	be in Utf format.
+ *	Reads an Icon Resource from an ICO file, as given by char* fileName -
+ *	Name of the ICO file. This name should be in Utf format.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns an icon resource, if found, else NULL.
@@ -1551,21 +1651,27 @@ TclWinReadCursorFromFile(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj* fileName)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static BlockOfIconImagesPtr 
-ReadIconOrCursorFromFile(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj* fileName, BOOL isIcon)
+
+static BlockOfIconImagesPtr
+ReadIconOrCursorFromFile(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    Tcl_Obj *fileName,
+    BOOL isIcon)
 {
     BlockOfIconImagesPtr lpIR, lpNew;
-    Tcl_Channel          channel;
-    int                  i;
-    DWORD            	 dwBytesRead;
-    LPICONDIRENTRY    	 lpIDE;
+    Tcl_Channel channel;
+    int i;
+    DWORD dwBytesRead;
+    LPICONDIRENTRY lpIDE;
+
+    /*
+     * Open the file.
+     */
 
-    /*  Open the file */
     channel = Tcl_FSOpenFileChannel(interp, fileName, "r", 0);
     if (channel == NULL) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Error opening file \"", 
-			 Tcl_GetString(fileName), 
-	                 "\" for reading",(char*)NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Error opening file \"",
+		Tcl_GetString(fileName), "\" for reading", NULL);
 	return NULL;
     }
     if (Tcl_SetChannelOption(interp, channel, "-translation", "binary")
@@ -1578,23 +1684,35 @@ ReadIconOrCursorFromFile(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj* fileName, BOOL isIcon)
 	Tcl_Close(NULL, channel);
 	return NULL;
     }
-    /*  Allocate memory for the resource structure */
+
+    /*
+     * Allocate memory for the resource structure
+     */
+
     lpIR = (BlockOfIconImagesPtr) ckalloc(sizeof(BlockOfIconImages));
     if (lpIR == NULL)    {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Error allocating memory",(char*)NULL);
 	Tcl_Close(NULL, channel);
 	return NULL;
     }
-    /*  Read in the header */
+
+    /*
+     * Read in the header
+     */
+
     if ((lpIR->nNumImages = ReadICOHeader( channel )) == -1)    {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Invalid file header",(char*)NULL);
 	Tcl_Close(NULL, channel);
 	ckfree((char*) lpIR );
 	return NULL;
     }
-    /*  Adjust the size of the struct to account for the images */
-    lpNew = (BlockOfIconImagesPtr) ckrealloc((char*)lpIR, 
-	sizeof(BlockOfIconImages) + ((lpIR->nNumImages-1) * sizeof(ICONIMAGE)));
+
+    /*
+     * Adjust the size of the struct to account for the images.
+     */
+
+    lpNew = (BlockOfIconImagesPtr) ckrealloc((char*)lpIR,
+	sizeof(BlockOfIconImages) + ((lpIR->nNumImages-1)*sizeof(ICONIMAGE)));
     if (lpNew == NULL) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Error allocating memory",(char*)NULL);
 	Tcl_Close(NULL, channel);
@@ -1602,7 +1720,11 @@ ReadIconOrCursorFromFile(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj* fileName, BOOL isIcon)
 	return NULL;
     }
     lpIR = lpNew;
-    /*  Allocate enough memory for the icon directory entries */
+
+    /*
+     * Allocate enough memory for the icon directory entries.
+     */
+
     lpIDE = (LPICONDIRENTRY) ckalloc(lpIR->nNumImages * sizeof(ICONDIRENTRY));
     if (lpIDE == NULL) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Error allocating memory",(char*)NULL);
@@ -1610,67 +1732,99 @@ ReadIconOrCursorFromFile(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj* fileName, BOOL isIcon)
 	ckfree( (char*)lpIR );
 	return NULL;
     }
-    /*  Read in the icon directory entries */
-    dwBytesRead = Tcl_Read(channel, (char*)lpIDE, 
-			   lpIR->nNumImages * sizeof( ICONDIRENTRY ));
+
+    /*
+     * Read in the icon directory entries.
+     */
+
+    dwBytesRead = Tcl_Read(channel, (char*)lpIDE,
+	    lpIR->nNumImages * sizeof(ICONDIRENTRY));
     if (dwBytesRead != lpIR->nNumImages * sizeof( ICONDIRENTRY ))    {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Error reading file",(char*)NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Error reading file", NULL);
 	Tcl_Close(NULL, channel);
-	ckfree( (char*)lpIR );
+	ckfree((char*) lpIR);
 	return NULL;
     }
-    /* NULL-out everything to make memory management easier */
-    for( i = 0; i < lpIR->nNumImages; i++ ) {
+
+    /*
+     * NULL-out everything to make memory management easier.
+     */
+
+    for (i = 0; i < lpIR->nNumImages; i++) {
 	lpIR->IconImages[i].lpBits = NULL;
     }
-    /*  Loop through and read in each image */
+
+    /*
+     * Loop through and read in each image.
+     */
+
     for( i = 0; i < lpIR->nNumImages; i++ )    {
-	/*  Allocate memory for the resource */
+	/*
+	 * Allocate memory for the resource.
+	 */
+
 	lpIR->IconImages[i].lpBits = (LPBYTE) ckalloc(lpIDE[i].dwBytesInRes);
 	if (lpIR->IconImages[i].lpBits == NULL) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Error allocating memory",(char*)NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Error allocating memory", NULL);
 	    goto readError;
 	}
 	lpIR->IconImages[i].dwNumBytes = lpIDE[i].dwBytesInRes;
-	/*  Seek to beginning of this image */
+
+	/*
+	 * Seek to beginning of this image.
+	 */
+
 	if (Tcl_Seek(channel, lpIDE[i].dwImageOffset, FILE_BEGIN) == -1) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Error seeking in file",(char*)NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Error seeking in file", NULL);
 	    goto readError;
 	}
-	/*  Read it in */
-	dwBytesRead = Tcl_Read( channel, lpIR->IconImages[i].lpBits, 
-			       lpIDE[i].dwBytesInRes);
+
+	/*
+	 * Read it in.
+	 */
+
+	dwBytesRead = Tcl_Read( channel, lpIR->IconImages[i].lpBits,
+		lpIDE[i].dwBytesInRes);
 	if (dwBytesRead != lpIDE[i].dwBytesInRes) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Error reading file",(char*)NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Error reading file", NULL);
 	    goto readError;
 	}
-	/*  Set the internal pointers appropriately */
+
+	/*
+	 * Set the internal pointers appropriately.
+	 */
+
 	if (!AdjustIconImagePointers( &(lpIR->IconImages[i]))) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Error converting to internal format",
-			     (char*)NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Error converting to internal format",
+		    NULL);
 	    goto readError;
 	}
 	lpIR->IconImages[i].hIcon =
 	    MakeIconOrCursorFromResource(&(lpIR->IconImages[i]), isIcon);
     }
-    /*  Clean up */
+
+    /*
+     * Clean up
+     */
+
     ckfree((char*)lpIDE);
     Tcl_Close(NULL, channel);
     if (lpIR == NULL){
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp,"Reading of ", Tcl_GetString(fileName),
-			 " failed!",(char*)NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Reading of ", Tcl_GetString(fileName),
+		" failed!", NULL);
 	return NULL;
     }
     return lpIR;
+
   readError:
     Tcl_Close(NULL, channel);
-    for( i = 0; i < lpIR->nNumImages; i++ )    {
+    for (i = 0; i < lpIR->nNumImages; i++) {
     	if (lpIR->IconImages[i].lpBits != NULL) {
-	    ckfree((char*)lpIR->IconImages[i].lpBits);
+	    ckfree((char*) lpIR->IconImages[i].lpBits);
 	}
     }
-    ckfree((char*)lpIDE );
-    ckfree((char*)lpIR );
+    ckfree((char*) lpIDE);
+    ckfree((char*) lpIR);
     return NULL;
 }
 
@@ -1679,8 +1833,7 @@ ReadIconOrCursorFromFile(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj* fileName, BOOL isIcon)
  *
  * GetTopLevel --
  *
- *	This function retrieves the TkWindow associated with the
- *	given HWND.
+ *	This function retrieves the TkWindow associated with the given HWND.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the matching TkWindow.
@@ -1690,17 +1843,18 @@ ReadIconOrCursorFromFile(Tcl_Interp* interp, Tcl_Obj* fileName, BOOL isIcon)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static TkWindow *
-GetTopLevel(hwnd)
-    HWND hwnd;
+GetTopLevel(
+    HWND hwnd)
 {
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * If this function is called before the CreateWindowEx call
-     * has completed, then the user data slot will not have been
-     * set yet, so we use the global createWindow variable.
+     * If this function is called before the CreateWindowEx call has
+     * completed, then the user data slot will not have been set yet, so we
+     * use the global createWindow variable.
      */
 
     if (tsdPtr->createWindow) {
@@ -1724,16 +1878,16 @@ GetTopLevel(hwnd)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Changes the values of the info pointer to reflect the current
- *	minimum and maximum size values.
+ *	Changes the values of the info pointer to reflect the current minimum
+ *	and maximum size values.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-SetLimits(hwnd, info)
-    HWND hwnd;
-    MINMAXINFO *info;
+SetLimits(
+    HWND hwnd,
+    MINMAXINFO *info)
 {
     register WmInfo *wmPtr;
     int maxWidth, maxHeight;
@@ -1783,8 +1937,8 @@ SetLimits(hwnd, info)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the window isn't supposed to be resizable, then set the
-     * minimum and maximum dimensions to be the same as the current size.
+     * If the window isn't supposed to be resizable, then set the minimum and
+     * maximum dimensions to be the same as the current size.
      */
 
     if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_SYNC_PENDING)) {
@@ -1806,8 +1960,8 @@ SetLimits(hwnd, info)
  *
  * TkWinWmCleanup --
  *
- *	Unregisters classes registered by the window manager. This is
- *	called from the DLL main entry point when the DLL is unloaded.
+ *	Unregisters classes registered by the window manager. This is called
+ *	from the DLL main entry point when the DLL is unloaded.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1819,14 +1973,14 @@ SetLimits(hwnd, info)
  */
 
 void
-TkWinWmCleanup(hInstance)
-    HINSTANCE hInstance;
+TkWinWmCleanup(
+    HINSTANCE hInstance)
 {
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr;
 
     /*
-     * If we're using stubs to access the Tcl library, and they
-     * haven't been initialized, we can't call Tcl_GetThreadData.
+     * If we're using stubs to access the Tcl library, and they haven't been
+     * initialized, we can't call Tcl_GetThreadData.
      */
 
 #ifdef USE_TCL_STUBS
@@ -1849,10 +2003,12 @@ TkWinWmCleanup(hInstance)
     tsdPtr->initialized = 0;
 
     UnregisterClass(TK_WIN_TOPLEVEL_CLASS_NAME, hInstance);
+
 #ifndef TCL_THREADS
     /*
      * Clean up specialized class created for layered windows.
      */
+
     if (setLayeredWindowAttributesProc != NULL) {
 	UnregisterClass(TK_WIN_TOPLEVEL_NOCDC_CLASS_NAME, hInstance);
 	setLayeredWindowAttributesProc = NULL;
@@ -1865,9 +2021,8 @@ TkWinWmCleanup(hInstance)
  *
  * TkWmNewWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever a new top-level
- *	window is created.  Its job is to initialize the WmInfo
- *	structure for the window.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever a new top-level window is created.
+ *	Its job is to initialize the WmInfo structure for the window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1879,8 +2034,8 @@ TkWinWmCleanup(hInstance)
  */
 
 void
-TkWmNewWindow(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Newly-created top-level window. */
+TkWmNewWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Newly-created top-level window. */
 {
     register WmInfo *wmPtr;
 
@@ -1889,6 +2044,7 @@ TkWmNewWindow(winPtr)
     /*
      * Initialize full structure, then set what isn't NULL
      */
+
     ZeroMemory(wmPtr, sizeof(WmInfo));
     winPtr->wmInfoPtr = wmPtr;
     wmPtr->winPtr = winPtr;
@@ -1928,16 +2084,16 @@ TkWmNewWindow(winPtr)
     winPtr->dispPtr->firstWmPtr = wmPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Tk must monitor structure events for top-level windows, in order
-     * to detect size and position changes caused by window managers.
+     * Tk must monitor structure events for top-level windows, in order to
+     * detect size and position changes caused by window managers.
      */
 
     Tk_CreateEventHandler((Tk_Window) winPtr, StructureNotifyMask,
 	    TopLevelEventProc, (ClientData) winPtr);
 
     /*
-     * Arrange for geometry requests to be reflected from the window
-     * to the window manager.
+     * Arrange for geometry requests to be reflected from the window to the
+     * window manager.
      */
 
     Tk_ManageGeometry((Tk_Window) winPtr, &wmMgrType, (ClientData) 0);
@@ -1948,24 +2104,23 @@ TkWmNewWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * UpdateWrapper --
  *
- *	This function creates the wrapper window that contains the
- *	window decorations and menus for a toplevel.  This function
- *	may be called after a window is mapped to change the window
- *	style.
+ *	This function creates the wrapper window that contains the window
+ *	decorations and menus for a toplevel. This function may be called
+ *	after a window is mapped to change the window style.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Destroys any old wrapper window and replaces it with a newly
- *	created wrapper.
+ *	Destroys any old wrapper window and replaces it with a newly created
+ *	wrapper.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window to redecorate. */
+UpdateWrapper(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Top-level window to redecorate. */
 {
     register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
     HWND parentHWND, oldWrapper = wmPtr->wrapper;
@@ -1983,15 +2138,18 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
 	/*
 	 * Ensure existence of the window to update the wrapper for.
 	 */
+
 	Tk_MakeWindowExist((Tk_Window) winPtr);
     }
 
     child = TkWinGetHWND(winPtr->window);
     parentHWND = NULL;
+
     /*
-     * nextHWND will help us maintain Z order.
-     * focusHWND will help us maintain focus, if we had it.
+     * nextHWND will help us maintain Z order. focusHWND will help us maintain
+     * focus, if we had it.
      */
+
     nextHWND = NULL;
     focusHWND = GetFocus();
     if ((oldWrapper == NULL) || (oldWrapper != GetForegroundWindow())) {
@@ -2009,13 +2167,13 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
 
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * Pick the decorative frame style.  Override redirect windows get
+	 * Pick the decorative frame style. Override redirect windows get
 	 * created as undecorated popups if they have no transient parent,
-	 * otherwise they are children.  This allows splash screens to operate
+	 * otherwise they are children. This allows splash screens to operate
 	 * as an independent window, while having dropdows (like for a
-	 * combobox) not grab focus away from their parent.  Transient windows
-	 * get a modal dialog frame.  Neither override, nor transient windows
-	 * appear in the Windows taskbar.  Note that a transient window does
+	 * combobox) not grab focus away from their parent. Transient windows
+	 * get a modal dialog frame. Neither override, nor transient windows
+	 * appear in the Windows taskbar. Note that a transient window does
 	 * not resize by default, so we need to explicitly add the
 	 * WS_THICKFRAME style if we want it to be resizeable.
 	 */
@@ -2023,7 +2181,11 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
 	if (winPtr->atts.override_redirect) {
 	    wmPtr->style = WM_OVERRIDE_STYLE;
 	    wmPtr->exStyle = EX_OVERRIDE_STYLE;
-	    /* parent must be desktop even if we have a transient parent */
+
+	    /*
+	     * Parent must be desktop even if we have a transient parent.
+	     */
+
 	    parentHWND = GetDesktopWindow();
 	    if (wmPtr->masterPtr) {
 		wmPtr->style |= WS_CHILD;
@@ -2067,9 +2229,9 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
 
 	/*
 	 * Set the initial position from the user or program specified
-	 * location.  If nothing has been specified, then let the system
-	 * pick a location. In full screen mode the x,y origin is 0,0
-	 * and the window width and height match that of the screen.
+	 * location. If nothing has been specified, then let the system pick a
+	 * location. In full screen mode the x,y origin is 0,0 and the window
+	 * width and height match that of the screen.
 	 */
 
 	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_FULLSCREEN) {
@@ -2087,13 +2249,14 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Create the containing window, and set the user data to point
-	 * to the TkWindow.
+	 * Create the containing window, and set the user data to point to the
+	 * TkWindow.
 	 */
 
 	tsdPtr->createWindow = winPtr;
 	Tcl_WinUtfToTChar(((wmPtr->title != NULL) ?
                            wmPtr->title : winPtr->nameUid), -1, &titleString);
+
 #ifndef TCL_THREADS
 	/*
 	 * Transparent windows require a non-CS_CLASSDC window class.
@@ -2104,7 +2267,10 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
 		    -1, &classString);
 	} else
 #endif
+	{
 	    Tcl_WinUtfToTChar(TK_WIN_TOPLEVEL_CLASS_NAME, -1, &classString);
+	}
+
 	wmPtr->wrapper = (*tkWinProcs->createWindowEx)(wmPtr->exStyle,
 		(LPCTSTR) Tcl_DStringValue(&classString),
 		(LPCTSTR) Tcl_DStringValue(&titleString),
@@ -2123,9 +2289,10 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
 		&& setLayeredWindowAttributesProc != NULL) {
 	    /*
 	     * The user supplies a double from [0..1], but Windows wants an
-	     * int (transparent) 0..255 (opaque), so do the translation.
-	     * Add the 0.5 to round the value.
+	     * int (transparent) 0..255 (opaque), so do the translation. Add
+	     * the 0.5 to round the value.
 	     */
+
 	    setLayeredWindowAttributesProc((HWND) wmPtr->wrapper,
 		    (COLORREF) NULL, (BYTE) (wmPtr->alpha * 255 + 0.5),
 		    LWA_ALPHA);
@@ -2150,14 +2317,15 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
 	     * We will adjust wrapper to have the same Z order as oldWrapper
 	     * if it isn't a TOPMOST window.
 	     */
+
 	    nextHWND = GetNextWindow(oldWrapper, GW_HWNDPREV);
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Now we need to reparent the contained window and set its
-     * style appropriately.  Be sure to update the style first so that
-     * Windows doesn't try to set the focus to the child window.
+     * Now we need to reparent the contained window and set its style
+     * appropriately. Be sure to update the style first so that Windows
+     * doesn't try to set the focus to the child window.
      */
 
 #ifdef _WIN64
@@ -2167,6 +2335,7 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
     SetWindowLong(child, GWL_STYLE,
 	    WS_CHILD | WS_CLIPCHILDREN | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS);
 #endif
+
     if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
 #ifdef _WIN64
 	SetWindowLongPtr(child, GWLP_WNDPROC, (LONG_PTR) TopLevelProc);
@@ -2174,6 +2343,7 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
 	SetWindowLong(child, GWL_WNDPROC, (LONG) TopLevelProc);
 #endif
     }
+
     SetParent(child, wmPtr->wrapper);
     if (oldWrapper) {
 	hSmallIcon = (HICON) SendMessage(oldWrapper, WM_GETICON, ICON_SMALL,
@@ -2195,21 +2365,22 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
 	     * Unset the current wrapper as the parent for all transient
 	     * children for whom this is the master
 	     */
+
 	    WmInfo *wmPtr2;
 
-	    childStateInfo = (int *)ckalloc((unsigned) wmPtr->numTransients
-		* sizeof(int));
+	    childStateInfo = (int *)
+		    ckalloc((unsigned) wmPtr->numTransients * sizeof(int));
 	    state = 0;
 	    for (wmPtr2 = winPtr->dispPtr->firstWmPtr; wmPtr2 != NULL;
-		 wmPtr2 = wmPtr2->nextPtr) {
-		if (wmPtr2->masterPtr == winPtr) {
-		    if (!(wmPtr2->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
-			childStateInfo[state++] = wmPtr2->hints.initial_state;
-			SetParent(TkWinGetHWND(wmPtr2->winPtr->window), NULL);
-		    }
+		    wmPtr2 = wmPtr2->nextPtr) {
+		if (wmPtr2->masterPtr == winPtr
+			&& !(wmPtr2->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+		    childStateInfo[state++] = wmPtr2->hints.initial_state;
+		    SetParent(TkWinGetHWND(wmPtr2->winPtr->window), NULL);
 		}
 	    }
 	}
+
 	/*
 	 * Remove the menubar before destroying the window so the menubar
 	 * isn't destroyed.
@@ -2220,19 +2391,18 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
     }
 
     wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_NEVER_MAPPED;
-    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
-	if(SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_ATTACHWINDOW, (WPARAM) child, 0))
-	{
-	    SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_GEOMETRYREQ, 
-		Tk_ReqWidth((Tk_Window)winPtr), Tk_ReqHeight((Tk_Window)winPtr));
-	    SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_SETMENU, (WPARAM)wmPtr->hMenu, (LPARAM)Tk_GetMenuHWND((Tk_Window)winPtr));
-	}
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED
+	    && SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_ATTACHWINDOW, (WPARAM)child, 0)){
+	SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_GEOMETRYREQ,
+		Tk_ReqWidth((Tk_Window)winPtr),
+		Tk_ReqHeight((Tk_Window)winPtr));
+	SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_SETMENU, (WPARAM) wmPtr->hMenu,
+		(LPARAM) Tk_GetMenuHWND((Tk_Window) winPtr));
     }
 
     /*
-     * Force an initial transition from withdrawn to the real
-     * initial state.  Set the Z order based on previous wrapper
-     * before we set the state.
+     * Force an initial transition from withdrawn to the real initial state.
+     * Set the Z order based on previous wrapper before we set the state.
      */
 
     state = wmPtr->hints.initial_state;
@@ -2253,12 +2423,11 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If we are embedded then force a mapping of the window now,
-     * because we do not necessarily own the wrapper and may not
-     * get another opportunity to map ourselves. We should not be
-     * in either iconified or zoomed states when we get here, so
-     * it is safe to just check for TK_EMBEDDED without checking
-     * what state we are supposed to be in (default to NormalState).
+     * If we are embedded then force a mapping of the window now, because we
+     * do not necessarily own the wrapper and may not get another opportunity
+     * to map ourselves. We should not be in either iconified or zoomed states
+     * when we get here, so it is safe to just check for TK_EMBEDDED without
+     * checking what state we are supposed to be in (default to NormalState).
      */
 
     if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
@@ -2282,18 +2451,18 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
     if (childStateInfo) {
 	if (wmPtr->numTransients > 0) {
 	    /*
-	     * Reset all transient children for whom this is the master
+	     * Reset all transient children for whom this is the master.
 	     */
+
 	    WmInfo *wmPtr2;
 
 	    state = 0;
 	    for (wmPtr2 = winPtr->dispPtr->firstWmPtr; wmPtr2 != NULL;
-		 wmPtr2 = wmPtr2->nextPtr) {
-		if (wmPtr2->masterPtr == winPtr) {
-		    if ( !(wmPtr2->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
-			UpdateWrapper(wmPtr2->winPtr);
-			TkpWmSetState(wmPtr2->winPtr, childStateInfo[state++]);
-		    }
+		    wmPtr2 = wmPtr2->nextPtr) {
+		if (wmPtr2->masterPtr == winPtr
+			&& !(wmPtr2->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+		    UpdateWrapper(wmPtr2->winPtr);
+		    TkpWmSetState(wmPtr2->winPtr, childStateInfo[state++]);
 		}
 	    }
 	}
@@ -2302,11 +2471,11 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If this is the first window created by the application, then
-     * we should activate the initial window.  Otherwise, if this had
-     * the focus, we need to restore that.
-     * XXX: Rewrapping generates a <FocusOut> and <FocusIn> that would
-     * XXX: best be avoided, if we could safely mask them.
+     * If this is the first window created by the application, then we should
+     * activate the initial window. Otherwise, if this had the focus, we need
+     * to restore that.
+     * XXX: Rewrapping generates a <FocusOut> and <FocusIn> that would best be
+     * XXX: avoided, if we could safely mask them.
      */
 
     if (tsdPtr->firstWindow) {
@@ -2322,28 +2491,28 @@ UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
  *
  * TkWmMapWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to map a top-level window.  This
- *	module gets a chance to update all window-manager-related
- *	information in properties before the window manager sees
- *	the map event and checks the properties.  It also gets to
- *	decide whether or not to even map the window after all.
+ *	This function is invoked to map a top-level window. This module gets a
+ *	chance to update all window-manager-related information in properties
+ *	before the window manager sees the map event and checks the
+ *	properties. It also gets to decide whether or not to even map the
+ *	window after all.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Properties of winPtr may get updated to provide up-to-date
- *	information to the window manager.  The window may also get
- *	mapped, but it may not be if this procedure decides that
- *	isn't appropriate (e.g. because the window is withdrawn).
+ *	Properties of winPtr may get updated to provide up-to-date information
+ *	to the window manager. The window may also get mapped, but it may not
+ *	be if this function decides that isn't appropriate (e.g. because the
+ *	window is withdrawn).
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkWmMapWindow(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window that's about to
-				 * be mapped. */
+TkWmMapWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Top-level window that's about to be
+				 * mapped. */
 {
     register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
@@ -2369,7 +2538,7 @@ TkWmMapWindow(winPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Map the window in either the iconified or normal state.  Note that
+	 * Map the window in either the iconified or normal state. Note that
 	 * we only send a map event if the window is in the normal state.
 	 */
 
@@ -2377,9 +2546,8 @@ TkWmMapWindow(winPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * This is the first time this window has ever been mapped.
-     * Store all the window-manager-related information for the
-     * window.
+     * This is the first time this window has ever been mapped. Store all the
+     * window-manager-related information for the window.
      */
 
     UpdateWrapper(winPtr);
@@ -2390,9 +2558,9 @@ TkWmMapWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * TkWmUnmapWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to unmap a top-level window.  The
- *	only thing it does special is unmap the decorative frame before
- *	unmapping the toplevel window.
+ *	This function is invoked to unmap a top-level window. The only thing
+ *	it does special is unmap the decorative frame before unmapping the
+ *	toplevel window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2404,9 +2572,9 @@ TkWmMapWindow(winPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkWmUnmapWindow(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window that's about to
-				 * be unmapped. */
+TkWmUnmapWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Top-level window that's about to be
+				 * unmapped. */
 {
     TkpWmSetState(winPtr, WithdrawnState);
 }
@@ -2416,8 +2584,8 @@ TkWmUnmapWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * TkpWmSetState --
  *
- *	Sets the window manager state for the wrapper window of a
- *	given toplevel window.
+ *	Sets the window manager state for the wrapper window of a given
+ *	toplevel window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2429,9 +2597,9 @@ TkWmUnmapWindow(winPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkpWmSetState(winPtr, state)
-     TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Toplevel window to operate on. */
-     int state;			/* One of IconicState, ZoomState, NormalState,
+TkpWmSetState(
+     TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Toplevel window to operate on. */
+     int state)			/* One of IconicState, ZoomState, NormalState,
 				 * or WithdrawnState. */
 {
     WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
@@ -2456,7 +2624,6 @@ TkpWmSetState(winPtr, state)
     ShowWindow(wmPtr->wrapper, cmd);
     wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_SYNC_PENDING;
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -2474,11 +2641,10 @@ TkpWmSetState(winPtr, state)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static
-void
-TkpWmSetFullScreen(winPtr, full_screen_state)
-     TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Toplevel window to operate on. */
-     int full_screen_state;		/* True if window should be full screen */
+static void
+TkpWmSetFullScreen(
+     TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Toplevel window to operate on. */
+     int full_screen_state)	/* True if window should be full screen */
 {
     int changed = 0;
     int full_screen = False;
@@ -2508,9 +2674,10 @@ TkpWmSetFullScreen(winPtr, full_screen_state)
 	    wmPtr->y = wmPtr->configY;
 	}
 
-	/* If the window has been mapped, then we need to
-	 * update the native wrapper window, and reset
-	 * the focus to the widget that had it before.
+	/*
+	 * If the window has been mapped, then we need to update the native
+	 * wrapper window, and reset the focus to the widget that had it
+	 * before.
 	 */
 
 	if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_NEVER_MAPPED)
@@ -2520,7 +2687,7 @@ TkpWmSetFullScreen(winPtr, full_screen_state)
 	    if (focusWinPtr = TkGetFocusWin(winPtr)) {
 	        TkSetFocusWin(focusWinPtr, 1);
 	    }
-	}   
+	}
     }
 }
 
@@ -2540,8 +2707,9 @@ TkpWmSetFullScreen(winPtr, full_screen_state)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-int TkpWmGetState(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+int
+TkpWmGetState(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
     return winPtr->wmInfoPtr->hints.initial_state;
 }
@@ -2551,9 +2719,8 @@ int TkpWmGetState(winPtr)
  *
  * TkWmDeadWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a top-level window is
- *	about to be deleted.  It cleans up the wm-related data
- *	structures for the window.
+ *	This function is invoked when a top-level window is about to be
+ *	deleted. It cleans up the wm-related data structures for the window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2565,8 +2732,8 @@ int TkpWmGetState(winPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkWmDeadWindow(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window that's being deleted. */
+TkWmDeadWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Top-level window that's being deleted. */
 {
     register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
     WmInfo *wmPtr2;
@@ -2658,10 +2825,11 @@ TkWmDeadWindow(winPtr)
     }
     if (wmPtr->masterPtr != NULL) {
 	wmPtr2 = wmPtr->masterPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
 	/*
-	 * If we had a master, tell them that we aren't tied
-	 * to them anymore
+	 * If we had a master, tell them that we aren't tied to them anymore.
 	 */
+
 	if (wmPtr2 != NULL) {
 	    wmPtr2->numTransients--;
 	}
@@ -2688,10 +2856,11 @@ TkWmDeadWindow(winPtr)
     }
     if (wmPtr->iconPtr != NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * This may delete the icon resource data.  I believe we
-	 * should do this after destroying the decorative frame,
-	 * because the decorative frame is using this icon.
+	 * This may delete the icon resource data. I believe we should do this
+	 * after destroying the decorative frame, because the decorative frame
+	 * is using this icon.
 	 */
+
         DecrIconRefCount(wmPtr->iconPtr);
     }
 
@@ -2704,11 +2873,10 @@ TkWmDeadWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * TkWmSetClass --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever a top-level window's
- *	class is changed.  If the window has been mapped then this
- *	procedure updates the window manager property for the
- *	class.  If the window hasn't been mapped, the update is
- *	deferred until just before the first mapping.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever a top-level window's class is
+ *	changed. If the window has been mapped then this function updates the
+ *	window manager property for the class. If the window hasn't been
+ *	mapped, the update is deferred until just before the first mapping.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2720,9 +2888,10 @@ TkWmDeadWindow(winPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkWmSetClass(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Newly-created top-level window. */
+TkWmSetClass(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Newly-created top-level window. */
 {
+    /* Do nothing */
     return;
 }
 
@@ -2731,8 +2900,8 @@ TkWmSetClass(winPtr)
  *
  * Tk_WmObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm" Tcl command. See the user
+ *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -2745,12 +2914,11 @@ TkWmSetClass(winPtr)
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 int
-Tk_WmObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+Tk_WmObjCmd(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
@@ -2762,7 +2930,8 @@ Tk_WmObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	"iconwindow", "maxsize", "minsize", "overrideredirect",
         "positionfrom", "protocol", "resizable", "sizefrom",
         "stackorder", "state", "title", "transient",
-	"withdraw", (char *) NULL };
+	"withdraw", NULL
+    };
     enum options {
         WMOPT_ASPECT, WMOPT_ATTRIBUTES, WMOPT_CLIENT, WMOPT_COLORMAPWINDOWS,
 	WMOPT_COMMAND, WMOPT_DEICONIFY, WMOPT_FOCUSMODEL, WMOPT_FRAME,
@@ -2772,14 +2941,15 @@ Tk_WmObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	WMOPT_ICONWINDOW, WMOPT_MAXSIZE, WMOPT_MINSIZE, WMOPT_OVERRIDEREDIRECT,
         WMOPT_POSITIONFROM, WMOPT_PROTOCOL, WMOPT_RESIZABLE, WMOPT_SIZEFROM,
         WMOPT_STACKORDER, WMOPT_STATE, WMOPT_TITLE, WMOPT_TRANSIENT,
-	WMOPT_WITHDRAW };
+	WMOPT_WITHDRAW
+    };
     int index, length;
     char *argv1;
     TkWindow *winPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
 
     if (objc < 2) {
-	wrongNumArgs:
+    wrongNumArgs:
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option window ?arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -2788,6 +2958,7 @@ Tk_WmObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     if ((argv1[0] == 't') && (strncmp(argv1, "tracing", length) == 0)
 	    && (length >= 3)) {
 	int wmTracing;
+
 	if ((objc != 2) && (objc != 3)) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?boolean?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -2824,70 +2995,70 @@ Tk_WmObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
     if (!Tk_IsTopLevel(winPtr)) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", winPtr->pathName,
-		"\" isn't a top-level window", (char *) NULL);
+		"\" isn't a top-level window", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-      case WMOPT_ASPECT:
+    case WMOPT_ASPECT:
 	return WmAspectCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_ATTRIBUTES:
+    case WMOPT_ATTRIBUTES:
 	return WmAttributesCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_CLIENT:
+    case WMOPT_CLIENT:
 	return WmClientCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_COLORMAPWINDOWS:
+    case WMOPT_COLORMAPWINDOWS:
 	return WmColormapwindowsCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_COMMAND:
+    case WMOPT_COMMAND:
 	return WmCommandCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_DEICONIFY:
+    case WMOPT_DEICONIFY:
 	return WmDeiconifyCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_FOCUSMODEL:
+    case WMOPT_FOCUSMODEL:
 	return WmFocusmodelCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_FRAME:
+    case WMOPT_FRAME:
 	return WmFrameCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_GEOMETRY:
+    case WMOPT_GEOMETRY:
 	return WmGeometryCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_GRID:
+    case WMOPT_GRID:
 	return WmGridCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_GROUP:
+    case WMOPT_GROUP:
 	return WmGroupCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_ICONBITMAP:
+    case WMOPT_ICONBITMAP:
 	return WmIconbitmapCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_ICONIFY:
+    case WMOPT_ICONIFY:
 	return WmIconifyCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_ICONMASK:
+    case WMOPT_ICONMASK:
 	return WmIconmaskCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_ICONNAME:
+    case WMOPT_ICONNAME:
 	return WmIconnameCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_ICONPHOTO:
+    case WMOPT_ICONPHOTO:
         return WmIconphotoCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_ICONPOSITION:
+    case WMOPT_ICONPOSITION:
 	return WmIconpositionCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_ICONWINDOW:
+    case WMOPT_ICONWINDOW:
 	return WmIconwindowCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_MAXSIZE:
+    case WMOPT_MAXSIZE:
 	return WmMaxsizeCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_MINSIZE:
+    case WMOPT_MINSIZE:
 	return WmMinsizeCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_OVERRIDEREDIRECT:
+    case WMOPT_OVERRIDEREDIRECT:
 	return WmOverrideredirectCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_POSITIONFROM:
+    case WMOPT_POSITIONFROM:
 	return WmPositionfromCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_PROTOCOL:
+    case WMOPT_PROTOCOL:
 	return WmProtocolCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_RESIZABLE:
+    case WMOPT_RESIZABLE:
 	return WmResizableCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_SIZEFROM:
+    case WMOPT_SIZEFROM:
 	return WmSizefromCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_STACKORDER:
+    case WMOPT_STACKORDER:
 	return WmStackorderCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_STATE:
+    case WMOPT_STATE:
 	return WmStateCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_TITLE:
+    case WMOPT_TITLE:
 	return WmTitleCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_TRANSIENT:
+    case WMOPT_TRANSIENT:
 	return WmTransientCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-      case WMOPT_WITHDRAW:
+    case WMOPT_WITHDRAW:
 	return WmWithdrawCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv);
     }
 
@@ -2900,8 +3071,8 @@ Tk_WmObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmAspectCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm aspect" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm aspect" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -2969,7 +3140,7 @@ WmAspectCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmAttributesCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm attributes" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm attributes" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -2997,7 +3168,7 @@ WmAttributesCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     int fullscreen_attr_changed = 0, fullscreen_attr = 0;
 
     if ((objc < 3) || ((objc > 5) && ((objc%2) == 0))) {
-        configArgs:
+    configArgs:
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
 		"window"
 		" ?-alpha ?double??"
@@ -3057,8 +3228,7 @@ WmAttributesCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	    styleBit = WS_EX_TOPMOST;
 	    if ((i < objc-1) && (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't set topmost flag on ",
-			winPtr->pathName, ": it is an embedded window",
-			(char *) NULL);
+			winPtr->pathName, ": it is an embedded window", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	} else {
@@ -3075,11 +3245,13 @@ WmAttributesCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 				!= TCL_OK)) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
+
 		/*
-		 * The user should give (transparent) 0 .. 1.0 (opaque),
-		 * but we ignore the setting of this (it will always be 1)
-		 * in the case that the API is not available.
+		 * The user should give (transparent) 0 .. 1.0 (opaque), but
+		 * we ignore the setting of this (it will always be 1) in the
+		 * case that the API is not available.
 		 */
+
 		if (dval < 0.0) {
 		    dval = 0;
 		} else if (dval > 1.0) {
@@ -3097,8 +3269,9 @@ WmAttributesCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 		     * Set the window directly regardless of UpdateWrapper.
 		     * The user supplies a double from [0..1], but Windows
 		     * wants an int (transparent) 0..255 (opaque), so do the
-		     * translation.  Add the 0.5 to round the value.
+		     * translation. Add the 0.5 to round the value.
 		     */
+
 		    setLayeredWindowAttributesProc((HWND) wmPtr->wrapper,
 			    (COLORREF) NULL, (BYTE) (wmPtr->alpha * 255 + 0.5),
 			    LWA_ALPHA);
@@ -3142,9 +3315,10 @@ WmAttributesCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     }
     if (wmPtr->styleConfig != style) {
 	/*
-	 * Currently this means only WS_DISABLED changed, which we can
-	 * effect with EnableWindow.
+	 * Currently this means only WS_DISABLED changed, which we can effect
+	 * with EnableWindow.
 	 */
+
 	wmPtr->styleConfig = style;
 	if ((wmPtr->exStyleConfig == exStyle)
 		&& !(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
@@ -3153,9 +3327,10 @@ WmAttributesCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     }
     if (wmPtr->exStyleConfig != exStyle) {
 	/*
-	 * UpdateWrapper ensure that all effects are properly handled,
-	 * such as TOOLWINDOW disappearing from the taskbar.
+	 * UpdateWrapper ensure that all effects are properly handled, such as
+	 * TOOLWINDOW disappearing from the taskbar.
 	 */
+
 	wmPtr->exStyleConfig = exStyle;
 	if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
 	    UpdateWrapper(winPtr);
@@ -3164,24 +3339,27 @@ WmAttributesCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     if (fullscreen_attr_changed) {
 	if (fullscreen_attr) {
 	    if (Tk_Attributes((Tk_Window) winPtr)->override_redirect) {
-	        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't set fullscreen attribute for \"",
-	            winPtr->pathName,
-	            "\": override-redirect flag is set",
-	            (char *) NULL);
+	        Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			"can't set fullscreen attribute for \"",
+			winPtr->pathName, "\": override-redirect flag is set",
+			NULL);
 	        return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    /* Check max width and height if set by the user,
-	     * don't worry about the default values since they
-	     * will likely be smaller than screen width/height.
+
+	    /*
+	     * Check max width and height if set by the user, don't worry
+	     * about the default values since they will likely be smaller than
+	     * screen width/height.
              */
+
 	    if (((wmPtr->maxWidth > 0) &&
 	            (WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(winPtr)) > wmPtr->maxWidth)) ||
 	            ((wmPtr->maxHeight > 0) &&
 	            (HeightOfScreen(Tk_Screen(winPtr)) > wmPtr->maxHeight))) {
-	        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't set fullscreen attribute for \"",
-	            winPtr->pathName,
-	            "\": max width/height is too small",
-	            (char *) NULL);
+	        Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+			"can't set fullscreen attribute for \"",
+			winPtr->pathName, "\": max width/height is too small",
+			NULL);
 	        return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
         }
@@ -3197,8 +3375,8 @@ WmAttributesCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmClientCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm client" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm client" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3238,8 +3416,7 @@ WmClientCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	    wmPtr->clientMachine = NULL;
 	    if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
 		XDeleteProperty(winPtr->display, winPtr->window,
-			Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr,
-				"WM_CLIENT_MACHINE"));
+			Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr,"WM_CLIENT_MACHINE"));
 	    }
 	}
 	return TCL_OK;
@@ -3252,6 +3429,7 @@ WmClientCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     strcpy(wmPtr->clientMachine, argv3);
     if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
 	XTextProperty textProp;
+
 	if (XStringListToTextProperty(&wmPtr->clientMachine, 1, &textProp)
 		!= 0) {
 	    XSetWMClientMachine(winPtr->display, winPtr->window,
@@ -3267,9 +3445,8 @@ WmClientCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmColormapwindowsCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm colormapwindows"
- *	Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm colormapwindows" Tcl
+ *	command. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3362,8 +3539,8 @@ WmColormapwindowsCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmCommandCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm command" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm command" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3394,8 +3571,7 @@ WmCommandCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     if (objc == 3) {
 	if (wmPtr->cmdArgv != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
-		    Tcl_Merge(wmPtr->cmdArgc, wmPtr->cmdArgv),
-		    TCL_DYNAMIC);
+		    Tcl_Merge(wmPtr->cmdArgc, wmPtr->cmdArgv), TCL_DYNAMIC);
 	}
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
@@ -3430,7 +3606,7 @@ WmCommandCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmDeiconifyCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm deiconify" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm deiconify" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -3458,14 +3634,13 @@ WmDeiconifyCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     }
     if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't deiconify ", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-		": it is an icon for ", Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor),
-		(char *) NULL);
+		": it is an icon for ", Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor), NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
-	if(!SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_DEICONIFY, 0, 0)) {
+	if (!SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_DEICONIFY, 0, 0)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't deiconify ", winPtr->pathName,
-		": the container does not support the request", (char *) NULL);
+		    ": the container does not support the request", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	return TCL_OK;
@@ -3479,7 +3654,7 @@ WmDeiconifyCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmFocusmodelCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm focusmodel" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm focusmodel" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -3501,9 +3676,11 @@ WmFocusmodelCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 {
     register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
-	"active", "passive", (char *) NULL };
+	"active", "passive", NULL
+    };
     enum options {
-	OPT_ACTIVE, OPT_PASSIVE };
+	OPT_ACTIVE, OPT_PASSIVE
+    };
     int index;
 
     if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
@@ -3533,8 +3710,8 @@ WmFocusmodelCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmFrameCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm frame" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm frame" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3578,7 +3755,7 @@ WmFrameCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmGeometryCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm geometry" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm geometry" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -3610,6 +3787,7 @@ WmGeometryCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     if (objc == 3) {
 	char buf[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
 	int x, y;
+
 	xSign = (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_X) ? '-' : '+';
 	ySign = (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_Y) ? '-' : '+';
 	if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
@@ -3625,7 +3803,7 @@ WmGeometryCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	    int result = SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_MOVEWINDOW, -1, -1);
 	    wmPtr->x = result >> 16;
 	    wmPtr->y = result & 0x0000ffff;
-	} 
+	}
 	x = wmPtr->x;
 	y = wmPtr->y;
 	sprintf(buf, "%dx%d%c%d%c%d", width, height, xSign, x, ySign, y);
@@ -3647,8 +3825,8 @@ WmGeometryCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmGridCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm grid" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm grid" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3688,8 +3866,8 @@ WmGridCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     }
     if (*Tcl_GetString(objv[3]) == '\0') {
 	/*
-	 * Turn off gridding and reset the width and height
-	 * to make sense as ungridded numbers.
+	 * Turn off gridding and reset the width and height to make sense as
+	 * ungridded numbers.
 	 */
 
 	wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~(PBaseSize|PResizeInc);
@@ -3736,8 +3914,8 @@ WmGridCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmGroupCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm group" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm group" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3799,7 +3977,7 @@ WmGroupCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmIconbitmapCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm iconbitmap" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm iconbitmap" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -3827,17 +4005,23 @@ WmIconbitmapCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window ?-default? ?image?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     } else if (objc == 5) {
-	/* If we have 5 arguments, we must have a '-default' flag */
+	/*
+	 * If we have 5 arguments, we must have a '-default' flag.
+	 */
+
 	char *argv3 = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+
 	if (strcmp(argv3, "-default")) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "illegal option \"",
-		    argv3, "\" must be \"-default\"",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    argv3, "\" must be \"-default\"", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	useWinPtr = NULL;
     } else if (objc == 3) {
-	/* No arguments were given */
+	/*
+	 * No arguments were given.
+	 */
+
 	if (wmPtr->hints.flags & IconPixmapHint) {
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *)
 		    Tk_NameOfBitmap(winPtr->display, wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap),
@@ -3859,42 +4043,46 @@ WmIconbitmapCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     } else {
 	/*
 	 * In the future this block of code will use Tk's 'image'
-	 * functionality to allow all supported image formats.
-	 * However, this will require a change to the way icons are
-	 * handled.  We will need to add icon<->image conversions
-	 * routines.
+	 * functionality to allow all supported image formats. However, this
+	 * will require a change to the way icons are handled. We will need to
+	 * add icon<->image conversions routines.
 	 *
-	 * Until that happens we simply try to find an icon in the
-	 * given argument, and if that fails, we use the older
-	 * bitmap code.  We do things this way round (icon then
-	 * bitmap), because the bitmap code actually seems to have
-	 * no visible effect, so we want to give the icon code the
-	 * first try at doing something.
+	 * Until that happens we simply try to find an icon in the given
+	 * argument, and if that fails, we use the older bitmap code. We do
+	 * things this way round (icon then bitmap), because the bitmap code
+	 * actually seems to have no visible effect, so we want to give the
+	 * icon code the first try at doing something.
 	 */
 
 	/*
-	 * Either return NULL, or return a valid titlebaricon with its
-	 * ref count already incremented.
+	 * Either return NULL, or return a valid titlebaricon with its ref
+	 * count already incremented.
 	 */
+
 	WinIconPtr titlebaricon = ReadIconFromFile(interp, objv[objc-1]);
 	if (titlebaricon != NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * Try to set the icon for the window.  If it is a '-default'
-	     * icon, we must pass in NULL
+	     * Try to set the icon for the window. If it is a '-default' icon,
+	     * we must pass in NULL
 	     */
+
 	    if (WinSetIcon(interp, titlebaricon, (Tk_Window) useWinPtr)
 		    != TCL_OK) {
-		/* We didn't use the titlebaricon after all */
+		/*
+		 * We didn't use the titlebaricon after all.
+		 */
+
 		DecrIconRefCount(titlebaricon);
 		titlebaricon = NULL;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (titlebaricon == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * We didn't manage to handle the argument as a valid
-	     * icon.  Try as a bitmap.  First we must clear the
-	     * error message which was placed in the interpreter
+	     * We didn't manage to handle the argument as a valid icon. Try as
+	     * a bitmap. First we must clear the error message which was
+	     * placed in the interpreter.
 	     */
+
 	    Pixmap pixmap;
 	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	    pixmap = Tk_GetBitmap(interp, (Tk_Window) winPtr, string);
@@ -3904,13 +4092,14 @@ WmIconbitmapCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	    wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap = pixmap;
 	    wmPtr->hints.flags |= IconPixmapHint;
 	    titlebaricon = GetIconFromPixmap(Tk_Display(winPtr), pixmap);
-	    if (titlebaricon != NULL) {
-		if (WinSetIcon(interp, titlebaricon, (Tk_Window) useWinPtr)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    /* We didn't use the titlebaricon after all */
-		    DecrIconRefCount(titlebaricon);
-		    titlebaricon = NULL;
-		}
+	    if (titlebaricon != NULL && WinSetIcon(interp, titlebaricon,
+		    (Tk_Window) useWinPtr) != TCL_OK) {
+		/*
+		 * We didn't use the titlebaricon after all.
+		 */
+
+		DecrIconRefCount(titlebaricon);
+		titlebaricon = NULL;
 	    }
 	}
     }
@@ -3922,8 +4111,8 @@ WmIconbitmapCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmIconifyCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm iconify" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm iconify" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3950,24 +4139,23 @@ WmIconifyCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
 	if(!SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_ICONIFY, 0, 0)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't iconify ", winPtr->pathName,
-		": the container does not support the request", (char *) NULL);
+		    ": the container does not support the request", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     }
     if (Tk_Attributes((Tk_Window) winPtr)->override_redirect) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't iconify \"", winPtr->pathName,
-		"\": override-redirect flag is set", (char *) NULL);
+		"\": override-redirect flag is set", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     if (wmPtr->masterPtr != NULL) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't iconify \"", winPtr->pathName,
-		"\": it is a transient", (char *) NULL);
+		"\": it is a transient", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't iconify ", winPtr->pathName,
-		": it is an icon for ", Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor),
-		(char *) NULL);
+		": it is an icon for ", Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor), NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     TkpWmSetState(winPtr, IconicState);
@@ -3979,7 +4167,7 @@ WmIconifyCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmIconmaskCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm iconmask" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm iconmask" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -4037,7 +4225,7 @@ WmIconmaskCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmIconnameCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm iconname" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm iconname" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -4089,8 +4277,7 @@ WmIconnameCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmIconphotoCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm iconphoto"
- *	Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm iconphoto" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -4124,9 +4311,11 @@ WmIconphotoCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 		"window ?-default? image1 ?image2 ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
+
     /*
      * Iterate over all images to validate their existence.
      */
+
     if (strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "-default") == 0) {
 	useWinPtr = NULL;
 	startObj = 4;
@@ -4144,10 +4333,13 @@ WmIconphotoCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     }
-    /* We have calculated the size of the data. Try to allocate the needed
-     * memory space. */
-    size = sizeof(BlockOfIconImages)
-	+ (sizeof(ICONIMAGE) * (objc - (startObj+1)));
+
+    /*
+     * We have calculated the size of the data. Try to allocate the needed
+     * memory space.
+     */
+
+    size = sizeof(BlockOfIconImages) + (sizeof(ICONIMAGE) * (objc-startObj-1));
     lpIR = (BlockOfIconImagesPtr) Tcl_AttemptAlloc(size);
     if (lpIR == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -4163,13 +4355,17 @@ WmIconphotoCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	/*
 	 * Encode the image data into an HICON.
 	 */
+
 	hIcon = CreateIcon(Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), width, height, 1, 32,
 		NULL, (BYTE *) block.pixelPtr);
 	if (hIcon == NULL) {
-	    /* XXX should free up created icons */
+	    /*
+	     * XXX should free up created icons.
+	     */
+
 	    Tcl_Free((char *) lpIR);
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "failed to create icon for \"",
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), "\"", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	lpIR->IconImages[i-startObj].Width  = width;
@@ -4181,7 +4377,10 @@ WmIconphotoCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     titlebaricon->iconBlock = lpIR;
     titlebaricon->refCount = 1;
     if (WinSetIcon(interp, titlebaricon, (Tk_Window) useWinPtr) != TCL_OK) {
-	/* We didn't use the titlebaricon after all */
+	/*
+	 * We didn't use the titlebaricon after all.
+	 */
+
 	DecrIconRefCount(titlebaricon);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -4193,8 +4392,7 @@ WmIconphotoCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmIconpositionCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm iconposition"
- *	Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm iconposition" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -4250,7 +4448,7 @@ WmIconpositionCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmIconwindowCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm iconwindow" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm iconwindow" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -4289,8 +4487,8 @@ WmIconwindowCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	wmPtr->hints.flags &= ~IconWindowHint;
 	if (wmPtr->icon != NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * Let the window use button events again, then remove
-	     * it as icon window.
+	     * Let the window use button events again, then remove it as icon
+	     * window.
 	     */
 
 	    atts.event_mask = Tk_Attributes(wmPtr->icon)->event_mask
@@ -4307,14 +4505,14 @@ WmIconwindowCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 	if (!Tk_IsTopLevel(tkwin2)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't use ", Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
-		    " as icon window: not at top level", (char *) NULL);
+		    " as icon window: not at top level", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	wmPtr2 = ((TkWindow *) tkwin2)->wmInfoPtr;
 	if (wmPtr2->iconFor != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
-		    " is already an icon for ",
-		    Tk_PathName(wmPtr2->iconFor), (char *) NULL);
+		    " is already an icon for ", Tk_PathName(wmPtr2->iconFor),
+		    NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (wmPtr->icon != NULL) {
@@ -4331,10 +4529,9 @@ WmIconwindowCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Disable button events in the icon window:  some window
-	 * managers (like olvwm) want to get the events themselves,
-	 * but X only allows one application at a time to receive
-	 * button events for a window.
+	 * Disable button events in the icon window: some window managers
+	 * (like olvwm) want to get the events themselves, but X only allows
+	 * one application at a time to receive button events for a window.
 	 */
 
 	atts.event_mask = Tk_Attributes(tkwin2)->event_mask
@@ -4358,8 +4555,8 @@ WmIconwindowCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmMaxsizeCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm maxsize" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm maxsize" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -4408,8 +4605,8 @@ WmMaxsizeCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmMinsizeCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm minsize" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm minsize" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -4458,9 +4655,8 @@ WmMinsizeCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmOverrideredirectCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm overrideredirect"
- *	Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm overrideredirect" Tcl
+ *	command. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -4508,12 +4704,13 @@ WmOverrideredirectCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	    SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_OVERRIDEREDIRECT, boolean, 0);
 	} else {
 	    /*
-	     * Only do this if we are really changing value, because it
-	     * causes some funky stuff to occur
+	     * Only do this if we are really changing value, because it causes
+	     * some funky stuff to occur.
 	     */
+
 	    atts.override_redirect = (boolean) ? True : False;
 	    Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes((Tk_Window) winPtr, CWOverrideRedirect,
-		&atts);
+		    &atts);
 	    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_NEVER_MAPPED))
 		&& !(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
 		UpdateWrapper(winPtr);
@@ -4528,8 +4725,7 @@ WmOverrideredirectCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmPositionfromCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm positionfrom"
- *	Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm positionfrom" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -4592,7 +4788,7 @@ WmPositionfromCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmProtocolCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm protocol" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm protocol" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -4626,6 +4822,7 @@ WmProtocolCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	/*
 	 * Return a list of all defined protocols for the window.
 	 */
+
 	for (protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr; protPtr != NULL;
 	     protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp,
@@ -4638,6 +4835,7 @@ WmProtocolCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	/*
 	 * Return the command to handle a given protocol.
 	 */
+
 	for (protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr; protPtr != NULL;
 	     protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (protPtr->protocol == protocol) {
@@ -4649,13 +4847,12 @@ WmProtocolCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Delete any current protocol handler, then create a new
-     * one with the specified command, unless the command is
-     * empty.
+     * Delete any current protocol handler, then create a new one with the
+     * specified command, unless the command is empty.
      */
 
     for (protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr, prevPtr = NULL; protPtr != NULL;
-	 prevPtr = protPtr, protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    prevPtr = protPtr, protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (protPtr->protocol == protocol) {
 	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
 		wmPtr->protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr;
@@ -4683,7 +4880,7 @@ WmProtocolCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmResizableCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm resizable" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm resizable" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -4746,7 +4943,7 @@ WmResizableCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmSizefromCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm sizefrom" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm sizefrom" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -4768,9 +4965,11 @@ WmSizefromCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 {
     register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
-	"program", "user", (char *) NULL };
+	"program", "user", NULL
+    };
     enum options {
-	OPT_PROGRAM, OPT_USER };
+	OPT_PROGRAM, OPT_USER
+    };
     int index;
 
     if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
@@ -4810,7 +5009,7 @@ WmSizefromCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmStackorderCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm stackorder" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm stackorder" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -4864,33 +5063,31 @@ WmStackorderCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	if (!Tk_IsTopLevel(winPtr2)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", winPtr2->pathName,
-		    "\" isn't a top-level window", (char *) NULL);
+		    "\" isn't a top-level window", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	if (!Tk_IsMapped(winPtr)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", winPtr->pathName,
-		    "\" isn't mapped", (char *) NULL);
+		    "\" isn't mapped", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	if (!Tk_IsMapped(winPtr2)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", winPtr2->pathName,
-		    "\" isn't mapped", (char *) NULL);
+		    "\" isn't mapped", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Lookup stacking order of all toplevels that are children
-	 * of "." and find the position of winPtr and winPtr2
-	 * in the stacking order.
+	 * Lookup stacking order of all toplevels that are children of "." and
+	 * find the position of winPtr and winPtr2 in the stacking order.
 	 */
 
 	windows = TkWmStackorderToplevel(winPtr->mainPtr->winPtr);
 
 	if (windows == NULL) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "TkWmStackorderToplevel failed",
-                    (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "TkWmStackorderToplevel failed", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	} else {
 	    for (window_ptr = windows; *window_ptr ; window_ptr++) {
@@ -4927,8 +5124,8 @@ WmStackorderCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmStateCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm state" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm state" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -4961,9 +5158,8 @@ WmStateCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     if (objc == 4) {
 	if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't change state of ",
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-		    ": it is an icon for ", Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor),
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), ": it is an icon for ",
+		    Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor), NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[3], optionStrings, "argument", 0,
@@ -4979,19 +5175,16 @@ WmStateCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
 	    int state;
 	    switch(index) {
-		case OPT_NORMAL:
+	    case OPT_NORMAL:
 		state = NormalState;
 		break;
-
-		case OPT_ICONIC:
+	    case OPT_ICONIC:
 		state = IconicState;
 		break;
-
-		case OPT_WITHDRAWN:
+	    case OPT_WITHDRAWN:
 		state = WithdrawnState;
 		break;
-
-		case OPT_ZOOMED:
+	    case OPT_ZOOMED:
 		state = ZoomState;
 		break;
 	    }
@@ -5008,22 +5201,21 @@ WmStateCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	if (index == OPT_NORMAL) {
 	    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_WITHDRAWN;
 	    TkpWmSetState(winPtr, NormalState);
+
 	    /*
-	     * This varies from 'wm deiconify' because it does not
-	     * force the window to be raised and receive focus
+	     * This varies from 'wm deiconify' because it does not force the
+	     * window to be raised and receive focus.
 	     */
 	} else if (index == OPT_ICONIC) {
 	    if (Tk_Attributes((Tk_Window) winPtr)->override_redirect) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't iconify \"",
-			winPtr->pathName,
-			"\": override-redirect flag is set",
-			(char *) NULL);
+			winPtr->pathName, "\": override-redirect flag is set",
+			NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    if (wmPtr->masterPtr != NULL) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't iconify \"",
-			winPtr->pathName,
-			"\": it is a transient", (char *) NULL);
+			winPtr->pathName, "\": it is a transient", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    TkpWmSetState(winPtr, IconicState);
@@ -5040,21 +5232,23 @@ WmStateCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "icon", TCL_STATIC);
 	} else {
 	    int state;
-	    if(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) 
+
+	    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
 		state = SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_STATE, -1, -1)-1;
-	    else
+	    } else {
 		state = wmPtr->hints.initial_state;
+	    }
 	    switch (state) {
-	      case NormalState:
+	    case NormalState:
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "normal", TCL_STATIC);
 		break;
-	      case IconicState:
+	    case IconicState:
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "iconic", TCL_STATIC);
 		break;
-	      case WithdrawnState:
+	    case WithdrawnState:
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "withdrawn", TCL_STATIC);
 		break;
-	      case ZoomState:
+	    case ZoomState:
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "zoomed", TCL_STATIC);
 		break;
 	    }
@@ -5068,8 +5262,8 @@ WmStateCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmTitleCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm title" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm title" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -5104,18 +5298,18 @@ WmTitleCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	wrapper = wmPtr->wrapper;
     }
     if (objc == 3) {
-	if(wrapper) {
+	if (wrapper) {
 	    char buf[512];
 	    Tcl_DString titleString;
 	    int size = tkWinProcs->useWide? 256:512;
 	    (*tkWinProcs->getWindowText)(wrapper, (LPCTSTR)buf, size);
-	    Tcl_WinTCharToUtf(buf, -1, &titleString);	
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&titleString), TCL_VOLATILE);
+	    Tcl_WinTCharToUtf(buf, -1, &titleString);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&titleString),TCL_VOLATILE);
 	    Tcl_DStringFree(&titleString);
 	} else {
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *)
-		((wmPtr->title != NULL) ? wmPtr->title : winPtr->nameUid),
-		TCL_STATIC);
+		    ((wmPtr->title != NULL) ? wmPtr->title : winPtr->nameUid),
+		    TCL_STATIC);
 	}
     } else {
 	if (wmPtr->title != NULL) {
@@ -5129,7 +5323,7 @@ WmTitleCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Tcl_DString titleString;
 	    Tcl_WinUtfToTChar(wmPtr->title, -1, &titleString);
 	    (*tkWinProcs->setWindowText)(wrapper,
-	        (LPCTSTR) Tcl_DStringValue(&titleString));
+		    (LPCTSTR) Tcl_DStringValue(&titleString));
 	    Tcl_DStringFree(&titleString);
 	}
     }
@@ -5141,7 +5335,7 @@ WmTitleCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmTransientCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm transient" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm transient" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -5178,8 +5372,8 @@ WmTransientCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     if (Tcl_GetString(objv[3])[0] == '\0') {
 	if (masterPtr != NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * If we had a master, tell them that we aren't tied
-	     * to them anymore
+	     * If we had a master, tell them that we aren't tied to them
+	     * anymore.
 	     */
 
 	    masterPtr->wmInfoPtr->numTransients--;
@@ -5204,35 +5398,30 @@ WmTransientCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tk_MakeWindowExist((Tk_Window) masterPtr);
 
 	if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't make \"",
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't make \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
 		    "\" a transient: it is an icon for ",
-		    Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor),
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor), NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	wmPtr2 = masterPtr->wmInfoPtr;
 
 	if (wmPtr2->iconFor != NULL) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't make \"",
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't make \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
 		    "\" a master: it is an icon for ",
-		    Tk_PathName(wmPtr2->iconFor),
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    Tk_PathName(wmPtr2->iconFor), NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
 	if (masterPtr == winPtr) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't make \"", Tk_PathName(winPtr),
-		    "\" its own master",
-		    (char *) NULL);
+		    "\" its own master", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	} else if (masterPtr != wmPtr->masterPtr) {
 	    /*
-	     * Remove old master map/unmap binding before setting
-	     * the new master. The event handler will ensure that
-	     * transient states reflect the state of the master.
+	     * Remove old master map/unmap binding before setting the new
+	     * master. The event handler will ensure that transient states
+	     * reflect the state of the master.
 	     */
 
 	    if (wmPtr->masterPtr != NULL) {
@@ -5267,7 +5456,7 @@ WmTransientCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * WmWithdrawCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm withdraw" Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "wm withdraw" Tcl command.
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -5295,15 +5484,14 @@ WmWithdrawCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     }
     if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't withdraw ", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-		": it is an icon for ", Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor),
-		(char *) NULL);
+		": it is an icon for ", Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor), NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    if(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
-	if(SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_WITHDRAW, 0, 0) < 0) {
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+	if (SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_WITHDRAW, 0, 0) < 0) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't withdraw", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-		": the container does not support the request", NULL);
+		    ": the container does not support the request", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     } else {
@@ -5314,13 +5502,14 @@ WmWithdrawCmd(tkwin, winPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 }
 
 /*
- * Invoked by those wm subcommands that affect geometry.
- * Schedules a geometry update.
+ * Invoked by those wm subcommands that affect geometry. Schedules a geometry
+ * update.
  */
+
 static void
-WmUpdateGeom(wmPtr, winPtr)
-    WmInfo *wmPtr;
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+WmUpdateGeom(
+    WmInfo *wmPtr,
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
     if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
@@ -5330,9 +5519,9 @@ WmUpdateGeom(wmPtr, winPtr)
 
 	/*ARGSUSED*/
 static void
-WmWaitVisibilityOrMapProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to window. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+WmWaitVisibilityOrMapProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Pointer to window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Information about event. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
     TkWindow *masterPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr->masterPtr;
@@ -5364,34 +5553,34 @@ WmWaitVisibilityOrMapProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * Tk_SetGrid --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by a widget when it wishes to set a grid
- *	coordinate system that controls the size of a top-level window.
- *	It provides a C interface equivalent to the "wm grid" command and
- *	is usually asscoiated with the -setgrid option.
+ *	This function is invoked by a widget when it wishes to set a grid
+ *	coordinate system that controls the size of a top-level window. It
+ *	provides a C interface equivalent to the "wm grid" command and is
+ *	usually asscoiated with the -setgrid option.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Grid-related information will be passed to the window manager, so
- *	that the top-level window associated with tkwin will resize on
- *	even grid units.  If some other window already controls gridding
- *	for the top-level window then this procedure call has no effect.
+ *	Grid-related information will be passed to the window manager, so that
+ *	the top-level window associated with tkwin will resize on even grid
+ *	units. If some other window already controls gridding for the
+ *	top-level window then this function call has no effect.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_SetGrid(tkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window.  New window mgr info
-				 * will be posted for the top-level window
+Tk_SetGrid(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window. New window mgr info will
+				 * be posted for the top-level window
 				 * associated with this window. */
-    int reqWidth;		/* Width (in grid units) corresponding to
-				 * the requested geometry for tkwin. */
-    int reqHeight;		/* Height (in grid units) corresponding to
-				 * the requested geometry for tkwin. */
-    int widthInc, heightInc;	/* Pixel increments corresponding to a
-				 * change of one grid unit. */
+    int reqWidth,		/* Width (in grid units) corresponding to the
+				 * requested geometry for tkwin. */
+    int reqHeight,		/* Height (in grid units) corresponding to the
+				 * requested geometry for tkwin. */
+    int widthInc, int heightInc)/* Pixel increments corresponding to a change
+				 * of one grid unit. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     register WmInfo *wmPtr;
@@ -5399,6 +5588,7 @@ Tk_SetGrid(tkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc)
     /*
      * Ensure widthInc and heightInc are greater than 0
      */
+
     if (widthInc <= 0) {
 	widthInc = 1;
     }
@@ -5406,7 +5596,6 @@ Tk_SetGrid(tkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc)
 	heightInc = 1;
     }
 
-
     /*
      * Find the top-level window for tkwin, plus the window manager
      * information.
@@ -5434,15 +5623,15 @@ Tk_SetGrid(tkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If gridding was previously off, then forget about any window
-     * size requests made by the user or via "wm geometry":  these are
-     * in pixel units and there's no easy way to translate them to
-     * grid units since the new requested size of the top-level window in
-     * pixels may not yet have been registered yet (it may filter up
-     * the hierarchy in DoWhenIdle handlers).  However, if the window
-     * has never been mapped yet then just leave the window size alone:
-     * assume that it is intended to be in grid units but just happened
-     * to have been specified before this procedure was called.
+     * If gridding was previously off, then forget about any window size
+     * requests made by the user or via "wm geometry": these are in pixel
+     * units and there's no easy way to translate them to grid units since the
+     * new requested size of the top-level window in pixels may not yet have
+     * been registered yet (it may filter up the hierarchy in DoWhenIdle
+     * handlers). However, if the window has never been mapped yet then just
+     * leave the window size alone: assume that it is intended to be in grid
+     * units but just happened to have been specified before this function was
+     * called.
      */
 
     if ((wmPtr->gridWin == NULL) && !(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
@@ -5451,8 +5640,8 @@ Tk_SetGrid(tkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Set the new gridding information, and start the process of passing
-     * all of this information to the window manager.
+     * Set the new gridding information, and start the process of passing all
+     * of this information to the window manager.
      */
 
     wmPtr->gridWin = tkwin;
@@ -5472,23 +5661,22 @@ Tk_SetGrid(tkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc)
  *
  * Tk_UnsetGrid --
  *
- *	This procedure cancels the effect of a previous call
- *	to Tk_SetGrid.
+ *	This function cancels the effect of a previous call to Tk_SetGrid.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	If tkwin currently controls gridding for its top-level window,
- *	gridding is cancelled for that top-level window;  if some other
- *	window controls gridding then this procedure has no effect.
+ *	gridding is cancelled for that top-level window; if some other window
+ *	controls gridding then this function has no effect.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_UnsetGrid(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window that is currently
+Tk_UnsetGrid(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for window that is currently
 				 * controlling gridding. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
@@ -5533,23 +5721,23 @@ Tk_UnsetGrid(tkwin)
  *
  * TopLevelEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a top-level (or other externally-
- *	managed window) is restructured in any way.
+ *	This function is invoked when a top-level (or other externally-managed
+ *	window) is restructured in any way.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Tk's internal data structures for the window get modified to
- *	reflect the structural change.
+ *	Tk's internal data structures for the window get modified to reflect
+ *	the structural change.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-TopLevelEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Window for which event occurred. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Event that just happened. */
+TopLevelEventProc(
+    ClientData clientData,	/* Window for which event occurred. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* Event that just happened. */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
 
@@ -5559,8 +5747,8 @@ TopLevelEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)) {
 	    /*
 	     * A top-level window was deleted externally (e.g., by the window
-	     * manager).  This is probably not a good thing, but cleanup as
-	     * best we can.  The error handler is needed because
+	     * manager). This is probably not a good thing, but cleanup as
+	     * best we can. The error handler is needed because
 	     * Tk_DestroyWindow will try to destroy the window, but of course
 	     * it's already gone.
 	     */
@@ -5578,24 +5766,24 @@ TopLevelEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * TopLevelReqProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the geometry manager whenever
- *	the requested size for a top-level window is changed.
+ *	This function is invoked by the geometry manager whenever the
+ *	requested size for a top-level window is changed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Arrange for the window to be resized to satisfy the request
- *	(this happens as a when-idle action).
+ *	Arrange for the window to be resized to satisfy the request (this
+ *	happens as a when-idle action).
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
-TopLevelReqProc(dummy, tkwin)
-    ClientData dummy;			/* Not used. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Information about window. */
+TopLevelReqProc(
+    ClientData dummy,		/* Not used. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Information about window. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     WmInfo *wmPtr;
@@ -5616,26 +5804,25 @@ TopLevelReqProc(dummy, tkwin)
  *
  * UpdateGeometryInfo --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a top-level window is first
- *	mapped, and also as a when-idle procedure, to bring the
- *	geometry and/or position of a top-level window back into
- *	line with what has been requested by the user and/or widgets.
- *	This procedure doesn't return until the system has
+ *	This function is invoked when a top-level window is first mapped, and
+ *	also as a when-idle function, to bring the geometry and/or position of
+ *	a top-level window back into line with what has been requested by the
+ *	user and/or widgets. This function doesn't return until the system has
  *	responded to the geometry change.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The window's size and location may change, unless the WM prevents
- *	that from happening.
+ *	The window's size and location may change, unless the WM prevents that
+ *	from happening.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to the window's record. */
+UpdateGeometryInfo(
+    ClientData clientData)	/* Pointer to the window's record. */
 {
     int x, y;			/* Position of border on desktop. */
     int width, height;		/* Size of client area. */
@@ -5647,10 +5834,10 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
     wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
 
     /*
-     * If the window is minimized or maximized, we should not update
-     * our geometry since it will end up with the wrong values.
-     * ConfigureToplevel will reschedule UpdateGeometryInfo when the
-     * state of the window changes.
+     * If the window is minimized or maximized, we should not update our
+     * geometry since it will end up with the wrong values. ConfigureToplevel
+     * will reschedule UpdateGeometryInfo when the state of the window
+     * changes.
      */
 
     if (wmPtr->wrapper && (IsIconic(wmPtr->wrapper) ||
@@ -5659,12 +5846,11 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Compute the border size for the current window style.  This
-     * size will include the resize handles, the title bar and the
-     * menubar.  Note that this size will not be correct if the
-     * menubar spans multiple lines.  The height will be off by a
-     * multiple of the menubar height.  It really only measures the
-     * minimum size of the border.
+     * Compute the border size for the current window style. This size will
+     * include the resize handles, the title bar and the menubar. Note that
+     * this size will not be correct if the menubar spans multiple lines. The
+     * height will be off by a multiple of the menubar height. It really only
+     * measures the minimum size of the border.
      */
 
     rect.left = rect.right = rect.top = rect.bottom = 0;
@@ -5674,15 +5860,13 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
     wmPtr->borderHeight = rect.bottom - rect.top;
 
     /*
-     * Compute the new size for the top-level window.  See the
-     * user documentation for details on this, but the size
-     * requested depends on (a) the size requested internally
-     * by the window's widgets, (b) the size requested by the
-     * user in a "wm geometry" command or via wm-based interactive
-     * resizing (if any), (c) whether or not the window is
-     * gridded, and (d) the current min or max size for
-     * the toplevel. Don't permit sizes <= 0 because this upsets
-     * the X server.
+     * Compute the new size for the top-level window. See the user
+     * documentation for details on this, but the size requested depends on
+     * (a) the size requested internally by the window's widgets, (b) the size
+     * requested by the user in a "wm geometry" command or via wm-based
+     * interactive resizing (if any), (c) whether or not the window is
+     * gridded, and (d) the current min or max size for the toplevel. Don't
+     * permit sizes <= 0 because this upsets the X server.
      */
 
     if (wmPtr->width == -1) {
@@ -5696,9 +5880,11 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
     if (width <= 0) {
 	width = 1;
     }
+
     /*
      * Account for window max/min width
      */
+
     if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
 	min = winPtr->reqWidth
 		+ (wmPtr->minWidth - wmPtr->reqGridWidth)*wmPtr->widthInc;
@@ -5729,9 +5915,11 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
     if (height <= 0) {
 	height = 1;
     }
+
     /*
      * Account for window max/min height
      */
+
     if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
 	min = winPtr->reqHeight
 		+ (wmPtr->minHeight - wmPtr->reqGridHeight)*wmPtr->heightInc;
@@ -5753,10 +5941,10 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
 
     /*
      * Compute the new position for the upper-left pixel of the window's
-     * decorative frame.  This is tricky, because we need to include the
-     * border widths supplied by a reparented parent in this calculation,
-     * but can't use the parent's current overall size since that may
-     * change as a result of this code.
+     * decorative frame. This is tricky, because we need to include the border
+     * widths supplied by a reparented parent in this calculation, but can't
+     * use the parent's current overall size since that may change as a result
+     * of this code.
      */
 
     if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_X) {
@@ -5773,11 +5961,12 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Reconfigure the window if it isn't already configured correctly.  Base
+     * Reconfigure the window if it isn't already configured correctly. Base
      * the size check on what we *asked for* last time, not what we got.
      * Return immediately if there have been no changes in the requested
      * geometry of the toplevel.
      */
+
     /* TODO: need to add flag for possible menu size change */
 
     if (!((wmPtr->flags & WM_MOVE_PENDING)
@@ -5791,9 +5980,8 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
     wmPtr->configHeight = height;
 
     /*
-     * Don't bother moving the window if we are in the process of
-     * creating it.  Just update the geometry info based on what
-     * we asked for.
+     * Don't bother moving the window if we are in the process of creating it.
+     * Just update the geometry info based on what we asked for.
      */
 
     if (wmPtr->flags & WM_CREATE_PENDING) {
@@ -5807,11 +5995,12 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
     wmPtr->flags |= WM_SYNC_PENDING;
     if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
 	/*
-	 * The wrapper window is in a different process, so we need
-	 * to send it a geometry request.  This protocol assumes that
-	 * the other process understands this Tk message, otherwise
-	 * our requested geometry will be ignored.
+	 * The wrapper window is in a different process, so we need to send it
+	 * a geometry request. This protocol assumes that the other process
+	 * understands this Tk message, otherwise our requested geometry will
+	 * be ignored.
 	 */
+
 	SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_MOVEWINDOW, x, y);
 	SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_GEOMETRYREQ, width, height);
     } else {
@@ -5821,15 +6010,13 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
 	int newHeight;
 
 	/*
-	 * We have to keep resizing the window until we get the
-	 * requested height in the client area. If the client
-	 * area has zero height, then the window rect is too
-	 * small by definition. Try increasing the border height
-	 * and try again. Once we have a positive size, then
-	 * we can adjust the height exactly. If the window
-	 * rect comes back smaller than we requested, we have
-	 * hit the maximum constraints that Windows imposes.
-	 * Once we find a positive client size, the next size
+	 * We have to keep resizing the window until we get the requested
+	 * height in the client area. If the client area has zero height, then
+	 * the window rect is too small by definition. Try increasing the
+	 * border height and try again. Once we have a positive size, then we
+	 * can adjust the height exactly. If the window rect comes back
+	 * smaller than we requested, we have hit the maximum constraints that
+	 * Windows imposes. Once we find a positive client size, the next size
 	 * is the one we try no matter what.
 	 */
 
@@ -5861,11 +6048,13 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
 		/*
 		 * We're done.
 		 */
+
 		break;
 	    } else if (newHeight > height) {
 		/*
 		 * One last resize to get rid of the extra space.
 		 */
+
 		menuInc = newHeight - height;
 		reqHeight -= menuInc;
 		if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_Y) {
@@ -5876,11 +6065,10 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * We didn't get enough space to satisfy our requested
-	     * height, so the menu must have wrapped.  Increase the
-	     * size of the window by one menu height and move the
-	     * window if it is positioned relative to the lower right
-	     * corner of the screen.
+	     * We didn't get enough space to satisfy our requested height, so
+	     * the menu must have wrapped. Increase the size of the window by
+	     * one menu height and move the window if it is positioned
+	     * relative to the lower right corner of the screen.
 	     */
 
 	    reqHeight += menuInc;
@@ -5900,13 +6088,12 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
  *
  * ParseGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure parses a geometry string and updates
- *	information used to control the geometry of a top-level
- *	window.
+ *	This function parses a geometry string and updates information used to
+ *	control the geometry of a top-level window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value, plus an error message in
- *	the interp's result if an error occurs.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value, plus an error message in the interp's
+ *	result if an error occurs.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The size and/or location of winPtr may change.
@@ -5915,12 +6102,12 @@ UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
  */
 
 static int
-ParseGeometry(interp, string, winPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    char *string;		/* String containing new geometry.  Has the
+ParseGeometry(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    char *string,		/* String containing new geometry. Has the
 				 * standard form "=wxh+x+y". */
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Pointer to top-level window whose
-				 * geometry is to be changed. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Pointer to top-level window whose geometry
+				 * is to be changed. */
 {
     register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
     int x, y, width, height, flags;
@@ -5936,9 +6123,9 @@ ParseGeometry(interp, string, winPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Parse the width and height, if they are present.  Don't
-     * actually update any of the fields of wmPtr until we've
-     * successfully parsed the entire geometry string.
+     * Parse the width and height, if they are present. Don't actually update
+     * any of the fields of wmPtr until we've successfully parsed the entire
+     * geometry string.
      */
 
     width = wmPtr->width;
@@ -5992,10 +6179,10 @@ ParseGeometry(interp, string, winPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Assume that the geometry information came from the user,
-	 * unless an explicit source has been specified.  Otherwise
-	 * most window managers assume that the size hints were
-	 * program-specified and they ignore them.
+	 * Assume that the geometry information came from the user, unless an
+	 * explicit source has been specified. Otherwise most window managers
+	 * assume that the size hints were program-specified and they ignore
+	 * them.
 	 */
 
 	if ((wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & (USPosition|PPosition)) == 0) {
@@ -6004,9 +6191,9 @@ ParseGeometry(interp, string, winPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Everything was parsed OK.  Update the fields of *wmPtr and
-     * arrange for the appropriate information to be percolated out
-     * to the window manager at the next idle moment.
+     * Everything was parsed OK. Update the fields of *wmPtr and arrange for
+     * the appropriate information to be percolated out to the window manager
+     * at the next idle moment.
      */
 
     wmPtr->width = width;
@@ -6022,9 +6209,8 @@ ParseGeometry(interp, string, winPtr)
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 
-    error:
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad geometry specifier \"",
-	    string, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+  error:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad geometry specifier \"", string, "\"", NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -6033,13 +6219,13 @@ ParseGeometry(interp, string, winPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetRootCoords --
  *
- *	Given a token for a window, this procedure traces through the
- *	window's lineage to find the (virtual) root-window coordinates
- *	corresponding to point (0,0) in the window.
+ *	Given a token for a window, this function traces through the window's
+ *	lineage to find the (virtual) root-window coordinates corresponding to
+ *	point (0,0) in the window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The locations pointed to by xPtr and yPtr are filled in with
- *	the root coordinates of the (0,0) point in tkwin.
+ *	The locations pointed to by xPtr and yPtr are filled in with the root
+ *	coordinates of the (0,0) point in tkwin.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -6048,10 +6234,10 @@ ParseGeometry(interp, string, winPtr)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window. */
-    int *xPtr;			/* Where to store x-displacement of (0,0). */
-    int *yPtr;			/* Where to store y-displacement of (0,0). */
+Tk_GetRootCoords(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Token for window. */
+    int *xPtr,			/* Where to store x-displacement of (0,0). */
+    int *yPtr)			/* Where to store y-displacement of (0,0). */
 {
     register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
@@ -6081,13 +6267,13 @@ Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr)
  *
  * Tk_CoordsToWindow --
  *
- *	Given the (virtual) root coordinates of a point, this procedure
- *	returns the token for the top-most window covering that point,
- *	if there exists such a window in this application.
+ *	Given the (virtual) root coordinates of a point, this function returns
+ *	the token for the top-most window covering that point, if there exists
+ *	such a window in this application.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return result is either a token for the window corresponding
- *	to rootX and rootY, or else NULL to indicate that there is no such
+ *	The return result is either a token for the window corresponding to
+ *	rootX and rootY, or else NULL to indicate that there is no such
  *	window.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -6097,13 +6283,13 @@ Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr)
  */
 
 Tk_Window
-Tk_CoordsToWindow(rootX, rootY, tkwin)
-    int rootX, rootY;		/* Coordinates of point in root window.  If
-				 * a virtual-root window manager is in use,
+Tk_CoordsToWindow(
+    int rootX, int rootY,	/* Coordinates of point in root window. If a
+				 * virtual-root window manager is in use,
 				 * these coordinates refer to the virtual
 				 * root, not the real root. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for any window in application;
-				 * used to identify the display. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for any window in application; used
+				 * to identify the display. */
 {
     POINT pos;
     HWND hwnd;
@@ -6125,16 +6311,15 @@ Tk_CoordsToWindow(rootX, rootY, tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_GetVRootGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure returns information about the virtual root
- *	window corresponding to a particular Tk window.
+ *	This function returns information about the virtual root window
+ *	corresponding to a particular Tk window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The values at xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, and heightPtr are set
- *	with the offset and dimensions of the root window corresponding
- *	to tkwin.  If tkwin is being managed by a virtual root window
- *	manager these values correspond to the virtual root window being
- *	used for tkwin;  otherwise the offsets will be 0 and the
- *	dimensions will be those of the screen.
+ *	The values at xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, and heightPtr are set with the
+ *	offset and dimensions of the root window corresponding to tkwin. If
+ *	tkwin is being managed by a virtual root window manager these values
+ *	correspond to the virtual root window being used for tkwin; otherwise
+ *	the offsets will be 0 and the dimensions will be those of the screen.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Vroot window information is refreshed if it is out of date.
@@ -6143,22 +6328,24 @@ Tk_CoordsToWindow(rootX, rootY, tkwin)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose virtual root is to be
+Tk_GetVRootGeometry(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window whose virtual root is to be
 				 * queried. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;		/* Store x and y offsets of virtual root
+    int *xPtr, int *yPtr,	/* Store x and y offsets of virtual root
 				 * here. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* Store dimensions of virtual root here. */
+    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)
+				/* Store dimensions of virtual root here. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
 
     /*
-     * XXX: This is not correct for multiple monitors.  There may be many
+     * XXX: This is not correct for multiple monitors. There may be many
      * changes required to get this right, and it may effect existing
-     * applications that don't consider possible <0 vroot.  See
-     * http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/en-us/gdi/monitor_3lrn.asp
-     * for more info.
+     * applications that don't consider possible <0 vroot. See
+     * http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/en-us/gdi/monitor_3lrn.asp for more
+     * info.
      */
+
     *xPtr = 0;
     *yPtr = 0;
     *widthPtr = DisplayWidth(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum);
@@ -6170,27 +6357,25 @@ Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  *
  * Tk_MoveToplevelWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is called instead of Tk_MoveWindow to adjust
- *	the x-y location of a top-level window.  It delays the actual
- *	move to a later time and keeps window-manager information
- *	up-to-date with the move
+ *	This function is called instead of Tk_MoveWindow to adjust the x-y
+ *	location of a top-level window. It delays the actual move to a later
+ *	time and keeps window-manager information up-to-date with the move
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The window is eventually moved so that its upper-left corner
- *	(actually, the upper-left corner of the window's decorative
- *	frame, if there is one) is at (x,y).
+ *	(actually, the upper-left corner of the window's decorative frame, if
+ *	there is one) is at (x,y).
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_MoveToplevelWindow(tkwin, x, y)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to move. */
-    int x, y;			/* New location for window (within
-				 * parent). */
+Tk_MoveToplevelWindow(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* Window to move. */
+    int x, int y)		/* New location for window (within parent). */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
@@ -6208,9 +6393,8 @@ Tk_MoveToplevelWindow(tkwin, x, y)
 
     /*
      * If the window has already been mapped, must bring its geometry
-     * up-to-date immediately, otherwise an event might arrive from the
-     * server that would overwrite wmPtr->x and wmPtr->y and lose the
-     * new position.
+     * up-to-date immediately, otherwise an event might arrive from the server
+     * that would overwrite wmPtr->x and wmPtr->y and lose the new position.
      */
 
     if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
@@ -6226,25 +6410,23 @@ Tk_MoveToplevelWindow(tkwin, x, y)
  *
  * TkWmProtocolEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the Tk_HandleEvent whenever a
- *	ClientMessage event arrives whose type is "WM_PROTOCOLS".
- *	This procedure handles the message from the window manager
- *	in an appropriate fashion.
+ *	This function is called by the Tk_HandleEvent whenever a ClientMessage
+ *	event arrives whose type is "WM_PROTOCOLS". This function handles the
+ *	message from the window manager in an appropriate fashion.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Depends on what sort of handler, if any, was set up for the
- *	protocol.
+ *	Depends on what sort of handler, if any, was set up for the protocol.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkWmProtocolEventProc(winPtr, eventPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to which the event was sent. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X event. */
+TkWmProtocolEventProc(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Window to which the event was sent. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr)		/* X event. */
 {
     WmInfo *wmPtr;
     register ProtocolHandler *protPtr;
@@ -6261,9 +6443,10 @@ TkWmProtocolEventProc(winPtr, eventPtr)
 	    protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (protocol == protPtr->protocol) {
 	    /*
-	     * Cache atom name, as we might destroy the window as a
-	     * result of the eval.
+	     * Cache atom name, as we might destroy the window as a result of
+	     * the eval.
 	     */
+
 	    CONST char *name = Tk_GetAtomName((Tk_Window) winPtr, protocol);
 
 	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) protPtr);
@@ -6283,8 +6466,8 @@ TkWmProtocolEventProc(winPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * No handler was present for this protocol.  If this is a
-     * WM_DELETE_WINDOW message then just destroy the window.
+     * No handler was present for this protocol. If this is a WM_DELETE_WINDOW
+     * message then just destroy the window.
      */
 
     if (protocol == Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr, "WM_DELETE_WINDOW")) {
@@ -6297,9 +6480,8 @@ TkWmProtocolEventProc(winPtr, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkWmStackorderToplevelEnumProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked once for each HWND Window on the
- *	display as a result of calling EnumWindows from
- *	TkWmStackorderToplevel.
+ *	This function is invoked once for each HWND Window on the display as a
+ *	result of calling EnumWindows from TkWmStackorderToplevel.
  *
  * Results:
  *	TRUE to request further iteration.
@@ -6310,9 +6492,10 @@ TkWmProtocolEventProc(winPtr, eventPtr)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-BOOL CALLBACK TkWmStackorderToplevelEnumProc(hwnd, lParam)
-    HWND hwnd;     /* handle to parent window */
-    LPARAM lParam; /* application-defined value */
+BOOL CALLBACK
+TkWmStackorderToplevelEnumProc(
+    HWND hwnd,			/* Handle to parent window */
+    LPARAM lParam)		/* Application-defined value */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     TkWindow *childWinPtr;
@@ -6325,7 +6508,11 @@ BOOL CALLBACK TkWmStackorderToplevelEnumProc(hwnd, lParam)
     hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(pair->table, (char *) hwnd);
     if (hPtr != NULL) {
         childWinPtr = (TkWindow *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-        /* Double check that same HWND does not get passed twice */
+
+        /*
+	 * Double check that same HWND does not get passed twice.
+	 */
+
         if (childWinPtr == NULL) {
             Tcl_Panic("duplicate HWND in TkWmStackorderToplevelEnumProc");
         } else {
@@ -6343,8 +6530,8 @@ BOOL CALLBACK TkWmStackorderToplevelEnumProc(hwnd, lParam)
  *
  * TkWmStackorderToplevelWrapperMap --
  *
- *	This procedure will create a table that maps the wrapper
- *	HWND id for a toplevel to the TkWindow structure that is wraps.
+ *	This function will create a table that maps the wrapper HWND id for a
+ *	toplevel to the TkWindow structure that is wraps.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -6356,10 +6543,10 @@ BOOL CALLBACK TkWmStackorderToplevelEnumProc(hwnd, lParam)
  */
 
 static void
-TkWmStackorderToplevelWrapperMap(winPtr, display, table)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;				/* TkWindow to recurse on */
-    Display *display;                          /* X display of parent window */
-    Tcl_HashTable *table;		/* Table to maps HWND to TkWindow */
+TkWmStackorderToplevelWrapperMap(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* TkWindow to recurse on */
+    Display *display,		/* X display of parent window */
+    Tcl_HashTable *table)	/* Table to maps HWND to TkWindow */
 {
     TkWindow *childPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
@@ -6373,8 +6560,7 @@ TkWmStackorderToplevelWrapperMap(winPtr, display, table)
         /*fprintf(stderr, "Mapped HWND %d to %x (%s)\n", wrapper,
 	  winPtr, winPtr->pathName);*/
 
-        hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(table,
-            (char *) wrapper, &newEntry);
+        hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(table, (char *) wrapper, &newEntry);
         Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, winPtr);
     }
 
@@ -6388,11 +6574,11 @@ TkWmStackorderToplevelWrapperMap(winPtr, display, table)
  *
  * TkWmStackorderToplevel --
  *
- *	This procedure returns the stack order of toplevel windows.
+ *	This function returns the stack order of toplevel windows.
  *
  * Results:
- *	An array of pointers to tk window objects in stacking order
- *	or else NULL if there was an error.
+ *	An array of pointers to tk window objects in stacking order or else
+ *	NULL if there was an error.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -6401,8 +6587,8 @@ TkWmStackorderToplevelWrapperMap(winPtr, display, table)
  */
 
 TkWindow **
-TkWmStackorderToplevel(parentPtr)
-    TkWindow *parentPtr;		/* Parent toplevel window. */
+TkWmStackorderToplevel(
+    TkWindow *parentPtr)	/* Parent toplevel window. */
 {
     TkWmStackorderToplevelPair pair;
     TkWindow **windows;
@@ -6421,8 +6607,8 @@ TkWmStackorderToplevel(parentPtr)
         * sizeof(TkWindow *));
 
     /*
-     * Special cases: If zero or one toplevels were mapped
-     * there is no need to call EnumWindows.
+     * Special cases: If zero or one toplevels were mapped there is no need to
+     * call EnumWindows.
      */
 
     switch (table.numEntries) {
@@ -6437,9 +6623,9 @@ TkWmStackorderToplevel(parentPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * We will be inserting into the array starting at the end
-     * and working our way to the beginning since EnumWindows
-     * returns windows in highest to lowest order.
+     * We will be inserting into the array starting at the end and working our
+     * way to the beginning since EnumWindows returns windows in highest to
+     * lowest order.
      */
 
     pair.table = &table;
@@ -6450,12 +6636,11 @@ TkWmStackorderToplevel(parentPtr)
 	    (LPARAM) &pair) == 0) {
         ckfree((char *) windows);
         windows = NULL;
-    } else {
-        if (pair.window_ptr != (windows-1))
-            Tcl_Panic("num matched toplevel windows does not equal num children");
+    } else if (pair.window_ptr != (windows-1)) {
+	Tcl_Panic("num matched toplevel windows does not equal num children");
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&table);
     return windows;
 }
@@ -6465,33 +6650,33 @@ TkWmStackorderToplevel(parentPtr)
  *
  * TkWmRestackToplevel --
  *
- *	This procedure restacks a top-level window.
+ *	This function restacks a top-level window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	WinPtr gets restacked  as specified by aboveBelow and otherPtr.
- *	This procedure doesn't return until the restack has taken
- *	effect and the ConfigureNotify event for it has been received.
+ *	WinPtr gets restacked as specified by aboveBelow and otherPtr. This
+ *	function doesn't return until the restack has taken effect and the
+ *	ConfigureNotify event for it has been received.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkWmRestackToplevel(winPtr, aboveBelow, otherPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to restack. */
-    int aboveBelow;		/* Gives relative position for restacking;
+TkWmRestackToplevel(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,		/* Window to restack. */
+    int aboveBelow,		/* Gives relative position for restacking;
 				 * must be Above or Below. */
-    TkWindow *otherPtr;		/* Window relative to which to restack;
-				 * if NULL, then winPtr gets restacked
-				 * above or below *all* siblings. */
+    TkWindow *otherPtr)		/* Window relative to which to restack; if
+				 * NULL, then winPtr gets restacked above or
+				 * below *all* siblings. */
 {
     HWND hwnd, insertAfter;
 
     /*
-     * Can't set stacking order properly until the window is on the
-     * screen (mapping it may give it a reparent window).
+     * Can't set stacking order properly until the window is on the screen
+     * (mapping it may give it a reparent window).
      */
 
     if (winPtr->window == None) {
@@ -6511,13 +6696,14 @@ TkWmRestackToplevel(winPtr, aboveBelow, otherPtr)
 	    TkWmMapWindow(otherPtr);
 	}
 	insertAfter = (otherPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper != NULL)
-	    ? otherPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper : Tk_GetHWND(otherPtr->window);
+		? otherPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper : Tk_GetHWND(otherPtr->window);
     } else {
 	insertAfter = NULL;
     }
 
-    if(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
-	SendMessage(winPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper, TK_RAISEWINDOW, (WPARAM)insertAfter, aboveBelow);
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+	SendMessage(winPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper, TK_RAISEWINDOW,
+		(WPARAM)insertAfter, aboveBelow);
     } else {
 	TkWinSetWindowPos(hwnd, insertAfter, aboveBelow);
     }
@@ -6528,28 +6714,27 @@ TkWmRestackToplevel(winPtr, aboveBelow, otherPtr)
  *
  * TkWmAddToColormapWindows --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to add a given window to the
- *	WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for its top-level, if it
- *	isn't already there.  It is invoked by the Tk code that
- *	creates a new colormap, in order to make sure that colormap
- *	information is propagated to the window manager by default.
+ *	This function is called to add a given window to the
+ *	WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for its top-level, if it isn't already
+ *	there. It is invoked by the Tk code that creates a new colormap, in
+ *	order to make sure that colormap information is propagated to the
+ *	window manager by default.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	WinPtr's window gets added to the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS
- *	property of its nearest top-level ancestor, unless the
- *	colormaps have been set explicitly with the
- *	"wm colormapwindows" command.
+ *	WinPtr's window gets added to the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property of its
+ *	nearest top-level ancestor, unless the colormaps have been set
+ *	explicitly with the "wm colormapwindows" command.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkWmAddToColormapWindows(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window with a non-default colormap.
-				 * Should not be a top-level window. */
+TkWmAddToColormapWindows(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Window with a non-default colormap. Should
+				 * not be a top-level window. */
 {
     TkWindow *topPtr;
     TkWindow **oldPtr, **newPtr;
@@ -6562,7 +6747,7 @@ TkWmAddToColormapWindows(winPtr)
     for (topPtr = winPtr->parentPtr; ; topPtr = topPtr->parentPtr) {
 	if (topPtr == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * Window is being deleted.  Skip the whole operation.
+	     * Window is being deleted. Skip the whole operation.
 	     */
 
 	    return;
@@ -6594,8 +6779,7 @@ TkWmAddToColormapWindows(winPtr)
 
     /*
      * Make a new bigger array and use it to reset the property.
-     * Automatically add the toplevel itself as the last element
-     * of the list.
+     * Automatically add the toplevel itself as the last element of the list.
      */
 
     newPtr = (TkWindow **) ckalloc((unsigned) ((count+2)*sizeof(TkWindow*)));
@@ -6630,26 +6814,26 @@ TkWmAddToColormapWindows(winPtr)
  *
  * TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to remove a given window from the
- *	WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for its top-level.  It is invoked
- *	when windows are deleted.
+ *	This function is called to remove a given window from the
+ *	WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for its top-level. It is invoked when
+ *	windows are deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	WinPtr's window gets removed from the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS
- *	property of its nearest top-level ancestor, unless the
- *	top-level itself is being deleted too.
+ *	WinPtr's window gets removed from the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property of
+ *	its nearest top-level ancestor, unless the top-level itself is being
+ *	deleted too.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that may be present in
+TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Window that may be present in
 				 * WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for its
-				 * top-level.  Should not be a top-level
+				 * top-level. Should not be a top-level
 				 * window. */
 {
     TkWindow *topPtr;
@@ -6671,8 +6855,8 @@ TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows(winPtr)
     }
     if (topPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD) {
 	/*
-	 * Top-level is being deleted, so there's no need to cleanup
-	 * the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property.
+	 * Top-level is being deleted, so there's no need to cleanup the
+	 * WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property.
 	 */
 
 	return;
@@ -6683,8 +6867,7 @@ TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows(winPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the window and slide the following ones down to cover
-     * it up.
+     * Find the window and slide the following ones down to cover it up.
      */
 
     count = topPtr->wmInfoPtr->cmapCount;
@@ -6711,16 +6894,16 @@ TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows(winPtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The menu will end up being drawn in the window, and the geometry
- *	of the window will have to be changed.
+ *	The menu will end up being drawn in the window, and the geometry of
+ *	the window will have to be changed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-TkWinSetMenu(tkwin, hMenu)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* the window to put the menu in */
-    HMENU hMenu;		/* the menu to set */
+TkWinSetMenu(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* the window to put the menu in */
+    HMENU hMenu)		/* the menu to set */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
     WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
@@ -6742,7 +6925,7 @@ TkWinSetMenu(tkwin, hMenu)
 	}
     } else {
 	SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_SETMENU,
-	    (WPARAM)hMenu, (LPARAM)Tk_GetMenuHWND(tkwin)); 
+	    (WPARAM)hMenu, (LPARAM)Tk_GetMenuHWND(tkwin));
     }
 }
 
@@ -6752,7 +6935,7 @@ TkWinSetMenu(tkwin, hMenu)
  * ConfigureTopLevel --
  *
  *	Generate a ConfigureNotify event based on the current position
- *	information.  This procedure is called by TopLevelProc.
+ *	information. This function is called by TopLevelProc.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -6764,8 +6947,8 @@ TkWinSetMenu(tkwin, hMenu)
  */
 
 static void
-ConfigureTopLevel(pos)
-    WINDOWPOS *pos;
+ConfigureTopLevel(
+    WINDOWPOS *pos)
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = GetTopLevel(pos->hwnd);
     WmInfo *wmPtr;
@@ -6789,15 +6972,15 @@ ConfigureTopLevel(pos)
 	windowPos.length = sizeof(WINDOWPLACEMENT);
 	GetWindowPlacement(wmPtr->wrapper, &windowPos);
 	switch (windowPos.showCmd) {
-	    case SW_SHOWMAXIMIZED:
-		state = ZoomState;
-		break;
-	    case SW_SHOWMINIMIZED:
-		state = IconicState;
-		break;
-	    case SW_SHOWNORMAL:
-		state = NormalState;
-		break;
+	case SW_SHOWMAXIMIZED:
+	    state = ZoomState;
+	    break;
+	case SW_SHOWMINIMIZED:
+	    state = IconicState;
+	    break;
+	case SW_SHOWNORMAL:
+	    state = NormalState;
+	    break;
 	}
     }
 
@@ -6809,27 +6992,26 @@ ConfigureTopLevel(pos)
     if (wmPtr->hints.initial_state != state) {
 	wmPtr->hints.initial_state = state;
 	switch (state) {
-	    case WithdrawnState:
-	    case IconicState:
-		XUnmapWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window);
-		break;
+	case WithdrawnState:
+	case IconicState:
+	    XUnmapWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window);
+	    break;
 
-	    case NormalState:
-		/*
-		 * Schedule a geometry update.  Since we ignore geometry
-		 * requests while in any other state, the geometry info
-		 * may be stale.
-		 */
+	case NormalState:
+	    /*
+	     * Schedule a geometry update. Since we ignore geometry requests
+	     * while in any other state, the geometry info may be stale.
+	     */
 
-		if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_UPDATE_PENDING)) {
-		    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
-		    wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
-		}
-		/* fall through */
-	    case ZoomState:
-		XMapWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window);
-		pos->flags |= SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE;
-		break;
+	    if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_UPDATE_PENDING)) {
+		Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+		wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+	    }
+	    /* fall through */
+	case ZoomState:
+	    XMapWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window);
+	    pos->flags |= SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE;
+	    break;
 	}
     }
 
@@ -6843,8 +7025,8 @@ ConfigureTopLevel(pos)
 
 
     /*
-     * Compute the current geometry of the client area, reshape the
-     * Tk window and generate a ConfigureNotify event.
+     * Compute the current geometry of the client area, reshape the Tk window
+     * and generate a ConfigureNotify event.
      */
 
     GetClientRect(wmPtr->wrapper, &rect);
@@ -6864,16 +7046,16 @@ ConfigureTopLevel(pos)
     if (state == NormalState) {
 
 	/*
-	 * Update size information from the event.  There are a couple of
+	 * Update size information from the event. There are a couple of
 	 * tricky points here:
 	 *
 	 * 1. If the user changed the size externally then set wmPtr->width
 	 *    and wmPtr->height just as if a "wm geometry" command had been
 	 *    invoked with the same information.
-	 * 2. However, if the size is changing in response to a request
-	 *    coming from us (sync is set), then don't set
-	 *    wmPtr->width or wmPtr->height (otherwise the window will stop
-	 *    tracking geometry manager requests).
+	 * 2. However, if the size is changing in response to a request coming
+	 *    from us (sync is set), then don't set wmPtr->width or
+	 *    wmPtr->height (otherwise the window will stop tracking geometry
+	 *    manager requests).
 	 */
 
 	if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_SYNC_PENDING)) {
@@ -6881,8 +7063,8 @@ ConfigureTopLevel(pos)
 		if ((wmPtr->width == -1)
 			&& (winPtr->changes.width == winPtr->reqWidth)) {
 		    /*
-		     * Don't set external width, since the user didn't
-		     * change it from what the widgets asked for.
+		     * Don't set external width, since the user didn't change
+		     * it from what the widgets asked for.
 		     */
 		} else {
 		    if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
@@ -6917,9 +7099,10 @@ ConfigureTopLevel(pos)
 		wmPtr->configWidth = winPtr->changes.width;
 		wmPtr->configHeight = winPtr->changes.height;
 	    }
+
 	    /*
-	     * If the user moved the window, we should switch back
-	     * to normal coordinates.
+	     * If the user moved the window, we should switch back to normal
+	     * coordinates.
 	     */
 
 	    if (!(pos->flags & SWP_NOMOVE)) {
@@ -6933,15 +7116,15 @@ ConfigureTopLevel(pos)
 
 	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_X) {
 	    wmPtr->x = DisplayWidth(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum)
-		- winPtr->changes.x - (winPtr->changes.width
-			+ wmPtr->borderWidth);
+		    - winPtr->changes.x - (winPtr->changes.width
+		    + wmPtr->borderWidth);
 	} else {
 	    wmPtr->x = winPtr->changes.x;
 	}
 	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_Y) {
 	    wmPtr->y = DisplayHeight(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum)
-		- winPtr->changes.y - (winPtr->changes.height
-			+ wmPtr->borderHeight);
+		    - winPtr->changes.y - (winPtr->changes.height
+		    + wmPtr->borderHeight);
 	} else {
 	    wmPtr->y = winPtr->changes.y;
 	}
@@ -6953,8 +7136,8 @@ ConfigureTopLevel(pos)
  *
  * GenerateConfigureNotify --
  *
- *	Generate a ConfigureNotify event from the current geometry
- *	information for the specified toplevel window.
+ *	Generate a ConfigureNotify event from the current geometry information
+ *	for the specified toplevel window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -6966,8 +7149,8 @@ ConfigureTopLevel(pos)
  */
 
 static void
-GenerateConfigureNotify(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+GenerateConfigureNotify(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
     XEvent event;
 
@@ -6996,8 +7179,8 @@ GenerateConfigureNotify(winPtr)
  *
  * InstallColormaps --
  *
- *	Installs the colormaps associated with the toplevel which is
- *	currently active.
+ *	Installs the colormaps associated with the toplevel which is currently
+ *	active.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -7009,12 +7192,12 @@ GenerateConfigureNotify(winPtr)
  */
 
 static int
-InstallColormaps(hwnd, message, isForemost)
-    HWND hwnd;			/* Toplevel wrapper window whose colormaps
+InstallColormaps(
+    HWND hwnd,			/* Toplevel wrapper window whose colormaps
 				 * should be installed. */
-    int message;		/* Either WM_PALETTECHANGED or
+    int message,		/* Either WM_PALETTECHANGED or
 				 * WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE */
-    int isForemost;		/* 1 if window is foremost, else 0 */
+    int isForemost)		/* 1 if window is foremost, else 0 */
 {
     int i;
     HDC dc;
@@ -7061,11 +7244,11 @@ InstallColormaps(hwnd, message, isForemost)
 
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * Window is being notified of a change in the system palette.
-	 * If this window is the foreground window, then we should only
-	 * install the secondary palettes, since the primary was installed
-	 * in response to the WM_QUERYPALETTE message.  Otherwise, install
-	 * all of the palettes.
+	 * Window is being notified of a change in the system palette. If this
+	 * window is the foreground window, then we should only install the
+	 * secondary palettes, since the primary was installed in response to
+	 * the WM_QUERYPALETTE message. Otherwise, install all of the
+	 * palettes.
 	 */
 
 
@@ -7107,11 +7290,10 @@ InstallColormaps(hwnd, message, isForemost)
  *
  * RefreshColormap --
  *
- *	This function is called to force all of the windows that use
- *	a given colormap to redraw themselves.  The quickest way to
- *	do this is to iterate over the toplevels, looking in the
- *	cmapList for matches.  This will quickly eliminate subtrees
- *	that don't use a given colormap.
+ *	This function is called to force all of the windows that use a given
+ *	colormap to redraw themselves. The quickest way to do this is to
+ *	iterate over the toplevels, looking in the cmapList for matches. This
+ *	will quickly eliminate subtrees that don't use a given colormap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -7123,9 +7305,9 @@ InstallColormaps(hwnd, message, isForemost)
  */
 
 static void
-RefreshColormap(colormap, dispPtr)
-    Colormap colormap;
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+RefreshColormap(
+    Colormap colormap,
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr)
 {
     WmInfo *wmPtr;
     int i;
@@ -7150,9 +7332,9 @@ RefreshColormap(colormap, dispPtr)
  *
  * InvalidateSubTree --
  *
- *	This function recursively generates damage for a window and
- *	all of its mapped children that belong to the same toplevel and
- *	are using the specified colormap.
+ *	This function recursively generates damage for a window and all of its
+ *	mapped children that belong to the same toplevel and are using the
+ *	specified colormap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -7164,15 +7346,15 @@ RefreshColormap(colormap, dispPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-InvalidateSubTree(winPtr, colormap)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
-    Colormap colormap;
+InvalidateSubTree(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,
+    Colormap colormap)
 {
     TkWindow *childPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Generate damage for the current window if it is using the
-     * specified colormap.
+     * Generate damage for the current window if it is using the specified
+     * colormap.
      */
 
     if (winPtr->atts.colormap == colormap) {
@@ -7182,8 +7364,7 @@ InvalidateSubTree(winPtr, colormap)
     for (childPtr = winPtr->childList; childPtr != NULL;
 	    childPtr = childPtr->nextPtr) {
 	/*
-	 * We can stop the descent when we hit an unmapped or
-	 * toplevel window.
+	 * We can stop the descent when we hit an unmapped or toplevel window.
 	 */
 
 	if (!Tk_TopWinHierarchy(childPtr) && Tk_IsMapped(childPtr)) {
@@ -7197,8 +7378,8 @@ InvalidateSubTree(winPtr, colormap)
  *
  * InvalidateSubTreeDepth --
  *
- *	This function recursively updates depth info for a window and
- *	all of its children that belong to the same toplevel.
+ *	This function recursively updates depth info for a window and all of
+ *	its children that belong to the same toplevel.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -7210,8 +7391,8 @@ InvalidateSubTree(winPtr, colormap)
  */
 
 static void
-InvalidateSubTreeDepth(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+InvalidateSubTreeDepth(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
     Display *display = Tk_Display(winPtr);
     int screenNum = Tk_ScreenNumber(winPtr);
@@ -7221,10 +7402,10 @@ InvalidateSubTreeDepth(winPtr)
 
 #if 0
     /*
-     * XXX: What other elements may require changes?  Changing just
-     * the depth works for standard windows and 16/24/32-bpp changes.
-     * I suspect 8-bit (palettized) displays may require colormap and/or
-     * visual changes as well.
+     * XXX: What other elements may require changes? Changing just the depth
+     * works for standard windows and 16/24/32-bpp changes. I suspect 8-bit
+     * (palettized) displays may require colormap and/or visual changes as
+     * well.
      */
 
     if (winPtr->window) {
@@ -7238,7 +7419,7 @@ InvalidateSubTreeDepth(winPtr)
     for (childPtr = winPtr->childList; childPtr != NULL;
 	 childPtr = childPtr->nextPtr) {
 	/*
-	 * We can stop the descent when we hit a non-embedded toplevel window, 
+	 * We can stop the descent when we hit a non-embedded toplevel window,
 	 * as it should get its own message.
 	 */
 
@@ -7256,8 +7437,8 @@ InvalidateSubTreeDepth(winPtr)
  *	Retrieves the currently installed foreground palette.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns the global foreground palette, if there is one.
- *	Otherwise, returns NULL.
+ *	Returns the global foreground palette, if there is one. Otherwise,
+ *	returns NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -7266,7 +7447,7 @@ InvalidateSubTreeDepth(winPtr)
  */
 
 HPALETTE
-TkWinGetSystemPalette()
+TkWinGetSystemPalette(void)
 {
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
@@ -7279,17 +7460,16 @@ TkWinGetSystemPalette()
  *
  * GetMinSize --
  *
- *	This procedure computes the current minWidth and minHeight
- *	values for a window, taking into account the possibility
- *	that they may be defaulted.
+ *	This function computes the current minWidth and minHeight values for a
+ *	window, taking into account the possibility that they may be
+ *	defaulted.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The values at *minWidthPtr and *minHeightPtr are filled
- *	in with the minimum allowable dimensions of wmPtr's window,
- *	in grid units.  If the requested minimum is smaller than the
- *	system required minimum, then this procedure computes the
- *	smallest size that will satisfy both the system and the
- *	grid constraints.
+ *	The values at *minWidthPtr and *minHeightPtr are filled in with the
+ *	minimum allowable dimensions of wmPtr's window, in grid units. If the
+ *	requested minimum is smaller than the system required minimum, then
+ *	this function computes the smallest size that will satisfy both the
+ *	system and the grid constraints.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -7298,21 +7478,21 @@ TkWinGetSystemPalette()
  */
 
 static void
-GetMinSize(wmPtr, minWidthPtr, minHeightPtr)
-    WmInfo *wmPtr;		/* Window manager information for the
+GetMinSize(
+    WmInfo *wmPtr,		/* Window manager information for the
 				 * window. */
-    int *minWidthPtr;		/* Where to store the current minimum
-				 * width of the window. */
-    int *minHeightPtr;		/* Where to store the current minimum
-				 * height of the window. */
+    int *minWidthPtr,		/* Where to store the current minimum width of
+				 * the window. */
+    int *minHeightPtr)		/* Where to store the current minimum height
+				 * of the window. */
 {
     int tmp, base;
     TkWindow *winPtr = wmPtr->winPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Compute the minimum width by taking the default client size
-     * and rounding it up to the nearest grid unit.  Return the greater
-     * of the default minimum and the specified minimum.
+     * Compute the minimum width by taking the default client size and
+     * rounding it up to the nearest grid unit. Return the greater of the
+     * default minimum and the specified minimum.
      */
 
     tmp = wmPtr->defMinWidth - wmPtr->borderWidth;
@@ -7357,15 +7537,15 @@ GetMinSize(wmPtr, minWidthPtr, minHeightPtr)
  *
  * GetMaxSize --
  *
- *	This procedure computes the current maxWidth and maxHeight
- *	values for a window, taking into account the possibility
- *	that they may be defaulted.
+ *	This function computes the current maxWidth and maxHeight values for a
+ *	window, taking into account the possibility that they may be
+ *	defaulted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The values at *maxWidthPtr and *maxHeightPtr are filled
  *	in with the maximum allowable dimensions of wmPtr's window,
  *	in grid units.  If no maximum has been specified for the
- *	window, then this procedure computes the largest sizes that
+ *	window, then this function computes the largest sizes that
  *	will fit on the screen.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -7375,13 +7555,13 @@ GetMinSize(wmPtr, minWidthPtr, minHeightPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-GetMaxSize(wmPtr, maxWidthPtr, maxHeightPtr)
-    WmInfo *wmPtr;		/* Window manager information for the
+GetMaxSize(
+    WmInfo *wmPtr,		/* Window manager information for the
 				 * window. */
-    int *maxWidthPtr;		/* Where to store the current maximum
-				 * width of the window. */
-    int *maxHeightPtr;		/* Where to store the current maximum
-				 * height of the window. */
+    int *maxWidthPtr,		/* Where to store the current maximum width of
+				 * the window. */
+    int *maxHeightPtr)		/* Where to store the current maximum height
+				 * of the window. */
 {
     int tmp;
 
@@ -7389,14 +7569,14 @@ GetMaxSize(wmPtr, maxWidthPtr, maxHeightPtr)
 	*maxWidthPtr = wmPtr->maxWidth;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * Must compute a default width.  Fill up the display, leaving a
-	 * bit of extra space for the window manager's borders.
+	 * Must compute a default width. Fill up the display, leaving a bit of
+	 * extra space for the window manager's borders.
 	 */
 
 	tmp = wmPtr->defMaxWidth - wmPtr->borderWidth;
 	if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * Gridding is turned on;  convert from pixels to grid units.
+	     * Gridding is turned on; convert from pixels to grid units.
 	     */
 
 	    tmp = wmPtr->reqGridWidth
@@ -7421,8 +7601,7 @@ GetMaxSize(wmPtr, maxWidthPtr, maxHeightPtr)
  *
  * TopLevelProc --
  *
- *	Callback from Windows whenever an event occurs on a top level
- *	window.
+ *	Callback from Windows whenever an event occurs on a top level window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Windows return value.
@@ -7434,11 +7613,11 @@ GetMaxSize(wmPtr, maxWidthPtr, maxHeightPtr)
  */
 
 static LRESULT CALLBACK
-TopLevelProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
-    HWND hwnd;
-    UINT message;
-    WPARAM wParam;
-    LPARAM lParam;
+TopLevelProc(
+    HWND hwnd,
+    UINT message,
+    WPARAM wParam,
+    LPARAM lParam)
 {
     if (message == WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED || message == WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGING) {
 	WINDOWPOS *pos = (WINDOWPOS *) lParam;
@@ -7457,7 +7636,8 @@ TopLevelProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	    winPtr->changes.height = pos->cy;
 	}
 	if (!(pos->flags & SWP_NOMOVE)) {
-	    long result = SendMessage(winPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper, TK_MOVEWINDOW, -1, -1);
+	    long result = SendMessage(winPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper,
+		    TK_MOVEWINDOW, -1, -1);
 	    winPtr->wmInfoPtr->x = winPtr->changes.x = result >> 16;
 	    winPtr->wmInfoPtr->y = winPtr->changes.y = result & 0xffff;
 	}
@@ -7488,189 +7668,195 @@ TopLevelProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
  */
 
 static LRESULT CALLBACK
-WmProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
-    HWND hwnd;
-    UINT message;
-    WPARAM wParam;
-    LPARAM lParam;
+WmProc(
+    HWND hwnd,
+    UINT message,
+    WPARAM wParam,
+    LPARAM lParam)
 {
     static int inMoveSize = 0;
-    static int oldMode;	/* This static is set upon entering move/size mode
-			 * and is used to reset the service mode after
-			 * leaving move/size mode.  Note that this mechanism
-			 * assumes move/size is only one level deep. */
+    static int oldMode;		/* This static is set upon entering move/size
+				 * mode and is used to reset the service mode
+				 * after leaving move/size mode. Note that
+				 * this mechanism assumes move/size is only
+				 * one level deep. */
     LRESULT result;
     TkWindow *winPtr = NULL;
 
     switch (message) {
-	case WM_KILLFOCUS:
-	case WM_ERASEBKGND:
-	    result = 0;
-	    goto done;
-
-	case WM_ENTERSIZEMOVE:
-	    inMoveSize = 1;
-
-	    /*
-	     * Cancel any current mouse timer.  If the mouse timer
-	     * fires during the size/move mouse capture, it will
-	     * release the capture, which is wrong.
-	     */
+    case WM_KILLFOCUS:
+    case WM_ERASEBKGND:
+	result = 0;
+	goto done;
 
-	    TkWinCancelMouseTimer();
+    case WM_ENTERSIZEMOVE:
+	inMoveSize = 1;
 
-	    oldMode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
-	    break;
-
-	case WM_ACTIVATE:
-	case WM_EXITSIZEMOVE:
-	    if (inMoveSize) {
-		inMoveSize = 0;
-		Tcl_SetServiceMode(oldMode);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	/*
+	 * Cancel any current mouse timer. If the mouse timer fires during the
+	 * size/move mouse capture, it will release the capture, which is
+	 * wrong.
+	 */
 
-	case WM_GETMINMAXINFO:
-	    SetLimits(hwnd, (MINMAXINFO *) lParam);
-	    result = 0;
-	    goto done;
+	TkWinCancelMouseTimer();
 
-	case WM_DISPLAYCHANGE:
-	    /* display and/or color resolution changed */
-	    winPtr = GetTopLevel(hwnd);
-	    if (winPtr) {
-		Screen *screen = Tk_Screen(winPtr);
-		if (screen->root_depth != (int) wParam) {
-		    /*
-		     * Color resolution changed, so do extensive rebuild of
-		     * display parameters.  This will affect the display for
-		     * all Tk windows.  We will receive this event for each
-		     * toplevel, but this check makes us update only once, for
-		     * the first toplevel that receives the message.
-		     */
-		    TkWinDisplayChanged(Tk_Display(winPtr));
-		} else {
-		    HDC dc = GetDC(NULL);
-		    screen->width   = LOWORD(lParam); /* horizontal res */
-		    screen->height  = HIWORD(lParam); /* vertical res */
-		    screen->mwidth  = MulDiv(screen->width, 254,
-			    GetDeviceCaps(dc, LOGPIXELSX) * 10);
-		    screen->mheight = MulDiv(screen->height, 254,
-			    GetDeviceCaps(dc, LOGPIXELSY) * 10);
-		    ReleaseDC(NULL, dc);
-		}
-		if (Tk_Depth(winPtr) != (int) wParam) {
-		    /*
-		     * Defer the window depth check to here so that each
-		     * toplevel will properly update depth info.
-		     */
-		    InvalidateSubTreeDepth(winPtr);
-		}
-	    }
-	    result = 0;
-	    goto done;
+	oldMode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
+	break;
 
-	case WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE:
-	    /*
-	     * XXX: Called when system color changes.  We need to
-	     * update any widgets that use a system color.
-	     */
-	    break;
+    case WM_ACTIVATE:
+    case WM_EXITSIZEMOVE:
+	if (inMoveSize) {
+	    inMoveSize = 0;
+	    Tcl_SetServiceMode(oldMode);
+	}
+	break;
 
-	case WM_PALETTECHANGED:
-	    result = InstallColormaps(hwnd, WM_PALETTECHANGED,
-		    hwnd == (HWND)wParam);
-	    goto done;
+    case WM_GETMINMAXINFO:
+	SetLimits(hwnd, (MINMAXINFO *) lParam);
+	result = 0;
+	goto done;
 
-	case WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE:
-	    result = InstallColormaps(hwnd, WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE, TRUE);
-	    goto done;
+    case WM_DISPLAYCHANGE:
+	/*
+	 * Display and/or color resolution changed.
+	 */
 
-	case WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED:
-	    ConfigureTopLevel((WINDOWPOS *) lParam);
-	    result = 0;
-	    goto done;
+	winPtr = GetTopLevel(hwnd);
+	if (winPtr) {
+	    Screen *screen = Tk_Screen(winPtr);
+	    if (screen->root_depth != (int) wParam) {
+		/*
+		 * Color resolution changed, so do extensive rebuild of
+		 * display parameters. This will affect the display for all Tk
+		 * windows. We will receive this event for each toplevel, but
+		 * this check makes us update only once, for the first
+		 * toplevel that receives the message.
+		 */
 
-	case WM_NCHITTEST: {
-	    winPtr = GetTopLevel(hwnd);
-	    if (winPtr && (TkGrabState(winPtr) == TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED)) {
+		TkWinDisplayChanged(Tk_Display(winPtr));
+	    } else {
+		HDC dc = GetDC(NULL);
+
+		screen->width = LOWORD(lParam);		/* horizontal res */
+		screen->height = HIWORD(lParam);	/* vertical res */
+		screen->mwidth  = MulDiv(screen->width, 254,
+			GetDeviceCaps(dc, LOGPIXELSX) * 10);
+		screen->mheight = MulDiv(screen->height, 254,
+			GetDeviceCaps(dc, LOGPIXELSY) * 10);
+		ReleaseDC(NULL, dc);
+	    }
+	    if (Tk_Depth(winPtr) != (int) wParam) {
 		/*
-		 * This window is outside the grab heirarchy, so don't let any
-		 * of the normal non-client processing occur.  Note that this
-		 * implementation is not strictly correct because the grab
-		 * might change between now and when the event would have been
-		 * processed by Tk, but it's close enough.
+		 * Defer the window depth check to here so that each toplevel
+		 * will properly update depth info.
 		 */
 
-		result = HTCLIENT;
-		goto done;
+		InvalidateSubTreeDepth(winPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
+	result = 0;
+	goto done;
 
-	case WM_MOUSEACTIVATE: {
-	    ActivateEvent *eventPtr;
-	    winPtr = GetTopLevel((HWND) wParam);
+    case WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE:
+	/*
+	 * XXX: Called when system color changes. We need to update any
+	 * widgets that use a system color.
+	 */
 
-	    if (winPtr && (TkGrabState(winPtr) != TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED)) {
-		/*
-		 * This allows us to pass the message onto the
-		 * native menus [Bug: 2272]
-		 */
-		result = (*tkWinProcs->defWindowProc)(hwnd, message,
-			wParam, lParam);
-		goto done;
-	    }
+	break;
+
+    case WM_PALETTECHANGED:
+	result = InstallColormaps(hwnd, WM_PALETTECHANGED,
+		hwnd == (HWND)wParam);
+	goto done;
+
+    case WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE:
+	result = InstallColormaps(hwnd, WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE, TRUE);
+	goto done;
 
+    case WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED:
+	ConfigureTopLevel((WINDOWPOS *) lParam);
+	result = 0;
+	goto done;
+
+    case WM_NCHITTEST: {
+	winPtr = GetTopLevel(hwnd);
+	if (winPtr && (TkGrabState(winPtr) == TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED)) {
 	    /*
-	     * Don't activate the window yet since there is a grab
-	     * that takes precedence.  Instead we need to queue
-	     * an event so we can check the grab state right before we
-	     * handle the mouse event.
+	     * This window is outside the grab heirarchy, so don't let any of
+	     * the normal non-client processing occur. Note that this
+	     * implementation is not strictly correct because the grab might
+	     * change between now and when the event would have been processed
+	     * by Tk, but it's close enough.
 	     */
 
-	    if (winPtr) {
-		eventPtr = (ActivateEvent *)ckalloc(sizeof(ActivateEvent));
-		eventPtr->ev.proc = ActivateWindow;
-		eventPtr->winPtr = winPtr;
-		Tcl_QueueEvent((Tcl_Event*)eventPtr, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
-	    }
-	    result = MA_NOACTIVATE;
+	    result = HTCLIENT;
 	    goto done;
 	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-	default:
-	    break;
+    case WM_MOUSEACTIVATE: {
+	ActivateEvent *eventPtr;
+	winPtr = GetTopLevel((HWND) wParam);
+
+	if (winPtr && (TkGrabState(winPtr) != TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED)) {
+	    /*
+	     * This allows us to pass the message onto the native menus [Bug:
+	     * 2272]
+	     */
+
+	    result = (*tkWinProcs->defWindowProc)(hwnd, message,
+		    wParam, lParam);
+	    goto done;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Don't activate the window yet since there is a grab that takes
+	 * precedence. Instead we need to queue an event so we can check the
+	 * grab state right before we handle the mouse event.
+	 */
+
+	if (winPtr) {
+	    eventPtr = (ActivateEvent *)ckalloc(sizeof(ActivateEvent));
+	    eventPtr->ev.proc = ActivateWindow;
+	    eventPtr->winPtr = winPtr;
+	    Tcl_QueueEvent((Tcl_Event*)eventPtr, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
+	}
+	result = MA_NOACTIVATE;
+	goto done;
+    }
+
+    default:
+	break;
     }
 
     winPtr = GetTopLevel(hwnd);
     switch(message) {
-	case WM_SYSCOMMAND:
-	case WM_INITMENU:
-	case WM_COMMAND:
-	case WM_MENUCHAR:
-	case WM_MEASUREITEM:
-	case WM_DRAWITEM:
-	case WM_MENUSELECT:
-	case WM_ENTERIDLE:
-	case WM_INITMENUPOPUP:
-	{
-	    HWND hMenuHWnd = Tk_GetEmbeddedMenuHWND((Tk_Window)winPtr);
-	    if(hMenuHWnd) {
-		if(SendMessage(hMenuHWnd, message, wParam, lParam)) {
-		    goto done;
-		}
-	    } else {
-		if (TkWinHandleMenuEvent(&hwnd, &message, &wParam, &lParam, &result)) {
-    		    goto done;
-		}
+    case WM_SYSCOMMAND:
+    case WM_INITMENU:
+    case WM_COMMAND:
+    case WM_MENUCHAR:
+    case WM_MEASUREITEM:
+    case WM_DRAWITEM:
+    case WM_MENUSELECT:
+    case WM_ENTERIDLE:
+    case WM_INITMENUPOPUP: {
+	HWND hMenuHWnd = Tk_GetEmbeddedMenuHWND((Tk_Window)winPtr);
+	if (hMenuHWnd) {
+	    if (SendMessage(hMenuHWnd, message, wParam, lParam)) {
+		goto done;
 	    }
+	} else if (TkWinHandleMenuEvent(&hwnd, &message, &wParam, &lParam,
+		&result)) {
+	    goto done;
 	}
 	break;
     }
 
     if (winPtr && winPtr->window) {
 	HWND child = Tk_GetHWND(winPtr->window);
+
 	if (message == WM_SETFOCUS) {
 	    SetFocus(child);
 	    result = 0;
@@ -7683,7 +7869,7 @@ WmProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 	result = (*tkWinProcs->defWindowProc)(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     Tcl_ServiceAll();
     return result;
 }
@@ -7693,8 +7879,8 @@ WmProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
  *
  * TkpMakeMenuWindow --
  *
- *	Configure the window to be either a pull-down (or pop-up)
- *	menu, or as a toplevel (torn-off) menu or palette.
+ *	Configure the window to be either a pull-down (or pop-up) menu, or as
+ *	a toplevel (torn-off) menu or palette.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -7706,12 +7892,12 @@ WmProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
  */
 
 void
-TkpMakeMenuWindow(tkwin, transient)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* New window. */
-    int transient;		/* 1 means menu is only posted briefly as
-				 * a popup or pulldown or cascade.  0 means
-				 * menu is always visible, e.g. as a torn-off
-				 * menu.  Determines whether save_under and
+TkpMakeMenuWindow(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* New window. */
+    int transient)		/* 1 means menu is only posted briefly as a
+				 * popup or pulldown or cascade. 0 means menu
+				 * is always visible, e.g. as a torn-off menu.
+				 * Determines whether save_under and
 				 * override_redirect should be set. */
 {
     XSetWindowAttributes atts;
@@ -7755,23 +7941,21 @@ TkWinGetWrapperWindow(
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
     return (winPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper);
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkWmFocusToplevel --
  *
- *	This is a utility procedure invoked by focus-management code. It
- *	exists because of the extra wrapper windows that exist under
- *	Unix; its job is to map from wrapper windows to the
- *	corresponding toplevel windows.  On PCs and Macs there are no
- *	wrapper windows so no mapping is necessary;  this procedure just
- *	determines whether a window is a toplevel or not.
+ *	This is a utility function invoked by focus-management code. It exists
+ *	because of the extra wrapper windows that exist under Unix; its job is
+ *	to map from wrapper windows to the corresponding toplevel windows. On
+ *	PCs and Macs there are no wrapper windows so no mapping is necessary;
+ *	this function just determines whether a window is a toplevel or not.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If winPtr is a toplevel window, returns the pointer to the
- *	window; otherwise returns NULL.
+ *	If winPtr is a toplevel window, returns the pointer to the window;
+ *	otherwise returns NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -7780,8 +7964,8 @@ TkWinGetWrapperWindow(
  */
 
 TkWindow *
-TkWmFocusToplevel(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that received a focus-related
+TkWmFocusToplevel(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Window that received a focus-related
 				 * event. */
 {
     if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)) {
@@ -7789,19 +7973,19 @@ TkWmFocusToplevel(winPtr)
     }
     return winPtr;
 }
- 
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkpGetWrapperWindow --
  *
- *	This is a utility procedure invoked by focus-management code. It
- *	maps to the wrapper for a top-level, which is just the same
- *	as the top-level on Macs and PCs.
+ *	This is a utility function invoked by focus-management code. It maps
+ *	to the wrapper for a top-level, which is just the same as the
+ *	top-level on Macs and PCs.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If winPtr is a toplevel window, returns the pointer to the
- *	window; otherwise returns NULL.
+ *	If winPtr is a toplevel window, returns the pointer to the window;
+ *	otherwise returns NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -7850,8 +8034,8 @@ ActivateWindow(
     winPtr = ((ActivateEvent *) evPtr)->winPtr;
 
     /*
-     * If the window is excluded by a grab, call SetFocus on the
-     * grabbed window instead. [Bug 220908]
+     * If the window is excluded by a grab, call SetFocus on the grabbed
+     * window instead. [Bug 220908]
      */
 
     if (winPtr) {
@@ -7864,16 +8048,14 @@ ActivateWindow(
 
     return 1;
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkWinSetForegroundWindow --
  *
- *	This function is a wrapper for SetForegroundWindow, calling
- *      it on the wrapper window because it has no affect on child
- *      windows.
+ *	This function is a wrapper for SetForegroundWindow, calling it on the
+ *	wrapper window because it has no affect on child windows.
  *
  * Results:
  *	none
@@ -7885,8 +8067,8 @@ ActivateWindow(
  */
 
 void
-TkWinSetForegroundWindow(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+TkWinSetForegroundWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
     register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
 
@@ -7896,14 +8078,14 @@ TkWinSetForegroundWindow(winPtr)
 	SetForegroundWindow(Tk_GetHWND(winPtr->window));
     }
 }
-
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkpWinToplevelWithdraw --
  *
- *	This function is to be used by a window manage to withdraw
- *	a toplevel window.
+ *	This function is to be used by a window manage to withdraw a toplevel
+ *	window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	none
@@ -7913,7 +8095,8 @@ TkWinSetForegroundWindow(winPtr)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-void 
+
+void
 TkpWinToplevelWithDraw(winPtr)
     TkWindow *winPtr;
 {
@@ -7927,8 +8110,8 @@ TkpWinToplevelWithDraw(winPtr)
  *
  * TkpWinToplevelIconify --
  *
- *	This function is to be used by a window manage to iconify
- *	a toplevel window.
+ *	This function is to be used by a window manage to iconify a toplevel
+ *	window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	none
@@ -7938,19 +8121,20 @@ TkpWinToplevelWithDraw(winPtr)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-void TkpWinToplevelIconify(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+
+void TkpWinToplevelIconify(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
     TkpWmSetState(winPtr, IconicState);
 }
-
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkpWinToplevelDeiconify --
  *
- *	This function is to be used by a window manage to deiconify
- *	a toplevel window.
+ *	This function is to be used by a window manage to deiconify a toplevel
+ *	window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	none
@@ -7960,19 +8144,20 @@ void TkpWinToplevelIconify(winPtr)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-void TkpWinToplevelDeiconify(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+
+void TkpWinToplevelDeiconify(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
     register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
 
     wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_WITHDRAWN;
 
     /*
-     * If WM_UPDATE_PENDING is true, a pending UpdateGeometryInfo may
-     * need to be called first to update a withdrawn toplevel's geometry
-     * before it is deiconified by TkpWmSetState.
-     * Don't bother if we've never been mapped.
+     * If WM_UPDATE_PENDING is true, a pending UpdateGeometryInfo may need to
+     * be called first to update a withdrawn toplevel's geometry before it is
+     * deiconified by TkpWmSetState. Don't bother if we've never been mapped.
      */
+
     if ((wmPtr->flags & WM_UPDATE_PENDING) &&
 	    !(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
 	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
@@ -7980,9 +8165,10 @@ void TkpWinToplevelDeiconify(winPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If we were in the ZoomState (maximized), 'wm deiconify'
-     * should not cause the window to shrink
+     * If we were in the ZoomState (maximized), 'wm deiconify' should not
+     * cause the window to shrink
      */
+
     if (wmPtr->hints.initial_state == ZoomState) {
 	TkpWmSetState(winPtr, ZoomState);
     } else {
@@ -7990,10 +8176,10 @@ void TkpWinToplevelDeiconify(winPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * An unmapped window will be mapped at idle time
-     * by a call to MapFrame. That calls CreateWrapper
-     * which sets the focus and raises the window.
+     * An unmapped window will be mapped at idle time by a call to MapFrame.
+     * That calls CreateWrapper which sets the focus and raises the window.
      */
+
     if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) {
 	return;
     }
@@ -8001,19 +8187,20 @@ void TkpWinToplevelDeiconify(winPtr)
     /*
      * Follow Windows-like style here, raising the window to the top.
      */
+
     TkWmRestackToplevel(winPtr, Above, NULL);
     if (!(Tk_Attributes((Tk_Window) winPtr)->override_redirect)) {
 	TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, 1);
     }
 }
-
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkpWinGeometryIsControlledByWm --
  *
- *	This function is to be used by a window manage to see if
- *	wm has canceled geometry control.
+ *	This function is to be used by a window manage to see if wm has
+ *	canceled geometry control.
  *
  * Results:
  *	0 - if the window manager has canceled its control
@@ -8024,27 +8211,29 @@ void TkpWinToplevelDeiconify(winPtr)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-long TkpWinToplevelIsControlledByWm(winPtr) 
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+
+long
+TkpWinToplevelIsControlledByWm(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
     register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
-    if(wmPtr) {
+
+    if (wmPtr) {
 	return ((wmPtr->width != -1) && (wmPtr->height != -1))? 1:0;
     } else {
 	return 0;
     }
 }
-
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkpWinToplevelMove --
  *
- *	This function is to be used by a container to move
- *	an embedded window.
+ *	This function is to be used by a container to move an embedded window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	position of the upper left frame in a 32-bit long: 
+ *	position of the upper left frame in a 32-bit long:
  *		16-MSBits - x; 16-LSBits - y
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -8052,24 +8241,28 @@ long TkpWinToplevelIsControlledByWm(winPtr)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-long TkpWinToplevelMove(winPtr, x, y)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
-    int x, y;
+
+long
+TkpWinToplevelMove(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,
+    int x, int y)
 {
     register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
-    if(wmPtr && x >= 0 && y >= 0 && !TkpWinToplevelIsControlledByWm(winPtr)) {
+
+    if (wmPtr && x >= 0 && y >= 0 && !TkpWinToplevelIsControlledByWm(winPtr)) {
 	Tk_MoveToplevelWindow((Tk_Window)winPtr, x, y);
     }
-    return ((winPtr->changes.x << 16) & 0xffff0000) | (winPtr->changes.y & 0xffff);
+    return ((winPtr->changes.x << 16) & 0xffff0000)
+	    | (winPtr->changes.y & 0xffff);
 }
-
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkpWinToplevelOverrideRedirect --
  *
- *	This function is to be used by a container to overrideredirect
- *	the contaner's frame window.
+ *	This function is to be used by a container to overrideredirect the
+ *	contaner's frame window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The current overrideredirect value
@@ -8079,9 +8272,11 @@ long TkpWinToplevelMove(winPtr, x, y)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-long TkpWinToplevelOverrideRedirect(winPtr, reqValue)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
-    int reqValue;
+
+long
+TkpWinToplevelOverrideRedirect(
+    TkWindow *winPtr,
+    int reqValue)
 {
     int curValue;
     register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
@@ -8091,21 +8286,23 @@ long TkpWinToplevelOverrideRedirect(winPtr, reqValue)
 
     if (curValue != reqValue) {
 	XSetWindowAttributes atts;
+
         /*
-         * Only do this if we are really changing value, because it
-         * causes some funky stuff to occur
+         * Only do this if we are really changing value, because it causes
+         * some funky stuff to occur
          */
+
         atts.override_redirect = reqValue ? True : False;
         Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes((Tk_Window) winPtr, CWOverrideRedirect,
 		&atts);
 	if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_NEVER_MAPPED))
-	    && !(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
+		&& !(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
 	    UpdateWrapper(winPtr);
 	}
     }
     return reqValue;
 }
-
+
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
@@ -8123,19 +8320,33 @@ long TkpWinToplevelOverrideRedirect(winPtr, reqValue)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void TkpWinToplevelDetachWindow(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;
+void
+TkpWinToplevelDetachWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)
 {
     register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
-    if(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
-	int state = SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_STATE, -1, -1)-1;
+
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+	int state = SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_STATE, -1, -1) - 1;
+
         SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_SETMENU, 0, 0);
         SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_DETACHWINDOW, 0, 0);
         winPtr->flags &= ~TK_EMBEDDED;
 	winPtr->privatePtr = NULL;
         wmPtr->wrapper = None;
-	if(state >= 0 && state <= 3) wmPtr->hints.initial_state = state;
+	if (state >= 0 && state <= 3) {
+	    wmPtr->hints.initial_state = state;
+	}
     }
-    if(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL) {
 	TkpWinToplevelOverrideRedirect(winPtr, 1);
+    }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinX.c b/win/tkWinX.c
index d13e59a..1ee8171 100644
--- a/win/tkWinX.c
+++ b/win/tkWinX.c
@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinX.c --
  *
- *	This file contains Windows emulation procedures for X routines. 
+ *	This file contains Windows emulation procedures for X routines.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1994 Software Research Associates, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinX.c,v 1.49 2005/08/21 03:29:22 mistachkin Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinX.c,v 1.50 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 /*
@@ -24,9 +24,9 @@
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 
 /*
- * The w32api 1.1 package (included in Mingw 1.1) does not define _WIN32_IE
- * by default. Define it here to gain access to the InitCommonControlsEx API
- * in commctrl.h.
+ * The w32api 1.1 package (included in Mingw 1.1) does not define _WIN32_IE by
+ * default. Define it here to gain access to the InitCommonControlsEx API in
+ * commctrl.h.
  */
 
 #ifndef _WIN32_IE
@@ -109,38 +109,37 @@ static int keyInputCharset = -1;    /* The Win32 CHARSET for the keyboard
 static Tcl_Encoding unicodeEncoding = NULL; /* unicode encoding */
 
 /*
- * Thread local storage.  Notice that now each thread must have its
- * own TkDisplay structure, since this structure contains most of
- * the thread-specific date for threads.
+ * Thread local storage. Notice that now each thread must have its own
+ * TkDisplay structure, since this structure contains most of the
+ * thread-specific date for threads.
  */
+
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    TkDisplay *winDisplay;       /* TkDisplay structure that *
-				  *  represents Windows screen. */
-    int updatingClipboard;	/* If 1, we are updating the clipboard */
+    TkDisplay *winDisplay;      /* TkDisplay structure that represents Windows
+				 * screen. */
+    int updatingClipboard;	/* If 1, we are updating the clipboard. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations of procedures used in this file.
+ * Forward declarations of functions used in this file.
  */
 
-static void		GenerateXEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message,
-			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
-static unsigned int	GetState _ANSI_ARGS_((UINT message, WPARAM wParam,
-			    LPARAM lParam));
-static void 		GetTranslatedKey _ANSI_ARGS_((XKeyEvent *xkey));
-static void             UpdateInputLanguage _ANSI_ARGS_((int charset));
-static int              HandleIMEComposition _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd,
-			    LPARAM lParam));
+static void		GenerateXEvent(HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
+static unsigned int	GetState(UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
+static void 		GetTranslatedKey(XKeyEvent *xkey);
+static void             UpdateInputLanguage(int charset);
+static int              HandleIMEComposition(HWND hwnd, LPARAM lParam);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkGetServerInfo --
  *
- *	Given a window, this procedure returns information about
- *	the window server for that window.  This procedure provides
- *	the guts of the "winfo server" command.
+ *	Given a window, this function returns information about the window
+ *	server for that window. This function provides the guts of the "winfo
+ *	server" command.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -152,11 +151,11 @@ static int              HandleIMEComposition _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd,
  */
 
 void
-TkGetServerInfo(interp, tkwin)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The server information is returned in
-				 * this interpreter's result. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window;  this selects a
-				 * particular display and server. */
+TkGetServerInfo(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The server information is returned in this
+				 * interpreter's result. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* Token for window; this selects a particular
+				 * display and server. */
 {
     char buffer[60];
     OSVERSIONINFO os;
@@ -170,7 +169,7 @@ TkGetServerInfo(interp, tkwin)
 #else
 	    "Win32"
 #endif
-	);
+	    );
     Tcl_SetResult(interp, buffer, TCL_VOLATILE);
 }
 
@@ -191,7 +190,7 @@ TkGetServerInfo(interp, tkwin)
  */
 
 HINSTANCE
-Tk_GetHINSTANCE()
+Tk_GetHINSTANCE(vpod)
 {
     if (tkInstance == NULL) {
 	tkInstance = GetModuleHandle(NULL);
@@ -204,8 +203,8 @@ Tk_GetHINSTANCE()
  *
  * TkWinSetHINSTANCE --
  *
- *	Sets the global instance handle used by the Tk library.
- *	This should be called by DllMain.
+ *	Sets the global instance handle used by the Tk library. This should be
+ *	called by DllMain.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -217,8 +216,8 @@ Tk_GetHINSTANCE()
  */
 
 void
-TkWinSetHINSTANCE(hInstance)
-    HINSTANCE hInstance;
+TkWinSetHINSTANCE(
+    HINSTANCE hInstance)
 {
     tkInstance = hInstance;
 }
@@ -240,8 +239,8 @@ TkWinSetHINSTANCE(hInstance)
  */
 
 void
-TkWinXInit(hInstance)
-    HINSTANCE hInstance;
+TkWinXInit(
+    HINSTANCE hInstance)
 {
     INITCOMMONCONTROLSEX comctl;
 
@@ -263,12 +262,12 @@ TkWinXInit(hInstance)
     }
 
     /*
-     * When threads are enabled, we cannot use CLASSDC because
-     * threads will then write into the same device context.
-     * 
-     * This is a hack; we should add a subsystem that manages
-     * device context on a per-thread basis.  See also tkWinWm.c,
-     * which also initializes a WNDCLASS structure.
+     * When threads are enabled, we cannot use CLASSDC because threads will
+     * then write into the same device context.
+     *
+     * This is a hack; we should add a subsystem that manages device context
+     * on a per-thread basis. See also tkWinWm.c, which also initializes a
+     * WNDCLASS structure.
      */
 
 #ifdef TCL_THREADS
@@ -299,6 +298,7 @@ TkWinXInit(hInstance)
     /*
      * Make sure we cleanup on finalize.
      */
+
     TkCreateExitHandler(TkWinXCleanup, (ClientData) hInstance);
 }
 
@@ -319,14 +319,15 @@ TkWinXInit(hInstance)
  */
 
 void
-TkWinXCleanup(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;
+TkWinXCleanup(
+    ClientData clientData)
 {
     HINSTANCE hInstance = (HINSTANCE) clientData;
+
     /*
      * Clean up our own class.
      */
-    
+
     if (childClassInitialized) {
         childClassInitialized = 0;
         UnregisterClass(TK_WIN_CHILD_CLASS_NAME, hInstance);
@@ -340,7 +341,7 @@ TkWinXCleanup(clientData)
     /*
      * And let the window manager clean up its own class(es).
      */
-    
+
     TkWinWmCleanup(hInstance);
     TkWinCleanupContainerList();
 }
@@ -350,12 +351,12 @@ TkWinXCleanup(clientData)
  *
  * TkWinGetPlatformId --
  *
- *	Determines whether running under NT, 95, or Win32s, to allow 
- *	runtime conditional code.  Win32s is no longer supported.
+ *	Determines whether running under NT, 95, or Win32s, to allow runtime
+ *	conditional code. Win32s is no longer supported.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is one of:
- *	    VER_PLATFORM_WIN32s		Win32s on Windows 3.1. 
+ *	    VER_PLATFORM_WIN32s		Win32s on Windows 3.1.
  *	    VER_PLATFORM_WIN32_WINDOWS	Win32 on Windows 95.
  *	    VER_PLATFORM_WIN32_NT	Win32 on Windows NT
  *
@@ -366,7 +367,7 @@ TkWinXCleanup(clientData)
  */
 
 int
-TkWinGetPlatformId()
+TkWinGetPlatformId(vpod
 {
     if (tkPlatformId == 0) {
 	OSVERSIONINFO os;
@@ -374,17 +375,20 @@ TkWinGetPlatformId()
 	os.dwOSVersionInfoSize = sizeof(OSVERSIONINFO);
 	GetVersionEx(&os);
 	tkPlatformId = os.dwPlatformId;
-        
-        /* Set tkWinTheme to be TK_THEME_WIN_XP or TK_THEME_WIN_CLASSIC.
-         * The TK_THEME_WIN_CLASSIC could be set even when running
-         * under XP if the windows classic theme was selected. */
+
+        /*
+	 * Set tkWinTheme to be TK_THEME_WIN_XP or TK_THEME_WIN_CLASSIC. The
+	 * TK_THEME_WIN_CLASSIC could be set even when running under XP if the
+	 * windows classic theme was selected.
+	 */
 	if ((os.dwPlatformId == VER_PLATFORM_WIN32_NT) &&
 	        (os.dwMajorVersion == 5 && os.dwMinorVersion == 1)) {
-	    HKEY   hKey;
+	    HKEY hKey;
 	    LPCSTR szSubKey  = TEXT("Control Panel\\Appearance");
 	    LPCSTR szCurrent = TEXT("Current");
-	    DWORD  dwSize = 200;
+	    DWORD dwSize = 200;
 	    char pBuffer[200];
+
 	    memset(pBuffer, 0, dwSize);
 	    if (RegOpenKeyEx(HKEY_CURRENT_USER, szSubKey, 0L,
                     KEY_READ, &hKey) != ERROR_SUCCESS) {
@@ -414,8 +418,8 @@ TkWinGetPlatformId()
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is one of:
- *	    TK_THEME_WIN_CLASSIC		95/98/NT or XP in classic mode
- *	    TK_THEME_WIN_XP	                XP not in classic mode
+ *	    TK_THEME_WIN_CLASSIC	95/98/NT or XP in classic mode
+ *	    TK_THEME_WIN_XP		XP not in classic mode
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Could invoke TkWinGetPlatformId.
@@ -424,7 +428,7 @@ TkWinGetPlatformId()
  */
 
 int
-TkWinGetPlatformTheme()
+TkWinGetPlatformTheme(void)
 {
     if (tkPlatformId == 0) {
         TkWinGetPlatformId();
@@ -450,9 +454,9 @@ TkWinGetPlatformTheme()
  */
 
 CONST char *
-TkGetDefaultScreenName(interp, screenName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Not used. */
-    CONST char *screenName;	/* If NULL, use default string. */
+TkGetDefaultScreenName(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Not used. */
+    CONST char *screenName)	/* If NULL, use default string. */
 {
     if ((screenName == NULL) || (screenName[0] == '\0')) {
 	screenName = winScreenName;
@@ -478,7 +482,8 @@ TkGetDefaultScreenName(interp, screenName)
  */
 
 void
-TkWinDisplayChanged(Display *display)
+TkWinDisplayChanged(
+    Display *display)
 {
     HDC dc;
     Screen *screen;
@@ -499,9 +504,9 @@ TkWinDisplayChanged(Display *display)
     /*
      * On windows, when creating a color bitmap, need two pieces of
      * information: the number of color planes and the number of pixels per
-     * plane.  Need to remember both quantities so that when constructing an
+     * plane. Need to remember both quantities so that when constructing an
      * HBITMAP for offscreen rendering, we can specify the correct value for
-     * the number of planes.  Otherwise the HBITMAP won't be compatible with
+     * the number of planes. Otherwise the HBITMAP won't be compatible with
      * the HWND and we'll just get blank spots copied onto the screen.
      */
 
@@ -559,8 +564,8 @@ TkWinDisplayChanged(Display *display)
  *
  * TkpOpenDisplay --
  *
- *	Create the Display structure and fill it with device
- *	specific information.
+ *	Create the Display structure and fill it with device specific
+ *	information.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns a TkDisplay structure on success or NULL on failure.
@@ -572,17 +577,17 @@ TkWinDisplayChanged(Display *display)
  */
 
 TkDisplay *
-TkpOpenDisplay(display_name)
-    CONST char *display_name;
+TkpOpenDisplay(
+    CONST char *display_name)
 {
     Screen *screen;
     TkWinDrawable *twdPtr;
     Display *display;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
 	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (tsdPtr->winDisplay != NULL) {
-	if (strcmp(tsdPtr->winDisplay->display->display_name, display_name) 
+	if (strcmp(tsdPtr->winDisplay->display->display_name, display_name)
                 == 0) {
 	    return tsdPtr->winDisplay;
 	} else {
@@ -658,11 +663,11 @@ TkpOpenDisplay(display_name)
  */
 
 void
-TkpCloseDisplay(dispPtr)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+TkpCloseDisplay(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr)
 {
     Display *display = dispPtr->display;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
 	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (dispPtr != tsdPtr->winDisplay) {
@@ -695,11 +700,10 @@ TkpCloseDisplay(dispPtr)
  *
  * TkClipCleanup --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to cleanup resources associated with
- *	claiming clipboard ownership and for receiving selection get
- *	results.  This function is called in tkWindow.c.  This has to be
- *	called by the display cleanup function because we still need the
- *	access display elements.
+ *	This function is called to cleanup resources associated with claiming
+ *	clipboard ownership and for receiving selection get results. This
+ *	function is called in tkWindow.c. This has to be called by the display
+ *	cleanup function because we still need the access display elements.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -711,8 +715,8 @@ TkpCloseDisplay(dispPtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkClipCleanup(dispPtr)
-    TkDisplay *dispPtr;	/* display associated with clipboard */
+TkClipCleanup(
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr)		/* Display associated with clipboard. */
 {
     if (dispPtr->clipWindow != NULL) {
 	/*
@@ -720,6 +724,7 @@ TkClipCleanup(dispPtr)
 	 */
 
 	HWND hwnd = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(dispPtr->clipWindow));
+
 	if (GetClipboardOwner() == hwnd) {
 	    OpenClipboard(hwnd);
 	    EmptyClipboard();
@@ -755,9 +760,9 @@ TkClipCleanup(dispPtr)
  */
 
 void
-XBell(display, percent)
-    Display* display;
-    int percent;
+XBell(
+    Display *display,
+    int percent)
 {
     MessageBeep(MB_OK);
 }
@@ -767,8 +772,7 @@ XBell(display, percent)
  *
  * TkWinChildProc --
  *
- *	Callback from Windows whenever an event occurs on a child
- *	window.
+ *	Callback from Windows whenever an event occurs on a child window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Windows return value.
@@ -780,69 +784,68 @@ XBell(display, percent)
  */
 
 LRESULT CALLBACK
-TkWinChildProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
-    HWND hwnd;
-    UINT message;
-    WPARAM wParam;
-    LPARAM lParam;
+TkWinChildProc(
+    HWND hwnd,
+    UINT message,
+    WPARAM wParam,
+    LPARAM lParam)
 {
     LRESULT result;
 
     switch (message) {
-        case WM_INPUTLANGCHANGE:
-	    UpdateInputLanguage(wParam);
-	    result = 1;
-	    break;
-
-        case WM_IME_COMPOSITION:
-            result = 0;
-            if (HandleIMEComposition(hwnd, lParam) == 0) {
-                result = DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
-            }
-            break;
-
-	case WM_SETCURSOR:
-	    /*
-	     * Short circuit the WM_SETCURSOR message since we set
-	     * the cursor elsewhere.
-	     */
-
-	    result = TRUE;
-	    break;
-
-	case WM_CREATE:
-	case WM_ERASEBKGND:
-	    result = 0;
-	    break;
-
-	case WM_PAINT:
-	    GenerateXEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+    case WM_INPUTLANGCHANGE:
+	UpdateInputLanguage(wParam);
+	result = 1;
+	break;
+
+    case WM_IME_COMPOSITION:
+	result = 0;
+	if (HandleIMEComposition(hwnd, lParam) == 0) {
 	    result = DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
-	    break;
+	}
+	break;
 
-        case TK_CLAIMFOCUS:
-	case TK_GEOMETRYREQ:
-	case TK_ATTACHWINDOW:
-	case TK_DETACHWINDOW:
-	case TK_ICONIFY:
-	case TK_DEICONIFY:
-	case TK_MOVEWINDOW:
-	case TK_WITHDRAW:
-	case TK_RAISEWINDOW:
-	case TK_GETFRAMEWID:
-	case TK_OVERRIDEREDIRECT:
-	case TK_SETMENU:
-	case TK_STATE:
-	case TK_INFO:
-	    result =  TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
-	    break;
+    case WM_SETCURSOR:
+	/*
+	 * Short circuit the WM_SETCURSOR message since we set the cursor
+	 * elsewhere.
+	 */
 
-	default:
-	    if (!Tk_TranslateWinEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam,
-		    &result)) {
-		result = DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	result = TRUE;
+	break;
+
+    case WM_CREATE:
+    case WM_ERASEBKGND:
+	result = 0;
+	break;
+
+    case WM_PAINT:
+	GenerateXEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+	result = DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+	break;
+
+    case TK_CLAIMFOCUS:
+    case TK_GEOMETRYREQ:
+    case TK_ATTACHWINDOW:
+    case TK_DETACHWINDOW:
+    case TK_ICONIFY:
+    case TK_DEICONIFY:
+    case TK_MOVEWINDOW:
+    case TK_WITHDRAW:
+    case TK_RAISEWINDOW:
+    case TK_GETFRAMEWID:
+    case TK_OVERRIDEREDIRECT:
+    case TK_SETMENU:
+    case TK_STATE:
+    case TK_INFO:
+	result = TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+	break;
+
+    default:
+	if (!Tk_TranslateWinEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam, &result)) {
+	    result = DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+	}
+	break;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -858,8 +861,8 @@ TkWinChildProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
  *
  * Tk_TranslateWinEvent --
  *
- *	This function is called by widget window procedures to handle
- *	the translation from Win32 events to Tk events.
+ *	This function is called by widget window functions to handle the
+ *	translation from Win32 events to Tk events.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns 1 if the event was handled, else 0.
@@ -871,74 +874,79 @@ TkWinChildProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
  */
 
 int
-Tk_TranslateWinEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam, resultPtr)
-    HWND hwnd;
-    UINT message;
-    WPARAM wParam;
-    LPARAM lParam;
-    LRESULT *resultPtr;
+Tk_TranslateWinEvent(
+    HWND hwnd,
+    UINT message,
+    WPARAM wParam,
+    LPARAM lParam,
+    LRESULT *resultPtr)
 {
     *resultPtr = 0;
     switch (message) {
-	case WM_RENDERFORMAT: {
-	    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_HWNDToWindow(hwnd);
-	    if (winPtr) {
-		TkWinClipboardRender(winPtr->dispPtr, wParam);
-	    }
-	    return 1;
+    case WM_RENDERFORMAT: {
+	TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_HWNDToWindow(hwnd);
+
+	if (winPtr) {
+	    TkWinClipboardRender(winPtr->dispPtr, wParam);
 	}
+	return 1;
+    }
 
-	case WM_COMMAND:
-	case WM_NOTIFY:
-	case WM_VSCROLL:
-	case WM_HSCROLL: {
-	    /*
-	     * Reflect these messages back to the sender so that they
-	     * can be handled by the window proc for the control.  Note
-	     * that we need to be careful not to reflect a message that
-	     * is targeted to this window, or we will loop.
-	     */
+    case WM_COMMAND:
+    case WM_NOTIFY:
+    case WM_VSCROLL:
+    case WM_HSCROLL: {
+	/*
+	 * Reflect these messages back to the sender so that they can be
+	 * handled by the window proc for the control. Note that we need to be
+	 * careful not to reflect a message that is targeted to this window,
+	 * or we will loop.
+	 */
 
-	    HWND target = (message == WM_NOTIFY)
+	HWND target = (message == WM_NOTIFY)
 		? ((NMHDR*)lParam)->hwndFrom : (HWND) lParam;
-	    if (target && target != hwnd) {
-		*resultPtr = SendMessage(target, message, wParam, lParam);
-		return 1;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
 
-	case WM_LBUTTONDOWN:
-	case WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK:
-	case WM_MBUTTONDOWN:
-	case WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK:
-	case WM_RBUTTONDOWN:
-	case WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK:
-	case WM_LBUTTONUP:
-	case WM_MBUTTONUP:
-	case WM_RBUTTONUP:
-	case WM_MOUSEMOVE:
-	    Tk_PointerEvent(hwnd, (short) LOWORD(lParam),
-		    (short) HIWORD(lParam));
+	if (target && target != hwnd) {
+	    *resultPtr = SendMessage(target, message, wParam, lParam);
 	    return 1;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-	case WM_CLOSE:
-	case WM_SETFOCUS:
-	case WM_KILLFOCUS:
-	case WM_DESTROYCLIPBOARD:
-	case WM_CHAR:
-	case WM_SYSKEYDOWN:
-	case WM_SYSKEYUP:
-	case WM_KEYDOWN:
-	case WM_KEYUP:
-	case WM_MOUSEWHEEL:
- 	    GenerateXEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
-	    return 1;
-	case WM_MENUCHAR:
-	    GenerateXEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
-	    /* MNC_CLOSE is the only one that looks right.  This is a hack. */
-	    *resultPtr = MAKELONG (0, MNC_CLOSE);
-	    return 1;
+    case WM_LBUTTONDOWN:
+    case WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK:
+    case WM_MBUTTONDOWN:
+    case WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK:
+    case WM_RBUTTONDOWN:
+    case WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK:
+    case WM_LBUTTONUP:
+    case WM_MBUTTONUP:
+    case WM_RBUTTONUP:
+    case WM_MOUSEMOVE:
+	Tk_PointerEvent(hwnd, (short) LOWORD(lParam), (short) HIWORD(lParam));
+	return 1;
+
+    case WM_CLOSE:
+    case WM_SETFOCUS:
+    case WM_KILLFOCUS:
+    case WM_DESTROYCLIPBOARD:
+    case WM_CHAR:
+    case WM_SYSKEYDOWN:
+    case WM_SYSKEYUP:
+    case WM_KEYDOWN:
+    case WM_KEYUP:
+    case WM_MOUSEWHEEL:
+	GenerateXEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+	return 1;
+    case WM_MENUCHAR:
+	GenerateXEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+
+	/*
+	 * MNC_CLOSE is the only one that looks right. This is a hack.
+	 */
+
+	*resultPtr = MAKELONG (0, MNC_CLOSE);
+	return 1;
     }
     return 0;
 }
@@ -948,8 +956,8 @@ Tk_TranslateWinEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam, resultPtr)
  *
  * GenerateXEvent --
  *
- *	This routine generates an X event from the corresponding
- * 	Windows event.
+ *	This routine generates an X event from the corresponding Windows
+ *	event.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -961,15 +969,15 @@ Tk_TranslateWinEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam, resultPtr)
  */
 
 static void
-GenerateXEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
-    HWND hwnd;
-    UINT message;
-    WPARAM wParam;
-    LPARAM lParam;
+GenerateXEvent(
+    HWND hwnd,
+    UINT message,
+    WPARAM wParam,
+    LPARAM lParam)
 {
     XEvent event;
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)Tk_HWNDToWindow(hwnd);
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
 	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (!winPtr || winPtr->window == None) {
@@ -982,243 +990,237 @@ GenerateXEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
     event.xany.window = winPtr->window;
 
     switch (message) {
-	case WM_PAINT: {
-	    PAINTSTRUCT ps;
-
-	    event.type = Expose;
-	    BeginPaint(hwnd, &ps);
-	    event.xexpose.x = ps.rcPaint.left;
-	    event.xexpose.y = ps.rcPaint.top;
-	    event.xexpose.width = ps.rcPaint.right - ps.rcPaint.left;
-	    event.xexpose.height = ps.rcPaint.bottom - ps.rcPaint.top;
-	    EndPaint(hwnd, &ps);
-	    event.xexpose.count = 0;
-	    break;
-	}
+    case WM_PAINT: {
+	PAINTSTRUCT ps;
+
+	event.type = Expose;
+	BeginPaint(hwnd, &ps);
+	event.xexpose.x = ps.rcPaint.left;
+	event.xexpose.y = ps.rcPaint.top;
+	event.xexpose.width = ps.rcPaint.right - ps.rcPaint.left;
+	event.xexpose.height = ps.rcPaint.bottom - ps.rcPaint.top;
+	EndPaint(hwnd, &ps);
+	event.xexpose.count = 0;
+	break;
+    }
 
-	case WM_CLOSE:
-	    event.type = ClientMessage;
-	    event.xclient.message_type =
+    case WM_CLOSE:
+	event.type = ClientMessage;
+	event.xclient.message_type =
 		Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr, "WM_PROTOCOLS");
-	    event.xclient.format = 32;
-	    event.xclient.data.l[0] =
+	event.xclient.format = 32;
+	event.xclient.data.l[0] =
 		Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr, "WM_DELETE_WINDOW");
-	    break;
+	break;
 
-	case WM_SETFOCUS:
-	case WM_KILLFOCUS: {
-	    TkWindow *otherWinPtr = (TkWindow *)Tk_HWNDToWindow((HWND) wParam);
-	    
-	    /*
-	     * Compare toplevel windows to avoid reporting focus
-	     * changes within the same toplevel.
-	     */
+    case WM_SETFOCUS:
+    case WM_KILLFOCUS: {
+	TkWindow *otherWinPtr = (TkWindow *)Tk_HWNDToWindow((HWND) wParam);
 
-	    while (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
-		winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr;
-		if (winPtr == NULL) {
-		    return;
-		}
-	    }
-	    while (otherWinPtr && !(otherWinPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
-		otherWinPtr = otherWinPtr->parentPtr;
-	    }
-
-	    /*
-	     * Do a catch-all Tk_SetCaretPos here to make sure that the
-	     * window receiving focus sets the caret at least once.
-	     */
-	    if (message == WM_SETFOCUS) {
-		Tk_SetCaretPos((Tk_Window) winPtr, 0, 0, 0);
-	    }
+	/*
+	 * Compare toplevel windows to avoid reporting focus changes within
+	 * the same toplevel.
+	 */
 
-	    if (otherWinPtr == winPtr) {
+	while (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	    winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr;
+	    if (winPtr == NULL) {
 		return;
 	    }
+	}
+	while (otherWinPtr && !(otherWinPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	    otherWinPtr = otherWinPtr->parentPtr;
+	}
 
-	    event.xany.window = winPtr->window;
-	    event.type = (message == WM_SETFOCUS) ? FocusIn : FocusOut;
-	    event.xfocus.mode = NotifyNormal;
-	    event.xfocus.detail = NotifyNonlinear;
+	/*
+	 * Do a catch-all Tk_SetCaretPos here to make sure that the window
+	 * receiving focus sets the caret at least once.
+	 */
 
+	if (message == WM_SETFOCUS) {
+	    Tk_SetCaretPos((Tk_Window) winPtr, 0, 0, 0);
+	}
+
+	if (otherWinPtr == winPtr) {
+	    return;
+	}
+
+	event.xany.window = winPtr->window;
+	event.type = (message == WM_SETFOCUS) ? FocusIn : FocusOut;
+	event.xfocus.mode = NotifyNormal;
+	event.xfocus.detail = NotifyNonlinear;
+
+	/*
+	 * Destroy the caret if we own it. If we are moving to another Tk
+	 * window, it will reclaim and reposition it with Tk_SetCaretPos.
+	 */
+
+	if (message == WM_KILLFOCUS) {
+	    DestroyCaret();
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case WM_DESTROYCLIPBOARD:
+	if (tsdPtr->updatingClipboard == TRUE) {
 	    /*
-	     * Destroy the caret if we own it.  If we are moving to another Tk
-	     * window, it will reclaim and reposition it with Tk_SetCaretPos.
+	     * We want to avoid this event if we are the ones that caused this
+	     * event.
 	     */
-	    if (message == WM_KILLFOCUS) {
-		DestroyCaret();
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
 
-	case WM_DESTROYCLIPBOARD:
-	    if (tsdPtr->updatingClipboard == TRUE) {
-		/*
-		 * We want to avoid this event if we are the ones that caused
-		 * this event.
-		 */
-		return;
-	    }
-	    event.type = SelectionClear;
-	    event.xselectionclear.selection =
+	    return;
+	}
+	event.type = SelectionClear;
+	event.xselectionclear.selection =
 		Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window)winPtr, "CLIPBOARD");
-	    event.xselectionclear.time = TkpGetMS();
-	    break;
+	event.xselectionclear.time = TkpGetMS();
+	break;
+
+    case WM_MOUSEWHEEL:
+	/*
+	 * The mouse wheel event is closer to a key event than a mouse event
+	 * in that the message is sent to the window that has focus.
+	 */
+
+    case WM_CHAR:
+    case WM_SYSKEYDOWN:
+    case WM_SYSKEYUP:
+    case WM_KEYDOWN:
+    case WM_KEYUP: {
+	unsigned int state = GetState(message, wParam, lParam);
+	Time time = TkpGetMS();
+	POINT clientPoint;
+	POINTS rootPoint;	/* Note: POINT and POINTS are different */
+	DWORD msgPos;
+
+	/*
+	 * Compute the screen and window coordinates of the event.
+	 */
+
+	msgPos = GetMessagePos();
+	rootPoint = MAKEPOINTS(msgPos);
+	clientPoint.x = rootPoint.x;
+	clientPoint.y = rootPoint.y;
+	ScreenToClient(hwnd, &clientPoint);
+
+	/*
+	 * Set up the common event fields.
+	 */
 
+	event.xbutton.root = RootWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum);
+	event.xbutton.subwindow = None;
+	event.xbutton.x = clientPoint.x;
+	event.xbutton.y = clientPoint.y;
+	event.xbutton.x_root = rootPoint.x;
+	event.xbutton.y_root = rootPoint.y;
+	event.xbutton.state = state;
+	event.xbutton.time = time;
+	event.xbutton.same_screen = True;
+
+	/*
+	 * Now set up event specific fields.
+	 */
+
+	switch (message) {
 	case WM_MOUSEWHEEL:
 	    /*
-	     * The mouse wheel event is closer to a key event than a
-	     * mouse event in that the message is sent to the window
-	     * that has focus.
+	     * We have invented a new X event type to handle this event. It
+	     * still uses the KeyPress struct. However, the keycode field has
+	     * been overloaded to hold the zDelta of the wheel. Set nbytes to
+	     * 0 to prevent conversion of the keycode to a keysym in
+	     * TkpGetString. [Bug 1118340].
 	     */
 
-	case WM_CHAR:
+	    event.type = MouseWheelEvent;
+	    event.xany.send_event = -1;
+	    event.xkey.nbytes = 0;
+	    event.xkey.keycode = (short) HIWORD(wParam);
+	    break;
 	case WM_SYSKEYDOWN:
-	case WM_SYSKEYUP:
 	case WM_KEYDOWN:
-	case WM_KEYUP: {
-	    unsigned int state = GetState(message, wParam, lParam);
-	    Time time = TkpGetMS();
-	    POINT clientPoint;
-	    POINTS rootPoint;	/* Note: POINT and POINTS are different */
-	    DWORD msgPos;
-
 	    /*
-	     * Compute the screen and window coordinates of the event.
+	     * Check for translated characters in the event queue.  Setting
+	     * xany.send_event to -1 indicates to the Windows implementation
+	     * of TkpGetString() that this event was generated by windows and
+	     * that the Windows extension xkey.trans_chars is filled with the
+	     * MBCS characters that came from the TranslateMessage call.
 	     */
 
-	    msgPos = GetMessagePos();
-	    rootPoint = MAKEPOINTS(msgPos);
-	    clientPoint.x = rootPoint.x;
-	    clientPoint.y = rootPoint.y;
-	    ScreenToClient(hwnd, &clientPoint);
+	    event.type = KeyPress;
+	    event.xany.send_event = -1;
+	    event.xkey.keycode = wParam;
+	    GetTranslatedKey(&event.xkey);
+	    break;
 
+	case WM_SYSKEYUP:
+	case WM_KEYUP:
 	    /*
-	     * Set up the common event fields.
+	     * We don't check for translated characters on keyup because Tk
+	     * won't know what to do with them. Instead, we wait for the
+	     * WM_CHAR messages which will follow.
 	     */
 
-	    event.xbutton.root = RootWindow(winPtr->display,
-		    winPtr->screenNum);
-	    event.xbutton.subwindow = None;
-	    event.xbutton.x = clientPoint.x;
-	    event.xbutton.y = clientPoint.y;
-	    event.xbutton.x_root = rootPoint.x;
-	    event.xbutton.y_root = rootPoint.y;
-	    event.xbutton.state = state;
-	    event.xbutton.time = time;
-	    event.xbutton.same_screen = True;
+	    event.type = KeyRelease;
+	    event.xkey.keycode = wParam;
+	    event.xkey.nbytes = 0;
+	    break;
 
+	case WM_CHAR:
 	    /*
-	     * Now set up event specific fields.
+	     * Synthesize both a KeyPress and a KeyRelease. Strings generated
+	     * by Input Method Editor are handled in the following manner:
+	     * 1. A series of WM_KEYDOWN & WM_KEYUP messages that cause
+	     *    GetTranslatedKey() to be called and return immediately
+	     *    because the WM_KEYDOWNs have no associated WM_CHAR messages
+	     *    -- the IME window is accumulating the characters and
+	     *    translating them itself. In the "bind" command, you get an
+	     *    event with a mystery keysym and %A == "" for each WM_KEYDOWN
+	     *    that actually was meant for the IME.
+	     * 2. A WM_KEYDOWN corresponding to the "confirm typing"
+	     *    character. This causes GetTranslatedKey() to be called.
+	     * 3. A WM_IME_NOTIFY message saying that the IME is done. A side
+	     *	  effect of this message is that GetTranslatedKey() thinks
+	     *	  this means that there are no WM_CHAR messages and returns
+	     *	  immediately. In the "bind" command, you get an another event
+	     *	  with a mystery keysym and %A == "".
+	     * 4. A sequence of WM_CHAR messages that correspond to the
+	     *	  characters in the IME window. A bunch of simulated
+	     *	  KeyPress/KeyRelease events will be generated, one for each
+	     *	  character. Adjacent WM_CHAR messages may actually specify
+	     *	  the high and low bytes of a multi-byte character -- in that
+	     *	  case the two WM_CHAR messages will be combined into one
+	     *	  event. It is the event-consumer's responsibility to convert
+	     *	  the string returned from XLookupString from system encoding
+	     *	  to UTF-8.
+	     * 5. And finally we get the WM_KEYUP for the "confirm typing"
+	     *    character.
 	     */
 
-	    switch (message) {
-		case WM_MOUSEWHEEL:
-		    /*
-		     * We have invented a new X event type to handle
-		     * this event.  It still uses the KeyPress struct.
-		     * However, the keycode field has been overloaded
-		     * to hold the zDelta of the wheel.  Set nbytes to 0
-		     * to prevent conversion of the keycode to a keysym
-		     * in TkpGetString. [Bug 1118340].
-		     */
-
-		    event.type = MouseWheelEvent;
-		    event.xany.send_event = -1;
-		    event.xkey.nbytes = 0;
-		    event.xkey.keycode = (short) HIWORD(wParam);
-		    break;
-		case WM_SYSKEYDOWN:
-		case WM_KEYDOWN:
-		    /*
-		     * Check for translated characters in the event queue.
-		     * Setting xany.send_event to -1 indicates to the
-		     * Windows implementation of TkpGetString() that this
-		     * event was generated by windows and that the Windows
-		     * extension xkey.trans_chars is filled with the
-		     * MBCS characters that came from the TranslateMessage
-		     * call. 
-		     */
-
-		    event.type = KeyPress;
-		    event.xany.send_event = -1;
-		    event.xkey.keycode = wParam;
-		    GetTranslatedKey(&event.xkey);
-		    break;
+	    event.type = KeyPress;
+	    event.xany.send_event = -1;
+	    event.xkey.keycode = 0;
+	    event.xkey.nbytes = 1;
+	    event.xkey.trans_chars[0] = (char) wParam;
 
-		case WM_SYSKEYUP:
-		case WM_KEYUP:
-		    /*
-		     * We don't check for translated characters on keyup
-		     * because Tk won't know what to do with them.  Instead, we
-		     * wait for the WM_CHAR messages which will follow.
-		     */
-		    event.type = KeyRelease;
-		    event.xkey.keycode = wParam;
-		    event.xkey.nbytes = 0;
-		    break;
+	    if (IsDBCSLeadByte((BYTE) wParam)) {
+		MSG msg;
 
-		case WM_CHAR:
-		    /*
-		     * Synthesize both a KeyPress and a KeyRelease.
-		     * Strings generated by Input Method Editor are handled
-		     * in the following manner:
-		     * 1. A series of WM_KEYDOWN & WM_KEYUP messages that 
-		     *    cause GetTranslatedKey() to be called and return
-		     *    immediately because the WM_KEYDOWNs have no 
-		     *	  associated WM_CHAR messages -- the IME window is 
-		     *	  accumulating the characters and translating them 
-		     *    itself.  In the "bind" command, you get an event
-		     *	  with a mystery keysym and %A == "" for each 
-		     *	  WM_KEYDOWN that actually was meant for the IME.
-		     * 2. A WM_KEYDOWN corresponding to the "confirm typing"
-		     *    character.  This causes GetTranslatedKey() to be 
-		     *	  called.
-		     * 3. A WM_IME_NOTIFY message saying that the IME is 
-		     *	  done.  A side effect of this message is that 
-		     *    GetTranslatedKey() thinks this means that there
-		     *	  are no WM_CHAR messages and returns immediately.
-		     *    In the "bind" command, you get an another event
-		     *	  with a mystery keysym and %A == "".
-		     * 4. A sequence of WM_CHAR messages that correspond to 
-		     *	  the characters in the IME window.  A bunch of 
-		     *    simulated KeyPress/KeyRelease events will be 
-		     *    generated, one for each character.  Adjacent 
-		     *    WM_CHAR messages may actually specify the high
-		     *	  and low bytes of a multi-byte character -- in that
-		     *    case the two WM_CHAR messages will be combined into
-		     *	  one event.  It is the event-consumer's 
-		     *	  responsibility to convert the string returned from
-		     *	  XLookupString from system encoding to UTF-8.
-		     * 5. And finally we get the WM_KEYUP for the "confirm
-		     *    typing" character.
-		     */
-
-		    event.type = KeyPress;
-		    event.xany.send_event = -1;
-		    event.xkey.keycode = 0;
-		    event.xkey.nbytes = 1;
-		    event.xkey.trans_chars[0] = (char) wParam;
-
-		    if (IsDBCSLeadByte((BYTE) wParam)) {
-			MSG msg;
-
-			if ((PeekMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0, PM_NOREMOVE) != 0)
-				&& (msg.message == WM_CHAR)) {
-			    GetMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0);
-			    event.xkey.nbytes = 2;
-			    event.xkey.trans_chars[1] = (char) msg.wParam;
-			}
-		    }
-		    Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
-		    event.type = KeyRelease;
-		    break;
+		if ((PeekMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0, PM_NOREMOVE) != 0)
+			&& (msg.message == WM_CHAR)) {
+		    GetMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0);
+		    event.xkey.nbytes = 2;
+		    event.xkey.trans_chars[1] = (char) msg.wParam;
+		}
 	    }
+	    Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
+	    event.type = KeyRelease;
 	    break;
 	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-	default:
-	    return;
+    default:
+	return;
     }
     Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
 }
@@ -1228,12 +1230,12 @@ GenerateXEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
  *
  * GetState --
  *
- *	This function constructs a state mask for the mouse buttons 
- *	and modifier keys as they were before the event occured.
+ *	This function constructs a state mask for the mouse buttons and
+ *	modifier keys as they were before the event occured.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a composite value of all the modifier and button state
- *	flags that were set at the time the event occurred.
+ *	Returns a composite value of all the modifier and button state flags
+ *	that were set at the time the event occurred.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1242,18 +1244,18 @@ GenerateXEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
  */
 
 static unsigned int
-GetState(message, wParam, lParam)
-    UINT message;		/* Win32 message type */
-    WPARAM wParam;		/* wParam of message, used if key message */
-    LPARAM lParam;		/* lParam of message, used if key message */
+GetState(
+    UINT message,		/* Win32 message type */
+    WPARAM wParam,		/* wParam of message, used if key message */
+    LPARAM lParam)		/* lParam of message, used if key message */
 {
     int mask;
     int prevState;		/* 1 if key was previously down */
     unsigned int state = TkWinGetModifierState();
 
     /*
-     * If the event is a key press or release, we check for modifier
-     * keys so we can report the state of the world before the event.
+     * If the event is a key press or release, we check for modifier keys so
+     * we can report the state of the world before the event.
      */
 
     if (message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN || message == WM_KEYDOWN
@@ -1261,33 +1263,33 @@ GetState(message, wParam, lParam)
 	mask = 0;
 	prevState = HIWORD(lParam) & KF_REPEAT;
 	switch(wParam) {
-	    case VK_SHIFT:
-		mask = ShiftMask;
-		break;
-	    case VK_CONTROL:
-		mask = ControlMask;
-		break;
-	    case VK_MENU:
-		mask = ALT_MASK;
-		break;
-	    case VK_CAPITAL:
-		if (message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN || message == WM_KEYDOWN) {
-		    mask = LockMask;
-		    prevState = ((state & mask) ^ prevState) ? 0 : 1;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case VK_NUMLOCK:
-		if (message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN || message == WM_KEYDOWN) {
-		    mask = Mod1Mask;
-		    prevState = ((state & mask) ^ prevState) ? 0 : 1;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case VK_SCROLL:
-		if (message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN || message == WM_KEYDOWN) {
-		    mask = Mod3Mask;
-		    prevState = ((state & mask) ^ prevState) ? 0 : 1;
-		}
-		break;
+	case VK_SHIFT:
+	    mask = ShiftMask;
+	    break;
+	case VK_CONTROL:
+	    mask = ControlMask;
+	    break;
+	case VK_MENU:
+	    mask = ALT_MASK;
+	    break;
+	case VK_CAPITAL:
+	    if (message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN || message == WM_KEYDOWN) {
+		mask = LockMask;
+		prevState = ((state & mask) ^ prevState) ? 0 : 1;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case VK_NUMLOCK:
+	    if (message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN || message == WM_KEYDOWN) {
+		mask = Mod1Mask;
+		prevState = ((state & mask) ^ prevState) ? 0 : 1;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case VK_SCROLL:
+	    if (message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN || message == WM_KEYDOWN) {
+		mask = Mod3Mask;
+		prevState = ((state & mask) ^ prevState) ? 0 : 1;
+	    }
+	    break;
 	}
 	if (prevState) {
 	    state |= mask;
@@ -1310,26 +1312,26 @@ GetState(message, wParam, lParam)
  *
  * GetTranslatedKey --
  *
- *	Retrieves WM_CHAR messages that are placed on the system queue
- *	by the TranslateMessage system call and places them in the
- *	given KeyPress event.
+ *	Retrieves WM_CHAR messages that are placed on the system queue by the
+ *	TranslateMessage system call and places them in the given KeyPress
+ *	event.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Sets the trans_chars and nbytes member of the key event.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Removes any WM_CHAR messages waiting on the top of the system
- *	event queue.
+ *	Removes any WM_CHAR messages waiting on the top of the system event
+ *	queue.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-GetTranslatedKey(xkey)
-    XKeyEvent *xkey;
+GetTranslatedKey(
+    XKeyEvent *xkey)
 {
     MSG msg;
-    
+
     xkey->nbytes = 0;
 
     while ((xkey->nbytes < XMaxTransChars)
@@ -1338,11 +1340,10 @@ GetTranslatedKey(xkey)
 	    GetMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0);
 
 	    /*
-	     * If this is a normal character message, we may need to strip
-	     * off the Alt modifier (e.g. Alt-digits).  Note that we don't
-	     * want to do this for system messages, because those were
-	     * presumably generated as an Alt-char sequence (e.g. accelerator
-	     * keys).
+	     * If this is a normal character message, we may need to strip off
+	     * the Alt modifier (e.g. Alt-digits). Note that we don't want to
+	     * do this for system messages, because those were presumably
+	     * generated as an Alt-char sequence (e.g. accelerator keys).
 	     */
 
 	    if ((msg.message == WM_CHAR) && (msg.lParam & 0x20000000)) {
@@ -1353,11 +1354,10 @@ GetTranslatedKey(xkey)
 
 	    if (((unsigned short) msg.wParam) > ((unsigned short) 0xff)) {
                 /*
-                 * Some "addon" input devices, such as the popular
-                 * PenPower Chinese writing pad, generate 16 bit
-                 * values in WM_CHAR messages (instead of passing them
-                 * in two separate WM_CHAR messages containing two
-                 * 8-bit values.
+                 * Some "addon" input devices, such as the popular PenPower
+                 * Chinese writing pad, generate 16 bit values in WM_CHAR
+                 * messages (instead of passing them in two separate WM_CHAR
+                 * messages containing two 8-bit values.
                  */
 
 	        xkey->trans_chars[xkey->nbytes] = (char) (msg.wParam >> 8);
@@ -1374,13 +1374,12 @@ GetTranslatedKey(xkey)
  *
  * UpdateInputLanguage --
  *
- *	Gets called when a WM_INPUTLANGCHANGE message is received
- *      by the TK child window procedure. This message is sent
- *      by the Input Method Editor system when the user chooses
- *      a different input method. All subsequent WM_CHAR
- *      messages will contain characters in the new encoding. We record
- *      the new encoding so that TkpGetString() knows how to
- *      correctly translate the WM_CHAR into unicode.
+ *	Gets called when a WM_INPUTLANGCHANGE message is received by the TK
+ *	child window function. This message is sent by the Input Method Editor
+ *	system when the user chooses a different input method. All subsequent
+ *	WM_CHAR messages will contain characters in the new encoding. We
+ *	record the new encoding so that TkpGetString() knows how to correctly
+ *	translate the WM_CHAR into unicode.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Records the new encoding in keyInputEncoding.
@@ -1392,8 +1391,8 @@ GetTranslatedKey(xkey)
  */
 
 static void
-UpdateInputLanguage(charset)
-    int charset;
+UpdateInputLanguage(
+    int charset)
 {
     CHARSETINFO charsetInfo;
     Tcl_Encoding encoding;
@@ -1434,8 +1433,8 @@ UpdateInputLanguage(charset)
  *
  * TkWinGetKeyInputEncoding --
  *
- *	Returns the current keyboard input encoding selected by the
- *      user (with WM_INPUTLANGCHANGE events).
+ *	Returns the current keyboard input encoding selected by the user (with
+ *	WM_INPUTLANGCHANGE events).
  *
  * Results:
  *	The current keyboard input encoding.
@@ -1447,7 +1446,7 @@ UpdateInputLanguage(charset)
  */
 
 Tcl_Encoding
-TkWinGetKeyInputEncoding()
+TkWinGetKeyInputEncoding(void)
 {
     return keyInputEncoding;
 }
@@ -1469,7 +1468,7 @@ TkWinGetKeyInputEncoding()
  */
 
 Tcl_Encoding
-TkWinGetUnicodeEncoding()
+TkWinGetUnicodeEncoding(void)
 {
     if (unicodeEncoding == NULL) {
 	unicodeEncoding = Tcl_GetEncoding(NULL, "unicode");
@@ -1482,19 +1481,18 @@ TkWinGetUnicodeEncoding()
  *
  * HandleIMEComposition --
  *
- *      This function works around a definciency in some versions
- *      of Windows 2000 to make it possible to entry multi-lingual
- *      characters under all versions of Windows 2000.
+ *      This function works around a definciency in some versions of Windows
+ *      2000 to make it possible to entry multi-lingual characters under all
+ *      versions of Windows 2000.
  *
- *      When an Input Method Editor (IME) is ready to send input
- *      characters to an application, it sends a WM_IME_COMPOSITION
- *      message with the GCS_RESULTSTR. However, The DefWindowProc()
- *      on English Windows 2000 arbitrarily converts all non-Latin-1
- *      characters in the composition to "?".
+ *      When an Input Method Editor (IME) is ready to send input characters to
+ *      an application, it sends a WM_IME_COMPOSITION message with the
+ *      GCS_RESULTSTR. However, The DefWindowProc() on English Windows 2000
+ *      arbitrarily converts all non-Latin-1 characters in the composition to
+ *      "?".
  *
- *      This function correctly processes the composition data and
- *      sends the UNICODE values of the composed characters to
- *      TK's event queue. 
+ *      This function correctly processes the composition data and sends the
+ *      UNICODE values of the composed characters to TK's event queue.
  *
  * Results:
  *	If this function has processed the composition data, returns 1.
@@ -1507,10 +1505,9 @@ TkWinGetUnicodeEncoding()
  */
 
 static int
-HandleIMEComposition(hwnd, lParam)
-    HWND hwnd;                          /* Window receiving the message. */
-    LPARAM lParam;                      /* Flags for the WM_IME_COMPOSITION
-                                         * message */
+HandleIMEComposition(
+    HWND hwnd,			/* Window receiving the message. */
+    LPARAM lParam)		/* Flags for the WM_IME_COMPOSITION message */
 {
     HIMC hIMC;
     int i, n;
@@ -1551,10 +1548,11 @@ HandleIMEComposition(hwnd, lParam)
 		i = Tcl_DStringLength(&unicodeString);
 		if (n < i) {
 		    /*
-		     * Only alloc more space if we need, otherwise just
-		     * use what we've created.  Don't realloc as that may
-		     * copy data we no longer need.
+		     * Only alloc more space if we need, otherwise just use
+		     * what we've created. Don't realloc as that may copy data
+		     * we no longer need.
 		     */
+
 		    ckfree((char *) buff);
 		    buff = (char *) ckalloc(i);
 		}
@@ -1568,9 +1566,9 @@ HandleIMEComposition(hwnd, lParam)
 	     * Set up the fields pertinent to key event.
              *
              * We set send_event to the special value of -2, so that
-             * TkpGetString() in tkWinKey.c knows that trans_chars[]
-             * already contains a UNICODE char and there's no need to
-             * do encoding conversion.
+             * TkpGetString in tkWinKey.c knows that trans_chars[] already
+             * contains a UNICODE char and there's no need to do encoding
+             * conversion.
 	     */
 
             winPtr = (TkWindow *)Tk_HWNDToWindow(hwnd);
@@ -1589,8 +1587,8 @@ HandleIMEComposition(hwnd, lParam)
 
             for (i=0; i<n;) {
                 /*
-                 * Simulate a pair of KeyPress and KeyRelease events
-                 * for each UNICODE character in the composition.
+                 * Simulate a pair of KeyPress and KeyRelease events for each
+                 * UNICODE character in the composition.
                  */
 
                 event.xkey.trans_chars[0] = (char) buff[i++];
@@ -1629,9 +1627,9 @@ HandleIMEComposition(hwnd, lParam)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_FreeXId(display, xid)
-    Display *display;
-    XID xid;
+Tk_FreeXId(
+    Display *display,
+    XID xid)
 {
 }
 
@@ -1641,22 +1639,22 @@ Tk_FreeXId(display, xid)
  * TkWinResendEvent --
  *
  *	This function converts an X event into a Windows event and
- *	invokes the specified windo procedure.
+ *	invokes the specified windo function.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Windows result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Invokes the window procedure
+ *	Invokes the window function
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 LRESULT
-TkWinResendEvent(wndproc, hwnd, eventPtr)
-    WNDPROC wndproc;
-    HWND hwnd;
-    XEvent *eventPtr;
+TkWinResendEvent(
+    WNDPROC wndproc,
+    HWND hwnd,
+    XEvent *eventPtr)
 {
     UINT msg;
     WPARAM wparam;
@@ -1664,20 +1662,20 @@ TkWinResendEvent(wndproc, hwnd, eventPtr)
 
     if (eventPtr->type == ButtonPress) {
 	switch (eventPtr->xbutton.button) {
-	    case Button1:
-		msg = WM_LBUTTONDOWN;
-		wparam = MK_LBUTTON;
-		break;
-	    case Button2:
-		msg = WM_MBUTTONDOWN;
-		wparam = MK_MBUTTON;
-		break;
-	    case Button3:
-		msg = WM_RBUTTONDOWN;
-		wparam = MK_RBUTTON;
-		break;
-	    default:
-		return 0;
+	case Button1:
+	    msg = WM_LBUTTONDOWN;
+	    wparam = MK_LBUTTON;
+	    break;
+	case Button2:
+	    msg = WM_MBUTTONDOWN;
+	    wparam = MK_MBUTTON;
+	    break;
+	case Button3:
+	    msg = WM_RBUTTONDOWN;
+	    wparam = MK_RBUTTON;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    return 0;
 	}
 	if (eventPtr->xbutton.state & Button1Mask) {
 	    wparam |= MK_LBUTTON;
@@ -1707,8 +1705,8 @@ TkWinResendEvent(wndproc, hwnd, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkpGetMS --
  *
- *	Return a relative time in milliseconds.  It doesn't matter
- *	when the epoch was.
+ *	Return a relative time in milliseconds. It doesn't matter when the
+ *	epoch was.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Number of milliseconds.
@@ -1720,7 +1718,7 @@ TkWinResendEvent(wndproc, hwnd, eventPtr)
  */
 
 unsigned long
-TkpGetMS()
+TkpGetMS(void)
 {
     return GetTickCount();
 }
@@ -1741,9 +1739,10 @@ TkpGetMS()
  */
 
 void
-TkWinUpdatingClipboard(int mode)
+TkWinUpdatingClipboard(
+    int mode)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
 	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     tsdPtr->updatingClipboard = mode;
@@ -1754,17 +1753,17 @@ TkWinUpdatingClipboard(int mode)
  *
  * Tk_SetCaretPos --
  *
- *	This enables correct movement of focus in the MS Magnifier, as well
- *	as allowing us to correctly position the IME Window.  The following
- *	Win32 APIs are used to work with MS caret:
+ *	This enables correct movement of focus in the MS Magnifier, as well as
+ *	allowing us to correctly position the IME Window. The following Win32
+ *	APIs are used to work with MS caret:
  *
  *	CreateCaret	DestroyCaret	SetCaretPos	GetCaretPos
  *
- *	Only one instance of caret can be active at any time
- *	(e.g. DestroyCaret API does not take any argument such as handle).
- *	Since do-it-right approach requires to track the create/destroy
- *	caret status all the time in a global scope among windows (or
- *	widgets), we just implement this minimal setup to get the job done.
+ *	Only one instance of caret can be active at any time (e.g.
+ *	DestroyCaret API does not take any argument such as handle). Since
+ *	do-it-right approach requires to track the create/destroy caret status
+ *	all the time in a global scope among windows (or widgets), we just
+ *	implement this minimal setup to get the job done.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None
@@ -1776,16 +1775,20 @@ TkWinUpdatingClipboard(int mode)
  */
 
 void
-Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height)
+Tk_SetCaretPos(
+    Tk_Window tkwin,
+    int x, int y,
+    int height)
 {
     static HWND caretHWND = NULL;
     TkCaret *caretPtr = &(((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr->caret);
     Window win;
 
     /*
-     * Prevent processing anything if the values haven't changed.
-     * Windows only has one display, so we can do this with statics.
+     * Prevent processing anything if the values haven't changed. Windows only
+     * has one display, so we can do this with statics.
      */
+
     if ((caretPtr->winPtr == ((TkWindow *) tkwin))
 	    && (caretPtr->x == x) && (caretPtr->y == y)) {
 	return;
@@ -1797,9 +1800,8 @@ Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height)
     caretPtr->height = height;
 
     /*
-     * We adjust to the toplevel to get the coords right, as setting
-     * the IME composition window is based on the toplevel hwnd, so
-     * ignore height.
+     * We adjust to the toplevel to get the coords right, as setting the IME
+     * composition window is based on the toplevel hwnd, so ignore height.
      */
 
     while (!Tk_IsTopLevel(tkwin)) {
@@ -1834,6 +1836,7 @@ Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height)
 	 * be converted to the final characters and the other clauses still
 	 * stay on the composition window.  -- yamamoto
 	 */
+
 	hIMC = ImmGetContext(hwnd);
 	if (hIMC) {
 	    COMPOSITIONFORM cform;
@@ -1855,26 +1858,28 @@ Tk_SetCaretPos(Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height)
  *
  * Results:
  *	Milliseconds of user inactive time or -1 if the user32.dll doesn't
- *	have the symbol GetLastInputInfo or GetLastInputInfo returns an
- *	error.
+ *	have the symbol GetLastInputInfo or GetLastInputInfo returns an error.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 long
-Tk_GetUserInactiveTime(dpy)
-     Display *dpy;			/* Ignored on Windows */
+Tk_GetUserInactiveTime(
+     Display *dpy)		/* Ignored on Windows */
 {
     struct tagLASTINPUTINFO {
 	UINT cbSize;
 	DWORD dwTime;
     } li;
+
     /*
-     * Multiple settings of either of these variables should be OK;
-     * any thread hazards should just cause inefficiency...
+     * Multiple settings of either of these variables should be OK; any thread
+     * hazards should just cause inefficiency...
      */
+
     static FARPROC pfnGetLastInputInfo = NULL;
     static int initinfo = 0;
 
@@ -1894,7 +1899,11 @@ Tk_GetUserInactiveTime(dpy)
     if (!(BOOL)(pfnGetLastInputInfo)(&li)) {
 	return -1;
     }
-    /* last input info is in milliseconds, since restart time. */
+
+    /*
+     * Last input info is in milliseconds, since restart time.
+     */
+
     return (GetTickCount()-li.dwTime);
 }
 
@@ -1909,15 +1918,15 @@ Tk_GetUserInactiveTime(dpy)
  *	none
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The user inactivity timer of the underlaying windowing system
- *	is reset to zero.
+ *	The user inactivity timer of the underlaying windowing system is reset
+ *	to zero.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime(dpy)
-    Display *dpy;
+Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime(
+    Display *dpy)
 {
     INPUT inp;
 
@@ -1931,3 +1940,11 @@ Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime(dpy)
 
     SendInput(1, &inp, sizeof(inp));
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/winMain.c b/win/winMain.c
index 4f89b2c..5176a00 100644
--- a/win/winMain.c
+++ b/win/winMain.c
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * winMain.c --
  *
  *	Main entry point for wish and other Tk-based applications.
@@ -6,10 +6,10 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: winMain.c,v 1.22 2005/09/13 21:25:21 dgp Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: winMain.c,v 1.23 2005/12/02 00:19:04 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include <tk.h>
@@ -21,16 +21,15 @@
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * The following declarations refer to internal Tk routines.  These
- * interfaces are available for use, but are not supported.
+ * The following declarations refer to internal Tk routines. These interfaces
+ * are available for use, but are not supported.
  */
 
-
 /*
  * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		WishPanic _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *format, ...));
+static void		WishPanic(CONST char *format, ...);
 #ifdef TK_TEST
 extern int		Tktest_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp);
 #endif /* TK_TEST */
@@ -38,27 +37,25 @@ extern int		Tktest_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp);
 static BOOL consoleRequired = TRUE;
 
 /*
- * The following #if block allows you to change the AppInit
- * function by using a #define of TCL_LOCAL_APPINIT instead
- * of rewriting this entire file.  The #if checks for that
- * #define and uses Tcl_AppInit if it doesn't exist.
+ * The following #if block allows you to change the AppInit function by using
+ * a #define of TCL_LOCAL_APPINIT instead of rewriting this entire file. The
+ * #if checks for that #define and uses Tcl_AppInit if it doesn't exist.
  */
-    
+
 #ifndef TK_LOCAL_APPINIT
-#define TK_LOCAL_APPINIT Tcl_AppInit    
+#define TK_LOCAL_APPINIT Tcl_AppInit
 #endif
-extern int TK_LOCAL_APPINIT _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp));
-    
+extern int TK_LOCAL_APPINIT(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+
 /*
  * The following #if block allows you to change how Tcl finds the startup
- * script, prime the library or encoding paths, fiddle with the argv,
- * etc., without needing to rewrite Tk_Main()
+ * script, prime the library or encoding paths, fiddle with the argv, etc.,
+ * without needing to rewrite Tk_Main()
  */
 
 #ifdef TK_LOCAL_MAIN_HOOK
-extern int TK_LOCAL_MAIN_HOOK _ANSI_ARGS_((int *argc, char ***argv));
+extern int TK_LOCAL_MAIN_HOOK(int *argc, char ***argv);
 #endif
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -68,8 +65,7 @@ extern int TK_LOCAL_MAIN_HOOK _ANSI_ARGS_((int *argc, char ***argv));
  *	Main entry point from Windows.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns false if initialization fails, otherwise it never
- *	returns. 
+ *	Returns false if initialization fails, otherwise it never returns.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Just about anything, since from here we call arbitrary Tcl code.
@@ -78,11 +74,11 @@ extern int TK_LOCAL_MAIN_HOOK _ANSI_ARGS_((int *argc, char ***argv));
  */
 
 int APIENTRY
-WinMain(hInstance, hPrevInstance, lpszCmdLine, nCmdShow)
-    HINSTANCE hInstance;
-    HINSTANCE hPrevInstance;
-    LPSTR lpszCmdLine;
-    int nCmdShow;
+WinMain(
+    HINSTANCE hInstance,
+    HINSTANCE hPrevInstance,
+    LPSTR lpszCmdLine,
+    int nCmdShow)
 {
     char **argv;
     int argc;
@@ -91,22 +87,22 @@ WinMain(hInstance, hPrevInstance, lpszCmdLine, nCmdShow)
     Tcl_SetPanicProc(WishPanic);
 
     /*
-     * Create the console channels and install them as the standard
-     * channels.  All I/O will be discarded until Tk_CreateConsoleWindow is
-     * called to attach the console to a text widget.
+     * Create the console channels and install them as the standard channels.
+     * All I/O will be discarded until Tk_CreateConsoleWindow is called to
+     * attach the console to a text widget.
      */
 
     consoleRequired = TRUE;
 
     /*
-     * Set up the default locale to be standard "C" locale so parsing
-     * is performed correctly.
+     * Set up the default locale to be standard "C" locale so parsing is
+     * performed correctly.
      */
 
     setlocale(LC_ALL, "C");
 
     /*
-     *  Get our args from the c-runtime.  Ignore lpszCmdLine.
+     * Get our args from the c-runtime. Ignore lpszCmdLine.
      */
 
     argc = __argc;
@@ -129,20 +125,19 @@ WinMain(hInstance, hPrevInstance, lpszCmdLine, nCmdShow)
     Tk_Main(argc, argv, TK_LOCAL_APPINIT);
     return 1;
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tcl_AppInit --
  *
- *	This procedure performs application-specific initialization.
- *	Most applications, especially those that incorporate additional
- *	packages, will have their own version of this procedure.
+ *	This procedure performs application-specific initialization. Most
+ *	applications, especially those that incorporate additional packages,
+ *	will have their own version of this procedure.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a standard Tcl completion code, and leaves an error
- *	message in the interp's result if an error occurs.
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl completion code, and leaves an error message in
+ *	the interp's result if an error occurs.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Depends on the startup script.
@@ -151,8 +146,8 @@ WinMain(hInstance, hPrevInstance, lpszCmdLine, nCmdShow)
  */
 
 int
-Tcl_AppInit(interp)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application. */
+Tcl_AppInit(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Interpreter for application. */
 {
     if (Tcl_Init(interp) == TCL_ERROR) {
 	goto error;
@@ -193,8 +188,7 @@ Tcl_AppInit(interp)
     if (Tktest_Init(interp) == TCL_ERROR) {
 	goto error;
     }
-    Tcl_StaticPackage(interp, "Tktest", Tktest_Init,
-            (Tcl_PackageInitProc *) NULL);
+    Tcl_StaticPackage(interp, "Tktest", Tktest_Init, NULL);
 #endif /* TK_TEST */
 
     Tcl_SetVar(interp, "tcl_rcFileName", "~/wishrc.tcl", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
@@ -205,7 +199,11 @@ error:
     MessageBox(NULL, Tcl_GetStringResult(interp), "Error in Wish",
 	    MB_ICONSTOP | MB_OK | MB_TASKMODAL | MB_SETFOREGROUND);
     ExitProcess(1);
-    /* we won't reach this, but we need the return */
+
+    /*
+     * We won't reach this, but we need the return.
+     */
+
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -226,11 +224,12 @@ error:
  */
 
 void
-WishPanic(CONST char *format, ...)
+WishPanic(
+    CONST char *format, ...)
 {
     va_list argList;
     char buf[1024];
-    
+
     va_start(argList, format);
     vsprintf(buf, format, argList);
 
@@ -252,8 +251,8 @@ WishPanic(CONST char *format, ...)
  *	Main entry point from the console.
  *
  * Results:
- *	None: Tk_Main never returns here, so this procedure never
- *      returns either.
+ *	None: Tk_Main never returns here, so this procedure never returns
+ *	either.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Whatever the applications does.
@@ -261,21 +260,24 @@ WishPanic(CONST char *format, ...)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-int main(int argc, char **argv)
+int
+main(
+    int argc,
+    char **argv)
 {
     Tcl_SetPanicProc(WishPanic);
 
     /*
-     * Set up the default locale to be standard "C" locale so parsing
-     * is performed correctly.
+     * Set up the default locale to be standard "C" locale so parsing is
+     * performed correctly.
      */
 
     setlocale(LC_ALL, "C");
 
     /*
-     * Create the console channels and install them as the standard
-     * channels.  All I/O will be discarded until Tk_CreateConsoleWindow is
-     * called to attach the console to a text widget.
+     * Create the console channels and install them as the standard channels.
+     * All I/O will be discarded until Tk_CreateConsoleWindow is called to
+     * attach the console to a text widget.
      */
 
     consoleRequired = FALSE;
@@ -284,3 +286,11 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv)
     return 0;
 }
 #endif /* !__GNUC__ || TK_TEST */
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */